20-F 1 dp02253_20f.htm
 
As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 26, 2006


UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549

 
FORM 20-F

(Mark One)  
o REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
  OR
x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
  For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005
  OR
o TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
  OR
o SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report ___________
For the transition period from ___________ to ___________
 
Commission file number 0001-10306
 
THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND GROUP plc
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
 
United Kingdom
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
 
RBS Gogarburn, PO Box 1000, Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
(Address of principal executive offices)
 
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Title of each class   Name of each exchange on which registered

 
American Depositary Shares Series D**, E, F, G, H, I**, K, L, M, N and P each   New York Stock Exchange
     representing one Non-Cumulative Dollar Preference Share, Series D, E, F, G, H, I,    
     K, L, M, N and P, respectively    
Exchangeable Capital Securities, Series A***   New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Dollar Preference Shares*   New York Stock Exchange
Dollar Perpetual Regulatory tier one securities, Series 1   New York Stock Exchange

* Issuable upon exchange of the Exchangeable Capital Securities    
** Redeemed on March 6, 2006    
*** Redeemed on December 31, 2005    

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
None

 
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:
None

 
Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of December 31, 2005, the close of the period covered by the annual report:

Ordinary shares of 25 pence each   3,196,543,671   Non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series D to P   206,000,000
Non-voting Deferred Shares   2,660,556,304   Non-cumulative convertible dollar preference shares, Series 1   1,000,000
11% cumulative preference shares   500,000   Non-cumulative euro preference shares, Series 1 and 2   2,500,000
5½% cumulative preference shares   400,000        

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act
Yes x No o
 
If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
Yes o No x
 
Note — checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
Yes x No o
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer x Accelerated filer o Non-accelerated filer o
   
Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.  
  o Item 17 x Item 18
   
If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).
  Yes o No x
 
(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.
Yes o No o
 






SEC Form 20-F cross reference guide


Item   Item Caption   Pages
         
PART I      
1   Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers   Not applicable
2   Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable   Not applicable
3   Key Information    
         Selected financial data   129-131, 184-185, 193-195, 202, 215
         Capitalisation and indebtedness   Not applicable
         Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds   Not applicable
         Risk factors   6
4   Information on the Company   11-16, 42-47, 111-112, 185-193, 195-202
         History and development of the Company   4-5, 62, 116-117, 209, 220-221
         Business overview   4-5, 62, 157-159, 205-208
         Organisational structure   4, 113
         Property, plant and equipment   116-117, 209
5   Operating and Financial Review and Prospects    
         Operating results   7-37, 54-55, 118-120, 139-140, 205-208
         Liquidity and capital resources   36-37, 48-51, 62, 117-120, 133-134, 136-153, 155-156, 158, 192
         Research and development, patents, licences etc   Not applicable
         Trend information   6, 205-208
         Off balance sheet arrangements   118-120, 203-204
         Contractual obligations   204
6   Directors, Senior Management and Employees    
         Directors and senior management   60-61
         Compensation   73-81, 103
         Board practices   61, 67-69, 71-73, 76-77
         Employees   33
         Share ownership   64, 79-80, 82
7   Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions    
         Major shareholders   63, 209
         Related party transactions   161
         Interests of experts and counsel   Not applicable
8   Financial Information    
         Consolidated statements and other financial information   86-182, 207
         Significant changes   181
         

i






Item   Item Caption   Pages
         
9   The Offer and Listing    
         Offer and listing details   214
         Plan of distribution   Not applicable
         Markets   213
         Selling shareholders   Not applicable
         Dilution   Not applicable
         Expenses of the issue   Not applicable
10   Additional Information    
         Share capital   Not applicable
         Memorandum and articles of association   220
         Material contracts   209
         Exchange controls   220
         Taxation   216-220
         Dividends and paying agents   Not applicable
         Statement of experts   Not applicable
         Documents on display   220
         Subsidiary information   Not applicable
11   Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk   38-58, 118-120, 136-153
12   Description of Securities other than Equity Securities   Not applicable
PART II        
13   Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies   Not applicable
14   Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds   Not applicable
15   Controls and Procedures   69-70
16   [Reserved]    
16   A      Audit Committee financial expert   71
    B      Code of ethics   65, 220
    C      Principal Accountant Fees and services   72, 105
    D      Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees   Not applicable
    E      Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers   62, 220
PART III        
17   Financial Statements   Not applicable
18   Financial Statements   86-181
19   Exhibits   222
    Signature   223
         
         
         
         
         
         
         

ii






Operating and financial review

Contents
     
2   Presentation of information
3   Forward-looking statements
4   Description of business
6   Risk factors
7   Financial highlights
8   Summary consolidated
  income statement
11   Analysis of results
21   Divisional performance
34   Consolidated balance sheet
36   Cash flow
37   IFRS compared
    with US GAAP
37   Capital resources
38   Risk management
     

     
       
 
   
 

Annual Report and Accounts 2005





Presentation of information

In the Form 20-F, and unless specified otherwise, the term ‘company’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, ‘RBS’ or the ‘Group’ means the company and its subsidiary undertakings, ‘the Royal Bank’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and ‘NatWest’ means National Westminster Bank Plc.

The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (“£” or “sterling”). The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to ‘pence’ represent pence in the United Kingdom (“UK”). Reference to ‘dollars’ or ‘$’ are to United States of America (“US”) dollars. The abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to ‘cents’ represent cents in the US. The abbreviation ‘€’ represents the ‘euro’, the European single currency and the abbreviations ‘€m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.

Certain information in this report is presented separately for domestic and foreign activities. Domestic activities primarily consist of the UK domestic transactions of the Group. Foreign activities comprise the Group’s transactions conducted through those offices in the UK specifically organised to service international banking transactions and transactions conducted through offices outside the UK.

The geographic analysis in the average balance sheet and interest rates, changes in net interest income and average interest rates, yields, spreads and margins in this report have been compiled on the basis of location of office – UK and Overseas. Management believes that this presentation provides more useful information on the Group’s yields, spreads and margins of the Group’s activities than would be provided by presentation on the basis of the domestic and foreign activities analysis used elsewhere in this report as it more closely reflects the basis on which the Group is managed. ‘UK’ in this context includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

The Group distinguishes its trading from non-trading activities by determining whether a business unit’s principal activity is trading or non-trading and then attributing all of that unit’s activities to one portfolio or the other. Although this method may result in some non-trading activity being classified as trading, and vice versa, the Group believes that any resulting misclassification is not material.

International Financial Reporting Standards

As required by the Companies Act 1985 and Article 4 of the European Union IAS Regulation, the consolidated financial statements of the Group have been prepared, for the first time, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and interpretations issued by the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee of the IASB (together ‘IFRS’) as endorsed by the European Union. The Group, however, has taken advantage of the option in IFRS 1 ‘First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’ to implement IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ (IAS 39), IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation’ (IAS 32) and IFRS 4 ‘Insurance Contracts’ (IFRS 4) from 1 January 2005 without restating its 2004 income statement and balance sheet. The implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 had a significant effect on the Group's balance sheet. To facilitate comparison, a balance sheet as at 1 January 2005 and a reconciliation of Shareholders’ funds as at 31 December 2004 are shown on pages 171 and 172 respectively. For a further discussion of the Group's adoption of IFRS, see ’Accounting Policies–Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’ on page 88.

The Group’s 2004 financial statements were prepared in accordance with then current UK generally accepted accounting principles (“UK GAAP” or “previous GAAP”) comprising standards issued by the UK Accounting Standards Board, pronouncements of the Urgent Issues Task Force, relevant Statements of Recommended Accounting Practice and provisions of the Companies Act 1985.

The Group also presents information under generally accepted accounting principles in the US (“US GAAP”).

2






Forward-looking statements

Certain sections in this document contain ‘forward-looking statements’ as that term is defined in the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, such as statements that include the words ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘project’, ‘anticipate’, ‘believes’, ‘should’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘probability’, ‘risk’, ‘Value-at-Risk (“VaR”)’, ‘target’, ‘goal’, ‘objective’, ‘will’, ‘endeavour’, ‘outlook’, ‘optimistic’, ‘prospects’ and similar expressions or variations on such expressions.

In particular, this document includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited, to the Group’s potential exposures to various types of market risks, such as interest rate risk, foreign exchange rate risk and commodity and equity price risk. Such statements are subject to risks and uncertainties. For example, certain of the market risk disclosures are dependent on choices about key model characteristics and assumptions and are subject to various limitations. By their nature, certain of the market risk disclosures are only estimates and, as a result, actual future gains and losses could differ materially from those that have been estimated.

Other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those estimated by the forward-looking statements contained in this document include, but are not limited to: general economic conditions in the UK and in other countries in which the Group has significant business activities or investments, including the United States; the monetary and interest rate policies of the Bank of England, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and other G-7 central banks; inflation; deflation; unanticipated turbulence in interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates, commodity prices and equity prices; changes in UK and foreign laws, regulations and taxes; changes in competition and pricing environments; natural and other disasters; the inability to hedge certain risks economically; the adequacy of loss reserves; acquisitions or restructurings; technological changes; changes in consumer spending and saving habits; and the success of the Group in managing the risks involved in the foregoing.

The forward-looking statements contained in this document speak only as of the date of this report, and the Group does not undertake to update any forward-looking statement to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

For a further discussion of certain risks faced by the Group, see Risk factors on page 6.

3






Operating and financial review

Description of business

Introduction

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc is the holding company of one of the world’s largest banking and financial services groups, with a market capitalisation of £56 billion at the end of 2005. Headquartered in Edinburgh, the Group operates in the UK, US and internationally through its two principal subsidiaries, the Royal Bank and NatWest, which are major UK clearing banks whose origins go back over 275 years. In the US, the Group’s subsidiary Citizens Financial Group, Inc. (“Citizens”) is ranked the eighth largest commercial banking organisation by deposits. The Group has a large and diversified customer base and provides a wide range of products and services to personal, commercial and large corporate and institutional customers.

The Group had total assets of £776.8 billion and shareholders’ equity of £35.4 billion at 31 December 2005. It is strongly capitalised with a total capital ratio of 11.7% and tier 1 capital ratio of 7.6% as at 31 December 2005.

Organisational structure and business overview

The Group’s activities are organised in the following business divisions: Corporate Markets (formerly Corporate Banking & Financial Markets), Retail Markets (comprising Retail Banking, Retail Direct and Wealth Management), Ulster Bank, Citizens, RBS Insurance and Manufacturing. A description of each of the divisions is given below.

Corporate Markets is focused on the provision of debt and risk management services to medium and large businesses and financial institutions in the UK and around the world. Corporate Banking & Financial Markets was renamed Corporate Markets on 1 January 2006 when its activities were reorganised into two businesses, UK Corporate Banking and Global Banking & Markets, in order to enhance our focus on the distinct needs of these two customer segments. These two divisions broadly correspond to the analysis of Corporate Markets by customer grouping presented in this review.

Corporate Markets provides an integrated range of core banking, structured finance and financial markets products and services, including acquisition finance, trade finance, leasing, factoring, treasury services, money markets, foreign exchange, derivatives, bond origination and trading, sovereign debt trading, futures brokerage and interest rate risk management services.

Corporate Markets is the largest provider of banking, finance and risk management services to Mid-Corporate and Commercial customers in the UK. Through its network of relationship managers across the country it provides the full range of Corporate Markets products and services to small, medium and large companies.

Corporate Markets is a leading banking partner to major corporations and financial institutions around the world, providing a full range of debt financing, risk management and investment services to its Global Banking & Markets customers.

Retail Markets was established in June 2005 to strengthen co-ordination and delivery of our multi-brand retail strategy. Retail Markets comprises Retail Banking, Retail Direct and Wealth Management.

Retail Banking is one of the leading retail banks in the UK. The division comprises both the Royal Bank and NatWest retail brands. It offers a full range of banking products and related financial services to the personal, premium and small business markets.

In the personal banking market, Retail Banking offers a comprehensive product range: money transmission, savings, loans, mortgages and insurance. In the small business market, Retail Banking provides a full range of services which include money transmission and cash management, short, medium and long-term financing, deposit products and insurance.

Customer choice and product flexibility are central to the Retail Banking proposition and customers are able to access services through a full range of channels: branches, ATMs, the internet and the telephone.

Retail Direct consists of the Group’s non-branch based retail businesses. Retail Direct issues a comprehensive range of credit and charge cards to personal and corporate customers and provides card processing services for retail businesses. It also includes Tesco Personal Finance, The One account, First Active UK, Direct Line Financial Services and Lombard Direct, all of which offer products to customers through direct channels principally in the UK. In continental Europe, Retail Direct offers a similar range of products through the RBS and Comfort Card brands.

Wealth Management provides private banking and investment services to its clients through a number of leading UK and overseas private banking subsidiaries and offshore banking businesses. Coutts is one of the world’s leading international wealth managers with over 20 offices worldwide, including Switzerland, Dubai, Monaco, Hong Kong and Singapore, as well as its premier position in the UK. Adam & Company is the major private bank in Scotland. The offshore banking businesses – The Royal Bank of Scotland International and NatWest Offshore – deliver retail banking services to local and expatriate customers, principally in the Channel Islands, the Isle of Man and Gibraltar.

Ulster Bank brings together Ulster Bank and First Active to provide a highly effective challenger to the larger competitors in the Irish banking market. Serving personal and small business customers, Ulster Bank Retail Banking provides branch banking, wealth management and direct banking throughout the Republic of Ireland and Northern Ireland. With a continued focus on providing customer choice and value, First Active serves personal and small business customers through its separately branded product offerings and branch network throughout the Republic of Ireland. Both First Active and Ulster Bank retain their own brands, branch networks and distinctive customer propositions and benefits are achieved by selling more mortgage and savings products to Ulster Bank’s customers and a broader range of banking products to First Active’s customers.

4






Ulster Bank Corporate Banking & Financial Markets caters for the banking needs of business and corporate customers, including treasury and money market activities, asset finance, ebanking and international services.

Citizens is the second largest commercial banking organisation in New England and the eighth largest commercial banking organisation in the US measured by deposits. Citizens provides retail and corporate banking services under the Citizens brand in Connecticut, Delaware, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York state, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont and the Charter One brand in Illinois, Indiana, Michigan and Ohio. Through its branch network Citizens provides a full range of retail and corporate banking services, including personal banking, residential mortgages and cash management. In addition, Citizens engages in a wide variety of commercial lending, consumer lending, commercial and consumer deposit products, merchant credit card services, insurance products, trust services and retail investment services.

RBS Insurance is the second largest general insurer in the UK, by gross earned premiums. Through the Direct Line, Churchill and Privilege brands it sells and underwrites personal insurance over the telephone and the internet in the UK. Through the Direct Line brand, RBS Insurance also sells and underwrites personal insurance in Spain, Italy and Germany. Through UKI Partnerships, our partnership business, we operate insurance schemes on behalf of third parties who in turn sell insurance products to their customers. NIG sells personal and commercial products through a network of intermediaries, while Inter Group acts as an insurance administrator and Devitt Insurance Services operates as a specialist broker administrator.

Manufacturing supports the customer facing businesses in the UK and Ireland and manages the Group’s telephony, account management and money transmission operations. It is also responsible for information technology operations and development, global purchasing, property and other services.

Manufacturing drives optimum efficiencies in high volume processing activities, leverages the Group’s purchasing power and has become a centre of excellence for managing large scale and complex change programmes such as integration.

Competition

The Group faces intense competition in all the markets it serves. In the UK, the Group’s principal competitors are the other UK retail and commercial banks, building societies and the other major international banks represented in London.

Competition for corporate and institutional customers in the UK is from UK banks and from large foreign financial institutions who are also active and offer combined investment and commercial banking capabilities. In asset finance, the Group competes with banks and specialised asset finance providers, both captive and non-captive.

In the small business banking market, the Group competes with other UK clearing banks, specialist finance providers and, for smaller businesses, building societies.

In the personal banking segment the Group competes with UK banks and building societies, major retailers, life assurance companies and internet-only players. In the mortgage market the Group competes with UK banks and building societies. NatWest Life and Royal Scottish Assurance compete with Independent Financial Advisors and life assurance companies. The competitive situation in the long-term savings market is dynamic due to the uncertainties created by regulatory change and the continued evolution of institutions, particularly in the mutual sector.

In the UK credit card market large retailers and specialist card issuers, including major US operators, are active in addition to the UK banks. Competitive activity is across a number of dimensions including introductory and longer term pricing, loyalty and reward schemes, and packaged benefits. Whilst competition remains intense, pricing of introductory interest rate offers has become less aggressive. In addition to physical distribution channels, providers compete through direct marketing activity and the internet.

In Wealth Management, The Royal Bank of Scotland International competes with other UK and international banks to offer offshore banking services. Coutts and Adam & Company compete as private banks with UK clearing and private banks, and with international private banks.

RBS Insurance competes in personal lines insurance and to a limited extent in commercial insurance. There is strong competition from a range of insurance companies which now operate telephone and internet direct sales businesses. RBS Insurance also competes with local insurance companies in the direct motor insurance markets in Spain, Italy and Germany.

In Ireland, Ulster Bank and First Active compete in retail and commercial banking with the major Irish banks and building societies, and with other UK and international banks and building societies active in the market. Competition is intensifying as UK, Irish and other European institutions seek to expand their businesses.

In the United States, where competition is intense, Citizens competes in the New England, Mid-Atlantic and Mid-West retail and mid-corporate banking markets with local and regional banks and other financial institutions. The Group also competes in the US in large corporate lending and specialised finance markets, and in fixed-income trading and sales. Competition is principally with the large US commercial and investment banks and international banks active in the US.

In other international markets, principally in continental Europe, the Group faces competition from the leading domestic and international institutions active in the relevant national markets.

5






Operating and financial review continued

Risk factors

Set out below are certain risk factors which could affect the Group’s future results and cause them to be materially different from expected results. The Group’s results are also affected by competition and other factors. The factors discussed in this report should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties.

The financial performance of the Group is affected by borrower credit quality and general economic conditions, in particular in the UK, US and Europe

Risks arising from changes in credit quality and the recoverability of loans and amounts due from counterparties are inherent in a wide range of the Group’s businesses. Adverse changes in the credit quality of the Group’s borrowers and counterparties or a general deterioration in UK, US, European or global economic conditions, or arising from systemic risks in the financial systems, could affect the recoverability and value of the Group’s assets and require an increase in the provision for impairment losses and other provisions.

Changes in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity prices and other market factors affect the Group’s business

The most significant market risks the Group faces are interest rate, foreign exchange and bond and equity price risks. Changes in interest rate levels, yield curves and spreads may affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. Changes in currency rates, particularly in the sterling-dollar and sterling-euro exchange rates, affect the value of assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies and affect earnings reported by the Group’s non-UK subsidiaries, mainly Citizens, RBS Greenwich Capital and Ulster Bank, and may affect income from foreign exchange dealing. The performance of financial markets may cause changes in the value of the Group’s investment and trading portfolios. The Group has implemented risk management methods to mitigate and control these and other market risks to which the Group is exposed. However, it is difficult to predict with accuracy changes in economic or market conditions and to anticipate the effects that such changes could have on the Group’s financial performance and business operations.

The Group’s insurance businesses are subject to inherent risks involving claims

Future claims in the Group’s general and life assurance business may be higher than expected as a result of changing trends in claims experience resulting from catastrophic weather conditions, demographic developments, changes in mortality and other causes outside the Group’s control. Such changes would affect the profitability of current and future insurance products and services. The Group re-insures some of the risks it has assumed.

Operational risks are inherent in the Group’s business

The Group’s businesses are dependent on the ability to process a very large number of transactions efficiently and accurately. Operational losses can result from fraud, errors by employees, failure to document transactions properly or to obtain proper authorisation, failure to comply with regulatory requirements and Conduct of Business rules, equipment failures, natural disasters or the failure of external systems, for example, the Group’s suppliers or counterparties. Although the Group has implemented risk controls and loss mitigation actions, and substantial resources are devoted to developing efficient procedures and to staff training, it is only possible to be reasonably, but not absolutely, certain that such procedures will be effective in controlling each of the operational risks faced by the Group.

Each of the Group’s businesses is subject to substantial regulation and regulatory oversight. Any significant regulatory developments could have an effect on how the Group conducts its business and on the results of operations

The Group is subject to financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in each location in which the Group operates. This supervision and regulation, in particular in the UK and US, if changed could materially affect the Group’s business, the products and services offered or the value of assets.

Future growth in the Group’s earnings and shareholder value depends on strategic decisions regarding organic growth and potential acquisitions

The Group devotes substantial management and planning resources to the development of strategic plans for organic growth and identification of possible acquisitions, supported by substantial expenditure to generate growth in customer business. If these strategic plans do not meet with success, the Group’s earnings could grow more slowly or decline.

The risk of litigation is inherent in the Group’s operations

In the ordinary course of the Group’s business, legal actions, claims against and by the Group and arbitrations arise; the outcome of such legal proceedings could affect the financial performance of the Group.

The Group is exposed to the risk of changes in tax legislation and its interpretation and to increases in the rate of corporate and other taxes in the jurisdictions in which in operates

The Group’s activities are subject to tax at various rates around the world computed in accordance with local legislation and practice. Action by governments to increase tax rates or to impose additional taxes would reduce the profitability of the Group. Revisions to tax legislation or to its interpretation might also affect the Group's results in the future.

6





As discussed on page 2, the consolidated financial statements of the Group have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards. The Group, however, has taken advantage of the option in IFRS 1 to implement IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 from 1 January 2005 without restating its 2004 income statement and balance sheet. The implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS on 1 January 2005 had a significant effect on the Group's balance sheet. Therefore the income statements for 2005 and 2004 and the balance sheets at 31 December 2005 and 31 December 2004 discussed in the Operating and financial review are not directly comparable.

Financial highlights

for the year ended 31 December   2005
£m
  2004
£m
   





     
Total income   25,902   23,391    
Profit before tax   7,936   7,284    
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders   5,392   4,856    
Cost:income ratio (%) (1)   46.1%   44.3%    
Basic earnings per share (pence)   169.4   157.4    
Return on equity (%) (2)   17.5%   18.3%    





     
         
at 31 December 2005
£m

2004
£m
1 January
2005
£m
 








Total assets 776,827 588,122 696,510  
Loans and advances to customers 417,226 347,251 381,162  
Deposits 453,274 383,198 421,072  
Shareholders’ equity 35,435 33,905 30,022  
Risk asset ratio – tier 1 (%) 7.6 7.0 6.7  
Risk asset ratio – total (%) 11.7 11.7 11.6  








  Notes:
(1) Cost:income ratio represents operating expenses expressed as a percentage of total income.
(2) Return on equity represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average ordinary shareholders’ equity.

 

7






Operating and financial review continued

Summary consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2005

  2005
£m
2004
£m
 







     
Net interest income   9,918 9,071  







     
Fees and commissions receivable   6,750 6,473    
Fees and commissions payable   (1,841 ) (1,926 )      
Other non-interest income   5,296 4,126    
Insurance premium income   6,076 6,146    
Reinsurers’ share   (297 ) (499 )      







     
Non-interest income   15,984 14,320    







     
Total income   25,902 23,391    
Operating expenses   11,946 10,362    







     
Profit before other operating charges   13,956 13,029    
Insurance claims   4,413 4,565    
Reinsurers’ share   (100 ) (305 )      







     
Operating profit before impairment losses   9,643 8,769    
Impairment losses   1,707 1,485    







     
Profit before tax   7,936 7,284    
Tax on profit   2,378 1,995    







     
Profit for the year   5,558 5,289    
Minority interests   57 177    
Preference dividends   109 256    







     
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders   5,392 4,856    





     
Basic earnings per ordinary share   169.4 p 157.4 p      





     

8






2005 compared with 2004

Profit

The implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 affected the timing of recognition of income and costs, classification of debt and equity, impairment provisions and accounting for insurance contracts in 2005.

Profit before tax was up 9%, from £7,284 million to £7,936 million. Strong underlying organic income growth in all divisions and a full year’s contribution from acquisitions made during 2004 were partially offset by the adverse impact on income of implementing IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005.

Total income

Total income was up 11% or £2,511 million to £25,902 million. This reflected growth in all divisions particularly Corporate Markets, Citizens and Ulster Bank and also included gain of £333 million on sale of strategic investments. The effect of implementing the requirements of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 was to reduce total income. Under IFRS, certain lending fees are deferred over the life of the financial asset and interest is recognised on a constant yield basis. The implementation of IAS 32 also resulted in most of the Group’s preference shares and minority interests being reclassified as debt and the interest thereon included in interest payable.

Net interest income increased by 9% to £9,918 million. Average loans and advances to customers and average customer deposits grew by 24% and 17% respectively. The effect of implementing the requirements of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 was to reduce net interest income. Interest income is recognised on a constant yield basis under IFRS; under UK GAAP interest was recognised on an accrual basis. Interest payable also increased due to the reclassification of the Group’s preference shares and minority interests.

Non-interest income increased by 12% to £15,984 million with good growth in banking fee income, financial markets income and insurance premium income. Non-interest income represents 62% of total income. The effect of implementing the requirements of IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 was to reduce non-interest income, principally due to the deferral of certain lending fees.

Operating expenses

Operating expenses rose by 15% to £11,946 million, partly due to the implementation of IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005. Operating expenses included loss on sale of subsidiaries of £93 million.

Integration

Integration costs were £458 million compared with £520 million in 2004. Included are software costs relating to the integration of NatWest which were written-off as incurred under UK GAAP but on transition to IFRS were capitalised and amortised. All such software is now fully amortised. The balance principally relates to the integration of Churchill, First Active and Citizens’ acquisitions, including Charter One which was acquired in August 2004.

Cost:income ratio

The Group’s cost:income ratio in 2005 was 46.1% (2004 – 44.3%), reflecting the impact on income in 2005 of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 and the first full year of acquisitions, particularly Charter One.

Net insurance claims

Bancassurance and general insurance claims after reinsurance, which under IFRS include maturities and surrenders, increased by 1% to £4,313 million.

Impairment losses

Impairment losses were £1,707 million compared with £1,485 million in 2004. Overall credit quality remained strong in 2005, with improvements in Corporate Markets partly offsetting

9






Operating and financial review continued

higher impairment losses in Retail Markets. The effect of implementing the requirements of IAS 39 on 1 January 2005 was to increase loan impairment losses.

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans represented 1.60% of gross loans and advances to customers excluding reverse repos at 31 December 2005 (31 December 2004 – 1.92%).

Provision coverage of risk elements in lending and potential problem loans was 65% compared with 72% at 31 December 2004. This reflects amounts written-off and the changing mix from unsecured to secured exposures.

Earnings and dividends

Basic earnings per ordinary share increased by 8% from 157.4p to 169.4p.

A final dividend of 53.1p per ordinary share, up 29% is recommended, giving a total dividend for the year of 72.5p, an increase of 25%. If approved, the final dividend will be paid on 9 June 2006 to shareholders registered on 10 March 2006.

Balance sheet

Total assets of £776.8 billion at 31 December 2005 were up £188.7 billion, 32%, compared with 31 December 2004, with £108.4 billion of this increase arising from the implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005, and the balance reflecting business growth.

Loans and advances to customers were up £70.0 billion, 20%, at £417.2 billion of which £33.9 billion resulted from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, mainly as a result of the grossing up of previously netted customer balances. Excluding this and a decrease in reverse repos, down 24%, £15.7 billion to £48.9 billion, customer lending was up £51.8 billion, 16%, reflecting organic growth across all divisions.

Customer accounts were up £59.5 billion, 21% at £342.9 billion with £31.7 billion arising from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, largely reflecting the grossing up of previously netted deposits. Excluding this and repos, which decreased £5.7 billion, 11% to £48.8 billion, deposits rose by £33.5 billion, 13%, to £294.1 billion with good growth in all divisions.

Capital ratios at 31 December 2005 were 7.6% (Tier 1) and 11.7% (Total).

Profitability

The after-tax return on ordinary equity, which is based on profit attributable to ordinary shareholders and average ordinary equity was 17.5%.

 

10






Analysis of results

Net interest income

  2005
£m
2004
£m







Interest receivable   21,331   16,632
Interest payable   (11,413 )   (7,561 )







Net interest income   9,918   9,071





  %   %







Gross yield on interest-earning assets of the banking business   5.59   5.21
Cost of interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business   (3.36 )   (2.70 )







Interest spread of the banking business   2.23   2.51
Benefit from interest-free funds   0.37   0.33







Net interest margin of the banking business   2.60   2.84





         
Yields, spreads and margins of the banking business   %   %







Gross yield (1)    
       Group   5.59   5.21
       UK   6.06   5.58
       Overseas   4.74   4.38
Interest spread (2)    
       Group   2.23   2.51
       UK   2.45   2.56
       Overseas   1.87   2.48
Net interest margin (3)    
       Group   2.60   2.84
       UK   2.75   2.85
       Overseas   2.32   2.83
         
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc base rate (average)   4.65   4.38
London inter-bank three month offered rates (average):    
       Sterling   4.76   4.64
       Eurodollar   3.56   1.62
       Euro   2.18   2.11







  Notes:
(1) Gross yield is the interest rate earned on average interest-earning assets of the banking business.
(2) Interest spread is the difference between the gross yield and the interest rate paid on average interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business.
(3) Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of average interest-earning assets of the banking business.

2005 compared with 2004

The net interest margin at 2.60% was down 24 basis points from 2.84% in 2004. The major contributors to the decline were product mix changes, driven by organic growth in lower margin mortgage lending and large corporate loans, and in rental assets as well as a change in deposit mix. The flattening of the US dollar yield curve also contributed to the reduction: the remainder was due to price re-positioning of some of our products. The implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 adversely impacted the net interest margin.

11






Operating and financial review continued

Average balance sheet and related interest

      2005           2004    
   






 






 
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
£m
    Rate
%
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
£m
    Rate
%
 









 






 
Assets                
Treasury bills and other eligible bills – UK   3,160     138     4.37   835     34     4.07  
Treasury bills and other eligible bills – Overseas   55     2     3.64   62     1     1.61  
Loans and advances to banks – UK   15,477     649     4.19   13,696     529     3.86  
Loans and advances to banks – Overseas   9,422     259     2.75   9,189     264     2.87  
Loans and advances to customers – UK   212,156     13,453     6.34   186,117     11,116     5.97  
Loans and advances to customers – Overseas   104,579     5,206     4.98   69,118     3,201     4.63  
Debt securities – UK   14,731     630     4.28   21,859     726     3.32  
Debt securities – Overseas   22,299     994     4.46   18,132     761     4.20  







     




     
Total interest-earning assets – banking business   381,879     21,331     5.59   319,008     16,632     5.21  
   

   

Total interest-earning assets      – trading business (2)   172,990               133,353            




 

Total interest-earning assets   554,869               452,361            
Non-interest-earning assets   182,179               70,446            




 

Total assets   737,048               522,807            


 

Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations   35.3%               32.9%            


 

       
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity                          
                           
Deposits by banks – UK   34,742     1,192     3.43   35,059     1,073     3.06  
Deposits by banks – Overseas   27,383     891     3.25   16,425     398     2.42  
Customer accounts: demand deposits – UK   73,653     2,057     2.79   67,519     1,568     2.32  
Customer accounts: demand deposits – Overseas   13,823     299     2.16   11,580     147     1.27  
Customer accounts: savings deposits – UK   26,727     778     2.91   23,149     625     2.70  
Customer accounts: savings deposits – Overseas   21,700     381     1.76   18,349     252     1.37  
Customer accounts: other time deposits – UK   60,350     2,325     3.85   51,591     1,699     3.29  
Customer accounts: other time deposits – Overseas   32,024     979     3.06   20,725     479     2.31  
Debt securities in issue – UK   42,745     1,771     4.14   41,058     1,351     3.29  
                                 – Overseas   19,621     633     3.23   12,320     229     1.86  
Subordinated liabilities – UK   23,948     1,117     4.66   17,959     665     3.70  
                                 – Overseas   2,642     154     5.83   235     15     6.38  
Internal funding of trading business – UK   (37,628)     (1,125)     2.99   (35,317)     (920)     2.60  
Internal funding of trading business – Overseas   (2,186)     (39)     1.78   (758)     (20)     2.64  







 




Total interest-bearing liabilities – banking business   339,544     11,413     3.36   279,894     7,561     2.70  
   

   

     liabilities                                      – trading business (2)   172,744               131,743            




 

Total interest-bearing liabilities   512,288               411,637            
Non-interest-bearing liabilities                                
Demand deposits – UK   17,484               17,157            
Demand deposits – Overseas   11,181               9,101            
Other liabilities   163,147               53,827            
Shareholders’ equity   32,948               31,085            




 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity   737,048               522,807            




Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations   33.5%       30.5%    





  Notes:
(1) The analysis into UK and Overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
(2) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in income from trading activities.
(3) Interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities include the Retail bancassurance long-term assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders.
(4) Interest income and interest expense do not include interest on financial assets and liabilities designated as at fair value through profit or loss. Interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities do not include the related balances.

12






Operating and financial review continued

Analysis of change in net interest income – volume and rate analysis

Volume and rate variances have been calculated based on movements in average balances over the period and changes in interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. Changes due to a combination of volume and rate are allocated pro rata to volume and rate movements.

      2005 over 2004      
 






 
    Increase/(decrease) due to changes in:  
  Average
volume
£m
    Average
rate
£m
    Net
change
£m
 










Interest- earning assets      

Treasury bills and other eligible bills

       
       UK   101     3     104
       Overseas   -     1     1
Loans and advances to banks                
       UK   72     48     120
       Overseas   6     (11 )   (5 )
Loans and advances to customers                
       UK   1,620     717     2,337
       Overseas   1,748     257     2,005
Debt securities                
       UK   (273 )   177     (96 )
       Overseas   184     49     233










Total interest receivable of the banking business                
       UK   1,520     945     2,465
       Overseas   1,938     296     2,234










  3,458     1,241     4,699








Interest-bearing liabilities        
Deposits by banks      
       UK   10     (129 )   (119 )
       Overseas   (326 )   (167 )   (493 )
Customer accounts: demand deposits                  
       UK   (151 )   (338 )   (489 )
       Overseas   (33 )   (119 )   (152 )
Customer accounts: savings deposits                  
       UK   (102 )   (51 )   (153 )
       Overseas   (50 )   (79 )   (129 )
Customer accounts: other time deposits                  
       UK   (313 )   (313 )   (626 )
       Overseas   (313 )   (187 )   (500 )
Debt securities in issue                  
       UK   (58 )   (362 )   (420 )
       Overseas   (180 )   (224 )   (404 )
Subordinated liabilities                  
       UK   (254 )   (198 )   (452 )
       Overseas   (140 )   1     (139 )
Internal funding of trading business                  
       UK   62     143     205  
       Overseas   27     (8 )   19  










Total interest payable of the banking business        
       UK   (806 )   (1,248 )   (2,054 )
       Overseas   (1,015 )   (783 )   (1,798 )










  (1,821 )   (2,031 )   (3,852 )








Movement in net interest income                  
       UK   714     (303 )   411  
       Overseas   923     (487 )   436  










  1,637     (790 )   847  









13







Operating and financial review continued

Analysis of results

Net interest income

As discussed on page 2, the Group implemented IFRS with effect from 1 January 2004. The average balance sheet and related data presented for 2003 on pages 14 to 16 are based on UK GAAP and therefore not directly comparable with the average balance sheet and related data for 2004 or 2005, each of which is based on IFRS. For a more complete discussion of the Group’s adoption of IFRS, see ’Accounting Policies–Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’ on page 88.

  2003 - UK GAAP
£m




Interest receivable   13,998
Interest payable   (5,697 )




Net interest income   8,301


  %




Gross yield on interest-earning assets of the banking business   5.00
Cost of interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business   (2.32 )




Interest spread of the banking business   2.68
Benefit from interest-free funds   0.29



 
Net interest margin of the banking business   2.97


     
Yields, spreads and margins of the banking business   %




Gross yield (1)  
       Group   5.00
       UK   5.20
       Overseas   4.44
Interest spread (2)  
       Group   2.68
       UK   2.68
       Overseas   2.71
Net interest margin (3)  
       Group   2.97
       UK   2.95
       Overseas   3.02
     
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc base rate (average)   3.69
London inter-bank three month offered rates (average):  
       Sterling   3.74
       Eurodollar   1.22
       Euro   2.33




  Notes:
(1) Gross yield is the interest rate earned on average interest-earning assets of the banking business.
(2) Interest spread is the difference between the gross yield and the interest rate paid on average interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business.
(3) Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of average interest-earning assets of the banking business.

 

14






Average balance sheet and related interest

  2003 - UK GAAP
 







    Average
balance
£m
    Interest
£m
    Rate
%









Assets                
Treasury bills and other eligible bills – UK   1,378     48     3.48
                                                          – Overseas   64     1     1.56
Loans and advances to banks – UK   13,724     459     3.34
                                                  – Overseas   9,559     212     2.22
Loans and advances to customers – UK   168,390     9,519     5.65
                                                         – Overseas   44,862     2,240     4.99
Debt securities – UK   23,810     754     3.17
                         – Overseas   17,927     765     4.27







 
Total interest-earning assets – banking business   279,714     13,998     5.00


                                                     – trading business (2)   96,648            




 
Total interest-earning assets   376,362            
Non-interest-earning assets   66,060            




 
Total assets   442,422            


 
Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations   32.4 %          


 
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity                
 
Deposits by banks – UK   28,220     703     2.49
                               – Overseas   9,565     218     2.28
Customer accounts: demand deposits – UK   64,469     1,028     1.59
                                                                – Overseas   9,166     70     0.76
Customer accounts: savings deposits – UK   18,653     503     2.70
                                                               – Overseas   16,310     260     1.59
Customer accounts: other time deposits – UK   49,880     1,478     2.96
                                                                   – Overseas   16,642     374     2.25
Debt securities in issue – UK   29,977     914     3.05
                                       – Overseas   9,630     119     1.24
Subordinated liabilities – UK   15,342     534     3.48
                                     – Overseas   154     16     10.39
Internal funding of trading business – UK   (21,258 )   (497 )   2.34
                                                          – Overseas   (1,651 )   (23 )   1.39







 
Total interest-bearing liabilities – banking business   245,099     5,697     2.32


 
Total interest-bearing liabilities – trading business (2)   93,466            




 
Total interest-bearing liabilities   338,565            
Non-interest-bearing liabilities                
Demand deposits – UK   17,589            
                              – Overseas   7,330            
Other liabilities   52,810            
Shareholders’ funds   26,128            




 
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity   442,422            


 
Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations   30.6 %          



  Notes:
 
(1) The analysis into UK and Overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
 
(2) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in dealing profits.

15






Operating and financial review continued

Analysis of change in net interest income – volume and rate analysis

Volume and rate variances have been calculated based on movements in average balances over the period and changes in interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. Changes due to a combination of volume and rate are allocated pro rata to volume and rate movements.

      2004 over 2003      
 







    Increase/(decrease) due to changes in:  
  Average
volume
£m
    Average
rate
£m
    Net
change
£m
 










Interest- earning assets      

Treasury bills and other eligible bills

       
       UK   (21 )   7     (14 )
       Overseas   -     -     -  
Loans and advances to banks                  
       UK   (1 )   71     70  
       Overseas   (8 )   60     52  
Loans and advances to customers                  
       UK   1,038     559     1,597  
       Overseas   1,133     (172 )   961  
Debt securities                  
       UK   (63 )   35     (28 )
       Overseas   9     (13 )   (4 )










Total interest receivable of the banking business                  
       UK   953     672     1,625  
       Overseas   1,134     (125 )   1,009  










  2,087     547     2,634  








Interest-bearing liabilities        
Deposits by banks      
       UK   (190 )   (180 )   (370 )
       Overseas   (166 )   (14 )   (180 )
Customer accounts: demand deposits                  
       UK   (50 )   (490 )   (540 )
       Overseas   (22 )   (55 )   (77 )
Customer accounts: savings deposits                  
       UK   (122 )   -     (122 )
       Overseas   (30 )   38     8  
Customer accounts: other time deposits                  
       UK   (52 )   (169 )   (221 )
       Overseas   (95 )   (10 )   (105 )
Debt securities in issue                  
       UK   (360 )   (77 )   (437 )
       Overseas   (39 )   (71 )   (110 )
Subordinated liabilities                  
       UK   (96 )   (35 )   (131 )
       Overseas   (7 )   8     1  
Internal funding of trading business                  
       UK   362     61     423  
       Overseas   (17 )   14     (3 )










Total interest payable of the banking business        
       UK   (508 )   (890 )   (1,398 )
       Overseas   (376 )   (90 )   (466 )










  (884 )   (980 )   (1,864 )








Movement in net interest income                  
       UK   445     (218 )   227  
       Overseas   758     (215 )   543  










  1,203     (433 )   770  









16






Non-interest income

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
Fees and commissions receivable   6,750   6,473    
Fees and commissions payable   (1,841 )   (1,926 )      
Income from trading activities   2,343   1,988    
Other operating income   2,953   2,138    







     
  10,205   8,673    







     
Insurance premium income   6,076   6,146    
Reinsurers’ share   (297 )   (499 )      







     
  5,779   5,647    







     
  15,984   14,320    





     

2005 compared with 2004

Non-interest income increased by £1,664 million, 12% to £15,984 million reflecting strong performances in Corporate Markets and Citizens, and good growth in banking fee income, financial markets income and insurance premium income. The effect of implementing IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005 was to reduce non-interest income.

Within non-interest income, fees and commissions receivable increased by 4% or £277 million, to £6,750 million, while fees and commissions payable decreased by £85 million to £1,841 million. Under IFRS, certain lending fees are deferred over the life of the financial asset.

Income from trading activities, which primarily arises from providing customers with debt and risk management products in interest rate, currency and credit, was up £355 million, 18%. The increase on 2004 reflected higher customer volumes.

Other operating income increased by 38%, £815 million to £2,953 million. This was principally due to higher income from rental assets, increased bancassurance income, realised investment securities gains and the gain on sale of strategic investments.

General insurance premium income, after reinsurance, rose by 2%, or £132 million to £5,779 million reflecting volume growth in motor and home insurance products.

17





Operating and financial review continued

Operating expenses

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
Administrative expenses:          
Staff costs   5,992     5,188        
Premises and equipment   1,313     1,177        
Other administrative expenses   2,816     2,323        







     
Total administrative expenses   10,121     8,688        
Depreciation and amortisation   1,825     1,674        







     
  11,946     10,362        





     

2005 compared with 2004

Operating expenses rose by 15% to £11,946 million to support growth in business volumes and included the loss on sale of subsidiaries.

Staff costs were up £804 million, 15% to £5,922 million reflecting business growth. The number of staff increased by 400 to 137,000.

Premises and equipment expenses increased by £136 million, 12% to £1,313 million reflecting our programme of investment both in the branch networks and in our major operational centres.

Other administrative expenses, up 21%, £493 million reflected business volume growth and ongoing expenditure on regulatory projects.

The Group’s ratio of operating expenses to total income was 46.1% compared with 44.3% in 2004, partly due to the full year effect of acquisitions and the impact of implementing IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005.

18






Integration costs

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
Staff costs   148     83        
Premises and equipment   39     35        
Other administrative expenses   131     149        
Depreciation and amortisation   140     253        







     
    458     520        
   




     

Integration costs were £458 million compared with £520 million in 2004 comprising amortisation of internally developed software and other expenditure. Software costs were previously written off as incurred under UK GAAP but under IFRS are now amortised over 3-5 years. All software relating to the NatWest integration was fully amortised by the end of 2005. The balance of integration costs principally relates to the integration of Churchill, First Active and Citizens’ acquisitions, including Charter One which was acquired in August 2004.

Accruals in relation to integration costs are set out below.

  At 31 December
2004
£m
  Currency translation
adjustments
£m
  Charge to
income statement
£m
  Utilised during
the year
£m
  At 31 December
2005
£m












Staff costs – redundancy   11   1   23   (18 )   17
Staff costs – other   29   1   125   (140 )   15
Premises and equipment   13   2   39   (40 )   14
Other   44   2   271   (291 )   26












    97   6   458   (489 )   72
   









19






Operating and financial review continued

Impairment losses

IAS 39 impacted the way in which loan impairment losses are calculated and was implemented on 1 January 2005 without restatement of comparatives. Consequently, the data in the following tables for 2005 and 2004 are not directly comparable.

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
New impairment losses   1,879   1,629    
less: recoveries of amounts previously written-off   (172 )   (144 )      







     
Charge to income statement   1,707   1,485    





     
Comprising:      
Loan impairment losses   1,703   1,402    
Other impairment losses   4   83    







     
Charge to income statement   1,707   1,485    





     

2005 compared with 2004

Impairment losses were £1,707 million compared with £1,485 million in 2004 with higher provisions in Retail Markets partly offset by improvements in Corporate Markets. Following the implementation of IAS 39 on 1 January 2005, loan impairment losses are based on the discounted value of expected recoveries. As a result, provisions are higher initially but the difference between the discounted and undiscounted amounts emerges as interest income over the recovery period.

New impairment losses were up 15%, £250 million to £1,879 million. Recoveries of amounts previously written off were up £28 million, 19% to £172 million. Consequently the net charge to the income statement was up £222 million, 15% to £1,707 million.

Total balance sheet provisions for impairment amounted to £3,887 million compared with £4,174 million at 31 December 2004. Total provision coverage (the ratio of total balance sheet provisions for impairment to total risk elements in lending) decreased from 76% to 65%.

The ratio of total balance sheet provisions for impairment to total risk elements in lending and potential problem loans decreased to 65% compared with 72% at 31 December 2004. This reflects amounts written-off and the changing mix from unsecured to secured exposure.

Other impairment losses were £4 million compared with £83 million in 2004.

Taxation

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
Tax   2,378     1,995        





     
  %     %        







     
UK corporation tax rate   30.0     30.0        
Effective tax rate   30.0     27.4        







     

The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax charge computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax as follows:

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
     







     
Expected tax charge   2,381   2,185    
Interest on subordinated debt not allowable for tax   79      
Non-deductible items   230   110    
Non-taxable items   (166 )   (128 )      
Taxable foreign exchange movements   (10 )   (10 )      
Foreign profits taxed at other rates   77   49    
Unutilised losses – brought forward and carried forward   (5 )   6    
Adjustments in respect of prior periods   (208 )   (217 )      







     
Actual tax charge   2,378   1,995    





     

20






Divisional performance

The contribution of each division before amortisation of purchased intangible assets, integration costs and net gain on sale of strategic investments and subsidiaries and, where appropriate, Manufacturing costs is detailed below.

  2005
£m
  2004
£m







Corporate Markets   5,224     4,226  
Retail Markets            
   Retail Banking   3,009     3,212  
   Retail Direct   790     885  
   Wealth Management   408     357  
Total Retail Markets   4,207     4,454  
Ulster Bank   530     452  
Citizens   1,575     1,071  
RBS Insurance   926     863  
Manufacturing   (2,743 )   (2,552 )
Central items   (1,468 )   (665 )







Profit before amortisation of purchased intangible assets, integration costs and net gain            
on sale of strategic investments and subsidiaries   8,251     7,849  
Amortisation of purchased intangible assets   97     45  
Integration costs   458     520  
Net gain on sale of strategic investments and subsidiaries   240      







Profit before tax   7,936     7,284  
   




The performance of each of the divisions is reviewed on pages 22 to 33.

21






Operating and financial review continued

Corporate Markets

 
2005
£m
  2004
£m
 






Net interest income   2,960   2,561  
Non-interest income   5,855   5,090  






Total income   8,815   7,651  






Direct expenses        
       – staff costs   2,000   1,705  
       – other   523   459  
       – operating lease depreciation   733   680  






    3,256   2,844  






Contribution before impairment losses   5,559   4,807  
Impairment losses   335   581  






Contribution   5,224   4,226  





         
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn
 






Total assets*   409.2   359.4  
Loans and advances to customers – gross*        
       – banking book   158.7   136.9  
       – trading book   11.8   10.1  
Rental assets   13.2   11.5  
Customer deposits*   111.1   100.8  
Weighted risk assets   202.6   178.4  






* excluding repos and reverse repos

Corporate Markets achieved excellent results in 2005, with total income up 15% to £8,815 million and contribution up 24% to £5,224 million, reflecting very good performances across our businesses.

RBS remains the number 1 corporate bank in the UK and we have significantly expanded our franchise in Europe and North America, where we are also focussing on the opportunities for increased co-operation between Corporate Markets and Citizens. In Asia, our profile has benefited from the announcement of the Group’s strategic partnership with Bank of China.

Our businesses continue to deliver good returns. Weighted risk assets rose by 14% over the course of the year to £202.6 billion, with much slower growth in the second half following the above-trend spike at 30 June 2005. The ratio of income to average weighted risk assets for 2005 was broadly stable, while the ratio of contribution to average weighted risk assets improved slightly.

22






Corporate Markets – Mid-Corporate and Commercial

  2005
£m
  2004
£m
 





 
Net interest income   1,760   1,477  
Non-interest income   1,257   1,333  





 
Total income   3,017   2,810  





 
Direct expenses    
       – staff costs   529   489  
       – other   132   123  
       – operating lease depreciation   335   322  





 
  996   934  





 
Contribution before impairment losses   2,021   1,876  
Impairment losses   218   270  





 
Contribution   1,803   1,606  
 


 
       
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn
 





 
Total assets*   70.4   61.6  
Loans and advances to customers – gross*   67.9   59.4  
Customer deposits*   60.0   51.8  
Weighted risk assets   74.2   65.6  





 
* excluding repos and reverse repos

Corporate Markets generated good results in the Mid-Corporate & Commercial customer segment in 2005, building on the strength of its UK franchise. We maintained our market-leading positions in corporate and commercial banking, asset finance and invoice finance. Total income rose by 7% to £3,017 million, whilst contribution rose by 12% to £1,803 million.

Net interest income increased 19% to £1,760 million as a result of strong growth in average lending and in average customer deposits.

Non-interest income declined by 6% to £1,257 million, reflecting the effect of IAS 39 on recognition of fee income being partially offset by our continued success in cross-selling our full range of products and services to customers. Our business has benefited from the co-location of our asset finance and invoice finance managers with our corporate and commercial banking operations.

Expense growth was 7% which included a further investment in customer-facing staff.

Impairment losses were 19% lower than in 2004 at £218 million, reflecting a further improvement in our credit metrics.

23






Operating and financial review continued

Corporate Markets – Global Banking & Markets          
       
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
 






Net interest income excluding funding cost of rental assets 1,652     1,454  
Funding cost of rental assets (452 )   (370 )






Net interest income 1,200     1,084  






Fees and commissions receivable 1,060     969  
Fees and commissions payable (252 )   (217 )
Income from trading activities 1,964     1,751  
Income on rental assets 1,074     924  
Other operating income 752     330  






Non-interest income 4,598     3,757  






Total income 5,798     4,841  






Direct expenses          
       – staff costs 1,471     1,216  
       – other 391     336  
       – operating lease depreciation 398     358  






  2,260     1,910  






Contribution before impairment losses 3,538     2,931  
Impairment losses 117     311  






Contribution 3,421     2,620  






  31 December
2005
£bn
    1 January
2005
£bn
 






 Total assets* 338.8     297.8  
 Loans and advances to customers – gross*          
           – banking book 90.8     77.5  
           – trading book 11.8     10.1  
 Rental assets 11.9     10.3  
 Customer deposits* 51.1     49.0  
 Weighted risk assets 128.4     112.8  






* excluding repos and reverse repos          

An excellent performance from our Global Banking & Markets customer segment in 2005 shows the fruits of the global platform we have built over the last five years, with good growth in all major geographies and across-the-board success in income generation from our core banking, structured finance and financial markets activities.

Total income rose by 20% to £5,798 million, with contribution up 31% to £3,421 million, benefiting from cost discipline and continuing benign credit conditions.

Debt underwriting volumes remained strong throughout the course of the year, reflecting our involvement in many of the largest financings in the UK and Europe for both large corporates and private equity sponsors. We were the fourth most active bank worldwide in arranging and underwriting bank lending in 2005. A strong distribution performance brought weighted risk assets to £128.4 billion at year-end, up 14% over the year and back to a more consistent trend level than the amount at 30 June 2005.

Non-interest income grew by 22% to £4,598 million and now accounts for 79% of Global Banking & Markets revenues.

We recorded good growth in fees earned from customer services in risk management, financial structuring and debt-raising. A strong performance from RBS Greenwich Capital, which has been brought together with other Corporate Markets activities in North America, contributed to steady growth in income from trading activities. Customer volumes were higher across all products and particularly good in our credit markets businesses. Average trading Value at Risk was held steady at a very conservative level, £12 million.

Our continuing success in aircraft, train, ship and hotel leasing delivered good growth in net income from rental assets. Other operating income grew strongly, with our structured finance investment portfolio producing good realised gains, notably in the second half of the year.

Growth in expenses was 18%, reflecting variable performance-related costs.

24




Retail Markets

Retail Markets was established in June 2005 to strengthen co-ordination and delivery of our multi-brand retail strategy across our product range, and comprises Retail Banking, Retail Direct and Wealth Management. The performance of each of these divisions is discussed on pages 26, 27 and 28, respectively.

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 4,499   4,261
Non-interest income 3,714   3,869




Total income 8,213   8,130




Direct expenses      
       – staff costs 1,514   1,446
       – other 821   808




  2,335   2,254




Insurance net claims 486   702




Contribution before impairment losses 5,392   5,174
Impairment losses 1,185   720




Contribution 4,207   4,454



31 December   1 January
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn




Total banking assets 114.4   104.9
Loans and advances to customers      
   – mortgages 64.6   56.9
   – personal 21.5   20.2
   – cards 9.6   9.4
   – business 16.7   15.9
Customer deposits 105.9   97.0
Investment management assets – excluding deposits 31.4   26.6
Weighted risk assets 80.6   76.5





Total income increased by 1% to £8,213 million and contribution decreased by 6% to £4,207 million, with good discipline on costs helping to partially offset increased impairment losses on unsecured lending.

At the end of 2004 we referred to the changes being seen in the retail markets with the consumer transitioning from an environment which had seen several years of very fast growth in consumer lending to an increased emphasis on savings and investment.

As a consequence, we planned to refocus our strategy to grow our sales of deposit and bancassurance products faster than the market, to exploit our potential for building profitable market share in the mortgage market and to concentrate more on the development of our branch franchise, building on our strong service proposition. During 2005 this transition has gathered momentum and we have achieved good progress in our strategies.

Branch deposit balances outgrew the market and our bancassurance sales accelerated strongly, with annual premium equivalent sales 25% higher than in 2004. Our share of net mortgage lending, assisted by the launch of the First Active brand, reached 8% in 2005. Our credit card business, meanwhile, made excellent headway in marketing through branch channels; we gained 60% more credit card customers in our core NatWest and RBS brands in the second half than in the same period of 2004.

25




Operating and financial review continued

Retail Banking

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 3,175   3,076
Non-interest income 2,258   2,504




Total income 5,433   5,580




Direct expenses      
       – staff costs 1,026   964
       – other 311   313




  1,337   1,277




Insurance net claims 486   702




Contribution before impairment losses 3,610   3,601
Impairment losses 601   389




Contribution 3,009   3,212



       
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn




Total banking assets 77.1   72.8
Loans and advances to customers – gross      
       – mortgages 47.3   44.1
       – personal 13.7   13.2
       – business 16.3   15.3
Customer deposits 77.7   71.9
Weighted risk assets 54.0   51.1





Retail Banking total income for 2005 of £5,433 million and contribution of £3,009 million were adversely affected by the implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005. Contribution before impairment losses increased to £3,610 million.

Overall customer numbers have increased since December 2004 with personal customers up 274,000 (2%) and registered internet customers up 30%. During 2005 we continued to demonstrate our commitment to customer service, with significant progress in terms of the proportion of our customers who are “extremely’’ satisfied and we are making pleasing progress in the current account switcher market. Among the high street banks, Royal Bank of Scotland ranks first for customer satisfaction with NatWest now in joint second place. NatWest remains the number one bank for students. In 2005, 44% of first year students in England and Wales chose to open new accounts with us compared with 42% in 2004.

Against the backdrop of a slower rate of growth in consumer borrowing, we have delivered robust business growth in average loans and advances, especially mortgage lending with particularly good growth in higher margin products such as the offset mortgage. Average unsecured personal lending, where we took further steps to enhance our focus on high quality new business, was also up. Average customer deposits grew, with particularly good inflows into savings products.

Net interest income was £3,175 million. Net interest margin was lower in 2005 than in 2004 with increased product margins offsetting mix effects. Spreads in mortgages and some savings products improved in the latter part of the year.

Non-interest income fell by 10% to £2,258 million. Growth in income from core personal and small business banking services, and good progress in our private banking and investment businesses were more than offset by the affect of IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on recognition of fee income and bancassurance income.

Direct expense grew by 5%, partly due to investment in future income initiatives in the second half. Staff costs increased by 6% to £1,026 million as a result of continued investment in customer-facing staff with over 500 additional customer advisors in branches, an increase in telephone banking advisors, and continued expansion of our bancassurance and investment businesses. We continue to make efficiency gains in other areas resulting in a decrease in other costs to £311 million.

Net claims in bancassurance, which under IFRS include maturities, surrenders and liabilities to policyholders, were £486 million compared with £702 million in 2004.

Impairment losses increased by 54% or £212 million to £601 million. The increased charge principally reflects the implementation of IAS 39 from 1 January 2005 and the growth in lending over recent years, including 17% growth in 2004. We have taken further steps to refine our credit policy and improved our recoveries process. Mortgage arrears remain very low. The average loan-to-value ratio on new mortgages written in 2005 was 62% and on the stock of mortgages was 46%. Small business credit quality remains stable.

26




Retail Direct

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 882   782
Non-interest income 1,084   995




Total income 1,966   1,777




Direct expenses      
       – staff costs 230   220
       – other 375   359




  605   579




Contribution before impairment losses 1,361   1,198
Impairment losses 571   313




Contribution 790   885



       
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn




Total assets 27.2   23.0
Loans and advances to customers – gross      
       – mortgages 13.8   9.4
       – cards 9.5   9.3
       – other 4.0   3.8
Customer deposits 2.7   2.8
Weighted risk assets 20.5   19.4





Total income rose by 11% to £1,966 million and contribution before impairment losses by 14% to £1,361 million, a strong performance in the context of slower growth in demand for unsecured credit. This performance reflected disciplined pricing, tight cost control and stringent credit assessment. Contribution after impairment losses decreased by 11% to £790 million.

During the year, the number of customer accounts increased by 734,000, 4%. In the light of changing market conditions we have focussed our marketing efforts on existing customers, and this has resulted in very strong growth in our core NatWest and RBS brands. We gained 336,000 credit card accounts in these brands in the second half of 2005, 60% more than in the equivalent period of 2004.

Net interest income increased by 13% to £882 million, reflecting the success of the First Active brand in the UK mortgage market and the maturing of the MINT portfolio. Average loans and advances rose strongly with the fastest growth coming in mortgages. Personal loan growth slowed, reflecting strategic decisions taken over the last 18 months to reposition pricing and tighten lending criteria for personal loans sold directly.

Net interest margin was only slightly lower than in 2004, as wider margins on our cards portfolio balanced the effects of the increasing weight of mortgage assets in our loan book.

Non-interest income was up 9% to £1,084 million, benefiting from higher volumes in both domestic and international card acquiring, strong sales through Tesco Personal Finance, the introduction of balance transfer fees and good growth in Europe.

Expenses increased by 4% to £605 million, with stringent cost control across all activities, including reduced marketing costs on personal loans. This was consistent with our more cautious approach to direct lending and with our successful focus on recruitment of customers through branches.

Impairment losses rose by 82% to £571 million, reflecting higher lending volumes, the increase in personal arrears signalled at the end of 2004 and the effect of implementing IAS 39 from 1 January 2005. There are some signs of a stabilisation of credit quality, assisted by the tightening of lending criteria. Mortgage arrears remain very low. The average loan-to-value ratio on new mortgages written in 2005 was 51% and on the stock of mortgages was 44%.

27




Operating and financial review continued

Wealth Management

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 442   403
Non-interest income 372   370




Total income 814   773




Expenses      
       – staff costs 258   262
       – other 135   136




  393   398




Contribution before impairment losses 421   375
Impairment losses 13   18




Contribution 408   357



       
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn




Loans and advances to customers – gross 7.8   7.1
Investment management assets – excluding deposits 25.4   21.6
Customer deposits 25.5   22.3
Weighted risk assets 6.1   6.0




Total income rose by 5% to £814 million, reflecting good growth across all our businesses, and contribution was 14% higher at £408 million. Coutts UK and Adam & Co both gained good numbers of customers, with Coutts up 7% and Adam up 11%. 2005 also saw the continuation of rapid growth in Asia, where the number of private bankers increased by 20%, with particular emphasis placed on recruitment for the Chinese and Indian markets.

Net interest income increased by 10% to £442 million. Strong growth in average customer loans and deposits was partiallly offset by lower net interest margin due to a change in the mix of business.

Non-interest income was steady at £372 million. Average assets under management rose 9% to £23.1 billion as a result of good new business volumes in Coutts UK and the rise in equity markets. Assets under management at the year end were £25.4 billion, an increase of 18%.

Expenses decreased by 1% to £393 million, reflecting a continued focus on efficiency. Despite continued investment in growth markets in both the UK and overseas, staff costs were 2% lower than in 2004. Other costs reduced to £135 million.

Impairment losses amounted to £13 million, down £5 million.

28




Ulster Bank

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 655   550
Non-interest income 203   193




Total income 858   743




Expenses      
       – staff costs 191   172
       – other 79   79




  270   251




Contribution before impairment losses 588   492
Impairment losses 58   40




Contribution 530   452



       
  31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005
£bn




Total assets 35.9   28.7
Loans and advances to customers – gross      
       – mortgages 13.2   10.1
       – other 15.0   12.9
Customer deposits 15.9   13.6
Weighted risk assets 22.4   18.6
Average exchange rate – 1.463   1.474
Spot exchange rate – 1.457   1.418





Total income increased by 15% to £858 million, with contribution up 17% to £530 million, as Ulster Bank achieved another year of strong growth, with excellent customer recruitment, robust lending volumes and very good growth in deposits. First Active continues to perform well and in line with our integration plan. It led the Republic of Ireland market with the introduction of new mortgage products, as well as launching new credit card and direct loan products.

The number of personal and business customers increased by 68,000 in the year. Ulster Bank personal customer numbers rose by 9% in the Republic of Ireland, where our switcher mortgage product has helped us to gain market share. In Northern Ireland, Ulster Bank significantly enhanced its personal current account offering in the fourth quarter to provide free banking to all customers.

Net interest income rose by 19% to £655 million. Average loans and advances and average customer deposits both grew strongly. However, the continuing strong growth in mortgages and business loans led to a decline in net interest margin.

Non-interest income increased by £10 million or 5% to £203 million. This reflected increased volumes of customer transactions and good growth in income from financial markets services.

Expenses increased by 8% to £270 million, as a result of investment to support the growth of the business. This investment will continue into 2006. We have continued with our branch improvement programme, upgrading 50 branches in the Republic of Ireland and 39 in Northern Ireland.

Impairment losses increased by £18 million to £58 million, reflecting the growth in lending.

29






Operating and financial review continued

Citizens

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Net interest income 2,122   1,609
Non-interest income 1,142   659




Total income 3,264   2,268




Expenses      
       – staff costs 819   580
       – other 739   500




  1,558   1,080




Contribution before impairment losses 1,706   1,188
Impairment losses 131   117




Contribution 1,575   1,071



       
  31 December
2005
US$bn
  1 January
2005
US$bn




Total assets 158.8   141.7
Loans and advances to customers – gross 104.6   91.7
Customer deposits 106.3   99.2
Weighted risk assets 106.4   93.5
Average exchange rate – US$/£ 1.820   1.832
Spot exchange rate – US$/£ 1.721   1.935





Citizens performed well in 2005, delivering a strong underlying performance in challenging market conditions both from the old Citizens franchise and from Charter One. Total income, in US dollars, rose by 43% to $5,940 million and contribution by 46% to $2,867 million, including a full year’s contribution from Charter One. Excluding Charter One and other acquisitions, income rose by 7% and contribution by 10%, despite the impact of the flattening of the yield curve, which reduced net interest margin and the rate of growth in net interest income.

We have grown our customer numbers in both personal and business segments, with Charter One increasing its small business and corporate customer base by 10%. Co-operation between Citizens and RBS Corporate Markets is yielding good results. Citizens’ new international cash management service has already won nearly 300 new accounts with existing RBS customers, bringing in more than $80 million of new core deposits.

Our cards businesses, which are only active in the prime and superprime segments, have made good progress. Credit card balances increased by 19% to $2.5 billion, as RBS National launched into a number of new channels such as Charter One branches. RBS Lynk, our merchant acquiring business, increased its customer base by 24%.

The integration of Charter One progressed well and all phases of the IT conversion were completed in July 2005, five months ahead of schedule. This involved the conversion to Citizens’ systems of over 750 branches and three million customer accounts spread over a wide geography. Despite the focus on the integration process, Charter One achieved good growth in business volumes, with loans and advances up 18% over the course of the year and customers deposits up 10%.

Net interest income increased by 31% to $3,861 million. This reflected strong growth in both lending and deposits. Excluding acquisitions, average lending increased by 13% or $6.7 billion, with robust growth in secured consumer lending, and average customer deposits by 9% or $5.7 billion. However, as a consequence of the flattening yield curve, net interest income excluding acquisitions was only 4% higher at $2,534 million.

Non-interest income was up 72% to $2,079 million. Excluding acquisitions, non-interest income grew by 15% to $1,004 million, benefiting from higher fee income, increased student loan and leasing activities, and investment gains.

Expenses were up 43% to $2,834 million. Expense growth, excluding acquisitions, was contained to 6%.

Impairment losses, including acquisitions, were up $25 million to $239 million. Credit quality overall remained stable. More than 90% of our personal sector lending is secured, and as a result there was minimal impact from the change in US bankruptcy laws in 2005.

30






RBS Insurance

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Earned premiums 5,641     5,507  
Reinsurers’ share (246 )   (454 )






Insurance premium income 5,395     5,053  
Net fees and commissions (449 )   (481 )
Other income 543     467  






Total income 5,489     5,039  






Expenses          
       – staff costs 323     304  
       – other 413     314  






  736     618  






Gross claims 3,903     3,826  
Reinsurers’ share (76 )   (268 )






Net claims 3,827     3,558  






Contribution 926     863  





           
  31 December
2005
    31 December
2004
 






In-force policies (000’s)          
       – Motor: UK 8,687     8,338  
       – Motor: Continental Europe 1,862     1,639  
       – Non-motor (including home, rescue, pet, HR24): UK 10,898     10,464  
General insurance reserves – total (£m) 7,776     7,379  







RBS Insurance produced a good performance in 2005, with total income increasing by 9% to £5,489 million and contribution by 7% to £926 million. The integration of Churchill was completed in September 2005, ahead of plan, and Churchill delivered greater transaction benefits than anticipated at the time of the acquisition. Following the integration of Churchill, all our direct general insurance businesses in the UK now operate on a common platform.

RBS Insurance achieved 4% growth in UK motor policies in force. In achieving this against a background of very strong competition in UK motor insurance, we benefited from the strength of our brands and the diversity of our distribution channels. Growth came through our direct brands, through our partnership business, where we operate insurance schemes on behalf of third parties who in turn sell insurance products to their customers, and through NIG, our intermediary business acquired as part of Churchill. Our businesses in Spain, Germany and Italy together delivered 14% growth in motor policies in force. Linea Directa, our joint venture with Bankinter, increased its customer base by 17% and, with more than 1 million policies, is the largest direct motor insurer and sixth largest motor insurer in Spain.

Total home insurance policies declined by 1%. Within this total, we continued to expand through our direct brands but there was attrition of some partner-branded books.

In addition to expanding its intermediary business in motor and home insurance, NIG achieved 10% growth in commercial policies sold to SMEs.

Expenses rose by 19%. Excluding the impact of a change in reinsurance arrangements, total income rose by 6% and expenses by 9%. Net insurance claims on the same basis were up by 5%, reflecting increased volumes, claims inflation in motor and an increase in home claims following severe storms in the UK in January 2005.

The UK combined operating ratio for 2005 was 93.6%.

31






Operating and financial review continued

Manufacturing

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Staff costs 740   753
Other costs 2,003   1,799




Total manufacturing costs 2,743   2,552



Analysis:      
Group Technology 945   852
Group Purchasing and Property Operations 1,013   927
Customer Support and other operations 785   773




Total manufacturing costs 2,743   2,552




Manufacturing’s costs increased by 7% to £2,743 million. Excluding software amortisation, costs rose by 4%. Costs relating to internal software development, which under UK GAAP were written off as incurred, are now under IFRS capitalised and amortised.

Group Technology costs increased by 11% to £945 million. Excluding software amortisation, costs were up 2%, with support for increased business volumes offset by efficiency improvements. The Group Efficiency Programme was substantially completed during the year, with major implementations such as a new system for handling customer queries and a new customer account-opening platform. The Churchill systems integration was completed in September 2005.

Group Purchasing and Property Operations costs increased by 9% to £1,013 million. We improved the efficiency of our property utilisation in 2005 while continuing our programme of investment both in the branch networks and in our major operational centres, including Birmingham, Manchester and our new headquarters in Edinburgh.

Customer Support and other operations costs rose by just 2%, despite a much greater increase in the business volumes supported. Cash withdrawals from ATMs, for example, rose by 13%, while we handled 10% more mortgage applications and 7% more personal loan volumes. These increases were absorbed by improved efficiency through the delivery of new systems and ways of working.

32






Central items

  2005
£m
  2004
£m




Funding costs 810   274
Departmental and corporate costs 658   391




Total Central items 1,468   665




Total central items increased by £803 million to £1,468 million.

Funding costs at £810 million, were up £536 million largely because of the full year funding cost of the acquisition of Charter One in August 2004 and the effect of implementing IAS 32 (reclassification of funding costs on preference shares and trust preferred securities from dividends payable and minority interests respectively to interest payable). The Group’s primary objective is to hedge its economic risks. So as not to distort divisional results, volatility attributable to derivatives in economic hedges that do not meet the criteria in IFRS for hedge accounting is transferred to the Group’s central treasury function. This resulted in a charge of £45 million, in addition to a charge for £14 million for hedge ineffectiveness under IFRS.

Central departmental costs and other corporate items at £658 million were £267 million higher than 2004. This was principally due to higher pension costs and the centralisation of certain functions, and includes ongoing expenditure on regulatory projects such as Basel II and Sarbanes-Oxley Section 404.

Employee numbers at 31 December      
  2005   2004




Corporate Markets 15,700   16,800
Retail Banking 33,100   32,200
Retail Direct 6,800   7,000
Wealth Management 4,200   4,100
Ulster Bank 4,400   4,100
Citizens 24,400   24,000
RBS Insurance 19,400   19,500
Manufacturing 26,800   26,900
Centre 2,200   2,000




Group total 137,000   136,600




2005 compared with 2004

The number of employees increased by 400 to 137,000, with increases in Retail Banking, Citizens and Ulster Bank partly offset by a reduction in Corporate Markets.

33






Operating and financial review continued

Consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 2005

  31 December
2005
£m
  1 January
2005
£m
  31 December
2004
£m






Assets          
Cash and balances at central banks 4,759   4,293   4,293
Treasury bills and other eligible bills 5,538   6,109   6,110
Loans and advances to banks 70,587   65,691   61,073
Loans and advances to customers 417,226   381,162   347,251
Debt securities 120,965   93,915   93,908
Equity shares 9,301   5,231   4,723
Intangible assets 19,932   19,242   19,242
Property, plant and equipment 18,053   16,425   16,428
Settlement balances 6,005   5,682   5,682
Derivatives at fair value 95,663   89,905   17,800
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets 8,798   8,855   11,612






Total assets 776,827   696,510   588,122





Liabilities          
Deposits by banks 110,407   106,026   99,883
Customer accounts 342,867   315,046   283,315
Debt securities in issue 90,420   66,245   63,999
Settlement balances and short positions 43,988   33,339   32,990
Derivatives at fair value 96,438   91,277   18,876
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities 14,247   14,720   17,648
Retirement benefit liabilities 3,735   2,940   2,940
Deferred taxation liabilities 1,695   1,826   2,061
Insurance liabilities 7,212   6,592   8,647
Subordinated liabilities 28,274   27,526   20,366






Total liabilities 739,283   665,537   550,725
           
Equity          
Minority interests 2,109   951   3,492
Shareholders’ equity          
    Called up share capital 826   822   822
    Reserves 34,609   29,200     33,083
Total equity 37,544   30,973   37,397
           






Total liabilities and equity    776,827   696,510   588,122





Analysis of repurchase agreements included above          
           
Reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing          






Loans and advances to banks 41,804   34,475   29,975
Loans and advances to customers 48,887   64,599   52,184






  90,691   99,074   82,159





Repurchase agreements and stock lending          






Deposits by banks 47,905   47,841   43,342
Customer accounts 48,754   54,485   42,134






  96,659   102,326   85,476





34





Overview of consolidated balance sheet

31 December 2005 compared with 31 December 2004

Total assets of £776.8 billion at 31 December 2005 were up £188.7 billion, 32%, compared with 31 December 2004, with £108.4 billion of this increase arising from the implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005, and the balance reflecting business growth.

Treasury bills and other eligible bills decreased by £0.6 billion, 9%, to £5.5 billion, reflecting trading activity.

Loans and advances to banks rose £9.5 billion, 16%, to £70.6 billion. Of the increase, £4.6 billion was due to the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, and the balance reflected growth in reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing (“reverse repos”), which increased by £7.3 billion, 21%, to £41.8 billion. This was partially offset by a decrease in bank placings, down £2.4 billion, 8% to £28.8 billion.

Loans and advances to customers were up £70.0 billion, 20%, at £417.2 billion of which £33.9 billion resulted from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, mainly due to the grossing up of previously netted customer balances. Customer lending was up £51.8 billion, 16%, reflecting organic growth across all divisions while reverse repos were down 24%, £15.7 billion to £48.9 billion.

Debt securities increased by £27.1 billion, 29%, to £121.0 billion, principally due to increased holdings in Corporate Markets.

Equity shares rose £4.6 billion, 97%, to £9.3 billion with most of the increase, £4.1 billion, 78%, mainly due to increased activity in Corporate Markets. Implementation of IAS 39 added £0.5 billion.

Intangible assets increased by £0.7 billion, 4% to £19.9 billion largely due to exchange rate movements.

Property, plant and equipment were up £1.6 billion, 10% to £18.1 billion, principally as a result of growth in operating lease assets.

Derivatives at fair value were higher by £77.9 billion at £95.7 billion, including £72.1 billion resulting from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, with £71.5 billion arising from the grossing up of previously netted balances. The remainder of the increase, £5.8 billion, 6%, primarily reflected higher trading volumes and movements in interest and exchange rates.

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets decreased by £2.8 billion, 24% to £8.8 billion, mainly due to the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39.

Deposits by banks increased by £10.5 billion, 11% to £110.4 billion, of which £6.1 billion arose from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39. The remaining £4.4 billion was raised to fund business growth mainly higher inter-bank deposits, up £4.3 billion, 7% to £62.5 billion. Repurchase agreements and stock lending (‘’repos’’) were largely flat at £47.9 billion.

Customer accounts were up £59.6 billion, 21% at £342.9 billion with £31.7 billion arising from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, largely reflecting the grossing up of previously netted deposits. Deposits rose by £33.5 billion, 13%, to £294.1 billion with good growth in all divisions. Repos decreased by £5.7 billion, 11% to £48.8 billion.

Debt securities in issue increased by £26.4 billion, 41%, to £90.4 billion, with £2.2 billion resulting from the implementation of IAS 39, and £24.2 billion raised primarily to meet the Group's funding requirements.

The increase in settlement balances and short positions, up £11.0 billion, 33%, largely reflected growth in customer activity.

Derivatives at fair value were up £77.6 billion to £96.4 billion, including £72.4 billion resulting from the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39, with £71.5 billion arising from the grossing up of previously netted balances. The remainder of the increase, £5.2 billion, 6% primarily reflected higher trading volumes and movements in interest and exchange rates.

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities decreased by £3.4 billion, 19% to £14.2 billion, largely due to the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39.

Subordinated liabilities were up £7.9 billion, 39% to £28.3 billion, including £7.2 billion due to the reclassification as debt of the majority of the Group’s existing preference share capital and non-equity minority interests following the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39. The balance, £0.7 billion, reflected the issue of £1.2 billion dated loan capital and exchange rate movements of £1.3 billion which were partially offset by the redemption of £1.6 billion non-cumulative preference shares and dated loan capital.

Minority interests decreased £1.4 billion, 40% to £2.1 billion, due to the reclassification of £2.6 billion as debt following the implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39. This more than offset the increase in minority interests of £1.2 billion to £2.1 billion principally due to the co-investors interest in the Group’s subsidiary that invested in Bank of China and the issuance of preferred securities.

Shareholders’ equity increased by £1.5 billion, 5%, to £35.4 billion. The implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 reduced shareholders’ equity by £3.9 billion, largely as a result of the reclassification as debt of the majority of the Group’s preference share capital, £3.3 billion. The profit for the period of £5.5 billion, issue of £1.6 billion non-cumulative equity preference shares and £0.3 billion of ordinary shares in respect of scrip dividends and the exercise of share options, were partly offset by the payment of the 2004 final ordinary dividend, £1.3 billion, and the 2005 interim ordinary dividend, £0.6 billion, preference dividends of £0.1 billion and £0.6 billion actuarial losses, net of tax, recognised in post-retirement benefit schemes.

The fair value of the assets of the Group’s post-retirement benefit schemes was £17.4 billion (2004 - £14.8 billion) and the present value of defined benefit obligations was £21.1 billion (2004 - £17.7 billion). The increase in net pension liability (after tax) to £2.7 billion from £2.1 billion is principally due to movements in interest rates. The mortality assumptions used in the valuation of liabilities were updated at the end of 2004 and have not been changed.

35






Operating and financial review continued

Cash flow

  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Net cash flows from operating activities 8,950     2,493  
Net cash flows from investing activities (2,612 )   (9,398 )
Net cash flows from financing activities (703 )   7,119  
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents (3,107 )   1,686  






Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 2,528     1,900  





2005

The major factors contributing to the net cash inflow of £8,950 million from operating activities in 2005 were the profit before tax of £7,936 million, increases in deposits and debt securities in issue of £56,571 million, and increases in short positions and settlement balances of £10,326 million, partially offset by increases in securities of £28,842 million and in loans and advances of £36,778 million.

Net purchases of fixed assets, including operating lease assets and computer and other equipment, of £2,592 million were the main contributor to the net cash outflow from investing activities of £2,612 million.

The issue of £1,649 million preference shares and £1,234 million subordinated debt were more than offset by dividend payments of £2,007 million and the repayment of £1,553 million of subordinated liabilities, resulting in a net cash outflow from financing activities of £703 million.

2004

The major factors contributing to the net cash inflow of £2,493 million from operating activities in 2004 were the profit before tax of £7,284 million, increases in deposits and debt securities in issue of £72,146 million, and in short positions and settlement balances of £8,796 million, partially offset by increases in securities of £11,883 million and in loans and advances of £72,955 million.

Net purchases of fixed assets, including operating lease assets and computer and other equipment, of £2,662 million and net investment in business interests and intangible assets of £7,968 million led to the net cash outflow from investing activities of £9,398 million.

The issue of £1,358 million preference shares and £2,845 million ordinary shares, and £4,624 million subordinated liabilities, partly offset by the payment of £1,635 million of dividends, were the main contributors to the net cash inflow from financing activities of £7,119 million.

36






IFRS compared with US GAAP

The Group’s financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRS, which differ in certain material respects from US GAAP as described on pages 173 to 178.

The net income available for ordinary shareholders under US GAAP was £4,475 million, £917 million lower than profit attributable to ordinary shareholders under IFRS of £5,392 million. The principal reasons for the decrease are:

  • a reduction of £556 million relating to financial instruments principally foreign exchange gains on available-for-sale securities recognised in net income under IFRS but included directly in equity under US GAAP together with the adjustment for financial assets and liabilities designated as at fair value through profit or loss; US GAAP does not permit such designation.

  • higher pension costs under US GAAP compared with IFRS reflecting the deferral of actuarial gains and losses over the remaining service lives of current employees under US GAAP; such gains and losses are recognised in full in equity under IFRS.

US GAAP shareholders’ equity at £40,229 million is £4,794 million higher than IFRS equity of £35,435 million principally due to the inclusion of certain preference shares, classified as debt under IFRS, equity under US GAAP, the reinstatement of goodwill deducted from equity under previous GAAP, and the effect of deferring and amortising loan origination costs.

Capital resources

It is the Group’s policy to maintain a strong capital base, to expand it as appropriate and to utilise it efficiently throughout its activities to optimise the return to shareholders while maintaining a prudent relationship between the capital base and the underlying risks of the business. In carrying out this policy, the Group has regard to the supervisory requirements of the FSA. The FSA uses Risk Asset Ratio (“RAR”) as a measure of capital adequacy in the UK banking sector, comparing a bank’s capital resources with its weighted risk assets (the assets and off-balance sheet exposures are ‘weighted’ to reflect the inherent credit and other risks); by international agreement, the RAR should be not less than 8% with a tier 1 component of not less than 4%. At 31 December 2005, the Group’s total RAR was 11.7% and the tier 1 RAR was 7.6%.

Upon the adoption of IFRS by listed banks in the UK on 1 January 2005, the Financial Services Authority ("FSA") changed its regulatory requirements such that the measurement of capital adequacy was based on IFRS subject to a number of prudential filters. The data as at 31 December 2005 set out below has been presented in compliance with these revised FSA requirements.

                        2005 - IFRS
£m
 














Capital base                          
Tier 1 capital                       28,218  
Tier 2 capital                       22,437  



                        50,655  
Less: investments in insurance subsidiaries, associated                          
       undertakings and other supervisory deductions                       (7,282 )



Total capital                       43,373  
                     

Weighted risk assets                          
Banking book:                          
       On-balance sheet                       303,300  
       Off-balance sheet                       51,500  
Trading book                       16,200  



                        371,000  
                     

                           
Risk asset ratios                       %  



Tier 1                       7.6  
Total                       11.7  














                           
The data set forth below are in accordance with the FSA regulations in force at the time and are based on UK GAAP.
                           
      2004 - UK GAAP
£m
    2003 - UK GAAP
£m
    2002 - UK GAAP
£m
    2001 - UK GAAP
£m
 














Capital base                          
Tier 1 capital     22,694     19,399     17,155     15,052  
Tier 2 capital     20,229     16,439     13,271     11,734  
Tier 3 capital     ––             172  














      42,923     35,838     30,426     26,958  
Less: investments in insurance subsidiaries, associated                          
       undertakings and other supervisory deductions     (5,165 )   (4,618 )   (3,146 )   (2,698 )














Total capital     37,758     31,220     27,280     24,260  
 
Weighted risk assets                          
Banking book:                          
       On-balance sheet     261,800     214,400     193,800     176,000  
       Off-balance sheet     44,900     36,400     28,700     22,000  
Trading book     17,100     12,900     11,500     12,500  














      323,800     263,700     234,000     210,500  
 
                           
Risk asset ratios     %     %     %     %  














Tier 1     7.0     7.4     7.3     7.1  
Total     11.7     11.8     11.7     11.5  














 

37






Operating and financial review continued

Risk management

Governance framework

The Board sets the overall risk appetite and philosophy for the Group. Various Board and executive sub-committees support these goals, as follows:

  • Group Audit Committee is a non-executive committee that supports the Board in carrying out its responsibilities for financial reporting including accounting policies and in respect of internal control and risk assessment. The Group Audit Committee monitors the ongoing process of the identification, evaluation and management of all significant risks throughout the Group. The Committee is supported by Group Internal Audit which provides an independent assessment of the design, adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls.

  • Advances Committee is a board committee that deals with all transactions that exceed the Group Credit Committee’s delegated authority.

In addition to the responsibilities at Board level, operational authority and oversight is delegated to the Group Executive Management Committee (“GEMC”), which is responsible for implementing a risk management framework consistent with the Board’s risk appetite. The GEMC, in turn, is supported by the following committees:

  • Group Risk Committee (“GRC”) is an executive risk governance committee which recommends and approves limits, processes and policies in respect of the effective management of all material non-balance sheet risks across the Group.

  • Group Credit Committee (“GCC”) is a credit approval committee which deals with all transactions that exceed the delegated authority of divisional credit committees.

  • Group Asset and Liability Management Committee (“GALCO”), is an executive committee which is responsible for reviewing the balance sheet, funding, liquidity, structural foreign exchange, intra-group limits, capital adequacy and capital raising across the Group as well as interest rate risk in the banking book. In addition, GALCO monitors and reviews external, economic and environmental changes affecting such risks.

These Committees are supported by two dedicated group level functions, Group Risk Management (“GRM”), which has responsibility for credit, market, regulatory and enterprise risk and Group Treasury which is responsible for the management of the Group’s balance sheet, capital raising, intra group credit exposure, liquidity and hedging policies. Both functions report to GEMC and the Group Board through the Group Finance Director and play an active role in assessing and monitoring the effectiveness of the divisional risk management functions. Heads of Group Risk Mangement and Internal Audit have direct access to the Group Chief Executive and the Chairman of the Group Audit Committee.

38






Risk management

The principal risks that the Group manages are as follows:

  • Credit risk: is the risk arising from the possibility that the Group will incur losses from the failure of customers to meet their obligations.

  • Liquidity risk: is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its obligations as they fall due.

  • Market risk: the Group is exposed to market risk because of positions held in its trading portfolios and its non-trading businesses.

  • Insurance risk: the Group is exposed to insurance risk, either directly through its businesses or through using insurance as a tool to mitigate other risk exposures.

  • Enterprise risk: the Group separately defines operational and external risk. Operational risk is defined as the risk arising from the Group’s people, processes, systems and assets. External risk comprises business, political and environmental risk.

  • Regulatory risk: is the risk arising from failing to meet the requirements and expectations of our many regulators, or from a failure to address or implement any change in these requirements or expectations.

Principal risk types

Regulatory risk    
Credit risk Liquidity risk Market risk Insurance risk
Enterprise risk    

Risk appetite

Risk management across the Group is based on the risk appetite and philosophy set by the Board and the associated risk committees. The Board establishes the parameters for risk appetite for the Group through:

  • Setting strategic direction.
  • Contributing to, and ultimately approving annual plans for each division.
  • Regularly reviewing and monitoring the Group’s performance in relation to risk through monthly Board Reports.

The Board delegates the articulation of risk appetite to GEMC and ensures that this is in line with the strategy and the desired risk reward trade off for the Group. Risk appetite is an expression of the maximum level of residual risk that the Group is prepared to accept in order to deliver its business objectives and is assessed against regular (often daily) controls and stress testing to ensure that the limits are not compromised in abnormal circumstances.

Risk appetite is usually defined in both quantitative and qualitative terms. Whilst different techniques are used to ensure that the Group’s risk appetite is achieved, generically they can be classified as follows:

  • Quantitative: encompassing stress testing, risk concentration, value at risk and credit related metrics, including the probability, loss and exposure at default.

  • Qualitative: focuses on ensuring that the Group applies the correct principles, policies and procedures.

The annual business planning and performance management process and associated activities ensure the expression of risk appetite remains appropriate. GRC and GALCO support this work.

Qualitative and quantitative elements of risk management

39




Operating and financial review continued

Risk organisation

Divisional CEOs are specifically responsible for the management of risk within their divisions. As such, they are responsible for ensuring that they have appropriate risk management frameworks that are adequate in design, effective in operation and meet minimum Group standards.

Divisional CEOs are supported by divisional Chief Risk Officers (CROs) and Chief Financial Officers (CFOs). An important element that underpins the Group’s approach to the management of all risk is independence. In the case of CROs, it is enforced by joint reporting lines, both operationally to the divisional CEO and functionally to the Group Chief Risk Officer.

Credit risk

Key principles of credit risk management

The objective of credit risk management is to enable the Group to achieve sustainable and superior risk versus reward performance whilst maintaining credit risk exposure in line with approved risk appetite.

Group Risk Management is responsible for setting standards for maintaining and developing credit risk management throughout the Group. This is achieved via a combination of governance structures, credit risk policies, control processes and credit systems collectively known as the Group’s Credit Risk Management Framework (“CRMF”). The framework is defined in detail in the Group’s ‘Principles for Managing Credit Risk’.

The key principles for credit risk management as defined in the CRMF include:

  • Approval of all credit exposure must be granted prior to any advance or extension of credit.

  • An appropriate credit risk assessment of the customer and related credit facilities must be undertaken prior to approval of credit exposure. This must include a review of, amongst other things, the purpose of the credit and sources of repayment, compliance with affordability tests, repayment history, capacity to repay, sensitivity to economic and market developments and risk-adjusted return.

  • The Board delegates authority to Executive Advances Committee, Group Credit Committee and divisional credit committees.

  • Credit risk authority must be specifically granted in writing to all individuals involved in the granting of credit approval, whether this is exercised personally or collectively as part of a credit committee. In exercising credit authority, the individuals must act independently and with balanced commercial judgement.

  • Where credit authority is exercised personally, the individual must not have any responsibility or accountability for business revenue generation.

  • All credit exposures, once approved, must be effectively monitored and managed and reviewed periodically against approved limits. Lower quality exposures are subject to a greater frequency of analysis and assessment.

  • Customers with emerging credit problems must be identified early and classified accordingly. Remedial actions must be implemented promptly to minimise the potential loss to the Group.

  • Portfolio analysis and reporting must be used to identify and manage credit risk concentrations and credit risk quality migration.

Each Division must establish its own CRMF consistent with the Group CRMF. Divisional credit departments are responsible for maintaining the CRMF and ensuring that asset quality is within specified parameters. Divisional credit departments are independent of business management and have no direct responsibility or accountability for revenue generation. This independence is supported by the divisional head of credit having dual reporting lines to the both the divisional CEO (via the divisional Chief Risk Officer) and to the Head of Group Credit Risk.

GRM undertakes regular assessment of the effectiveness of each divisional CRMF to ensure it complies with Group standards and is appropriate for the business being undertaken. GRC and the GEMC review reports on the Group’s portfolio of credit risks on a monthly basis.

Credit approval process

Different credit approval processes exist for each customer type in order to ensure appropriate skills and resources are employed in credit assessment and approval whilst following the key principles relating to credit approval.

Wholesale risk exposures are aggregated to determine the appropriate level of credit approval required and to facilitate consolidated credit risk management.

40






Credit authority is not extended to relationship managers:

  • Assessments of corporate borrower and transaction risk are undertaken using a range of credit risk models supplemented, where appropriate, by management judgement. Specialist internal credit risk departments independently oversee the credit process and make credit decisions or recommendations to the appropriate credit committee.

  • Financial Markets counterparties are subject to similar modelling techniques but are approved by a dedicated credit function which specialises in traded market product risk.

Consumer lending and personal businesses employ best practice credit scoring techniques to process small scale, large volume credit decisions. Scores from such systems are combined with management judgement to ensure an effective ongoing process of approval, review and enhancement. Credit decisions for loans above specified thresholds are individually assessed.

Credit risk models

Credit risk models are used throughout the Group to support the analytical elements of the credit risk management framework, in particular the quantitative risk assessment part of the credit approval process, ongoing credit monitoring as well as portfolio level analysis and reporting.

Credit risk modelling governance

The Group’s ‘Principles for Managing Credit Risk’ outline the governance structure under which all credit risk models must be developed, reviewed and approved. GRM is responsible for:

  • Establishing high level standards to which all credit risk models across the Group must adhere and thus ensuring a consistency of approach to credit risk modelling across the Group.

  • Approving all credit risk models prior to implementation and reviewing existing models on at least an annual basis.

Divisional credit risk departments own the particular models and are responsible for:

  • Developing credit risk models appropriate for the types of borrower and facilities in their credit portfolios and obtaining approval from GRM for their implementation.

  • Validating the models on at least an annual basis (every two years for credit risk exposure measurements models) and submitting documentation of these validations to GRM with appropriate recommendations on recalibration, where applicable.

  • Obtaining approval from GRM for any new methodology or parameter estimates used in existing credit risk models prior to implementation.

Credit risk models used by the Group can be broadly grouped into four categories.

  • Probability of default (“PD”)/customer credit grade – these models assess the probability that the customer will fail to make full and timely repayment of credit obligations over a one year time horizon. Each customer is assigned an internal credit grade which corresponds to probability of default. There are a number of different credit grading models in use across the Group, each of which considers particular customer characteristics in that portfolio. The credit grading models use a combination of quantitative inputs, such as recent financial performance and customer behaviour, and qualitative inputs, such as company management performance or sector outlook.

Every customer credit grade across all grading scales in the Group can be mapped to a Group level credit grade (see page 42).

  • Exposure at default (“EAD”) – these models estimate the expected level of utilisation of a credit facility at the time of a borrower’s default. The EAD will typically be higher than the current utilisation (e.g. in the case where further drawings are made on a revolving credit facility prior to default) but will not typically exceed the total facility limit. The methodologies used in EAD modelling recognise that customers may make more use of their existing credit facilities in the run up to a default.

  • Loss given default (“LGD”) – these models estimate the economic loss that may be suffered by the Group on a credit facility in the event of default. The LGD of a facility represents the amount of debt which cannot be recovered and is typically expressed as a percentage of the EAD. The Group’s LGD models take into account the type of borrower, facility and any risk mitigation such as the presence of any security or collateral held. The LGD may also be affected by the industry sector of the borrower, the legal jurisdiction in which the borrower operates as well as general economic conditions which may impact the value of any assets held as security.

  • Credit risk exposure measurement – these models calculate the credit risk exposure for products where the exposure is not 100% of the gross nominal amount of the credit obligation. These models are most commonly used for derivative and other traded instruments where the amount of credit risk exposure may be dependent on external variables such as interest rates or foreign exchange rates.
41




Operating and financial review continued

Credit risk assets

Credit risk assets measure the exposure to all products in the Group’s credit portfolios which consist of loans and advances (including overdraft facilities), instalment credit, finance lease receivables, debt securities and other traded instruments across all customer types.

Credit risk assets are typically analysed excluding reverse repurchase agreements due to the short-term nature and low credit risk associated with this product. A breakdown of credit risk assets by division is shown below.

Credit risk assets 2005
£bn
  2004
£bn




   Corporate Markets 273.0   235.2
   Retail Banking 78.0   72.2
   Retail Direct 26.6   21.7
   Wealth Management 8.9   10.7
   Citizens 74.5   59.4
   RBS Insurance 6.7   6.1
   Ulster Bank 30.5   22.3




  498.2   427.6




Excluding reverse repurchase agreements, credit risk assets at 31 December 2005 were £498.2 billion (2004 – £427.6 billion), an increase of £70.6 billion (17%) during the year.

An analysis of reverse repurchase agreements is shown below.

Reverse repurchase agreements 31 December
2005
£bn
  1 January
2005

£bn




   Banks 41.8   34.5
   Customers 48.9   64.6




  90.7   99.1



Reverse repurchase agreements as at 31 December 2005 were £90.7 billion (1 January 2005 – £99.1 billion), a decrease of £8.4 billion (8%) during the year.

Credit risk asset quality

Internal reporting and oversight of risk assets is principally differentiated by credit ratings. Internal ratings are used to assess the credit quality of borrowers. Customers are assigned credit ratings, based on various credit grading models that reflect the probability of default. All credit ratings across the Group map to a Group level asset quality scale.

Expressed as an annual probability of default, the upper and lower boundaries and the midpoint for each of these Group level asset quality grades are as follows:

    Annual probability of default         
Asset quality grade   Minimum %   Midpoint %   Maximum %   S&P equivalent









AQ1   0.02   0.10   0.20   AAA to BBB-
AQ2   0.21   0.40   0.60   BB+ to BB
AQ3   0.61   1.05   1.50   BB- to B+
AQ4   1.51   3.25   5.00   B+ to B
AQ5   5.01   15.00     B and below










Distribution of credit risk assets by asset quality

Overall credit asset quality remained stable during 2005. As at 31 December 2005, exposure to investment grade counterparties (AQ1) accounted for 47% (2004 – 49%) of credit risk assets and 98% (2004 – 97%) of exposures were to counterparties rated AQ4 or higher. The exposure to the lowest asset quality (AQ5) reduced from 2.6% at 31 December 2004 to 2.2% at 31 December 2005.

Note: Graph data are shown net of provisions and reverse repurchase agreements.

42






Distribution of credit risk assets by industry sector

Industry analysis plays an important part in assessing potential concentration risk from within the loan portfolio. Particular attention is given to industry sectors where the Group believes there is a high degree of risk or potential for volatility in the future.

The Group also uses scenario analysis and stress testing in order to monitor the risk to clusters of correlated industry sectors.

Note: Graph data are shown net of provisions and reverse repurchase agreements.


As at 31 December 2005, 30% of credit risk assets (2004 – 30%) relate to individuals (personal and retail customers) and include mortgage lending and other smaller loans that are intrinsically well-diversified. Corporate industry sectors, including public sector and quasi government, account for 48% (2004 – 46%) of credit risk assets, with banks and other financial institutions representing the remaining 22% (2004 – 24%) of credit risk assets.

43






Operating and financial review continued

Distribution of credit risk assets by geography

The Group is currently active in 27 countries, with its principal focus on the UK, North America and Europe.

During 2005 there was further geographic diversification of credit risk assets away from the UK and into the rest of Europe and North America. As at 31 December 2005, 49.3% of credit risk assets were within the UK. North America and Europe account for 45.5% of credit risk assets with the remaining 5.2% in the rest of the world.

Distribution of credit risk assets by product and customer type

The Group also monitors the breakdown of the credit portfolio by customer type and product type. The Group’s largest exposure by credit risk assets is corporate customer lending products which represent 31% of credit risk assets as at 31 December 2005 (2004 – 30%). As illustrated in the industry analysis this exposure is well diversified across industry sectors.

44






Loan impairment

The Group classifies impaired assets as either Risk Elements in Lending (“REIL”) or Potential Problem Loans (“PPL”). REIL represents non-accrual loans, loans that are accruing but are past due 90 days and restructured loans. PPL represent impaired assets which are not included in REIL but where known information about possible credit problems causes management to have serious doubts about the future ability of the borrower to comply with loan repayment terms.

Both REIL and PPL are reported gross of the value of any security held, which could reduce the eventual loss should it occur, and gross of any provision marked. Therefore impaired assets which are highly collateralised, such as mortgages, will have a low coverage ratio of provisions held against reported impaired balance.

The adoption of IAS 39 under IFRS at the start of 2005 resulted in changes to the methodology used to identify impaired assets and therefore the way that REIL is calculated. Comparative financial information is given in the following tables for both 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2004. Commentary is based on comparison with information at 1 January 2005, which reflects the impact of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4.

The table below sets out the Group’s loans that are classified as REIL and PPL:

REIL and PPL 31 December
2005
£m
  1 January
2005
£m
  31 December
2004
£m






Non-accrual loans(1) 5,926   5,836   4,733
Accrual loans past due 90 days(2) 9   52   713
Troubled debt restructurings(3) 2     24






Total REIL 5,937   5,888   5,470
           
PPL(4) 19   11   280






Total REIL and PPL 5,956   5,899   5,750





REIL and PPL as % of lending to customers loans and advances – gross(5) 1.60%   1.84%   1.92%






* following the implementation of IAS 39, the sub-categories of REIL and PPL are calculated as per notes 1 to 4 below.

(1) All loans against which an impairment provision is held are reported in the non-accrual category.
(2) Loans where an impairment event has taken place but no impairment recognised. This category is used for over-collateralised non-revolving credit facilities.
(3) Troubled debt restructurings represent loans that have been restructured following the granting of a concession by the Group to the borrower.
(4) Loans for which an impairment event has occurred but no impairment provision is necessary. This category is used for over-collateralised advances and revolving credit facilities where identification as 90 days overdue is not feasible.
(5) Gross of provisions and excluding reverse repurchase agreements.

REIL as at 31 December 2005 was £5,937 million (1 January 2005 – £5,888 million), an increase of £49 million (1%) during the year. As a % of customer lending, REIL and PPL in aggregate show an improving trend, amounting to 1.60% of customer loans and advances at 31 December 2005 (1 January 2005 – 1.84%).

REIL by division

The table below shows REIL by division.

REIL 31 December
2005
£m
  1 January
2005
£m
  31 December
2004
£m






   Corporate Markets 1,465   2,098   1,892
   Retail Banking 2,988   2,526   2,399
   Retail Direct 889   671   601
   Wealth Management 58   65   99
   Ulster Bank 342   389   341
   Citizens 195   136   135
   RBS Insurance   3   3






Total REIL 5,937   5,888   5,470

During 2005 REIL in Corporate Markets reduced by £633 million reflecting continued favourable conditions in the corporate environment in UK, Europe and the US. This was offset by a combined increase in REIL in Retail Banking and Retail Direct of £680 million (21%) due to the weakening of the consumer environment in the UK.

45




Operating and financial review continued

Impairment loss provision methodology

Provisions for impairment losses are assessed under three categories as described below:

Individually assessed provisions are the provisions required for individually significant impaired assets which are assessed on a case by case basis, taking into account the financial condition of the counterparty and any guarantor. This incorporates an estimate of the discounted value of any recoveries and realisation of security or collateral. The asset continues to be assessed on an individual basis until it is repaid in full, transferred to the performing portfolio or written-off.

Collectively assessed provisions are provisions on impaired credits below an agreed threshold which are assessed on a portfolio basis, to reflect the homogeneous nature of the assets, such as credit cards or personal loans. The provision is determined from a quantitative review of the relevant portfolio, taking account of the level of arrears, security and average loss experience over the recovery period.

Latent loss provisions are provisions held against the estimated impairment in the performing portfolio which have yet to be identified as at the balance sheet date. To assess the latent loss within the portfolios, the Group has developed methodologies to estimate the time that an asset can remain impaired within a performing portfolio before it is identified and reported as such.

Provision analysis

The Group’s consumer portfolios, which consist of small value, high volume credits, have highly efficient largely automated processes for identifying problem credits and very short timescales, typically three months, before resolution or adoption of various recovery methods.

Corporate portfolios consist of higher value, lower volume credits, which tend to be structured to meet individual customer requirements. Provisions are assessed on a case by case basis by experienced specialists, as well as professional valuations of collateral and the expert judgement of accountants. The Group operates a clear provisions governance framework which sets thresholds whereby suitable oversight and challenge is undertaken. These opinions and levels of provision are overseen by the division’s Provision Committee chaired by its Chief Executive, with representation from Group Risk Management. In addition, significant cases are presented to, and challenged by, the Group Problem Exposure Review Forum chaired by the Group Chief Executive or the Group Finance Director.

Early and active management of problem exposures ensures that credit losses are minimised. Specialised units are used for different customer types to ensure that the appropriate risk mitigation is taken in a timely manner.

Portfolio provisions are reassessed regularly as part of the Group’s ongoing monitoring process.

The adoption of IAS 39 under IFRS at the start of 2005 resulted in changes to the methodology used to identify impaired assets and to calculate required provisions.

Loan impairment charge 2005
£m
  2004
£m




Latent loss provisions charge 14    
Collectively assessed provisions charge 1,399    
Individually assessed provisions charge 290    
Specific provision charge     1,386
General provision charge     16




Total charge to income statement 1,703   1,402


Charge as a % of customer loans and advances – gross(1) 0.46%   0.47%




  Notes:
(1) Gross of provisions and excluding reverse repurchase agreements.

Provisions for loan impairment charged to the income statement in 2005 were £1,703 million, up £301 million (21%) from 2004. As a percentage of customer lending, the impairment charge improved slightly from 0.47% to 0.46%.

46






Summary of loan impairment provisions

A summary of the total customer provisions balance is shown in the table below.

Loan impairment provisions(1) 31 December
2005
£m
  1 January
2005
£m
  31 December
2004
£m






Latent loss provisions 543   570    
Collectively assessed provisions 2,587   2,484    
Individually assessed provisions 754   1,086    
Specific provisions         3,607
General provision         561






Total provisions 3,884   4,140   4,168





Total provision as a % of customer loans and advances – gross(2) 1.0%   1.3%   1.4%






  Notes:
(1) Excludes provisions against loans and advances to banks of £3 million (1 January 2005 – £5 million; 31 December 2004 – £6 million).
(2) Gross of provisions and excluding reverse repurchase agreements.

As at 31 December 2005 total customer provisions were £3,884 million, down £256 million (6%) from 1 January 2005. The movement in provisions balance is shown at the bottom of the page.

Provisions coverage

The Group’s provision coverage ratios are shown in the table below.

  31 December
2005
  1 January
2005
  31 December
2004






Total provision expressed as a:          
% of REIL 65%   70%   76%
% of REIL and PPL 65%   70%   72%







The coverage ratio of closing provisions to REIL and PPL decreased from 70% to 65% during 2005. The lower coverage ratio reflects a change of mix in the portfolios to more secured assets (e.g. residential mortgages) which, due to the level of collateral held, require a much lower level of provision.

Movement in loan impairment provisions balance

The movement in provisions balance during 2005 is shown in the table below.

  £m  



Balance as at 1 January 2005 4,145  
Currency and other adjustments 51  
Amounts written-off (2,040 )
Recoveries of amounts previously written-off 172  
Charge to income statement 1,703  
Discount unwind(1) (144 )



Balance as at 31 December 2005(2) 3,887  


  Notes:
(1) The impact of discounting inherent within the provisions balance is unwound as the time to receiving the expected recovery cash flows draws nearer.
(2) Includes provisions against loans and advances to banks of £3 million (1 January 2005 – £5 million).

An impairment provision calculated using the effective interest rate method leaves a discounted asset; the discount unwinds at a constant effective rate until the outstanding asset is completely realised.

47






Operating and financial review continued

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk management within the Group focuses on both overall balance sheet structure and the day-to-day control, within prudent limits, of risk arising from the mismatch of maturities across the balance sheet and from undrawn commitments and other contingent obligations.

The management of liquidity risk within the Group is undertaken within limits and other policy parameters set by GALCO, which reviews monthly, and receives on an exception basis, reports detailing compliance with those policy parameters. A weekly report is also provided to the Group’s executive management. Compliance is monitored and coordinated daily under the stewardship of the Group Treasury function, both in respect of internal policy and the regulatory requirements of the Financial Services Authority.

Detailed liquidity position reports are compiled each day by Group Treasury and reviewed daily and weekly with Financial Markets, who manage day-to-day and intra-day market execution within the policy parameters set.

In addition to their consolidation within the Group’s daily liquidity management process, it is also the responsibility of all Group subsidiaries and branches outside the UK to ensure compliance with any separate local regulatory liquidity requirements where applicable, subject to Group Treasury oversight.

Diversification of funding sources

The structure of the Group’s balance sheet is managed to maintain substantial diversification, to minimise concentration across its various deposit sources, and to contain the level of reliance on total and net short-term wholesale sources of funds within prudent levels. As part of the Group’s planning process, the forecast structure of the balance sheet is regularly reviewed over the plan horizon and funding strategies and options are developed by Group Treasury and implemented after review and approval by GALCO.

The level of large deposits taken from banks, corporate customers, non-bank financial institutions and other customers, and significant cash outflows therefrom, are also reviewed regularly to monitor concentration and identify any adverse trends. During 2005 the composition of the Group’s funding sources remained well diversified by counterparty, instrument, market and maturity.

Sources of funding 2005
£m
  %   2004
£m
  %








Customer accounts (excluding repos)              
       Repayable on demand 172,853   27   169,016   32
       Time deposits 121,260   19   72,165   14








Total customer accounts (excluding repos) 294,113   46   241,181   46
Debt securities over 1 year remaining maturity 22,293   3   9,931   2
Subordinated liabilities 28,274   4   20,366   4
Shareholders’ equity 35,435   6   33,905   6








  380,115   59   305,383   58
Debt securities up to 1 year remaining maturity 68,127   11   54,068   10
Repo agreements with customers 48,754   7   42,134   8
Deposits by banks (excluding repos) 62,502   10   56,541   11
Repo agreements with banks 47,905   7   43,342   8
Short positions 37,427   6   28,923   5








Total 644,830   100   530,391   100








Customer accounts (excluding repos), term debt securities of over 1 year remaining maturity, subordinated liabilities and capital continue to represent the core of the Group’s funding. These core funds in total increased by £74,732 million (24%) over the course of 2005 to represent 59% of total funding excluding other liabilities at 31 December 2005.

Customer accounts continue to provide a substantial proportion of the Group’s funding and comprise a well diversified and stable source of funds from a wide range of retail, corporate and non-bank institutional customers. Excluding repo agreements, customer accounts grew by £52,932 million (22%), to maintain 46% of total funding excluding other liabilities at 31 December 2005.

Term debt securities with an outstanding term of over 1 year increased £12,362 million (124%) to represent 3% of the Group’s funding at 31 December 2005, reflecting the activity of the Group in raising term funds through its Euro and US Medium Term Note and securitisation programmes.

Capital (shareholders’ equity and subordinated debt) increased by £9,438 million (17%) and provides around 10% of total funding excluding other liabilities.

48






Short term wholesale deposits are taken from a wide range of counterparties, with the largest single depositor continuing to represent less than 1% of the Group’s total funding. The level of funding from short term unsecured debt issuance and bank deposits, excluding repos and short positions, has increased by £20,020 million (18%) to represent 20% of total funding excluding other liabilities at 31 December 2005, reflecting the higher rate of growth in customer loans and advances (see ‘net customer activity’ below).

Short positions and repos with corporate, institutional customers and banks are undertaken primarily by RBS Greenwich Capital in the US and by Financial Markets. Repo and short positions increased by £19,687 million (17%) to represent 21% of total funding excluding other liabilities at 31 December 2005.

The Group remains well placed to access various wholesale funding sources from a wide range of counterparties and markets. The changing mix evident between customer repo, deposits by banks, debt securities in issue, and shorts primarily reflects comparative pricing, maturity considerations and investor/counterparty demand rather than a material perceived trend.

Net customer activity

Net customer lending, excluding repos, rose by £20,056 million as the growth in loans and advances to customers continued to exceed the growth in customer accounts, thus increasing the degree of reliance on wholesale market funding to support loan growth.

Net customer activity 2005
£m
  2004
£m




Loans and advances to customers (gross, excluding reverse repos) 372,223   299,235
Customer accounts (excluding repos) 294,113   241,181




Customer lending less customer accounts 78,110   58,054



Loans and advances to customers as a % of customer accounts (excluding repos) 126.6%   124.1%





In prevailing economic conditions and with interest rates at relatively low historical levels in the UK, US and Europe, it is anticipated that the growth in demand for further borrowing by customers is likely, in the medium term, to continue to exceed that for customer deposits received, thus increasing net customer lending further and increasing gradually over time the Group’s dependence on the wholesale market for funding.

The Group evaluates on a regular basis a range of balance sheet management and term funding strategies to address the consequent potential impact on its structural liquidity risk position and maintain that within its normal policy parameters.

Management of term structure

The degree of maturity mismatch within the overall long-term structure of the Group’s assets and liabilities is also managed within internal policy limits, to ensure that term asset commitments may be funded on an economic basis over their life. In managing its overall term structure, the Group analyses and takes into account the effect of retail and corporate customer behaviour on actual asset and liability maturities where they differ materially from the underlying contractual maturities.

Stress testing

The maintenance of high quality credit ratings is recognised as an important component in the management of the Group’s liquidity risk. Credit ratings affect the Group’s ability to raise, and the cost of raising, funds from the wholesale market and the need to provide collateral in respect of, for example, changes in the mark-to-market value of derivative transactions.

Given its strong credit ratings, the impact of a single notch downgrade would, if it occurred, be expected to have a relatively small impact on the Group’s economic access to liquidity. More severe downgrades would have a progressively greater impact but have an increasingly lower probability of occurrence.

As part of its stress testing of its access to sufficient liquidity, the Group regularly evaluates the potential impact of a range of levels of downgrade in its credit ratings and carries out stress tests of other relevant scenarios and sensitivity analyses.

Contingency funding plans are maintained to anticipate and respond to any approaching or actual material deterioration in market conditions or in the Group’s credit ratings, and the Group remains confident of its ability to manage its liquidity requirements effectively in all such circumstances.

Daily risk management

The primary focus of the Group’s day to day risk management activity is to ensure access to sufficient liquidity to meet its cashflow obligations within key time horizons out to one month ahead. The short-term maturity structure of the Group’s liabilities and assets is managed on a daily basis to ensure that all material cashflow obligations, and potential cashflows arising from undrawn commitments and other contingent obligations, can be met as they arise from day to day, either from cash inflows, from maturing assets, new borrowing or the sale or repurchase of various debt securities held (after allowing for appropriate haircuts).

49






Operating and financial review continued

Short-term liquidity risk is managed on a consolidated basis for the whole Group excluding the activities of Citizens and insurance businesses, which are subject to regulatory regimes that necessitate local management of liquidity.

Internal liquidity mismatch limits are set for all other subsidiaries and non-UK branches which have material local treasury activities in external markets, to ensure those activities do not compromise daily maintenance of the Group’s overall liquidity risk position within the Group’s policy parameters.

Net short-term wholesale market activity 2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Debt securities, treasury bills and other eligible bills 126,503     100,018  
Reverse repo agreements with banks and customers 90,691     82,159  
Less: repos with banks and customers (96,659 )   (85,476 )
Short positions (37,427 )   (28,923 )
Insurance Companies’ debt securities held (5,724 )   (5,029 )
Debt securities charged as security for liabilities (9,578 )   (4,852 )






Net marketable assets 67,806     57,897  






By remaining maturity up to 1 month:          
Deposits by banks (excluding repos) 35,153     34,041  
Less: loans and advances to banks (gross, excluding reverse repos) (16,381 )   (17,067 )
Debt securities in issue 20,577     15,505  






Net wholesale liabilities due within 1 month 39,349     32,479  






           
Net surplus of marketable assets over wholesale liabilities due within 1 month 28,457     25,418  






The Group’s net surplus of marketable assets over net short-term wholesale liabilities due within one month increased by £3,039 million to £28,457 million at 31 December 2005. Overall access to liquidity to meet all foreseen needs remains comfortably within the Group’s policy parameters.

Sterling liquidity

Over 42% of the Group’s total assets are denominated in sterling. For its sterling activity the FSA requires the Group on a consolidated basis to maintain daily a minimum ratio of 100% between:

1.

a stock of qualifying high quality liquid assets (primarily UK and EU government securities, treasury bills, and cash held in branches) and
   
2. the sum of:
   
 
  • sterling wholesale net outflows contractually due within five working days (offset up to a limit of 50%, by 85% of sterling certificates of deposit held which mature beyond five working days); and
  • 5% of retail deposits with a residual contractual maturity of five working days or less.

The Group exceeded the minimum ratio requirement throughout 2005.

The FSA also set an absolute minimum level for the stock of qualifying liquid assets that the Group is required to maintain each day. The Group has exceeded that minimum stock requirement at all times during 2005.

The Group’s operational processes are actively managed to ensure that both the minimum sterling liquidity ratio and the minimum stock requirement are achieved or exceeded at all times.

Liquidity in non-sterling currencies

For non-sterling currencies, no specific regulatory liquidity requirement is currently set for the Group by the FSA. However, the importance of managing prudently the liquidity risk in its non-sterling activities is recognised and the Group manages its non-sterling liquidity risk daily within net mismatch limits set for the 0-8 calendar day and 0-1 month periods as a percentage of the Group’s total deposit and debt liabilities.

In measuring its non-sterling liquidity risk, due account is taken of the marketability within a short period of the wide range of debt securities held. Appropriate adjustments are applied in each case, dependent on various parameters, to determine the Group’s ability to realise cash at short notice via the sale or repo of such marketable assets if required to meet unexpected outflows.

The level of contingent risk from the potential drawing of undrawn or partially drawn commitments, back-up lines, standby lines and other similar facilities is also actively monitored and reflected in the measures of the Group’s non-sterling liquidity risk. Particular attention is given to the US$ commercial paper market and the propensity of the Group’s corporate counterparties who are active in raising funds from that market to switch to utilising facilities offered by the Group in the event of either counterparty specific difficulties or a significant widening of interest spreads generally in the commercial paper market.

50






The Group also provides liquidity back-up facilities to both its own conduits and certain other conduits which take funding from the US$ commercial paper market. Limits sanctioned for such facilities totalled less than £11 billion at 31 December 2005. The short-term contingent liquidity risk in providing such back-up facilities is also mitigated by the spread of maturity dates of the commercial paper taken by the conduits.

The Group has operated within its non-sterling liquidity policy mismatch limits at all times during 2005 and operational processes are actively managed to ensure that is the case going forward.

Developments in liquidity risk management regulation

Following the Basel Committee’s publication of Sound Practices for Managing Liquidity in Banking Organisations in February 2000, a number of regulatory bodies internationally began reviewing their regulatory liquidity frameworks.

In the UK, the FSA published a discussion document – DP24 –in October 2003 setting out draft proposals for a new quantitative framework to operate in the UK. Comments made to the FSA, by the Group and other banks collectively, in response to these proposals, made clear the desirability of an internationally coordinated approach to the regulation of liquidity. An international forum of regulators, chaired jointly by the FSA and the US Federal Reserve Bank, was also established in 2004 to review regulation across the OECD. Their report is awaited. In 2005, the European Commission has also begun to consider the subject.

Following earlier consultation, the FSA also introduced in January 2005, new requirements for liquidity management systems and controls, particularly in respect of stress testing, contingency funding plans and related documentation. The Group has complied with these requirements and will continue to do so going forward.

The Group has been, and continues to be, actively involved in working with the various regulatory bodies to assist the development of an appropriate future regulatory liquidity regime which takes into account local national considerations but also gives due recognition to the integrated cross-border approach to the management of liquidity risk within most international banking groups.

Taking account of the indicative future regulatory requirements published to date, the Group continues to develop its liquidity risk reporting, management and stress testing capabilities.

Market risk

The Group is exposed to market risk because of positions held in its trading portfolios and its non-trading business including the Group’s treasury operations. The Group manages the market risk in its trading and treasury portfolios through its market risk management framework, which is based on value-at-risk (“VaR”) limits, together with, but not limited to, stress testing, scenario analysis, and position and sensitivity limits. Stress testing measures the impact of abnormal changes in market rates and prices on the fair value of the Group’s trading portfolios. GEMC approves the high-level VaR and stress limits for the Group. The Group Market Risk function, independent from the Group’s trading businesses, is responsible for setting and monitoring the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s market risk management processes.

Value-at-risk

VaR is a technique that produces estimates of the potential negative change in the market value of a portfolio over a specified time horizon at given confidence levels. For internal risk management purposes, the Group’s VaR assumes a time horizon of one day and a confidence level of 95%. The Group uses historical simulation models in computing VaR. This approach, in common with many other VaR models, assumes that risk factor changes observed in the past are a good estimate of those likely to occur in the future and is, therefore, limited by the relevance of the historical data used. The Group’s method, however, does not make any assumption about the nature or type of underlying loss distribution. The Group typically uses the previous two years of market data. The Group’s VaR should be interpreted in light of the limitations of the methodology used. These limitations include:

  • Historical data may not provide the best estimate of the joint distribution of risk factor changes in the future and may fail to capture the risk of possible extreme adverse market movements which have not occurred in the historical window used in the calculations.

  • VaR using a one-day time horizon does not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be liquidated or hedged within one day.

  • VaR using a 95% confidence level does not reflect the extent of potential losses beyond that percentile.

The Group largely computes the VaR of trading portfolios at the close of business and positions may change substantially during the course of the trading day. Controls are in place to limit the Group’s intra-day exposure; such as the calculation of the VaR for selected portfolios. These limitations and the nature of the VaR measure mean that the Group cannot guarantee that losses will not exceed the VaR amounts indicated.

Trading

The principal focus of the Group’s trading activities is client facilitation – providing products to the Group’s client base at competitive prices. The Group also undertakes: market making – quoting firm bid (buy) and offer (sell) prices with the intention of profiting from the spread between the quotes; arbitrage –entering into offsetting positions in different but closely related markets in order to profit from market imperfections; and proprietary activity – taking positions in financial instruments as principal in order to take advantage of anticipated market conditions. The main risk factors are interest rates, credit spreads and foreign exchange. Financial instruments held in the Group’s trading portfolios include, but are not limited to, debt securities, loans, deposits, securities sale and repurchase agreements and derivative financial instruments (futures, forwards, swaps and options). For a discussion of the Group’s accounting policies for, and information with respect to, its exposures to derivative financial instruments, see Accounting policies and Note 19 on the accounts.

51






Operating and financial review continued

The VaR for the Group’s trading portfolios segregated by type of market risk exposure, including idiosyncratic risk, is presented in the table below.

  2005   2004
 
 
Trading Average
£m
  Period end
£m
    Maximum
£m
  Minimum
£m
  Average
£m
  Period end
£m
    Maximum
£m
  Minimum
£m

Interest rate 7.3   7.4     10.9   5.1   6.0   5.4     8.5   4.1
Credit spread 11.4   11.8     14.4   8.8   8.6   10.4     12.0   5.1
Currency 1.8   1.4     10.7   0.5   1.1   1.2     2.7   0.5
Equity and commodity 0.5   0.7     1.1   0.2   0.8   0.4     2.1   0.3
Diversification     (8.5 )               (6.5 )        




Total trading VaR 13.0   12.8     16.5   9.9   10.6   10.9     16.0   6.3

The Group’s trading activities are carried out principally by Global Banking & Markets. The charts below depict the number of days on which Global Banking & Markets’ trading income fell within the stated ranges.

2005


2004


52




Non-trading

The principal market risks arising from the Group’s non-trading activities are interest rate risk, currency risk and equity risk. Treasury activity and mismatches between the repricing of assets and liabilities in its retail and corporate banking operations account for most of the non-trading interest rate risk. Non-trading currency risk derives from the Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries, associates and branches. The Group’s venture capital portfolio and investments held by its general insurance business are the principal sources of non-trading equity price risk. The Group’s portfolios of non-trading financial instruments mainly comprise loans (including finance leases), debt securities, equity shares, deposits, certificates of deposits and other debt securities issued, loan capital and derivatives. To reflect their distinct nature, the Group’s long-term assurance assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders have been excluded from these market risk disclosures.

Interest rate risk

Non-trading interest rate risk arises from the Group’s treasury activities and retail and corporate banking businesses.

Treasury

The Group’s treasury activities include its money market business and the management of internal funds flow within the Group’s businesses. Money market portfolios include cash instruments (principally debt securities, loans and deposits) and related hedging derivatives. VaR for the Group’s treasury portfolios, which relates mainly to interest rate risk including credit spreads, was £3.5 million at 31 December 2005 (2004 –£5.7 million). During the year the maximum VaR was £5.8 million (2004 – £9.3 million), the minimum £2.8 million (2004 –£5.7 million) and the average £4.0 million (2004 – £7.3 million).

Retail and corporate banking

Structural interest rate risk arises in these activities where assets and liabilities have different repricing dates. It is the Group’s policy to minimise the sensitivity of net interest income to changes in interest rates and where interest rate risk is retained to ensure that appropriate resources, measures and limits are applied.

Structural interest rate risk is calculated in each division on the basis of establishing the repricing behaviour of each asset and liability product. For many products, the actual interest rate repricing characteristics differ from the contractual repricing. In most cases, the repricing maturity is determined by the market interest rate that most closely fits the historical behaviour of the product interest rate. For non-interest bearing current accounts, the repricing maturity is determined by the stability of the portfolio. The repricing maturities used are approved by Group Treasury and divisional asset and liability committees at least annually. Key conventions are reviewed annually by GALCO.

A static maturity gap report is produced as at the month-end for each division, in each functional currency based on the behaviouralised repricing for each product. It is Group policy to include in the gap report, non-financial assets and liabilities, mainly property, plant and equipment and the Group’s capital and reserves, spread over medium and longer term maturities. This report also includes hedge transactions, principally derivatives.

Any residual non-trading interest rate exposures are controlled by limiting repricing mismatches in the individual balance sheets. Potential exposures to interest rate movements in the medium to long term are measured and controlled using a version of the same VaR methodology that is used for the Group’s trading portfolios but without discount factors. Net accrual income exposures are measured and controlled in terms of sensitivity over time to movements in interest rates.

Risk is managed within limits approved by GALCO through the execution of cash and derivative instruments. Execution of the hedging is carried out by the relevant division through the Group’s treasury functions. The residual risk position is reported to divisional asset and liability committees, GALCO and the Board.

Non-trading interest rate VaR

Non-trading interest rate VaR for the Group’s treasury and retail and corporate banking activities was £81.5 million at 31 December 2005 (2004 – £72.4 million) with the major exposure being to changes in longer term US dollar interest rates. During the year, the maximum VaR was £104.2 million (2004 –£89.7 million), the minimum £10.8 million (2004 – £51.5 million) and the average £65.5 million (2004 – £71.2 million).

Citizens was the main contributor to the Group’s non-trading interest rate VaR. It invests in a portfolio of highly rated and liquid investments, principally mortgage-backed securities. This balance sheet management approach is common for US retail banks where mortgages are originated and then sold to Federal agencies for funding through the capital markets. VaR, like all interest rate risk measures, has its limitations when applied to retail banking books and the management of Citizens’ interest rate exposures involves a number of other interest rate risk measures and related limits. Two measures that are reported both to Citizens ALCO and the Board are:

  • the sensitivity of net accrual earnings to a series of parallel movements in interest rates; and

  • economic value of equity (“EVE”) sensitivity to a series of parallel movements in interest rates.

 

53




Operating and financial review continued

The limits applied to these measures are set to parallel movements of +/-1% and +/-2%. The EVE methodology captures deposit repricing strategies and the embedded option risks that exist within both the investment portfolio of mortgage-backed securities and the consumer loan portfolio. EVE is the present value of the cash flows generated by the current balance sheet. EVE sensitivity to a 2% parallel movement upwards and downwards in US interest rates is shown below.

  Percent increase/(decrease) in Citizens EVE    

2005 2% parallel upward
movement in
US interest rates
%
    2% parallel downward
movement in US interest rates
(no negative rates allowed)
%
 






Period end (9.1 )   (8.2 )
Maximum (10.1 )   (9.8 )
Minimum (7.1 )   (4.4 )
Average (9.2 )   (7.9 )






           
2004          






Period end (9.2 )   (4.4 )
Maximum (12.6 )   (18.5 )
Minimum (5.2 )   (4.4 )
Average (9.3 )   (9.2 )







For the Group, the other major structural interest rate risk arises from a low interest rate environment, particularly in sterling, sustained for a number of years. In such a scenario, deposit pricing may reach effective floors below which it is not practical to reduce rates further whilst variable rate asset pricing continues to decline. A sustained low rate scenario would also generate progressively reduced income from the medium and long term hedging of non-interest bearing liabilities. GALCO regularly reviews the impact of stress scenarios including the impact of substantial declines in rates to ensure that appropriate risk management strategies are employed. Resulting action may involve execution of derivatives, product development and tactical pricing changes.

Note 34 on the accounts includes, on pages 147 and 148, tables that summarise the Group’s interest rate sensitivity gap for its non-trading book at 31 December 2005 and 31 December 2004. The tables show the contractual re-pricing for each category of asset, liability and for off-balance sheet items and do not reflect the behaviouralised repricing used in the Group’s asset and liability management methodology and the non-trading interest rate VaR presented above.

Currency risk

The Group does not maintain material non-trading open currency positions other than the structural foreign currency translation exposures arising from its investments in foreign subsidiaries and associated undertakings and their related currency funding. The Group’s policy in relation to structural positions is to match fund the structural foreign currency exposure arising from net asset value, including goodwill, in foreign subsidiaries, equity accounted investments and branches, except where doing so would materially increase the sensitivity of either the Group’s or the subsidiary’s regulatory capital ratios to currency movements. The policy requires structural foreign exchange positions to be reviewed regularly by GALCO. Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are recognised directly in equity together with the effective portion of foreign exchange differences arising on hedging liabilities.

54






The tables below set out the Group’s structural foreign currency exposures.

2005 Net investments
in foreign
operations
£m
  Foreign
currency
borrowings
hedging net
investments
£m
  Structural
foreign
currency
exposures
£m






US dollar 15,452   6,637   8,815
Euro 2,285   139   2,146
Swiss franc 431   430   1
Chinese RMB 914     914
Other non-sterling 76   72   4






  19,158   7,278   11,880





2004          






US dollar 12,367   6,580   5,787
Euro 2,086   1,349   737
Swiss franc 398   392   6
Other non-sterling 116   112   4






  14,967   8,433   6,534






The US dollar open structural foreign currency exposure reflects the action taken to mitigate the effect of the acquisition in 2004 of Charter One on the Group’s capital ratios. However, the increase in this position and the Euro structural exposure over 2004 is largely a result of the exclusion from the table of preference shares classified as equity under IFRS. These instruments continue to be considered part of the currency funding of foreign operations for asset and liability management purposes. The exposure in Chinese RMB arises from the Group’s strategic investment in Bank of China.

Equity risk

Non-trading equity risk arises principally from the Group’s strategic investments, its venture capital activities and its general insurance business. General insurance investment strategy is discussed below under insurance risk.

VaR is not an appropriate risk measure for the Group’s venture capital investments, which comprise a mix of quoted and unquoted investments, or its portfolio of strategic investments. These investments are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recorded in profit or loss, or in equity.

Insurance risk

The Group is exposed to insurance risk, either directly through its businesses or through using insurance as a tool to reduce other risk exposures.

An insurance contract transfers risk from the policyholder to the insurer, whereby, in return for a premium paid, the insurer indemnifies the policyholder on the occurrence of specified events.

Insurance risk is the risk of fluctuations in the timing, frequency and severity of insured events, relative to the expectations of the Group at the time of underwriting. This risk is managed according to the following separate components:

  • Underwriting and pricing risk
  • Claims management risk
  • Reinsurance risk
  • Reserving risk

Insurance risk is predictable, especially with the analysis of large volumes of data over time. There is, however, uncertainty around the predictions from various sources, for example, volatility of the weather. However, the Group has documented risk policies, coupled with governance frameworks to oversee and control and hence minimise the risks.

Underwriting and pricing risk

The Group manages underwriting and pricing risk through a wide range of processes and forums, which include:

  • Underwriting guidelines which exist for all business transacted restricting the types and classes of business that may be accepted;

  • Pricing policies which are set by pricing committees, by product line and by brand;

  • Centralised control of policy wordings and any subsequent changes

Reinsurance and insurance of Group assets are centrally controlled in the same department as insurance risk and both have a similar framework of robust controls and processes.

55






Operating and financial review continued

Claims management risk

Claims management risk is the risk that claims are paid inappropriately. Claims are managed using a range of IT system controls and manual processes conducted by experienced staff, to ensure that claims are handled in a timely and accurate manner. Detailed policies and procedures exist to ensure that all claims are handled appropriately, with each member of staff having a specified handling authority. The processes include controls to avoid claims staff handling or paying claims beyond their authorities, as well as controls to avoid paying invalid claims. Loss adjustors are used to handle certain claims to conclusion.

Reinsurance risk

Reinsurance is used to protect the insurance results against the impact of major catastrophic events or unforeseen volumes of, or adverse trends in, large individual claims and to transfer risk that is outside the Group’s current risk appetite.

The following types of reinsurance are used where appropriate:

  • Excess of loss ‘per individual risk’ reinsurance to protect against significantly large individual losses.

  • Excess of loss catastrophe ‘event’ reinsurance to protect against major events, for example, windstorms or floods.

  • Quota share reinsurance to protect against unforeseen adverse trends, where the reinsurer takes an agreed percentage of premiums and claims.

  • Other forms of reinsurance may be utilised according to need, subject to approval by senior management or the board as appropriate.

Reinsurance is only effective when the counterparty is financially secure. Before entering a contract with a new reinsurer, it must satisfy the Credit Risk Approval process that uses information derived internally and from security ratings agencies. Acceptable reinsurers are rated at A- or better unless specifically authorised by the RBS Insurance Group Board.

Reserving risk

Reserving risk relates to both premiums and claims. It is the risk that reserves are assessed incorrectly such that insufficient funds have been retained to pay or handle claims as the amounts fall due, both in relation to those claims which have already occurred (in relation to the claims reserves, including claims handling expense reserves) or will occur in future periods of insurance (in relation to the premium reserves).

a) Premium reserves

In respect of premium reserves, it is the Group’s policy to ensure that the net unearned premium reserves and deferred acquisition costs are adequate to meet the expected cost of claims and associated expenses in relation to the exposure after the balance sheet date. To the extent that the unearned premium reserves and deferred acquisition costs are inadequate, a liability adequacy provision will be held which will initially write down any deferred acquisition asset held. Once any deferred acquisition asset has been exhausted, an additional liability adequacy provision will be established.

b) Claims reserves

It is the Group’s policy to hold undiscounted claims reserves (including reserves to cover claims which have occurred but not been reported (IBNR reserves)) for all classes at a sufficient level to meet all liabilities as they fall due, having regard to actuarial estimates and the volatility observed and expected in the claims in each class.

The Group’s policy is to hold provisions for the major classes of business in excess of the actuarial best estimate. The percentage margin in excess of this estimate is assessed by senior management, with particular reference to the volatility observed and expected in the claims in each class.

The Group’s focus is on high volume and relatively straightforward products, for example home and motor. This facilitates the generation of comprehensive underwriting and claims data, which is used to monitor and accurately price the risks accepted. This attention to data analysis is reinforced by tight controls on costs and claims handling procedures.

Frequency and severity of specific risks and sources of uncertainty

Most general insurance contracts written by the Group are issued on an annual basis, which means that the Group’s liability extends for a 12 month period, after which the Group is entitled to decline or renew or can impose renewal terms by amending the premium or excess or both.

The following paragraphs explain the frequency and severity of claims and the sources of uncertainty for the key classes that the Group is exposed to:

a) Motor insurance contracts (private and commercial)

Claims experience is quite variable, due to a wide number of factors, but the principal ones of these are age of driver, type of vehicle and use.

There are many sources of uncertainty that will impact the Group's experience under motor insurance, including operational risk, reserving risk, premium rates not matching claims inflation rates, the social, economic and legislative environment and reinsurance failure risks.

b) Property insurance contracts (residential and commercial)

The major causes of claims for property insurance are theft, flood, escape of water, fire, storm, subsidence and various types of accidental damage.

The major source of uncertainty in the Group’s property accounts is the volatility of weather. Weather in the UK can affect most of the above perils. Over a longer period, the strength of the economy is also a factor. There are many other sources of uncertainty which include operational, reserving and reinsurance issues.

56






c) Commercial other insurance contracts

Other commercial claims come mainly from business interruption and loss arising from the negligence of the insured (liability insurance). Business interruption losses come from the loss of income, revenue and/or profit as a result of property damage claims. Liability insurance can be broken down between employers liability and public/products liability. The first is to indemnify employees for injury caused as a result of the insured’s negligence. Public/products liability is to indemnify a third party for injury and/or damage as a result of an act of the Insured’s negligence. As liability insurance is written on an occurrence basis, these covers are still subject to claims that manifest over a substantial period of time, but where loss was in existence during the life of the policy.

Fluctuations in the social, economic and legislative climate are a source of uncertainty in the Group’s general liability account, and in particular court judgements and legislation (for example periodic payments under the Courts Act, a review of the Ogden tables used by the courts when setting personal injury claim values), significant events (for example terrorist attacks) and any emerging new heads of damage, types of claim that are not envisaged when the policy is written.

d) Creditor insurance

Creditor insurance contracts are designed to cover payments on secured or unsecured lending. These contracts are for a maximum term of 5 years. The causes of creditor insurance claims are loss of income through accident, sickness or unemployment or, in some circumstances, loss of life.

The main source of uncertainty affecting the Group's creditor accounts is the economic environment. A recession could lead to an increased number and cost of unemployment, accident and sickness claims. Other sources of uncertainty include operational and reserving issues.

Life business

The three regulated life companies of RBSG, NatWest Life Assurance Limited, Royal Scottish Assurance plc and Direct Line Life Limited, are required to meet minimum capital requirements at all times under the Financial Service Authority’s Prudential Sourcebook. The capital resources covering the regulatory requirement are not transferable to other areas of the Group. To ensure that the capital requirement is satisfied at all times, each company holds an additional voluntary buffer above the absolute minimum. Sufficient capital resources are held to ensure that the capital requirements are covered over a two year projection period. Life insurance results are inherently uncertain, due to actual experience being different to modelled assumptions. Such differences affect regulatory capital resources, as do varying levels of new business. Therefore, projections are formally reviewed twice a year. Where there is a shortfall of capital, various options are available to provide new capital.

The Group is not exposed to price, currency, credit, or interest risk on unit linked life contracts but it is exposed to variation in management fees. A decrease of 10% in the value of the assets would reduce the asset management fees by £5 million per annum (2004 – £5 million). The Group also writes insurance contracts with minimum guaranteed death benefits that expose it to the risk that declines in the value of underlying investments may increase the Group’s net exposure to death risk.

Frequency and severity of claims – for contracts where death is the insured risk, the most significant factors that could increase the overall frequency of claims are epidemics or wide spread changes in lifestyle, resulting in earlier or more claims than expected.

For contracts where survival is the insured risk, the most significant factor is continued improvement in medical science and social conditions that would increase longevity.

For contracts with fixed and guaranteed benefits and fixed future premiums, there are no mitigating terms and conditions that reduce the insurance risk accepted. Participating contracts can result in a significant portion of the insurance risk being shared with the insured party.

Sources of uncertainty in the estimation of future benefit payments and premium receipts – the Group uses base tables of standard mortality appropriate to the type of contract being written and the territory in which the insured person resides. These are adjusted to reflect the Group’s experience, mortality improvements and voluntary termination behaviour.

Purchased insurance

The Insurance Sourcing Department is responsible to GEMC for the Group-wide purchase of insurance as a means of reducing other risk exposures.

Enterprise risk

In order to adequately identify and manage the full range of Enterprise risk, the Group has separately defined operational and external risk:

Operational risk is defined as the risk arising within the organisation from:

  • People – risks arising from an inappropriate level of staff, inadequately skilled or managed.

  • Process – risk caused by inadequate or failed internal processes.

  • Systems – risks of inadequately designed or maintained systems.

  • Assets – risk of damage, misappropriation or theft of the Group’s physical, logical and intangible assets.

 

57




Operating and financial review continued

External risk is defined as the risk arising outside of the organisation in three main areas:

  • Business – risks arising from product performance, competitor activity, supplier unreliability or customer activity.

  • Political – risks caused by political unrest or uncertainty, activity by public interest groups or extremists, and non-compliance with, or changes to, current legislation.

  • Environment – risks arising due to demographic, macroeconomic, technical, cultural or environmental change.

Enterprise risk also includes the potential or actual impact on corporate reputation arising from any of the Group’s activities.

Enterprise risk management is achieved through monitoring the Group’s exposure to direct or indirect loss using a range of policies, procedures, data, analytical tools and reporting techniques. In particular, Group-wide risk management processes ensure that enterprise risk issues are quickly escalated and resolved, that the risks inherent in new products are fully evaluated, and that emerging external risks are actively monitored.

Operational risk exposures and loss events for each division are captured through monthly Risk and Control returns, which provide details on the change of risk exposures for each risk category in the light of trends and the risk profile of each division.

Regulatory risk

Regulatory risk is the risk arising from failing to meet the requirements of our regulators. To mitigate this risk, the Group is active in various regulatory developments affecting risk, capital and liquidity management. This includes working with domestic and international trade associations, being active with various regulators, especially the FSA and the main regulatory groups, including the Basel Committee (see page 208), the Committee of European Banking Supervisors, the EU Commission and US regulators.

58




Governance

Contents
60   Board of directors
    and secretary
62   Report of the directors
67   Corporate governance
73   Directors’ remuneration report
82   Directors’ interests in shares
83   Statement of directors’
    responsibilities

59






Board of directors and secretary*


*Not pictured: Johnny Cameron, Mark Fisher and Bill Friedrich (each appointed in March 2006)

60






Chairman
Sir George Mathewson (age 65)
CBE, DUniv, LLD, FRSE, FCIBS
C (Chairman), N (Chairman)

Appointed to the Board in September 1987 and as Chairman in April 2001, Sir George Mathewson has a wide background in finance, technology and management and spent some of his career in the United States. He became Group Chief Executive in January 1992 and, in March 2000, he was appointed Executive Deputy Chairman. He is a director of The Scottish Investment Trust PLC and the Institute of International Finance, Inc. He is also president of the International Monetary Conference, a member of the Advisory Committee of Bridgepoint Capital Limited and a member of the Financial Reporting Council. He was chief executive of the Scottish Development Agency from 1981 to 1987 and is a former president of the British Bankers’ Association.

Deputy Chairman and
Chairman-designate
Sir Tom McKillop* (age 62)
C, N

Appointed to the Board as Deputy Chairman in September 2005, Sir Tom is a non-executive director of BP p.l.c., and was formerly chief executive of AstraZeneca plc. He was formerly president of the European Federation of Pharmaceutical Industries and Associations and chairman of the British Pharma Group. He is Pro-Chancellor of the University of Leicester and a trustee of the Council for Industry and Higher Education.

Executive directors
Sir Fred Goodwin (age 47)
DUniv, FCIBS, FCIB, LLD
Group Chief Executive
C

Appointed to the Board in August 1998, Sir Fred Goodwin is a Chartered Accountant. He was formerly chief executive and director, Clydesdale Bank PLC and Yorkshire Bank PLC. He is chairman of The Prince’s Trust, a non-executive director of Bank of China Limited and a former president of the Chartered Institute of Bankers in Scotland.

Lawrence Fish (age 61)
Chairman and Chief Executive
Officer of Citizens Financial
Group, Inc.

Appointed to the Board in January 1993, Lawrence Fish is an American national. He is a career banker and was a director of the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston. He is a trustee of The Brookings Institution and a director of the Financial Services Roundtable, Textron Inc., and numerous community organisations in the USA.

Gordon Pell (age 56)
FCIBS, FCIB
Chief Executive,
Retail Markets

Appointed to the Board in March 2000, Gordon Pell was formerly group director of Lloyds TSB UK Retail Banking before joining National Westminster Bank Plc as a director in February 2000 and then becoming chief executive, Retail Banking. He is also a director of Race for Opportunity and a member of the National Employment Panel and the FSA Practitioner Panel.

Guy Whittaker (age 49)
Group Finance Director
C

Appointed to the Board in February 2006, Guy Whittaker was formerly group treasurer at Citigroup Inc., based in New York, having previously held a number of management positions within the financial markets business at Citigroup. He was elected a Lady Beaufort Fellow of Christ's College Cambridge in 2004.

Johnny Cameron (age 51)
FCIBS
Chief Executive, Corporate Markets

Appointed to the Board in March 2006, Johnny Cameron has held a number of senior positions in financial institutions including County NatWest, Dresdner Kleinwort Benson and RBS. He was appointed Managing Director, Corporate and Institutional Banking in 1998, before being promoted to Deputy Chief Executive, Corporate Banking and Financial Markets (renamed Corporate Markets in January 2006) in 2000, and Chief Executive in 2001.

Mark Fisher (age 46)
FCIBS
Chief Executive, Manufacturing

Appointed to the Board in March 2006, Mark Fisher is a career banker, having joined the Group in 1981 as a graduate trainee. Mark has held a number of senior management positions in NatWest Retail Bank, including Finance Director and latterly Chief Operating Officer. He was responsible for overseeing the successful integration of NatWest on to the RBS operational platform following the acquisition in 2001, and has since then completed the integration of Churchill Insurance. Mark is also Chairman of The Association for Payment Clearing Services (APACS).

Non-executive directors
Colin Buchan* (age 51)
A, C, R

Appointed to the Board in June 2002, Colin Buchan was educated in South Africa and spent the early part of his career in South Africa and the Far East. He has considerable international investment banking experience, as well as experience in very large risk management in the equities business. He was formerly a member of the group management board of UBS AG and head of equities of UBS Warburg. He is chairman of UBS Securities Canada Inc. and vice-chairman of Standard Life Investments Limited. He is also a director of Merrill Lynch World Mining Trust Plc, Merrill Lynch Gold Limited, Royal Scottish National Orchestra Society Limited and World Mining Investment Company Limited.

Jim Currie* (age 64)
D.Litt
R

Appointed to the Board in November 2001, Jim Currie is a highly experienced senior international civil servant who spent many years working in Brussels and Washington. He was formerly director general at the European Commission with responsibility for the EU’s environmental policy and director general for Customs and Excise and Indirect Taxation. He is also a director of Total Holdings UK Limited, an international advisor to Eversheds and a consultant to Butera & Andrews UK Limited.

Bill Friedrich* (age 56)

Appointed to the Board in March 2006, Bill Friedrich was appointed to the Board of BG Group plc as an Executive Director, Deputy Chief Executive and General Counsel in October 2000. Since 2005, he has had primary responsibility for the Group’s overall strategy function and portfolio development activities as well as oversight of the Group’s organisational and human resource matters. Prior to that he was responsible for BG’s operations in North and South America and various Group-wide staff functions. He joined British Gas plc in December 1995 as General Counsel after a 20-year career with Shearman & Sterling, based in New York, where he became a partner in 1983.

Archie Hunter* (age 62)
A (Chairman), C

Appointed to the Board in September 2004, Archie Hunter is a Chartered Accountant. He was Scottish senior partner of KPMG between 1992 and 1999 and President of The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland in 1997/1998. He has extensive professional experience in the UK and North and South America. He is currently chairman of Macfarlane Group plc, a director of Edinburgh US Tracker Trust plc, Convenor of Court at the University of Strathclyde and a governor of the Beatson Cancer Research Institute.

Charles ‘Bud’ Koch (age 59)

Appointed to the Board in September 2004, Bud Koch is an American national. He has extensive professional experience in the USA and is currently chairman of the board of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Cincinnati, chairman of the board of John Carroll University and a trustee of Case Western Reserve University. He was chairman, president and chief executive officer of Charter One Financial, Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiary, Charter One Bank, N.A between 1973 and 2004. He is also a director of Assurant, Inc.

Janis Kong* (age 55)
OBE, DUniv

Appointed to the Board in January 2006, Janis Kong is currently executive chairman of Heathrow Airport Limited, chairman of Heathrow Express Limited and a director of BAA plc and Portmeirion Group plc. She is also a member of the board of Visit Britain and previously served as a member of the board of the South East England Regional Development Agency.

Joe MacHale* (age 54)
A

Appointed to the Board in September 2004, Joe MacHale is currently a non-executive director and chairman of the audit committee of Morgan Crucible plc, a non-executive director of Brit Insurance Holdings plc, and a trustee of MacMillan Cancer Relief. He held a number of senior executive positions with J P Morgan between 1979 and 2001 and was latterly chief executive of J P Morgan Europe, Middle East and Africa Region.

Sir Steve Robson* (age 62)
A

Appointed to the Board in July 2001, Sir Steve Robson is a former senior UK civil servant, who had responsibility for a wide variety of Treasury matters. His early career included the post of private secretary to the Chancellor of the Exchequer and secondment to ICFC (now 3i). He was also a second permanent secretary of HM Treasury, where he was managing director of the Finance and Regulation Directorate. He is a non-executive director of JP Morgan Cazenove Holdings, Xstrata Plc and Partnerships UK plc, and a member of the Chairman’s Advisory Committee of KPMG.

Bob Scott* (age 64)
CBE, FCIBS
C, N, R (Chairman)

Appointed to the Board in January 2001, Bob Scott is an Australian national. He is the senior independent director. He has many years experience in the international insurance business and played a leading role in the consolidation of the UK insurance industry. He is a former group chief executive of CGNU plc and chairman of the board of the Association of British Insurers. He is chairman of Yell Group plc and a non-executive director of Swiss Reinsurance Company (Zurich), Jardine Lloyd Thompson Group plc and Focus DIY Group Limited. He is also a trustee of the Crimestoppers Trust and an adviser to Duke Street Capital.

Peter Sutherland* (age 59)
KCMG
C, N

Appointed to the Board in January 2001, Peter Sutherland is an Irish national. He is a former attorney general of Ireland and from 1985 to 1989 was the European Commissioner responsible for competition policy. He is chairman of BP p.l.c. and Goldman Sachs International and honorary president and member of the Advisory Council for the European Movement – Ireland. He was formerly chairman of Allied Irish Bank and a director general of GATT and the World Trade Organisation.

Group Secretary and
General Counsel
Miller McLean (age 56)
FCIBS
C

Miller McLean was appointed Group Secretary in August 1994. He is a trustee of the Industry and Parliament Trust, a non-executive chairman of The Whitehall and Industry Group and a director of The Scottish Parliament and Business Exchange.

A member of the Audit Committee
C member of the Chairman’s Advisory Group
N member of the Nominations Committee
R member of the Remuneration Committee
* independent non-executive director

61






Report of the directors

The directors have pleasure in presenting their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2005.

Profit and dividends

The profit attributable to the ordinary shareholders of the company for the year ended 31 December 2005 amounted to £5,392 million compared with £4,856 million for the year ended 31 December 2004, as set out in the consolidated income statement on page 97.

An interim dividend of 19.4p per ordinary share was paid on 7 October 2005 totalling £619 million (2004 – £529 million). The directors now recommend that a final dividend of 53.1p per ordinary share totalling £1,700 million (2004 – £1,308 million) be paid on 9 June 2006 to members on the register at the close of business on 10 March 2006. Subject to approval of the dividend at the Annual General Meeting, shareholders will be offered the opportunity to participate in a dividend reinvestment plan, which will replace the current scrip dividend scheme.

Activities and business review

The company is a holding company owning the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Royal Bank, the principal direct operating subsidiary undertaking of the company. The “Group” comprises the company and all its subsidiary and associated undertakings, including the Royal Bank and NatWest. The Group is engaged principally in providing a wide range of banking, insurance and other financial services. The financial risk management objectives and policies of the Group and information on the Group’s exposure to price, credit, liquidity and cash flow risk are contained in Note 34 on the financial statements. Details of the principal subsidiary undertakings of the company are shown in Note 15. A review of the business for the year to 31 December 2005, of recent events and of likely future developments is contained in the Operating and financial review.

Business developments

In August 2005, the Group announced a strategic partnership with Bank of China (BoC). Subsequently, a Group-led consortium acquired a 10% shareholding in BoC through a majority-owned subsidiary for US$3.1 billion (£1.7 billion). The Group’s share of the investment (US$1.6 billion) was financed through the disposal of its 2.2% holding in the issued share capital of Banco Santander Central Hispano, S.A. Following receipt of all required regulatory approvals, the investment was completed in December 2005. The two banks will co-operate across a range of business activities in China including credit cards, wealth management, corporate banking and personal lines insurance. They will also closely co-operate in key operational areas including financial controls, risk management, human resources and corporate governance.

Going concern

The directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis for preparing the accounts.

Ordinary share capital

During the year ended 31 December 2005, the ordinary share capital was increased by the following issues:

(a)      13.5 million ordinary shares allotted as a result of the exercise of options under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and a further 0.7 million ordinary shares allotted in respect of the exercise of options under the NatWest executive and sharesave schemes which had been exchanged for options over the company’s shares following the acquisition of NatWest in 2000;
   
(b)      7.4 million ordinary shares allotted in lieu of cash dividends; and
   
(c)      2.3 million ordinary shares allotted under the company’s employee share ownership plan.

Details of the authorised and issued ordinary share capital at 31 December 2005 are shown in Note 30.

Preference share capital

Details of issues of preference shares during the year and the authorised and issued share capital at 31 December 2005 are shown in Note 30.

Authority to repurchase shares

At the Annual General Meeting in 2005, shareholders renewed the authority for the company to make market purchases of up to 317,495,924 ordinary shares. The directors have not exercised this authority to date. The Group has however announced its intention to repurchase up to £1 billion of ordinary shares over the course of the next 12 months, and shareholders will be asked to renew this authority at the Annual General Meeting in April.

62






Shareholdings

As at 27 February 2006, the company had been notified of the following interests in its shares, in accordance with section 198 of the Companies Act 1985:

    Number of shares   % held       Number of shares   % held











Ordinary shares:           5½% cumulative preference shares:        
       Legal & General Group plc   98,761,695   3.40          Commercial Union Assurance plc   91,429   22.86
       Barclays PLC   126,816,644   3.97          Mr P. S. and Mrs J. Allen   86,999   21.75
       The Capital Group of Companies, Inc   95,578,555   3.01          Bassett-Patrick Securities Limited*   46,255   11.56
11% cumulative preference shares:                  E M Behrens Charitable Trust   20,000   5.00
       Guardian Royal Exchange                  Mrs Gina Wild   19,800   4.95
       Assurance plc   129,830   25.97          Trustees of The Stephen Cockburn        
       Windsor Life Assurance                          Limited Pension Scheme   19,879   4.97
       Company Limited   51,510   10.30          Miss Elizabeth Hill   16,124   4.03
       Mr S. J. and Mrs J. A. Cockburn   30,810   6.16          Mr W. T. Hardison Jr.   13,532   3.38
       Cleaning Tokens Limited   25,500   5.10          Ms C. L. Allen   13,200   3.30
                   Ms J. C. Allen   12,750   3.18












* Notification has been received on behalf of Mr A. W. R. Medlock and Mrs H. M. Medlock that they each have an interest in the holding of 51/2 % cumulative preference shares registered in the name of Bassett-Patrick Securities Limited noted above and that there are further holdings of 5,300 and 5,000 shares, respectively, of that class registered in each of their names.

Directors

The names and brief biographical details of the directors are shown on page 61. All directors, except:

  • Sir Angus Grossart, Lord Vallance and Iain Robertson, who retired from the Board on 20 April 2005, and Eileen Mackay, who retired from the Board on 31 December 2005,

  • Sir Tom McKillop, who was appointed to the Board on 1 September 2005, Janis Kong, who was appointed to the Board on 1 January 2006, and Guy Whittaker, who was appointed to the Board on 1 February 2006, and

  • Fred Watt, who resigned from the Board on 31 January 2006,

served throughout the year and to the date of signing of the financial statements.

Sir Tom McKillop, Colin Buchan, Janis Kong, Bob Scott, Peter Sutherland and Guy Whittaker will retire and offer themselves for election or re-election at the company’s Annual General Meeting. Bill Friedrich, Johnny Cameron and Mark Fisher have been appointed as directors with effect from 1 March 2006 and will also offer themselves for election at the company’s Annual General Meeting.

Details of the service agreement for Guy Whittaker are set out on page 77. Johnny Cameron has a service agreement with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc dated 29 March 1998 which may be terminated by Mr Cameron giving six months notice to the Royal Bank and by the Royal Bank giving 12 months notice to Mr Cameron. Mark Fisher has a service agreement with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc dated 3 May 2000 which may be terminated by either party giving six months notice to the other. No other director seeking election or re-election has a service agreement.

Sir George Mathewson will retire as Chairman of the Board with effect from the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting on 28 April 2006. The Group has secured his continued employment to serve in an advisory role to the Group. Sir Tom McKillop will succeed Sir George as Chairman.

Directors’ interests

The interests of the directors in the shares of the company at 31 December 2005 are shown on page 82. None of the directors held an interest in the loan capital of the company or in the shares and loan capital of any of the subsidiary undertakings of the company, during the period from 1 January 2005 to 27 February 2006.

Employee proposition

The Group recognises that staff performance is central to the successful delivery of its overall business strategy. Accordingly, the Group focuses on maintaining an employee proposition that attracts, engages and retains the best available talent.

Employee recruitment

Utilising a wide range of recruitment channels, including an open internal jobs market, talent forums and detailed succession planning, the Group ensures that the recruitment and development of employees is closely aligned to organisational requirements. A strong standing as an employer of choice prompts applications from hundreds of thousands of potential candidates each year. Similarly, all vacancies are displayed internally and RBS employees can apply for any role.

The Group retains a high profile as a graduate recruiter, providing a wide range of development programmes. In 2005, more than 14,000 graduates applied for over 230 places with the Group. The Group also received the Association of Graduate Recruiters Award for delivering the ‘Best Integrated Marketing Recruitment Campaign’ targeted at graduates.

63






Report of the directors continued

Group-wide co-ordination and access to recruitment and interview skills training ensures recruitment complies with internal and regulatory requirements. In addition, the Group continues to ensure all appointees are appropriately referenced and screened prior to joining the organisation.

Employee reward

The Group acknowledges that its continuing success is closely linked to the performance, skills and individual commitment of its employees. Significant focus is therefore given to offering an exceptional reward proposition to all RBS Group employees in order to attract, motivate and retain the best available talent at every level.

In 2005, employee costs of £5,992 million, including National Insurance and pension costs of £864 million, made up over a third of total expenditure.

The Group’s remuneration and benefits package, Total Reward, (consisting of salary, bonus, share scheme and competitive pension benefits) is acknowledged as one of the most comprehensive and flexible packages in the financial services sector. Salary awards within the Group reflect individual performance, offering greater increases for high performers, as well as acknowledging market competitor movements.

RBSelect, the Group’s benefits choice programme, forms part of the Total Reward package. It provides for UK staff in the Group a flexible way of tailoring their reward to reflect their own individual lifestyle needs. Options range from subsidised childcare vouchers and discounted personal insurance products to environmentally friendly bicycle purchases.

Employees can also participate in bonus incentive plans specific to their business and share in the Group’s ongoing success through profit sharing, Buy As You Earn and Sharesave schemes, which align their interests with those of shareholders. UK employees participate in profit sharing that is directly related to the annual performance of the Group. For the last seven years this has amounted to a further 10 percent of basic salary.

To enable employees to get the most from Total Reward, a wide range of information about reward and benefits has been introduced through RBSpeople.com, an internet site offering 24 hour access from home or work.

The RBS group Charity Lottery was launched during 2005. Employees contributing to the prize fund through a small monthly entry fee have the chance to win up to 50% of the total funds collected each month. The remainder, after payment of a small lottery-operating fee, is donated to charity.

The Group continues to offer membership of its final pension scheme, with the entire cost being met by the Group. The largest scheme is the Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund, with 80,000 employee members in the UK.

Employee learning and development

The Group actively encourages learning and development and is committed to creating and providing opportunities both inside and outside the workplace. These experiences are provided through a variety of developmental initiatives, technological innovations and learning networks and forums. Creating and maintaining a talented network of people across the Group ensures not only a strong leadership capability, but also a high performing workforce.

In 2005 a new Group-wide approach to leadership development was launched. Called the “Leadership Journey”, it defines success at different leadership levels and the key developmental challenges that employees face as they progress within the Group. A suite of development programmes has been designed and implemented to ensure appropriate leadership development, supporting the challenges that individual leaders face whilst completing different stages of the Leadership Journey.

A core component of this ongoing activity is the Group’s Executive Leadership Programme (developed in conjunction with the Harvard Business School) and the establishment of an on-site business school at the Group Headquarters at Gogarburn, Edinburgh, which opened in January 2006. The Business School is central to the Group’s commitment to developing its leaders, and equipping them with the skills and confidence necessary to lead in complex and challenging environments.

Employee communication

Employee engagement is encouraged through a variety of means including a corporate intranet, Group and divisional magazines, team meetings led by line managers, briefings held by senior managers and regular dialogue with employees and employee representatives.

During 2005, the high quality of the Group’s internal communications was reflected by success in a number of prestigious external awards schemes. Awards were attained at both Group and divisional level and included a Gold Award for hub magazine, the Manufacturing division’s internal publication, at the UK Communicators in Business Awards, and a Gold Award for the Group Communications team in the Regular Communications category at the International Visual Communication Association Awards

The Group Chief Executive and other senior Group executives regularly communicate with employees through ‘Question Time’ style programmes, broadcast on the Group’s internal television network. An ‘Open Air’ debate chaired by the Group Chief Executive on Diversity and Inclusion, seeking to ensure equality of opportunity for employees and customers, typifies this approach.

64






Employee consultation

The Group’s confidential global Employee Opinion Survey is externally designed, undertaken and analysed annually on behalf of the Group by International Survey Research (“ISR”).

The survey enables employees to maximise their contribution to the Group by expressing their views and opinions on a range of key issues.

The results from the 2005 survey, which 86% of Group employees completed, demonstrated significant improvements for the fifth successive year. This year, for the very first time, the Group scored above the ISR Global Financial Services Norm in every single category.

The survey results are presented at Board, divisional and team levels. Action plans are developed to address any issues identified. With continuing year-on-year improvement, strong divisional results and improvements in all leading indicators, it is believed that results are sustainable, particularly given the Group’s focus on continuous improvement.

In addition to direct communication and consultation with employees, the Group recognises the trade union Amicus in the UK, and the Irish Bank Officials Association and the Services, Industrial, Professional and Technical Union in Ireland. These formal relationships are complemented by works council arrangements in many of the Group’s mainland Europe-based operations.

The Group has an European Employee Communication Council that provides elected employee representatives with an opportunity to better understand market conditions and strategic decisions with transnational impact on our European operations.

Diversity

The Group’s “Managing Diversity” policy sets a framework and a minimum standard within which all employees can develop to their full potential irrespective of race, gender, marital status, age, disability, religious belief, political opinion or sexual orientation. Each division has developed and delivered an action plan incorporating both Group and division-specific priorities to promote diversity across all areas of the employee lifecycle.

The success of this approach culminated in the Group receiving a Gold Standard Award in the Race for Opportunity Benchmarking Survey, having previously attained a Bronze in 2004. The Group maintains its involvement in and support of the UK Employers’ Forum on Age, Employers’ Forum on Disability, Employers’ Forum on Belief, Stonewall and of the Government’s Age Positive campaign.

The Group is also committed to ensuring that all prospective applicants for employment are treated fairly and equitably throughout the recruitment process. Its comprehensive resourcing standards cover the attraction and retention of individuals with disabilities. Reasonable adjustments are provided to support applicants in the recruitment process where these are required. The Group provides reasonable workplace adjustments for new entrants into the Group and for existing employees who become disabled during their employment.

Health, safety, wellbeing and security

The health, safety, wellbeing and security of RBS staff and customers continue to be a priority for the Group. Regular reviews are undertaken of both policies and processes to ensure compliance with current legislation and best practice. The Group focus is on ensuring that these policies are closely linked to the operational needs of the business.

Corporate responsibility

Business excellence requires that the Group meets changing customer, shareholder, investor, employee and supplier expectations. The Group believes that meeting high standards of environmental, social and ethical responsibility is key to the way it does business.

The Board regularly considers corporate responsibility issues and receives a formal report twice each year. Further details of the Group’s corporate responsibility policies will be contained in the 2005 Corporate Responsibility Report.

Code of ethics

The Group has adopted a code of ethics that is applicable to all of the Group’s employees and a copy is available upon request.

Charitable contributions

In 2005 the contribution to the Group’s Community Investment programmes increased to £56.2 million (2004 – £45.8 million). The total amount given for charitable purposes by the company and its subsidiary undertakings during the year ended 31 December 2005 was £24.3 million (2004 – £20.1 million).

Corporate governance

The company is committed to high standards of Corporate governance. Details are given on pages 67 to 72.

Political donations

No political donations were made during the year.

At the Annual General Meeting in 2002, shareholders gave authority for the company and certain of its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure up to a maximum aggregate sum of £675,000 as a precautionary measure in light of the wide definitions in The Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000, for a period of four years. These authorities have not been used and it is not proposed that the Group’s longstanding policy of not making contributions to any political party be changed. A resolution to renew a general Group authority will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting on 28 April 2006.

65






Report of the directors continued

Policy and practice on payment of creditors

The Group is committed to maintaining a sound commercial relationship with its suppliers. Consequently, it is the Group’s policy to negotiate and agree terms and conditions with its suppliers, which includes the giving of an undertaking to pay suppliers within 30 days of receipt of a correctly prepared invoice submitted in accordance with the terms of the contract or such other payment period as may be agreed.

At 31 December 2005, the Group’s trade creditors represented 27 days (2004 – 27 days) of amounts invoiced by suppliers. The company does not have any trade creditors.

Directors' indemnities

In terms of section 309C of The Companies Act 1985 (as amended), the directors of the company, members of the Group Executive Management Committee and Approved Persons of the Group (under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000) have been granted Qualifying Third Party Indemnity Provisions by the company.

Auditors

The auditors, Deloitte & Touche LLP, have indicated their willingness to continue in office. A resolution to re-appoint Deloitte & Touche LLP as the company’s auditor will be proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

By order of the Board.

 
Miller McLean
Secretary
27 February 2006
 
 
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
is registered in Scotland No. 45551.

66






Corporate governance

The company is committed to high standards of corporate governance, business integrity and professionalism in all its activities.

Throughout the year ended 31 December 2005, the company has complied with all of the provisions set out in the revised Combined Code issued by the Financial Reporting Council in July 2003 (the “Code”) except in relation to the authority reserved to the Board to make the final determination of the remuneration of the executive directors, which is explained below in the paragraph headed ‘Remuneration Committee’.

The company has also complied with the Smith Guidance on Audit Committees in all material respects.

Under the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, enhanced standards of corporate governance and business and financial disclosure apply to companies, including the company, with securities registered in the US. The Group complies with all currently applicable sections of the Act.

Board of directors

The Board is the principal decision-making forum for the company. It has overall responsibility for leading and controlling the company and is accountable to shareholders for financial and operational performance. The Board approves Group strategy and monitors performance. The Board has adopted a formal schedule of matters detailing key aspects of the company’s affairs reserved to it for its decision. This schedule is reviewed annually.

The roles of the Chairman and Group Chief Executive are distinct and separate, with a clear division of responsibilities. The Chairman leads the Board and ensures the effective engagement and contribution of all non-executive and executive directors. The Group Chief Executive has responsibility for all Group businesses and acts in accordance with the authority delegated by the Board. Responsibility for the development of policy and strategy and operational management is delegated to the Group Chief Executive and other executive directors.

All directors participate in discussing strategy, performance and the financial and risk management of the company. Meetings of the Board are structured to allow open discussion.

The Board met nine times during 2005 and was supplied with comprehensive papers in advance of each Board meeting covering the Group’s principal business activities. Members of the executive management attend and make regular presentations at meetings of the Board.

Board balance and independence

The Board currently comprises the Chairman, six executive directors and eleven non-executive directors. The Board functions effectively and efficiently, and is considered to be of an appropriate size in view of the scale of the company and the diversity of its businesses. The directors provide the Group with the knowledge, mix of skills, experience and networks of contacts required. The Board Committees contain directors with a variety of relevant skills and experience so that no undue reliance is placed on any individual.

The non-executive directors combine broad business and commercial experience with independent and objective judgement. The balance between non-executive and executive directors enables the Board to provide clear and effective leadership and maintain the highest standards of integrity across the company’s business activities. The names and biographies of all Board members are set out on page 61.

The composition of the Board is subject to continuing review and the provisions of the Code will be taken into account in respect of the balance of the Board. The Code requires the Board to determine whether its non-executive members are independent.

The Board currently comprises ten independent and seven non-independent directors (including executive directors), in addition to the Chairman. Sir Tom McKillop is Chairman-designate and Bob Scott has been nominated as the senior independent director.

The Board considers that all non-executive directors are independent for the purposes of the Code, with the exception of Bud Koch who was formerly Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of Charter One Financial, Inc. which was acquired by Citizens Financial Group, Inc. in 2004.

Re-election of directors

At each Annual General Meeting, one third of the directors retire and offer themselves for re-election and each director must stand for re-election at least once every three years. Any non-executive directors who have served for more than nine years will also stand for annual re-election and the Board may consider their independence at that time. The proposed reelection of directors is subject to prior review by the Board.

The names of directors standing for re-election at the 2006 Annual General Meeting are contained on page 63 and further information will be given in the Chairman’s letter to shareholders in relation to the company’s Annual General Meeting.

Information, induction and professional development

All directors receive accurate, timely and clear information on all relevant matters. Any requests for further information or clarification are dealt with or co-ordinated by the Group Secretary.

The Group Secretary is responsible for advising the Board, through the Chairman, on all governance matters. All directors have access to the advice and services of the Group Secretary who is responsible to the Board for ensuring that Board procedures are followed and that applicable rules and regulations are complied with. In addition, all directors are able, if necessary, to obtain independent professional advice at the company’s expense.

Each new director receives a formal induction, including visits to all the Group’s major businesses and meetings with senior management. The induction is tailored to the director’s specific requirements. Existing directors undertake such professional development as they consider necessary in assisting them to carry out their duties as directors.

67






Corporate governance continued

Performance evaluation

The annual performance evaluation of the Board and its Committees was undertaken in the autumn of 2005. The evaluation, which covered the operation and effectiveness of the Board, the Remuneration Committee and the Nominations Committee, was conducted by the Group Secretary using a detailed questionnaire and meetings with each director. Amongst the areas reviewed were the composition of the Board, Board processes and performance against objectives.

In addition, each director discussed his or her own performance with the Chairman and the senior independent director met individually with the executive directors and with the non-executive directors as a group without the Chairman present, to consider the Chairman’s performance. The report on the Board evaluation, which was designed to assist the Board in further improving its performance, was considered and discussed by the Board as a whole and specific actions are currently being implemented.

A review of the effectiveness of the Audit Committee was undertaken during the year by PricewaterhouseCoopers and was the subject of a separate report to the Board. Amongst the areas reviewed were the composition and performance of the Committee and the Committee’s role in relation to internal and external audit, risk management and financial reporting.

Board Committees

In order to provide effective oversight and leadership, the Board has established a number of Board Committees with particular responsibilities. The Committee chairmanship and membership are reviewed on a regular basis. The names and biographies of all Board Committee members are set out on page 61.

The terms of reference of the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations committees and the standard terms and conditions of the appointment of non-executive directors are available on the Group's website (www.rbs.com) and copies are available on request.

Audit Committee

All members of the Audit Committee are independent non-executive directors. The Audit Committee holds at least five meetings each year. The Audit Committee’s report is contained on pages 71 and 72.

Remuneration Committee

All members of the Remuneration Committee are independent non-executive directors. The Remuneration Committee holds at least three meetings each year.

The Remuneration Committee is responsible for assisting the Board in discharging its responsibilities and making all relevant disclosures in relation to the formulation and review of the Group’s executive remuneration policy. The Remuneration Committee makes recommendations to the Board on the remuneration arrangements for its executive directors and the Chairman. The Directors’ Remuneration Report is contained on pages 73 to 81.

Responsibility for determining the remuneration of executive directors has not been delegated to the Remuneration Committee, and in that sense the provisions of the Code have not been complied with. The Board as a whole reserves the authority to make the final determination of the remuneration of directors as it considers that this two stage process allows greater consideration and evaluation and is consistent with the unitary nature of the Board. No director is involved in decisions regarding his or her own remuneration.

Nominations Committee

The Nominations Committee comprises independent non-executive directors, under the chairmanship of the Chairman of the Board. The Nominations Committee meets as required.

The Nominations Committee is responsible for assisting the Board in the formal selection and appointment of directors. It considers potential candidates and recommends appointments of new directors to the Board. The appointments are based on merit and against objective criteria, including the time available to, and the commitment which will be required of, the potential director.

In addition, the Nominations Committee considers succession planning for the Chairman, Group Chief Executive and non-executive directors. The Nominations Committee takes into account the knowledge, mix of skills, experience and networks of contacts which are anticipated to be needed on the Board in the future. The Chairman, Group Chief Executive and non-executive directors meet to consider executive succession planning. No director is involved in decisions regarding his or her own succession.

The Board is aware of the other commitments of its directors and is satisfied that these do not conflict with their duties as non-executive directors of the company.

68






Meetings

The number of meetings of the Board and the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees and individual attendance by members is shown below.

    Board   Audit   Remuneration   Nominations









Total number of meetings                
in 2005        9   9   5   5









Number of meetings                
attended in 2005                









Sir George Mathewson        9       5









Sir Tom McKillop*        2       2









Lord Vallance**        4      









Sir Angus Grossart**        4      









Sir Fred Goodwin        9      









Mr Buchan        9   8   5  









Dr Currie        9     5  









Mr Fish        6      









Mr Hunter        9   9    









Mr Koch        9      









Mr MacHale        9   9    









Miss Mackay        9   9   5  









Mr Pell        9      









Mr Robertson**        3      









Sir Steve Robson        9   9    









Mr Scott        9     5   4









Mr Sutherland        8       4









Mr Watt        9      









* Sir Tom McKillop was appointed to the Board on 1 September 2005.

** Lord Vallance, Sir Angus Grossart and Iain Robertson retired from the Board on 20 April 2005.

Relations with shareholders

The company communicates with shareholders through the annual report and by providing information in advance of the Annual General Meeting. Individual shareholders can raise matters relating to their shareholdings and the business of the Group at any time throughout the year. Shareholders are given the opportunity to ask questions at the Annual General Meeting or submit written questions in advance. The chairmen of the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees are available to answer questions at the Annual General Meeting.

Communication with the company’s largest institutional shareholders is undertaken as part of the company’s investor relations programme. During the year, the directors received copies of analysts’ reports and a monthly report from the Group’s investor relations department which includes an analysis of share price movements, the Group’s performance against the sector, and key broker comments. In addition, information on major investor relations activities and changes to external ratings are provided. In 2005, the senior independent director attended results presentations to enhance his understanding of the views of major shareholders and would be available to shareholders if concerns could not be addressed through the normal channels. The arrangements used to ensure that directors develop an understanding of the views of major shareholders are considered as part of the annual Board performance evaluation.

The Chairman, Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director and, if appropriate, the senior independent director communicate shareholder views to the Board as a whole.

In 2005, a survey of investor perceptions was undertaken on behalf of the Board by independent advisers, and the findings were considered by the Board.

Internal control

The Board of directors is responsible for the Group’s system of internal control that is designed to facilitate effective and efficient operations and to ensure the quality of internal and external reporting and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In devising internal controls, the Group has regard to the nature and extent of the risk, the likelihood of it crystallising and the cost of controls. A system of internal control is designed to manage, but not eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against the risk of material misstatement, fraud or losses.

The Board has established a process for the identification, evaluation and management of the significant risks faced by the Group, which operated throughout the year ended 31 December 2005 and to 27 February 2006, the date the directors approved the Report and Accounts. This process is regularly reviewed by the Board and meets the requirements of the guidance ‘Internal Control: Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code’ issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales in 1999.

The effectiveness of the Group’s internal control system is reviewed regularly by the Board and the Audit Committee. Executive management committees or boards of directors in each of the Group’s businesses receive quarterly reports on significant risks facing their business and how they are being controlled. These reports are combined and submitted to the Board as quarterly risk and control assessments. Additional details of the Group’s approach to risk management are given in the ‘Risk management’ section of the ‘Operating and financial review’ on pages 38 to 58. The Audit Committee also receives regular reports from Group Risk Management and Group Internal Audit. In addition, the Group’s independent auditors present to the Audit Committee reports that include details of any significant internal control matters which they have identified. The system of internal controls of the authorised institutions and other regulated entities in the Group is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas. Additional details of the Group’s regulatory oversight are given in the Supervision and Regulation section on pages 205 to 208.

69






Corporate governance continued

Disclosure controls and procedures

As required by US regulations, the Group Chief Executive and the Group Finance Director have evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in the rules under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934). This evaluation has been considered and approved by the Board which has authorised the Group Chief Executive and the Group Finance Director to certify that as at 31 December 2005, the company’s disclosure controls and procedures were adequate and effective and designed to ensure that material information relating to the company and its consolidated subsidiaries would be made known to them by others within those entities.

Changes in internal controls

There was no change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

 

70






Audit Committee Report

The members of the Audit Committee are Archie Hunter (Chairman), Colin Buchan, Joe MacHale, Eileen Mackay, until her retirement on 31 December 2005, and Sir Steve Robson. All members of the Audit Committee are independent non-executive directors. The Audit Committee holds at least five meetings each year, two of which are held immediately prior to submission of the interim and annual financial statements to the Group Board. This core agenda is supplemented by additional meetings as required, four being added in 2005. Audit Committee meetings are attended by relevant executive directors, the internal and external auditors and risk management executives. At least twice per annum the Committee meets privately with the external auditors. The Audit Committee also visits business divisions and certain Group functions under a programme set at the beginning of each year.

The Board is satisfied that all the Audit Committee members have recent and relevant financial experience. Although the Board has determined that each Member of the Audit Committee is an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ and is independent, each as defined in the SEC rules under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and related guidance, the members of the Audit Committee are selected with a view to the expertise and experience of the Audit Committee as a whole, and the Audit Committee reports to the Board as a single entity. The designation of a director or directors as an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ does not impose on any such director any duties, obligations or liability that are greater than the duties, obligations and liability imposed on such director as a member of the Audit Committee and Board in the absence of such a designation. Nor does the designation of a director as an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ affect the duties, obligations or liability of any other member of the Board.

The Audit Committee is responsible for:

  • assisting the Board in discharging its responsibilities and in making all relevant disclosures in relation to the financial affairs of the Group;

  • reviewing accounting and financial reporting and regulatory compliance;

  • reviewing the Group’s systems of internal control; and

  • monitoring the Group’s processes for internal audit, risk management and external audit.

Full details of the responsibilities of the Audit Committee are available at www.rbs.com/content/corporate_responsibility/corporate_governance/downloads/group_audit.pdf.

The Audit Committee has adopted a policy on the engagement of the external auditors to supply audit and non-audit services, which takes into account relevant legislation regarding the provision of such services by an external audit firm. The Audit Committee reviews the policy annually and prospectively approves the provision of audit services and certain non-audit services by the external auditors.

Annual audit services include all services detailed in the annual engagement letter including the annual audit and interim reviews (including US reporting requirements), periodic profit verifications and reports to regulators including skilled persons reports commissioned by the Financial Services Authority (e.g. Reporting Accountants Reports).

Annual audit services also include statutory or non-statutory audits required by any Group companies that are not incorporated in the United Kingdom. Terms of engagement for these audits are agreed separately with management, and are consistent with those set out in the audit engagement letter, as local regulations permit.

The prospectively approved non-audit services include the following classes of service:

  • capital raising, including consents, comfort letters and relevant reviews of registration statements;

  • provision of accounting opinions relating to the financial statements of the Group;

  • provision of reports that, according to law or regulation, must be rendered by the external auditors;

  • tax compliance services;

  • corporate finance services relative to companies that will remain outside the Group; and

  • insolvency work relating to the Group’s customers.

The Audit Committee approves all other permitted non-audit services on a case by case basis. The relevant submissions by management outline the service required and confirm that the external auditor’s independence will not be compromised. In addition, the Audit Committee reviews and monitors the independence and objectivity of the external auditors when it approves non-audit work to be carried out by them, taking into consideration relevant legislation and ethical guidance.

Information on the audit and non-audit services carried out by the external auditors is detailed in Note 4 to the Group’s accounts.

The Audit Committee undertakes an annual evaluation to assess the independence and objectivity of the external auditors and the effectiveness of the audit process, taking into consideration relevant professional and regulatory requirements. The results of this evaluation are reported to the Board.

The Audit Committee makes recommendations to the Board for it to put to the Shareholders for their approval at the Annual General Meeting, in relation to the appointment, re-appointment and removal of Deloitte & Touche LLP as the external auditors and to approve the remuneration and terms of engagement of the external auditors.

71






Corporate governance continued

In 2004 KPMG conducted a review of the effectiveness of Group Internal Audit. It is intended that there will be an external review of the effectiveness of Group Internal Audit every three years, with internal reviews continuing in the intervening years. In 2005 the Audit Committee conducted a review of Group Internal Audit that involved cross Group participation and the external auditors.

During 2005 PricewaterhouseCoopers conducted an external review of the effectiveness of the Audit Committee. It is intended that there will be an external review of the effectiveness of the Audit Committee every three years, with internal reviews by the Board continuing in the intervening years.

In 2005 the Audit Committee reviewed the audit committee structure throughout the Group and as a result proposed to the Board a reorganisation and strengthening of the structure to ensure that audit committees would cover each separate Group business appropriately. That recommendation was accepted by the Board and is now being implemented.

 

72






Directors’ remuneration report

The Remuneration Committee

The members of the Remuneration Committee are Bob Scott (Chairman), Colin Buchan, Jim Currie and Eileen Mackay, until her retirement on 31 December 2005. All members of the Remuneration Committee are independent non-executive directors.

During the accounting period, the Remuneration Committee received advice from Watson Wyatt, Mercer Human Resource Consulting and Ernst & Young LLP on matters relating to directors’ remuneration in the UK (Watson Wyatt and Ernst & Young) and US (Mercer). In addition, the Remuneration Committee has taken account of the views of the Chairman of the Board and the Group Chief Executive on performance assessment of the executive directors.

In addition to advising the Remuneration Committee, Watson Wyatt provided professional services in the ordinary course of business, including actuarial advice and benefits administration services to subsidiaries of the Group and investment consulting advice to The Royal Bank of Scotland Pension Trustees Limited. Mercer Human Resource Consulting provided advice and support in connection with a range of benefits, pension actuarial and investment matters. Ernst & Young provided professional services in the ordinary course of business, including actuarial and corporate recovery advice.

Remuneration policy

The executive remuneration policy was approved by shareholders at the company’s Annual General Meeting in 2005. At the beginning of 2005, the Remuneration Committee decided to conduct a comprehensive review of all aspects of the executive remuneration package. A review of this depth had not been undertaken since 2000/2001. Its terms of reference were to examine all aspects of the executive remuneration strategy, policy and practice in light of the changing business make up and strategy of the Group and the evolution of best practice on executive remuneration. Following this review, the Remuneration Committee made no change to the overall executive remuneration policy, which is set out below. However, as a result of this review, the Group is making a number of changes to executive director remuneration practice which are described below.

The objective of the executive remuneration policy is to provide, in the context of the company’s business strategy, remuneration in form and amount which will attract, motivate and retain high calibre executives. In order to achieve this objective, the policy is framed around the following core principles:

  • Total rewards will be set at levels that are competitive within the relevant market, taking each executive director’s remuneration package as a whole.

  • Total potential rewards will be earned through achievement of demanding performance targets based on measures consistent with shareholder interests over the short, medium and longer-term.

  • Remuneration arrangements will strike an appropriate balance between fixed and performance-related rewards. Performance- related elements will comprise the major part of executive remuneration packages. See illustrative charts below.

  • Incentive plans and performance metrics will be structured to be robust through the business cycle.

  • Remuneration arrangements will be designed to support the company’s business strategy, to promote appropriate teamwork and to conform to best practice standards.

The above diagram has been prepared to illustrate the use of performance metrics in the total compensation package. For the Group Chief Executive 22% of the package is fixed and 78% is performance related. For the other executive directors, 28% is fixed and 72% is performance related. Values are entered on the basis of on target performance; long term incentives are shown at the approximate expected value at grant. Pension and other benefits have been excluded. Financial metrics include profit growth, cost control and ROE.

The non-executive directors’ fees are reviewed annually by the Board, on the recommendation of its Chairman. The level of remuneration reflects the responsibility and time commitment of directors and the level of fees paid to non-executive directors of comparable major UK companies. Non-executive directors do not participate in any incentive or performance plan.

The Remuneration Committee approves the remuneration arrangements of senior executives below Board level who are members of the Group Executive Management Committee, on the recommendation of the Group Chief Executive, and reviews all long-term incentive arrangements which are operated by the Group.

Components of executive remuneration
UK based directors
Salary

Salaries are reviewed annually as part of total remuneration, having regard to remuneration packages received by executives of comparable companies. The Remuneration Committee uses a range of survey data from remuneration consultants and reaches individual salary decisions taking account of the remuneration environment and the performance and responsibilities of the individual director.

Benefits

UK-based executive directors are eligible to participate in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (“the RBS Fund”).

73






Directors’ remuneration report continued

The RBS Fund is a non-contributory defined benefit fund which provides pensions and other benefits within Inland Revenue limits. Certain directors receive additional pension and life assurance benefits in excess of Inland Revenue limits. Details of pension arrangements of directors are shown on page 81.

From April 2006, new tax legislation will apply to UK pensions; in particular any pension in excess of the Lifetime Allowance will be subject to additional taxation. The Group will allow directors and employees whose benefits do, or are likely to exceed the Lifetime Allowance to opt-out of future tax-approved pension provision. In such cases the Group will pay the individual a salary supplement in lieu of pension provision. The Group will not meet the cost of any additional tax that individuals may incur as a result of their benefits exceeding the new Lifetime or Annual Allowances.

Executive directors are eligible to receive a choice of various employee benefits or a cash equivalent, on a similar basis to other employees. In addition, as employees, executive directors are eligible also to participate in Sharesave, Buy As You Earn and the Group profit sharing scheme, which currently pays up to 10 per cent of salaries, depending on the Group’s performance. These schemes are not subject to performance conditions since they are operated on an all-employee basis. Executive directors also receive death-in-service benefits.

Short-term annual incentives

As part of the overall review of the executive remuneration package referred to above, short term incentive levels were considered and the Remuneration Committee agreed to increase annual incentive potentials to reflect market practice and the setting of stretching new targets. As a result, from 2006 individual UK-based executive directors will normally have a maximum annual incentive potential of between 160% and 200% of salary. These will typically focus from year to year on the delivery of a combination of appropriate Group and individual financial and operational targets approved by the Remuneration Committee.

For the Group Chief Executive, the annual incentive is primarily based on specific Group financial performance measures such as operating profit, earnings per share growth and return on equity. The remainder of the Group Chief Executive’s annual incentive is based on a range of non-financial measures which may include measures relating to shareholders, customers and staff.

For the other executive directors a proportion of the annual incentive is based on Group financial performance and a proportion on division financial performance. The remainder of each individual’s annual incentive opportunity is dependent on achievement of a range of non-financial measures, specific objectives and key result areas. Divisional performance includes measures such as operating income, costs, bad debts or operating profit. Non-financial measures include customer measures (e.g. customer numbers, customer satisfaction), staff measures (e.g. employee engagement) and efficiency and change objectives.

For exceptional performance, as measured by the achievement of significant objectives, executive directors may be awarded incentive payments of up to 200% of salary, or 250% of salary, in the case of the Group Chief Executive. This discretion to pay additional bonuses for exceptional performance was last used in 2002 to recognise the successful integration of Natwest.

Long-term incentives

The company provides long-term incentives in the form of share options and share or share equivalent awards. Their objective is to encourage the creation of value over the long-term and to align the rewards of the executive directors with the returns to shareholders.

The Group’s policy is to encourage executives to hold shares and retain vested long-term incentives. This policy has successfully built high levels of shareholdings and equity participation amongst executives. A table showing directors’ interests in shares and the estimated value of the shares and vested long term incentives held by executives is shown on page 82. In light of the already high levels of share price exposure, the Remuneration Committee is not proposing to introduce mandatory or guideline shareholding requirements for executives at this time.

Medium-term performance plan

The medium-term performance plan (“MPP”) was approved by shareholders in April 2001. Each executive director is eligible for an annual award under the plan in the form of share or share equivalent awards. Whilst the rules of the plan allow awards over shares worth up to one and a half times earnings, the Remuneration Committee has adopted a policy of granting awards based on a multiple of salary. Normally awards are made at one times salary to executive directors, with one and a half times salary being granted in the case of the Group Chief Executive. No changes will be made to this policy without prior consultation with shareholders. All awards under the plan are subject to three-year performance targets.

The award in 2005 is subject to two performance measures. First, the annual growth in the company’s earnings per share (“EPS”) must exceed the annualised growth of the Retail Prices Index (“RPI”) plus three per cent. If this condition is satisfied, the company’s total shareholder return (“TSR”) is compared with the TSR of a comparator group of companies. The companies are Aviva plc; Banco Santander Central Hispano S.A. (“BSCH”); Barclays PLC; Citigroup inc.; HBOS plc; HSBC Holdings PLC; Legal & General Group plc; Lloyds TSB Group plc; Prudential plc and Standard Chartered PLC. Awards made under the plan will not vest if the company’s TSR is below the median of the comparator group. Achievement of the EPS target and median TSR performance against the comparator companies will result in vesting of 25% of the award, increasing to 200% if the company achieves a TSR ranking at first position in the comparator group and exceeds the TSR of the second placed comparator company by at least 34%.

During 2005, the Remuneration Committee reviewed all elements of the plan including the performance conditions, the vesting schedule and the comparator group. As a result, it is intended that for awards made from 2006, 50% of the award will vest on a relative TSR measure and 50% will vest on growth in adjusted EPS over the three year performance period.

74






The introduction of the EPS element is designed to ensure that the plan includes a performance measure which is in the clear line of sight for the participants and which reflects the business strategy for the next few years.

For the TSR element, vesting will be based on the level of outperformance by the Group of the median of the comparator group TSR over the performance period. The Remuneration Committee believes this method of measuring relative TSR performance provides a more approriate measure of management performance. This change is permitted under the rules of the plan. Awards made under the plan will not vest if the company’s TSR is below the median of the comparator group. Achievement of median TSR performance against comparator companies will result in vesting of 25% of the award. Outperformance of median TSR performance by up to 9% will result in vesting on a straight-line basis from 25% to 125%, outperformance by 9% to 18% will result in vesting on a straight-line basis from 125% to 200%. Vesting at 200% will occur if the company outperforms the median TSR performance of the comparator group by at least 18%.

Following the Remuneration Committee’s review of the plan, the comparator group was amended to comprise UK and international banking groups, which the Remuneration Committee considers more appropriate in the context of the Group’s business and performance. For awards made from 2006, the companies in the comparator group will be ABN Amro Holdings N.V.; BSCH; Barclays PLC; Citigroup Inc; HBOS plc; HSBC Holdings plc; Lloyds TSB Group plc and Standard Chartered PLC.

For the EPS element, the level of EPS growth over the three year period will be calculated by comparing the adjusted EPS in the year prior to the year of grant with that in the final year of the performance period. Each year the vesting schedule for the EPS growth measure will be agreed by the Remuneration Committee at the time of grant, having regard to the business plan, performance relative to comparators and analysts’ forecasts.

Options

The executive share option scheme was approved by shareholders in January 1999. The operation of the scheme was reviewed as part of the overall executive remuneration review and the Remuneration Committee is satisfied that no changes are required. Each executive director is eligible for an annual grant of an option, exercisable at the market price at the time of grant. Options granted to executive directors are typically over shares worth one and a quarter times salary with an upper maximum in appropriate circumstances of two and a half times salary, over shares at the market value at date of grant. No payment is made by the executive director on the grant of an option award.

All executive share option grants are subject to a performance condition which is reviewed by the Remuneration Committee annually. The performance target is currently that the options are exercisable only if, over a three year period from the date of grant, the growth in the company’s EPS has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus nine per cent. This EPS performance target, which is consistent with market practice, measures underlying financial performance and represents a long-term test of performance. For awards made from 2004, there is no re-testing of the performance condition.

US based director – Lawrence Fish

Lawrence Fish's total remuneration package was reviewed in 2004 by the Remuneration Committee as a result of the acquisition of Charter One and his changing RBS responsibilities in North America. A new cash long-term incentive plan was approved by shareholders at the 2005 Annual General Meeting. The remuneration policy for Mr Fish is as follows:

Base salary is set having regard to the levels of base salary in other US banks and the appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration for US based executives of UK listed companies operating within the corporate governance frameworks of the UK.

Benefits Mr Fish accrues pension benefits under a number of arrangements in the US. Details are provided on page 81. In addition he is entitled to receive other benefits on a similar basis to other Citizens employees.

Short term performance rewards take the form of an annual incentive plan which rewards the achievement of Group, business unit and individual financial and non-financial targets. The normal maximum annual bonus potential is two times salary, although additional amounts to a maximum of a further two times salary may be awarded, at the discretion of the Board, for exceptional performance as measured by the achievement of significant objectives.

Long term incentives consist of the following components:

  • The two grants made under the Citizens Phantom 2000 Plan vested on 1 January 2005 and 1 January 2006, respectively.
    The value of units at the time of vesting is performance- linked and is based on the cumulative economic profit generated by Citizens, the trend in economic profit and on the external market trends in the US banking sector, using price/earnings ratios of comparator US banks. This measure was chosen to establish a clear link between the potential incentive and the performance of Citizens. No other grants will be made under this plan.

  • A grant under the RBS medium-term performance plan within the levels, and on the same terms, available to UK based executives.

  • A grant under the executive share option scheme within the levels, and on the same terms, available to UK based executives.

  • A grant under the new Citizens Long Term Incentive Plan. Performance is measured on a combination of Growth in Profit before Tax and Relative Return on Equity based on a comparison of Citizens with comparator US banks. The targets for this plan are set on an annual basis over the three year term of the grant.

75






Directors’ remuneration report continued

Total shareholder return performance

The undernoted performance graph illustrates the performance of the company over the past five years in terms of total shareholder return compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 index. This index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies. The total shareholder return for the company and the FTSE 100 have been rebased to 100 for 2000.

Total shareholder return

Service contracts

The company’s policy in relation to the duration of contracts with directors is that executive directors’ contracts generally continue until termination by either party, subject to the required notice, or until retirement date. The notice period under the service contracts of executive directors will not normally exceed 12 months. In relation to newly recruited executive directors, subject to the prior approval of the Remuneration Committee, the notice period from the employing company required to terminate the contract will not normally exceed 12 months unless there is a clear case for this. Where a longer period of notice is initially approved on appointment, it will normally be structured such that it will automatically reduce to 12 months in due course.

All new service contracts for executive directors will be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee. Those contracts will normally include standard clauses covering the performance review process, the company’s normal disciplinary procedure, and terms for dismissal in the event of failure to perform or in situations involving actions in breach of the Group’s policies.

Any compensation payment made in connection with the departure of an executive director will be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee, having regard to the terms of the service contract and the reasons for termination.

Information regarding executive directors’ service contracts is summarised in the table and notes below.

Name   Date of current contract/
Employing company
  Normal retirement age   Notice period –
from company
  Notice period –
from executive









Sir Fred Goodwin   1 August 1998   60   12 months   6 months
    The Royal Bank of Scotland plc            
                 
Mr Pell   20 February 2006   60   12 months   6 months
    The Royal Bank of Scotland plc            
                 
Mr Watt*   28 September 2000   60   12 months   6 months
    The Royal Bank of Scotland plc            
                 
Mr Fish   18 February 2004   65   12 months   12 months
    Citizens Financial Group, Inc.            









*  Mr Watt resigned as a director on 31 January 2006.

76






Except as noted below, in the event of severance of contract where any contractual notice period is not worked, the employing company may pay a sum to the executive in lieu of this period of notice. Any such payment would, at maximum, comprise base salary and a cash value in respect of fixed benefits (including pension plan contributions). In the event of situations involving breach of the employing company’s policies resulting in dismissal, reduced or no payments may be made to the executive. Depending on the circumstances of the termination of employment, the executive may be entitled, or the Remuneration Committee may exercise its discretion to allow, the executive to exercise outstanding awards under long-term incentive arrangements subject to the rules of relevant plan. The exception to these severance arrangements relates only to Mr Fish.

If Mr Fish’s contract is terminated without cause, or if he terminates the contract for good reason (as defined in the contract), he is entitled to a lump sum payment to compensate him for the loss of 12 months salary plus annual bonus. Mr Fish would also be entitled to receive for this period health, life insurance and long term disability coverage and any other benefits determined in accordance with the plans, policies and practices of Citizens at the time of termination. The Remuneration Committee has been advised that these termination provisions are less generous than the current market practice in the US.

Group Finance Director – Guy Whittaker

Guy Whittaker was appointed Group Finance Director on 1 February 2006 and has a service contract with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc dated 19 December 2005. This service contract provides for a normal retirement age of 60 and may be terminated by either party giving 12 months notice to the other.

In accordance with normal market practice, Mr Whittaker will be recompensed for the value of restricted stock and unvested options he forfeited on his departure from his previous employer. In this respect he will be provided with ordinary shares in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc worth £1,000,000 and restricted stock worth £1,450,000, the latter vesting in 3 tranches between 2007 and 2009. As Mr Whittaker forfeited his performance bonus from his previous employer, he received a cash payment of £1,195,181 and will receive restricted stock worth £962,785, the latter vesting in 4 tranches between 2007 and 2010. The provision of ordinary shares and the vesting of restricted stock is subject to certain conditions set out in Mr Whittaker’s service contract.

As Group Finance Director, Mr Whittaker will be eligible to receive short-term annual incentives and long-term incentives on the same basis as other UK-based executive directors.

Chairman and non-executive directors

The original date of appointment as a director of the company and the latest date for the next re-election are as follows:

    Date first appointed   Latest date for
next re-election





Sir George Mathewson   1 September 1987   retires 28 April 2006
Sir Tom McKillop   1 September 2005   2006
Mr Buchan   1 June 2002   2006
Dr Currie   28 November 2001   2008
Mr Hunter   1 September 2004   2008
Mr Koch   29 September 2004   2008
Mrs Kong   1 January 2006   2006
Mr MacHale   1 September 2004   2008
Sir Steve Robson   25 July 2001   2008
Mr Scott   31 January 2001   2006
Mr Sutherland   31 January 2001   2006





The non-executive directors do not have service contracts or notice periods although they have letters of engagement reflecting their responsibilities and commitments. Under the company’s articles of association, all directors must retire by rotation and seek re-election by shareholders at least every three years. The dates in the table above reflect the latest date for re-election. However, in 2007, at least one-third of the Board will retire by rotation as required by the company’s articles of association. No compensation would be paid to the Chairman or to any non-executive director in the event of early termination.

The tables and explanatory notes on pages 78 to 80 report the remuneration of each director for the year ended 31 December 2005 and have been audited by the company’s auditors, Deloitte & Touche LLP.

77






Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ remuneration                    
    Salary/
fees
£000
  Performance
bonus*
£000
  Benefits
£000
  2005
Total
£000
  2004
Total
£000











Chairman                    
Sir George Mathewson   579     28   607   581
                     
Executive directors                    
Sir Fred Goodwin   1,090   1,760   43   2,893   2,522
Mr Fish **   824   1,649   36   2,509   2,305
Mr Pell   751   825   10   1,586   1,403
Mr Watt   669   726   4   1,399   1,268











* includes 10% profit sharing
** Mr Fish is a non-executive director of Textron Inc. and retains the fees paid to him in this respect. For 2005, he received a remuneration package from Textron Inc. equivalent to approximately US$75,400.

Non-executive directors   Board fees
£000
  Board
committee fees
£000
  2005
Total
£000
  2004
Total
£000









Deputy Chairman                
Sir Tom McKillop (appointed 1 September 2005)   67     67  
Vice-chairmen                
Lord Vallance of Tummel (retired 20 April 2005)   33     33   100
Sir Angus Grossart (retired 20 April 2005)   33     33   100
                 
Mr Buchan   55   54   109   100
Dr Currie   55   13   68   60
Mr Hunter   55   58   113   22
Mr Koch   55     55   12
Mr MacHale   55   25   80   22
Miss Mackay (retired 31 December 2005)   55   38   93   75
Mr Robertson (retired 20 April 2005)   33     33   100
Sir Steve Robson   55   25   80   65
Mr Scott*   100     100   73
Mr Sutherland   55   5   60   53









In addition to his role as a non-executive director, Mr Koch has an agreement with Citizens Financial Group, Inc. to provide consulting services for a period of three years following the acquisition by Citizens of Charter One Financial, Inc. For these services Mr Koch receives $402,500 per annum.
* Mr Scott’s senior independent director fee covers all Board and Board Committee work including Chairmanship of the Remuneration Committee.
  No director received any expense allowances chargeable to UK income tax or compensation for loss of office/termination payment. The non-executive directors did not receive any bonus payments or benefits.

78






Share options

Options to subscribe for ordinary shares of 25p each in the company granted to, and exercised by, directors during the year to 31 December 2005 are included in the table below:

    Options exercised in 2005          
    Options held at
1 January
2005
  Options
granted in
2005
      Market price at
date of exercise
£
  Option price
£
  Options held at 31 December 2005  
        Number       Number   Exercise period  
















Sir George Mathewson   69,257               9.33   69,257   11.05.01 – 10.05.08  
    147,247               7.81   147,247   29.03.03 – 28.03.10  
    150               12.40   150   09.08.03 – 08.08.06 *
    20,100               17.18   20,100   14.08.04 – 13.08.11  
    1,347               13.64   1,347   01.10.08 – 31.03.09 *
    19,500               18.18   19,500   14.03.05 – 13.03.12  
    36,400               12.37   36,400   13.03.06 – 12.03.13  
    36,044               17.34   36,044   11.03.07 – 10.03.14  
        41,570           17.29   41,570   10.03.08 – 09.03.15  
















    330,045   41,570               371,615      
















Sir Fred Goodwin   164,571               8.75   164,571   07.12.01 – 06.12.08  
    2,963               11.18   2,963   04.03.02 – 03.03.09  
    27,306               11.97   27,306   03.06.02 – 02.06.09  
    153,648               7.81   153,648   29.03.03 – 28.03.10  
    43,700               17.18   43,700   14.08.04 – 13.08.11  
    1,713       1,713   16.19   9.85        
    41,300               18.18   41,300   14.03.05 – 13.03.12  
    72,800               12.37   72,800   13.03.06 – 12.03.13  
    144,175               17.34   144,175   11.03.07 – 10.03.14  
        159,051           17.29   159,051   10.03.08 – 09.03.15  
        1,267           13.04   1,267   01.10.10 – 31.03.11 *
















    652,176   160,318   1,713           810,781      
















Mr Fish   107,877               9.33   107,877   11.05.01 – 10.05.08  
    150               12.40   150   09.08.03 – 08.08.06 *
        37,603           17.29   37,603   10.03.08 – 09.03.15  
















    108,027   37,603               145,630      
















Mr Pell   51,216               7.81   51,216   29.03.03 – 28.03.10  
    29,100               17.18   29,100   14.08.04 – 13.08.11  
    27,600               18.18   27,600   14.03.05 – 13.03.12  
    49,800               12.37   49,800   13.03.06 – 12.03.13  
    47,217               17.34   47,217   11.03.07 – 10.03.14  
        50,607           17.29   50,607   10.03.08 – 09.03.15  
















    204,933   50,607               255,540      
















Mr Robertson**   56,635               9.33   56,635   11.05.01 – 10.05.08  
    82,654               11.18   82,654   04.03.02 – 03.03.09  
    128,040               7.81   128,040   29.03.03 – 28.03.10  
    36,400               17.18   36,400   14.08.04 – 13.08.11  
















    303,729                   303,729      
















Mr Watt***   70,148               12.83   70,148   04.09.03 – 03.09.10  
    23,300               17.18   23,300   14.08.04 – 13.08.11  
    22,100               18.18   22,100   14.03.05 – 13.03.12  
    42,500               12.37   42,500   13.03.06 – 12.03.13  
    43,253               17.34   43,253   11.03.07 – 10.03.14  
        57,259           17.29   57,259   10.03.08 – 09.03.15  
















    201,301   57,259               258,560      
















* Options held under the sharesave and option 2000 schemes, which are not subject to performance conditions.
** Mr Robertson retired from the Board on 20 April 2005.
*** Mr Watt resigned from the Board on 31 January 2006.

The performance conditions for options granted in 2005 are detailed on page 75.

79






Directors’ remuneration report continued

No options had their terms and conditions varied during the accounting period to 31 December 2005. No payment is required on the award of an option.

The executive share options which are exercisable from March 2002 onwards are subject to the satisfaction of an EPS growth target which provides that options are exercisable only if, over a three year period, the growth in the company’s EPS has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus 9%. In respect of executive share options exercisable before March 2002 the performance condition is that the growth in the company’s EPS over three years has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus 6%.

The market price of the company’s ordinary shares at 31 December 2005 was £17.55 and the range during the year to 31 December 2005 was £15.22 to £18.33.

In the ten year period to 31 December 2005, awards made using new issue shares under the company’s share plans represented 4.62% of the company’s issued ordinary share capital, leaving an available dilution headroom of 5.38%.

Medium Term Performance Plan

  Scheme interests
(share equivalents) at
1 January 2005
  Awards
granted
in 2005
  Market
price on
award
£
  Awards
vested in
2005*
  Awards
exercised
in 2005
  Market
price on
exercise
£
  Share interest
(share
equivalents) at
31 December 2005
  End of period
for qualifying
conditions to
be fulfilled

















Sir Fred Goodwin   93,040       16.35               93,040   vested 31.12.03
    33,855       18.59               33,855   vested 31.12.04
    78,398       17.22   Nil             vested 31.12.05
    86,506       17.34               86,506   31.12.06
        95,431   17.29               95,431   31.12.07

















    291,799                       308,832    

















Mr Fish   35,274       17.34               35,274   31.12.06
        10,495   17.29               10,495   31.12.07

















    35,274                       45,769    

















Mr Pell   22,026       16.35               22,026   vested 31.12.03
    22,570       18.59       22,570   17.87     vested 31.12.04
    35,715       17.22   Nil             vested 31.12.05
    37,774       17.34               37,774   31.12.06
        40,486   17.29               40,486   31.12.07

















    118,085                       100,286    

















Mr Robertson**   77,533       16.35       77,533   17.05     vested 31.12.03

















Mr Watt   18,877       18.59               18,877   vested 31.12.04
    30,488       17.22   Nil             vested 31.12.05
    34,603       17.34               34,603   31.12.06
        38,173   17.29               38,173   31.12.07

















    83,968                       91,653    

















* Awards were granted on 12 June 2003. The vesting level was nil and these awards have now lapsed.
** The exercise of awards for Mr Robertson occurred after his retirement from the Group Board on 20 April 2005.

Note:
For any awards that have vested, participants holding option-based awards can exercise their right over the underlying share equivalents at any time up to ten years from the date of grant.

No variation was made to any of the terms of the plan during the year. The performance measures are detailed on pages 74 and 75.

Phantom 2000 Plan   Awards granted during year        
    Phantom 2000 units at
1 January 2005
  Units awarded
during year
  Market price
on award
  End of the period for
qualifying conditions
to be fulfilled
  Benefits received
during year
  Phantom 2000 units at
31 December 2005













Mr Fish   1,000,000           01.01.04   US$7,670,900  
    1,000,000           01.01.05       1,000,000













    2,000,000                   1,000,000













No variation was made to any of the terms of the plan during the year. The performance measures are detailed on page 74.

Citizens Long Term Incentive Plan                
    Interests at 1 January 2005   Awards granted during year   Benefits received during year   Interests at 31 December 2005









Mr Fish   LTIP* awards for the   LTIP award for the   LTIP award for the   LTIP* awards for the
    3 year periods:   3 year period:   3 year period:   3 year periods:
    01.01.02 – 31.12.04       01.01.02 – 31.12.04    
    01.01.03 – 31.12.05       was US$1,025,394   01.01.03 – 31.12.05
    01.01.04 – 31.12.06           01.01.04 – 31.12.06
        01.01.05 – 31.12.07       01.01.05 – 31.12.07









* A new cash LTIP was approved by shareholders at the company’s Annual General Meeting in April 2005. Details are given on page 75. This replaces the previous LTIP which provided for a target payment of 60% of average salary over the three year period and a maximum payment of 105% of average salary.

80






Directors’ pension arrangements

During the year, Sir Fred Goodwin, Gordon Pell, Iain Robertson and Fred Watt participated in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (“the RBS Fund”). The RBS Fund is a defined benefit fund which provides pensions and other benefits within Inland Revenue limits.

The pension entitlements of Sir Fred Goodwin, Mr Pell, Mr Robertson and Mr Watt within the RBS Fund are restricted by Inland Revenue limits as set out in the Finance Act 1989. Additional life assurance cover in excess of these limits is provided by a separate arrangement. Arrangements have been made to provide Sir Fred Goodwin and Mr Pell with additional pension benefits on a defined benefit basis outwith the RBS Fund. The figures shown below include the accrual in respect of these arrangements. Mr Watt was provided with additional pension benefits on a defined contribution basis and contributions made in the year are shown below.

No changes are proposed to the level or form of pension benefits for any of the current directors as a result of the changes in pension legislation which come into force in April 2006 although as stated above directors will be able to opt out of tax-approved pension provision if they wish and receive a salary supplement in lieu. In addition consideration will be given to funding a greater proportion of the benefits.

Of the total transfer value as at 31 December 2005 shown, 25% relates to benefits in funded pension schemes. Sir George Mathewson receives life insurance cover under an individual arrangement. The non-executive directors do not accrue pension benefits, other than Mr Robertson who continued to accrue benefits in the RBS Fund after his appointment as a non-executive director.

Lawrence Fish accrues pension benefits under a number of arrangements in the US. Defined benefits are built up under the Citizens’ Qualified Plan, Excess Plan and Supplemental Executive Retirement Arrangement. In addition, he is a member of two defined contribution arrangements – a Qualified 401(k) Plan and an Excess 401(k) Plan.

As in the 2004 Report and Accounts, disclosure of these benefits has been made in accordance with the United Kingdom Listing Authority Listing Rules and the Combined Code and with the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002.

Defined benefit arrangements   Age at
31 December
2005
    Accrued
entitlement at
31 December
2005
000 p.a.
    Additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2005
000 p.a.
    Additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2005*
000 p.a.
    Transfer
value as at
31 December
2005
000
    Transfer
value as at
31 December
2004
000
    Increase
in transfer
value during
year ended
31 December
2005
000
    Transfer value
for the additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2005*
000
 

























                                                 
Sir Fred Goodwin   47     £444     £63     £51     £5,119     £3,591     £1,528     £592  
                                                 
Mr Pell   55     £302     £55     £47     £5,092     £3,592     £1,500     £790  
                                                 
Mr Robertson   60     £37     £4     £3     £676     £565     £111     £48  
                                                 
Mr Watt   45     £9     £2     £2     £96     £62     £34     £19  
                                                 
Mr Fish   61     $1,384     $244     $244     $13,347     $10,046     $3,301     $2,350  


























* net of statutory revaluation applying to deferred pensions
  Notes:
(1) There is a significant difference in the form of disclosure required by the Combined Code and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002. The former requires the disclosure of the additional pension earned during the year and the transfer value equivalent to this pension based on stock market conditions at the end of the year. The latter requires the disclosure of the difference between the transfer value at the start and end of the year and is therefore dependent on the change in stock market conditions over the course of the year. The above disclosure has been made in accordance with the Combined Code and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002.
(2) Mr Robertson continued to accrue pension during his service with the Group in 2005 after resignation as a director. The figures above include the pension accrued during this subsequent service.
(3) The transfer values disclosed above do not represent a sum paid or payable to the individual director. Instead they represent a potential liability of the company /pension scheme.
(4) No allowance is made in these transfer values for any enhanced benefits that may become payable on early retirement.
(5) The proportion of benefits represented by funded pension schemes for Sir Fred Goodwin, Gordon Pell and Lawrence Fish is 3%, 69% and 3% respectively. All benefits for Iain Robertson and Fred Watt are in funded pension schemes.
(6)

Following Mr Pell’s appointment as Executive Chairman, Retail Markets, he was awarded enhanced pension benefits.

(7) In accordance with US market practice, Mr Fish’s pensionable remuneration is limited to $4 million per annum.

Contributions and allowances paid in the year ended 31 December 2005 under defined contribution arrangements were:

    2005     2004
    000     000






Mr Watt   £144     £128
Mr Fish   $139     $91








81






Directors’ interests in shares

  Shares
beneficially
owned at
1 January 2005
or date of
appointment
if later
  31 December 2005  











    Shares
owned
beneficially
  Vested
MPP shares
or share
equivalents
  Vested
share
options
  Total     Value as at
31 December
2005
(2,3)
 














Chairman                          
Sir George Mathewson 250,816   260,159     256,254   516,413   £ 6,577,478  
Executive directors                          
Sir Fred Goodwin 64,960   66,762   126,895   433,488   627,145   £ 6,530,847  
Mr Fish 11,120   11,120     108,027   119,147   £ 1,082,677  
Mr Pell 582   582   22,026   107,916   130,524   £ 906,381  
Mr Watt 58,408   59,111   18,877   115,548   193,536   £ 1,708,409  















    Shares
beneficially
owned at
1 January 2005
or date of
appointment
if later
  Shares
beneficially
owned at
31 December
2005





Non-executive directors        
Sir Tom McKillop     30,000
Mr Buchan   5,000   5,000
Dr Currie     556
Mr Hunter   1,500   3,500
Mr Koch   20,000   20,000
Mr MacHale   10,000   10,000
Mr Scott   2,448   4,448
Mr Sutherland     5,590





No other director had an interest in the company’s ordinary shares during the year.

On both 9 January 2006 and 7 February 2006, 7 ordinary shares of 25p each were acquired by Sir Fred Goodwin under the Group’s Buy As You Earn share scheme.

Notes:
(1) The numbers shown in this table are taken from the audited disclosures shown elsewhere in this Annual Report.
(2) The value is based on the share price at 31 December 2005, which was £17.55. During the year ended 31 December 2005 the share price ranged from £15.22 to £18.33.
(3) The notional value of the vested share options has been calculated on the ‘in the money’ value.

As of 1 March 2006, Mr Cameron and Mr Fisher (who were each appointed to the Board in March 2006 and are thus not included in the above charts) held 1,827 and 3,924 ordinary shares of the company, respectively. In addition, below are tables that set forth certain information regarding the Share options held by Mr Cameron and Mr Fisher as of 1 March 2006 and awards made to Mr Cameron and Mr Fisher under the company’s Medium Term Performance Plan as of 1 March 2006, respectively. For further information regarding the Medium Term Performance Plan, see pages 74 to 75.

  Options held at
1 March 2006
  Option price   Exercise period

 
 
 
Mr Cameron   150   15.63   05.04.04 – 03.04.07
  1,865   9.85   01.10.07 – 31.03.08
  19,194   11.18   04.03.02 – 03.03.09
  38,411   7.81   29.03.03 – 28.03.10
  26,200   17.18   14.08.04 – 13.08.11
  31,800   18.18   14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
  52,600   12.37   13.03.06 – 12.03.13*
  50,461   17.34   11.03.07 – 10.03.14*
  80,972   17.29   10.03.08 – 09.03.15*
 
   
  301,653    
 
   
Mr Fisher   283   13.07   01.10.06 – 31.03.07
  311   12.09   01.10.07 – 31.03.08
  145   13.04   01.10.08 – 31.03.09
  14,281   9.24   01.04.02 – 31.03.09
  33,291   7.81   29.03.03 – 28.03.10
  22,700   18.18   14.03.05 – 13.03.12
  40,500   12.37   13.03.06 – 12.03.13*
  39,648   17.34   11.03.07 – 10.03.14*
  60,729   17.29   10.03.08 – 09.03.15*
  1,501   17.18   14.08.04 – 13.08.11*
  20,299   17.18   14.08.04 – 13.08.11*
 
   
  233,688    
 
   

*Not yet vested as at 1 March 2006

Medium term performance plan

  Scheme interests at 1 March 2006   Option price   End of period for qualifying
conditions to be fulfilled

 
 
 
Mr Cameron   55,824   Nil   Vested 31.12.03
  22,078   Nil   Vested 31.12.04
  40,370   Nil   31.12.06
  46,270   Nil   31.12.07
 
   
  164,542    
 
   
Mr Fisher   20,000   Nil   Vested 31.12.03
  8,000   Nil   Vested 31.12.04
  31,719   Nil   31.12.06
  34,703   Nil   31.12.07
 
   
  94,422    
 
   


Note:  For any awards that have vested, participants holding option-based awards can exercise their right over the underlying share equivalents at any time up to ten years from the date of grant.

Preference shares

Mr Fish held 20,000 non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at 31 December 2005 (2004 – 20,000) and Mr Koch held 20,000 non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at 31 December 2005 (2004 – nil). No other director had an interest in the preference shares during the year.

Loan notes

No director had an interest in loan notes during the year.

The company’s Register of Directors’ Interests, which is open to inspection, contains full details of directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe.

No director held a non-beneficial interest in the shares of the company at 31 December 2005, at 1 January 2005 or date of appointment if later.

82






Statement of directors’ responsibilities

The Directors are required by Article 4 of the IAS Regulation (European Commission Regulation No 1606/2002) to prepare Group accounts, and as permitted by the Companies Act 1985 have elected to prepare Company accounts, for each financial year in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards. They are responsible for preparing accounts that present fairly the financial position, financial performance, and cash flows of the Group and the Company. In preparing those accounts, the directors are required to:

  • select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

  • make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and

  • state whether applicable accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the accounts.

The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and to enable them to ensure that the Annual report and accounts complies with the Companies Act 1985. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the company and the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

By order of the Board.

 
 
Miller McLean
Secretary
27 February 2006

83






[Page intentionally left blank]

 

 

84






Financial statements

 

Contents
86 Report of independent registered public accounting firm
88 Accounting policies
97 Consolidated income statement
98 Balance sheets
99 Statements of recognised
  income and expense
100 Cash flow statements
101 Notes on the accounts

 


85






Report of independent registered public accounting firm to the members of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

We have audited the financial statements of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (“the company”) and its subsidiaries (together “the Group”) for the year ended 31 December 2005 which comprise the accounting policies, the balance sheets as at 31 December 2005 and 2004, the consolidated income statement, the cash flow statements, the statements of recognised income and expense for each of the two years in the period ended 31 December 2005 and the related Notes 1 to 47. These financial statements have been prepared under the accounting policies set out therein. We have also audited the information in the part of the directors’ remuneration report that is described as having been audited.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors

As described in the ‘Statement of directors’ responsibilities’, the company’s directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with applicable United Kingdom law and International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as adopted for use in the European Union. They are also responsible for the preparation of the other information contained in the 2005 Annual Report including the directors’ remuneration report. Our responsibility is to audit the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited in accordance with relevant United Kingdom legal and regulatory requirements and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland).

We report to you our opinion as to whether the financial statements give a true and fair view in accordance with the relevant framework and whether the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985 and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. We also report to you if, in our opinion, the directors’ report is not consistent with the financial statements, if the company has not kept proper accounting records, if we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit, or if information specified by law regarding directors’ remuneration and transactions with the company and other members of the Group is not disclosed.

We also report to you if, in our opinion, the company has not complied with any of the four directors’ remuneration disclosure requirements specified for our review by the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority. These comprise the amount of each element in the remuneration package and information on share options, details of long term incentive schemes, and money purchase and defined benefit schemes. We give a statement, to the extent possible, of details of any non-compliance.

We review whether the corporate governance statement reflects the company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the Combined Code specified for our review by the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority, and we report if it does not. We are not required to consider whether the Board’s statements on internal control cover all risks and controls, or form an opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s corporate governance procedures or its risk and control procedures.

We read the directors’ report and the other information contained in the 2005 Annual Report as described in the contents section including the unaudited part of the directors’ remuneration report and consider the implications for our report if we become aware of any apparent misstatements or material inconsistencies with the financial statements.

Basis of audit opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland) issued by the Auditing Practices Board and with the standards of the United States Public Company Accounting Oversight Board. An audit includes examination, on a test basis, of evidence relevant to the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited. The Group is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purposes of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. It also includes an assessment of the significant estimates and judgements made by the directors in the preparation of the financial statements and of whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the circumstances of the company and the Group, consistently applied and adequately disclosed.

We planned and performed our audit so as to obtain all the information and explanations which we considered necessary in order to provide us with sufficient evidence to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or other irregularity or error. In forming our opinion, we also evaluated the overall adequacy of the presentation of information in the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited.

86






UK opinion

In our opinion:

  • the Group financial statements give a true and fair view, in accordance with IFRS as adopted for use in the European Union, of the state of the Group’s affairs as at 31 December 2005 and of its profit and cash flows for the year then ended;

  • the company financial statements give a true and fair view, in accordance with IFRS as adopted for use in the European Union as applied in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 1985, of the state of affairs of the company as at 31 December 2005;

  • the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985 and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Separate opinion in relation to IFRS

As explained in the Accounting policies, the Group in addition to complying with its legal obligation to comply with IFRS as adopted for use in the European Union, has also complied with the IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. In our opinion the financial statements give a true and fair view, in accordance with IFRS, of the state of the Group’s affairs as at 31 December 2005 and of its profit for the year then ended.

US opinion

In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Group as at 31 December 2005 and 2004 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended 31 December 2005 in conformity with IFRS.

IFRS vary in certain significant respects from accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Information relating to the nature and effect of such differences is presented in Note 46 to the financial statements.

 
Deloitte & Touche LLP
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors
Edinburgh, United Kingdom
27 February 2006

87






Accounting policies

1. Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards

The annual accounts have, for the first time, been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”), and interpretations issued by the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee of the IASB (together “IFRS”) as endorsed by the European Union (“EU”). The EU has not endorsed the complete text of IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’; it has relaxed some of the standard’s hedging requirements. The Group has not taken advantage of this relaxation and has adopted IAS 39 as issued by the IASB. The date of transition to IFRS for the Group and the company (The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc) and the date of their opening IFRS balance sheets was 1 January 2004. The company accounts have been presented in accordance with the Companies Act 1985.

The main differences between IFRS and previously applied generally accepted accounting principles (“UK GAAP”) and the effect of implementing IFRS on the Group and company balance sheets and shareholders’ funds as at 1 January and 31 December 2004 are set out on pages 162 to 170.

On initial adoption of IFRS, the Group (and the company where relevant) applied the following exemptions from the requirements of IFRS and from their retrospective application as permitted by IFRS 1 ‘First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’:

Business combinations – the Group has applied IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ to business combinations that occurred on or after 1 January 2004. Business combinations before that date have not been restated. Under UK GAAP, goodwill arising on acquisitions after 1 October 1998 was capitalised and amortised over its estimated useful economic life. Goodwill arising on acquisitions before 1 October 1998 was deducted from equity. The carrying amount of goodwill in the Group’s opening IFRS balance sheet was £13,131 million, its carrying value under UK GAAP as at 31 December 2003.

Fair value or revaluation as deemed cost – under UK GAAP, the Group’s freehold and long leasehold property occupied for its own use was recorded at valuation on the basis of existing use value. The Group has elected to use this valuation as at 31 December 2003 as deemed cost for its opening IFRS balance sheet. At this date, the carrying value under UK GAAP of freehold and long leasehold property occupied for own use was £2,391 million.

Compound financial instruments – the Group has not separated compound instruments between liability and equity components, as required by IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation’, where the liability component was not outstanding at 1 January 2004. UK GAAP did not permit compound instruments to be separated between liability and equity components on issue.

Derecognition – the Group has applied the derecognition requirements of IAS 39 to transactions occurring on or after 1 January 1992.

Share based payments – IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payment’ has been applied to equity instruments granted after 7 November 2002.

Implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 ‘Insurance Contracts’ (incorporating the adoption of FRS 27 ‘Life Assurance’) – as allowed by IFRS 1, the Group and the company implemented IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 with effect from 1 January 2005 without restating the income statement, balance sheet and notes for 2004. The Group has adopted the Amendment to IAS 39 ‘The Fair Value Option’ issued by the IASB in June 2005 also from 1 January 2005. The effect of implementing IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on the Group and company balance sheets and shareholders’ funds as at 1 January 2005 is set out on pages 171 to 172. In preparing the 2004 comparatives, UK GAAP principles then current have been applied to financial instruments. The main differences between UK GAAP and IFRS on financial instruments are summarised on pages 164 to 166.

IFRS 1 prohibits retrospective application of some aspects of IFRS:

Derecognition of financial assets and liabilities – non-derivative financial assets and liabilities derecognised before 1 January 1992 (the date from which the derecognition requirements of IAS 39 have been implemented) under the Group’s previous GAAP have not been recognised in its opening IFRS balance sheet.

Hedge accounting – hedging relationships of a type that does not qualify for hedge accounting under IAS 39 are not reflected in the Group’s opening IFRS balance sheet.

Discontinued operations and assets classified as held for sale – the Group has applied IFRS 5 ‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations’ from 1 January 2005.

The Group has adopted the Amendment ‘Actuarial Gains and Losses, Group Plans and Disclosures’ to IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’ from 1 January 2004. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full as they occur outside profit or loss.

2. Accounting convention

The company is incorporated in the UK and registered in Scotland. The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except that the following assets and liabilities are stated at their fair value: derivative financial instruments, held-for-trading financial assets and financial liabilities, financial assets and financial liabilities that are designated as at fair value through profit or loss, available-for-sale financial assets and investment property. Recognised financial assets and financial liabilities in fair value hedges are adjusted for changes in fair value in respect of the risk that is hedged.

3. Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the company and entities (including certain special purpose entities) controlled by the Group (its subsidiaries). Control exists where the Group has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of the entity; generally conferred by holding a majority of voting rights. On acquisition of a subsidiary, its identifiable assets, liabilities and

88






contingent liabilities are included in the consolidated accounts at their fair value. Any excess of the cost (the fair value of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed and equity instruments issued by the Group plus any directly attributable costs) of an acquisition over the fair value of the net assets acquired is recognised as goodwill. The interest of minority shareholders is stated at their share of the fair value of the subsidiary’s net assets.

The results of subsidiaries acquired are included in the consolidated income statement from the date control passes to the Group. The results of subsidiaries sold are included up until the Group ceases to control them.

All intra-group balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. The consolidated accounts are prepared using uniform accounting policies.

4. Revenue recognition

Interest income on financial assets that are classified as loans and receivables, available-for-sale or held-to-maturity and interest expense on financial liabilities other than those at fair value through profit or loss are determined using the effective interest rate method. The effective interest rate method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability (or group of financial assets or liabilities) and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the asset or liability. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash flows to the instrument’s initial carrying amount. Calculation of the effective interest rate takes into account fees receivable, that are an integral part of the instrument’s yield, premiums or discounts on acquisition or issue, early redemption fees and transaction costs. All contractual terms of a financial instrument are considered when estimating future cash flows.

Financial assets and financial liabilities held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss are recorded at fair value. Changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss together with dividends and interest receivable and payable.

Commitment and utilisation fees are determined as a percentage of the outstanding facility. If it is unlikely that a specific lending arrangement will be entered into, such fees are taken to profit or loss over the life of the facility otherwise they are deferred and included in the effective interest rate on the advance.

Fees in respect of services are recognised as the right to consideration accrues through the provision of the service to the customer. The arrangements are generally contractual and the cost of providing the service is incurred as the service is rendered. The price is usually fixed and always determinable. The application of this policy to significant fee types is outlined below.

Payment services: this comprises income received for payment services including cheques cashed, direct debits, Clearing House Automated Payments (the UK electronic settlement system) and BACS payments (the automated clearing house that processes direct debits and direct credits). These are generally charged on a per transaction basis. The income is earned when the payment or transaction occurs. Payment services income is usually charged to the customer’s account, monthly or quarterly in arrears. Accruals are raised for services provided but not charged at period end.

Card related services: fees from credit card business include:

Commission received from retailers for processing credit and debit card transactions: income is accrued to the income statement as the service is performed.

Interchange received: as issuer, the Group receives a fee (interchange) each time a cardholder purchases goods and services. The Group also receives interchange fees from other card issuers for providing cash advances through its branch and Automated Teller Machine networks. These fees are accrued once the transaction has taken place.

An annual fee payable by a credit card holder is deferred and taken to profit or loss over the period of the service i.e. 12 months.

Insurance brokerage: this is made up of fees and commissions received from the agency sale of insurance. Commission on the sale of an insurance contract is earned at the inception of the policy as the insurance has been arranged and placed. However, provision is made where commission is refundable in the event of policy cancellation in line with estimated cancellations.

Investment management fees: fees charged for managing investments are recognised as revenue as the services are provided. Incremental costs that are directly attributable to securing an investment management contract are deferred and charged as expense as the related revenue is recognised.

Insurance premiums – see note 11 below.

5. Pensions and other post-retirement benefits

The Group provides post-retirement benefits in the form of pensions and healthcare plans to eligible employees.

For defined benefit schemes, scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method and discounted at a rate that reflects the current rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent term and currency to the scheme liabilities. Scheme assets are measured at their fair value. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets over liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). The current service cost and any past service costs together with the expected return on scheme assets less the unwinding of the discount on the scheme liabilities is charged to operating expenses. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in the period in which they occur outside profit or loss and presented in the statement of recognised income and expense. Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised in the income statement when payable.

6. Intangible assets and goodwill

Intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged to profit or loss using methods that best reflect the economic benefits over their estimated useful

89






Accounting policies
continued

economic lives and is included in Depreciation and amortisation. The estimated useful economic lives are as follows:

      Core deposit intangibles 7 years
      Other acquired intangibles 5-10 years
      Computer software 3-5 years

Expenditure on internally generated goodwill and brands is written-off as incurred. Acquired goodwill being the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the Group’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the subsidiary, associate or joint venture acquired is initially recognised at cost and subsequently at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries and joint ventures is included in the balance sheet caption ‘Intangible fixed assets’ and that on associates within their carrying amounts. The gain or loss on the disposal of a subsidiary, associate or joint venture includes the carrying value of any related goodwill.

7. Property, plant and equipment

Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation (see below) and impairment losses. Where an item of property, plant and equipment comprises major components having different useful lives, they are accounted for separately. Property that is being constructed or developed for future use as investment property is classified as property, plant and equipment and stated at cost until construction or development is complete, at which time it is reclassified as investment property.

Depreciation is charged to profit or loss on a straight-line basis so as to write-off the depreciable amount of property, plant and equipment (including assets owned and let on operating leases (except investment property – see note 20 below)) over their estimated useful lives. The depreciable amount is the cost of an asset less its residual value. Land is not depreciated. Estimated useful lives are as follows:

      Freehold and long leasehold buildings    50 years
      Short leaseholds unexpired period
  of the lease
      Property adaptation costs 10 to 15 years
      Computer equipment up to 5 years
      Other equipment 4 to 15 years

8. Impairment of intangible assets and property, plant and equipment

At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether there is any indication that its intangible assets, or property, plant and equipment are impaired. If any such indication exists, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the asset and the impairment loss if any. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired. If an asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from those of other assets or groups of assets, recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs. The recoverable amount of an asset is the higher of its fair value less costs to sell and its value in use. Value in use is the present value of future cash flows from the asset or cash-generating unit discounted at a rate that reflects market interest rates adjusted for risks specific to the asset or cash generating unit that have not been reflected in the estimation of future cash flows. If the recoverable amount of an intangible or tangible asset is less than its carrying value, an impairment loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss and the carrying value of the asset reduced by the amount of the loss. A reversal of an impairment loss on intangible assets (excluding goodwill) or property, plant and equipment is recognised as it arises provided the increased carrying value does not exceed that which it would have been had no impairment loss been recognised. Impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed.

9. Foreign currencies

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling which is the functional currency of the company.

Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in profit or loss except for differences arising on cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations. Non-monetary items denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at fair value are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates the values were determined. Translation differences arising on non-monetary items measured at fair value are recognised in profit or loss except for differences arising on available-for-sale non-monetary financial assets, for example equity shares, which are included in the available-for-sale reserve in equity unless the asset is the hedged item in a fair value hedge.

The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are recognised directly in equity.

10. Leases

Contracts to lease assets are classified as finance leases if they transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset to the customer. Other contracts to lease assets are classified as operating leases.

Finance lease receivables are stated in the balance sheet at the amount of the net investment in the lease being the minimum lease payments and any unguaranteed residual value discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods so as to give a constant periodic rate of return before tax on the net investment. Unguaranteed residual values are subject to regular review to identify potential impairment. If there has been a reduction in the estimated unguaranteed residual value, the income allocation is revised and any reduction in respect of amounts accrued is recognised immediately.

90






Rental income from operating leases is credited to the income statement on a receivable basis over the term of the lease. Operating lease assets are included within Property, plant and equipment and depreciated over their useful lives (see note 7 above).

11. Insurance

General insurance

General insurance comprises short-duration contracts principally property and liability insurance contracts. Due to the nature of the products sold – retail-based property and casualty, motor, home and personal health insurance contracts – the insurance protection is provided on an even basis throughout the term of the policy.

Premiums from general insurance contracts are recognised in the accounting period in which they begin. Unearned premiums represent the proportion of the net premiums that relate to periods of insurance after the balance sheet date and are calculated over the period of exposure under the policy, on a daily basis, 24th’s basis or allowing for the estimated incidence of exposure under policies which are longer than twelve months. Provision is made where necessary for the estimated amount of claims over and above unearned premiums including that in respect of future written business on discontinued lines under the run-off of delegated underwriting authority arrangements. It is designed to meet future claims and related expenses and is calculated across related classes of business on the basis of a separate carry forward of deferred acquisition expenses after making allowance for investment income.

Acquisition expenses relating to new and renewed business for all classes are expensed over the period during which the premiums are earned. The principal acquisition costs so deferred are commissions payable, costs associated with the telesales and underwriting staff and prepaid claims handling costs in respect of delegated claims handling arrangements for claims which are expected to occur after the balance sheet date. Claims and the related reinsurance are recognised in the accounting period in which the loss occurs. Provision is made for the full cost of settling outstanding claims at the balance sheet date, including claims estimated to have been incurred but not yet reported at that date, and claims handling expenses. The related reinsurance receivable is recognised at the same time.

Life assurance

The Group’s long-term assurance contracts include whole-life term assurance, endowment assurance, flexible whole-life, pension and annuity contracts that are expected to remain in force for an extended period of time. Long-term assurance contracts under which the Group does not accept significant insurance risk are classified as financial instruments. The Group recognises the value of in-force long-term assurance contracts as an asset. Cash flows associated with in-force contracts and related assets, including reinsurance cash flows, are projected, using appropriate assumptions as to future mortality, persistency and levels of expenses and excluding the value of future investment margins, to estimate future surpluses attributable to the Group. These surpluses, discounted at a risk-adjusted rate, are recognised as a separate asset. Changes in the value of this asset, which is determined on a post-tax basis, are included in operating profit.

The Group has reinsurance treaties that transfer significant insurance risk. Liabilities for reinsured contracts are calculated gross of reinsurance and a separate reinsurance asset recorded.

Premiums on long-term insurance contracts are recognised as income when receivable. Claims on long term insurance contracts reflect the cost of all claims arising during the year, including claims handling costs. Claims are recognised when the Group becomes aware of the claim.

12. Taxation

Provision is made for taxation at current enacted rates on taxable profits, arising in income or in equity, taking into account relief for overseas taxation where appropriate. Deferred taxation is accounted for in full for all temporary differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability for accounting purposes and its carrying amount for tax purposes, except in relation to overseas earnings where remittance is controlled by the Group, and goodwill.

Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the extent that it is probable that they will be recovered.

13. Financial assets

Financial assets are classified into held-to-maturity investments; available-for-sale financial assets; held-for-trading; designated as at fair value through profit or loss; or loans and receivables.

Held-to-maturity investments – a financial asset is classified as a held-to-maturity investment only if it has fixed or determinable payments, a fixed maturity and the Group has the positive intention and ability to hold to maturity. Held-to-maturity investments are initially recognised at fair value plus directly related transaction costs. They are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method (see note 4 above) less any impairment losses.

Held-for-trading – a financial asset is classified as held-for-trading if it is acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the near term, or forms part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together and for which there is evidence of short-term profit taking, or it is a derivative (not in a qualifying hedge relationship). Held-for-trading financial assets are recognised at fair value with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss. Subsequently they are measured at fair value. Gains and losses on held-for-trading financial assets are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.

Designated as at fair value through profit or loss – financial assets that the Group designates on initial recognition as being at fair value through profit or loss are recognised at fair value, with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss and are subsequently measured at fair value. Gains and losses on financial assets that are designated as at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.

Financial assets may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss only if such designation (a) eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency; or (b) applies to a group of financial assets, financial liabilities or both that the Group manages and

91






Accounting policies continued

evaluates on a fair value basis; or (c) relates to an instrument that contains an embedded derivative which is not evidently closely related to the host contract.

The principal category of financial assets designated as at fair value through profit or loss is policyholders’ assets underpinning insurance and investment contracts issued by the Group's life assurance businesses. Fair value designation significantly reduces the measurement inconsistency that would arise if these assets were classified as available-for-sale.

Loans and receivables – non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable repayments that are not quoted in an active market are classified as loans and receivables except those that are classified as available-for-sale or as held-for-trading, or designated as at fair value through profit or loss. Loans and receivables are initially recognised at fair value plus directly related transaction costs. They are subsequently measured at adjusted cost using the effective interest method (see note 4 above) less any impairment losses.

Available-for-sale – financial assets that are not classified as held-to-maturity; held-for-trading; designated at fair value through profit or loss; or loans and receivables are classified as available-for-sale. Financial assets can be designated as available-for-sale on initial recognition. Available-for-sale financial assets are initially recognised at fair value plus directly related transaction costs. They are subsequently measured at fair value. Impairment losses and exchange differences resulting from retranslating the amortised cost of currency monetary available-for-sale financial assets are recognised in profit or loss together with interest calculated using the effective interest rate (see note 4 above). Other changes in the fair value of available-for-sale financial assets are reported in a separate component of shareholders’ equity until disposal, when the cumulative gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss.

Regular way purchases of financial assets classified as loans and receivables are recognised on settlement date; all other regular way purchases are recognised on trade date.

Fair value for a net open position in a financial asset that is quoted in an active market is the current bid price times the number of units of the instrument held. Fair values for financial assets not quoted in an active market are determined using appropriate valuation techniques including discounting future cash flows, option pricing models and other methods that are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial assets.

14. Impairment of financial assets

The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets classified as held-to-maturity, available-for-sale or loans and receivables is impaired. A financial asset or portfolio of financial assets is impaired and an impairment loss incurred if there is objective evidence that an event or events since initial recognition of the asset have adversely affected the amount or timing of future cash flows from the asset.

Financial assets carried at amortised cost – if there is objective evidence that an impairment loss on a financial asset or group of financial assets classified as loans and receivables or as held-to-maturity investments has been incurred, the Group measures the amount of the loss as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset or group of assets and the present value of estimated future cash flows from the asset or group of assets discounted at the effective interest rate of the instrument at initial recognition. Impairment losses are assessed individually for financial assets that are individually significant and individually or collectively for assets that are not individually significant. In making collective assessment of impairment, financial assets are grouped into portfolios on the basis of similar risk characteristics. Future cash flows from these portfolios are estimated on the basis of the contractual cash flows and historical loss experience for assets with similar credit risk characteristics. Historical loss experience is adjusted, on the basis of current observable data, to reflect the effects of current conditions not affecting the period of historical experience.

Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss and the carrying amount of the financial asset or group of financial assets reduced by establishing an allowance for impairment losses. If in a subsequent period the amount of the impairment loss reduces and the reduction can be ascribed to an event after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised loss is reversed by adjusting the allowance. Once an impairment loss has been recognised on a financial asset or group of financial assets, interest income is recognised on the carrying amount using the rate of interest at which estimated future cash flows were discounted in measuring impairment.

Financial assets carried at fair value – when a decline in the fair value of a financial asset classified as available-for-sale has been recognised directly in equity and there is objective evidence that the asset is impaired, the cumulative loss is removed from equity and recognised in profit or loss. The loss is measured as the difference between the amortised cost of the financial asset and its current fair value. Impairment losses on available-for-sale equity instruments are not reversed through profit or loss, but those on available-for-sale debt instruments are reversed, if there is an increase in fair value that is objectively related to a subsequent event.

15. Financial liabilities

A financial liability is classified as held-for-trading if it is incurred principally for the purpose of selling in the near term, or forms part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together and for which there is evidence of short-term profit taking, or it is a derivative (not in a qualifying hedge relationship). Held-for-trading financial liabilities are recognised at fair value with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss. Subsequently they are measured at fair value. Gains and losses are recognised in profit or loss as they arise. Financial liabilities that the Group designates on initial recognition as being at fair value through profit or loss are recognised at fair value, with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss and are subsequently measured at fair value. Gains and losses on financial liabilities that are designated as at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.

92






Financial liabilities may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss only if such designation (a) eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency; or (b) applies to a group of financial assets, financial liabilities or both that the Group manages and evaluates on a fair value basis; or (c) relates to an instrument that contains an embedded derivative which is not evidently closely related to the host contract.

The principal categories of financial liabilities designated as at fair value through profit or loss are (a) structured liabilities issued by the Group: designation significantly reduces the measurement inconsistency between these liabilities and the related derivatives carried at fair value, and (b) investment contracts issued by the Group's life assurance businesses: fair value designation significantly reduces the measurement inconsistency that would arise if these liabilities were measured at amortised cost.

All other financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method (see note 4 above).

Fair value for a net open position in a financial liability that is quoted in an active market is the current offer price times the number of units of the instrument held or issued. Fair values for financial liabilities not quoted in an active market are determined using appropriate valuation techniques including discounting future cash flows, option pricing models and other methods that are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing financial liabilities.

16. Derecognition

A financial asset is derecognised when it has been transferred and the transfer qualifies for derecognition. A transfer requires that the Group either: (a) transfers the contractual rights to receive the asset’s cash flows; or (b) retains the right to the asset’s cash flows but assumes a contractual obligation to pay those cash flows to a third party. After a transfer, the Group assesses the extent to which it has retained the risks and rewards of ownership of the transferred asset. If substantially all the risks and rewards have been retained, the asset remains on the balance sheet. If substantially all of the risks and rewards have been transferred, the asset is derecognised. If substantially all the risks and rewards have been neither retained nor transferred, the Group assesses whether or not it has retained control of the asset. If it has not retained control, the asset is derecognised. Where the Group has retained control of the asset, it continues to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement.

A financial liability is removed from the balance sheet when the obligation is discharged, or cancelled, or expires.

17. Capital instruments

The Group classifies a financial instrument that it issues as a financial asset, financial liability or an equity instrument in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangement. An instrument is classified as a liability if it is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset, or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities on potentially unfavourable terms. An instrument is classified as equity if it evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after the deduction of liabilities. The components of a compound financial instrument issued by the Group are classified and accounted for separately as financial assets, financial liabilities or equity as appropriate.

18. Derivatives and hedging

Derivative financial instruments are recognised initially, and subsequently measured, at fair value. Derivative fair values are determined from quoted prices in active markets where available. Where there is no active market for an instrument, fair value is derived from prices for the derivative’s components using appropriate pricing or valuation models.

A derivative embedded in a contract is accounted for as stand-alone derivative if its economic characteristics are not closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract; unless the entire contract is carried at fair value through profit or loss.

Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of a derivative are recognised as they arise in profit or loss unless the derivative is the hedging instrument in a qualifying hedge. The Group enters into three types of hedge relationship: hedges of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or firm commitment (fair value hedges); hedges of the variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); and hedges of the net investment in a foreign entity.

Hedge relationships are formally documented at inception. The documentation includes identification of the hedged item and the hedging instrument, details the risk that is being hedged and the way in which effectiveness will be assessed at inception and during the period of the hedge. If the hedge is not highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk, consistent with the documented risk management strategy, hedge accounting is discontinued.

Fair value hedge – in a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss. The gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk is recognised in profit or loss and adjusts the carrying amount of the hedged item. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting or if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised or if hedge designation is revoked. If the hedged item is one for which the effective interest rate method is used, any cumulative adjustment is amortised to profit or loss over the life of the hedged item using a recalculated effective interest rate.

Cash flow hedge – where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset or liability or a highly probable forecast transaction, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised directly in equity. The ineffective portion is recognised in profit or loss. When the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, the cumulative gain or loss is reclassified from equity in the same periods in which the asset or liability affects profit or loss. Otherwise the cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in profit or loss at the same

93






Accounting policies continued

time as the hedged transaction. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting; if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised; if the forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur; or if hedge designation is revoked. On the discontinuance of hedge accounting (except where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur), the cumulative unrealised gain or loss recognised in equity is recognised in profit or loss when the hedged cash flow occurs or, if the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, in the same periods during which the asset or liability affects profit or loss. Where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative unrealised gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss immediately.

Hedge of net investment in a foreign operation – where a foreign currency liability hedges a net investment in a foreign operation, the portion of foreign exchange differences arising on translation of the liability determined to be an effective hedge is recognised directly in equity. Any ineffective portion is recognised in profit or loss.

19. Share-based payments

The Group grants options over shares in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc to its employees under various share option schemes. The Group has applied IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payment’ to grants under these schemes after 7 November 2002 that had not vested on 1 January 2005. The expense for these transactions is measured based on the fair value on the date the options are granted. The fair value is estimated using valuation techniques which take into account the option’s exercise price, its term, the risk free interest rate and the expected volatility of the market price of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc’s shares. Vesting conditions are not taken into account when measuring fair value, but are reflected by adjusting the number of options included in the measurement of the transaction such that the amount recognised reflects the number that actually vest. The fair value is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period.

20. Investment property

Investment property comprises freehold and leasehold properties that are held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both. It is not depreciated but is stated at fair value based on valuations by independent registered valuers. Fair value is based on current prices in an active market for similar properties in the same location and condition. Any gain or loss arising from a change in fair value is recognised in profit or loss. Rental income from investment property is recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives granted are recognised as an integral part of the total rental income.

21. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash and demand deposits with banks together with short-term highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and subject to insignificant risk of change in value.

22. Shares in Group entities

The company’s investments in its subsidiaries are stated at cost less any impairment.

Critical accounting policies and key sources of estimation uncertainty

The reported results of the Group are sensitive to the accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie the preparation of its financial statements. UK company law and IFRS require the directors, in preparing the Group's financial statements, to select suitable accounting policies, apply them consistently and make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent. In the absence of an applicable standard or interpretation, IAS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’, requires management to develop and apply an accounting policy that results in relevant and reliable information in the light of the requirements and guidance in IFRS dealing with similar and related issues and the IASB’s Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements.

The judgements and assumptions involved in the Group’s accounting policies that are considered by the Board to be the most important to the portrayal of its financial condition are discussed below. The use of estimates, assumptions or models that differ from those adopted by the Group would affect its reported results.

Loan impairment provisions

The Group’s loan impairment provisions are established to recognise incurred impairment losses in its portfolio of loans classified as loans and receivables and carried at amortised cost. A loan is impaired when there is objective evidence that events since the loan was granted have affected expected cash flows from the loan. The impairment loss is the difference between the carrying value of the loan and the present value of estimated future cash flows at the loan's original effective interest rate.

At 31 December 2005, gross loans and advances to customers totalled £421,110 million (2004 – £351,419 million) and customer loan impairment provisions amounted to £3,884 million (2004 – £4,168 million).

There are two components to the Group’s loan impairment provisions: individual and collective.

Individual component – all impaired loans that exceed specific thresholds are individually assessed for impairment. Individually assessed loans principally comprise the Group's portfolio of commercial loans to medium and large businesses. Impairment losses are recognised as the difference between the carrying value of the loan and the discounted value of management’s best estimate of future cash repayments and proceeds from any security held. These estimates take into account the customer’s debt capacity and financial flexibility; the level and quality of its earnings; the amount and sources of cash flows; the industry in which the counterparty operates; and the realisable value of any security held. Estimating the quantum and timing of future recoveries involves significant judgement. The size of receipts will depend on the future performance of the borrower and the value of security, both of which will be affected by future economic conditions; additionally, collateral may not be readily marketable. The actual amount of future cash flows and the date they are received may differ from these

94






estimates and consequently actual losses incurred may differ from those recognised in these financial statements.

Collective component – this is made up of two elements: loan impairment provisions for impaired loans that are below individual assessment thresholds (collective impaired loan provisions) and for loan losses that have been incurred but have not been separately identified at the balance sheet date (latent loss provisions). These are established on a portfolio basis taking into account the level of arrears, security, past loss experience, credit scores and defaults based on portfolio trends. The most significant factors in establishing these provisions are the expected loss rates and the related average life. These portfolios include credit card receivables and other personal advances including mortgages. The future credit quality of these portfolios is subject to uncertainties that could cause actual credit losses to differ materially from reported loan impairment provisions. These uncertainties include the economic environment, notably interest rates and their effect on customer spending, the unemployment level, payment behaviour and bankruptcy trends.

Pensions

The Group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes as described in Note 3 on the financial statements. The assets of the schemes are measured at their fair value at the balance sheet date. Scheme liabilities are measured using the projected unit method, which takes account of projected earnings increases, using actuarial assumptions that give the best estimate of the future cash flows that will arise under the scheme liabilities. These cash flows are discounted at the interest rate applicable to high-quality corporate bonds of the same currency and term as the liabilities. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets over liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). In determining the value of scheme liabilities, assumptions are made as to price inflation, dividend growth, pension increases, earnings growth and employees. There is a range of assumptions that could be adopted in valuing the schemes’ liabilities. Different assumptions could significantly alter the amount of the deficit recognised in the balance sheet and the pension cost charged to the income statement. The assumptions adopted for the Group’s pension schemes are set out in Note 3 on the financial statements. The pension deficit recognised in the balance sheet at 31 December 2005 was £3,735 million (2004 – £2,940 million).

Fair value

Financial instruments classified as held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss and financial assets classified as available-for-sale are recognised in the financial statements at fair value. All derivatives are measured at fair value. In the balance sheet, financial assets carried at fair value are included within Treasury and other eligible bills, Loans and advances to banks, Loans and advances to customers, Debt securities and Equity shares as appropriate. Financial liabilities carried at fair value are included within the captions Deposits by banks, Customer accounts, Debt securities in issue and Subordinated liabilities. Derivative assets and Derivative liabilities are shown separately on the face of the balance sheets. Gains or losses arising from changes in fair value of financial instruments classified as held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss are included in the income statement. Unrealised gains and losses on available-for-sale financial assets are recognised directly in equity unless an impairment loss is recognised. The carrying value of a financial asset or a financial liability carried at cost or amortised cost that is the hedged item in a qualifying hedge relationship is adjusted by the gain or loss attributable to the hedged risk.

Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm's length transaction. Fair values are determined by reference to observable market prices where available and reliable. Where representative market prices for an instrument are not available or are unreliable because of poor liquidity, the fair value is derived from prices for its components using appropriate pricing or valuation models that are based on independently sourced market parameters, including interest rate yield curves, option volatilities and currency rates.

Financial assets carried at fair value include government, asset backed and corporate debt securities, reverse repos, loans, corporate equity shares and derivatives. Financial liabilities carried at fair value include deposits, repos, short positions in securities and debt securities issued. Fair value for a substantial proportion of these instruments is based on observable market prices or derived from observable market parameters. Where observable prices are not available, fair value is based on appropriate valuation techniques or management estimates.

The Group’s derivative products include swaps, forwards, futures and options. Exchange traded instruments are valued using quoted prices. The fair value of over-the-counter instruments is derived from pricing models which take account of contract terms, including maturity, as well as quoted market parameters such as interest rates and volatilities. Most of the Group’s pricing models do not entail material subjectivity because the methodologies utilised do not incorporate significant judgement and the parameters included in the models can be calibrated to actively quoted market prices. Values established from pricing models are adjusted for credit risk, liquidity risk and future operational costs.

A negligible proportion of the Group’s trading derivatives are valued directly from quoted prices, the majority being valued using appropriate valuation techniques. The fair value of substantially all securities positions carried at fair value is determined directly from quoted prices.

Details of financial instruments carried at fair value are given in Note 34 on the financial statements.

General insurance claims

The Group makes provision for the full cost of settling outstanding claims arising from its general insurance business at the balance sheet date, including claims estimated to have been incurred but not yet reported at that date and claims handling expenses. General insurance claims provisions amounted to £4,913 million at 31 December 2005 (2004 – £4,504 million).

Provisions are determined by management based on experience of claims settled and on statistical models which require certain assumptions to be made regarding the

95






Accounting policies continued

incidence, timing and amount of claims and any specific factors such as adverse weather conditions. In order to calculate the total provision required, the historical development of claims is analysed using statistical methodology to extrapolate, within acceptable probability parameters, the value of outstanding claims at the balance sheet date. Also included in the estimation of outstanding claims are other assumptions such as the inflationary factor used for bodily injury claims which is based on historical trends and, therefore, allows for some increase due to changes in common law and statute. Costs for both direct and indirect claims handling expenses are also included. Outward reinsurance recoveries are accounted for in the same accounting period as the direct claims to which they relate. The outstanding claims provision is based on information available to management and the eventual outcome may vary from the original assessment. Actual claims experience may differ from the historical pattern on which the estimate is based and the cost of settling individual claims may exceed that assumed.

Goodwill

The Group capitalises goodwill arising on the acquisition of businesses, as disclosed in the Accounting policies. The carrying value of goodwill as at 31 December 2005 was £18,823 million (2004 – £18,032 million).

Goodwill is the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of its net assets. The determination of the fair value of assets and liabilities of businesses acquired requires the exercise of management judgement; for example those financial assets and liabilities for which there are no quoted prices, and those non-financial assets where valuations reflect estimates of market conditions such as property. Different fair values would result in changes to the goodwill arising and to the post-acquisition performance of the acquisition. Goodwill is not amortised but is tested for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.

For the purposes of impairment testing goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each of the Group’s cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units expected to benefit from the combination. Goodwill impairment testing involves the comparison of the carrying value of a cash-generating unit or group of cash generating units with its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the unit's fair value and its value in use. Value in use is the present value of expected future cash flows from the cash-generating unit or group of cash-generating units. Fair value is the amount obtainable for the sale of the cash-generating unit in an arm’s length transaction between knowledgeable, willing parties.

Impairment testing inherently involves a number of judgmental areas: the preparation of cash flow forecasts for periods that are beyond the normal requirements of management reporting; the assessment of the discount rate appropriate to the business; estimation of the fair value of cash-generating units; and the valuation of the separable assets of each business whose goodwill is being reviewed.

Accounting developments

International Financial Reporting Standards

The International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) issued IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’ in August 2005. The standard replaces IAS 30 ‘Disclosures in the Financial Statements of Banks and Similar Financial Institutions’ and the disclosure provisions in IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation’. IFRS 7 requires disclosure of the significance of financial instruments for an entity’s financial position and performance and of qualitative and quantitative information about exposure to risks arising from financial instruments. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2007. Earlier application is encouraged.

At the same time the IASB issued an amendment ‘Capital Disclosures’ to IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’. It requires disclosures about an entity's capital and the way it is managed. This amendment is also effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2007. Earlier application is encouraged.

The IASB has also issued three amendments to IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’. The first, ‘Cash Flow Hedge Accounting of Forecast Intragroup Transactions’, published in April 2005, amends IAS 39 to permit the foreign currency risk of a highly probable forecast intragroup transaction to qualify as a hedged item in consolidated financial statements. The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2006.

The second, ‘The Fair Value Option’, published in June 2005, places conditions on the option in IAS 39 to designate on initial recognition a financial asset or financial liability as at fair value through profit or loss. The amendment is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2006. Earlier application is encouraged. The Group has adopted this amendment from 1 January 2005 (see accounting policies on page 88).

The third, ‘Financial Guarantee Contracts’, published in August 2005, amends IAS 39 and IFRS 4 ‘Insurance Contracts’. The amendments define a financial guarantee contract. They require such contracts to be recorded initially at fair value and subsequently at higher of the provision determined in accordance with IAS 37 ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’ and the amount initially recognised less amortisation. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2006.

In December 2005, the IASB issued amendments to IAS 21 ‘The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates’ to clarify that a monetary item can form part of the net investment in overseas operations regardless of the currency in which it is denominated and that the net investment in a foreign operation can include a loan from a fellow subsidiary. The amendments are effective immediately but have not been endorsed by the EU.

The Group is reviewing IFRS 7 and the amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 21 and those to IAS 39 that it has not implemented, to determine their effect on its financial reporting.

US GAAP

For a discussion of recent developments in US GAAP relevant to the Group, see Note 46 on the accounts.

96






Consolidated income statement
for the year ended 31 December 2005

  Note   2005
£m
  2004
£m
 







Interest receivable     21,331   16,632  
Interest payable     (11,413 ) (7,561 )







Net interest income     9,918   9,071  







Fees and commissions receivable     6,750   6,473  
Fees and commissions payable     (1,841 ) (1,926 )
Income from trading activities 1   2,343   1,988  
Other operating income (excluding insurance premium income)     2,953   2,138  
Insurance premium income     6,076   6,146  
Reinsurers’ share     (297 ) (499 )







Non-interest income     15,984   14,320  







Total income     25,902   23,391  







Staff costs     5,992   5,188  
Premises and equipment     1,313   1,177  
Other administrative expenses     2,816   2,323  
Depreciation and amortisation     1,825   1,674  







Operating expenses 2   11,946   10,362  







Profit before other operating charges     13,956   13,029  
Insurance claims     4,413   4,565  
Reinsurers’ share     (100 ) (305 )







Operating profit before impairment losses     9,643   8,769  
Impairment losses     1,707   1,485  







Operating profit before tax 4   7,936   7,284  
Tax 5   2,378   1,995  







Profit for the year     5,558   5,289  




             
Profit attributable to:            
Minority interests     57   177  
Preference shareholders 6   109   256  
Ordinary shareholders     5,392   4,856  







      5,558   5,289  




             
Per 25p ordinary share:            
Basic earnings 9   169.4 p 157.4 p




             
Diluted earnings 9   168.3 p 155.9 p




             
Dividends 7   60.6 p 52.5 p





97






Balance sheets
at 31 December 2005

      Group   Company






  Note   2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m










Assets                  
Cash and balances at central banks     4,759   4,293    
Treasury bills and other eligible bills 10   5,538   6,110    
Loans and advances to banks 11   70,587   61,073   9,122   4,106
Loans and advances to customers 12   417,226   347,251   567   305
Debt securities 13   120,965   93,908    
Equity shares 14   9,301   4,723    
Investments in Group undertakings 15       20,851   21,900
Intangible assets 17   19,932   19,242    
Property, plant and equipment 18   18,053   16,428    
Settlement balances     6,005   5,682    
Derivatives at fair value 19   95,663   17,800   55  
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets 20   8,798   11,612   147   318










Total assets     776,827   588,122   30,742   26,629







                   
Liabilities                  
Deposits by banks 21   110,407   99,883   951   174
Customer accounts 22   342,867   283,315   55  
Debt securities in issue 23   90,420   63,999   2,942   1,608
Settlement balances and short positions 24   43,988   32,990    
Derivatives at fair value 19   96,438   18,876    
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities 25   14,247   17,648   14   301
Retirement benefit liabilities 3   3,735   2,940    
Deferred taxation liabilities 26   1,695   2,061    
Insurance liabilities 27   7,212   8,647    
Subordinated liabilities 28   28,274   20,366   9,242   5,935










Total liabilities     739,283   550,725   13,204   8,018
                   
Equity *                  
Minority interests 29   2,109   3,492    
Shareholders’ equity                  
  Called up share capital 30   826   822   826   822
  Reserves 31   34,609   33,083   16,712   17,789
Total equity     37,544   37,397   17,538   18,611










                   
Total liabilities and equity     776,827   588,122   30,742   26,629







* includes non-equity minority interests and preference shares in 2004.

The accounts were approved by the Board of directors on 27 February 2006 and signed on its behalf by:

Sir George Mathewson Sir Fred Goodwin Guy Whittaker
Chairman Group Chief Executive Group Finance Director

98






Statements of recognised income and expense
for the year ended 31 December 2005

        Group     Company  










  Note     2005
£m
    2004
£m
    2005
£m
    2004
£m
 















Available-for-sale investments                            
Net valuation gains taken direct to equity       35                  
Net profit taken to income on sales       (582 )                
                             
Cash flow hedges                            
Net (losses)/gains taken direct to equity       (67 )         6        
                             
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations       842     (606 )        
Actuarial losses on defined benefit plans       (799 )   (1,601 )        
Other movements                   (1 )















(Expense)/income before tax on items recognised direct in equity       (571 )   (2,207 )   6     (1 )
Tax on items recognised direct in equity       478     465     (2 )    















Net (expense)/income recognised direct in equity       (93 )   (1,742 )   4     (1 )
Profit for the year       5,558     5,289     2,074     2,874  















Total recognised income and expense for the year       5,465     3,547     2,078     2,873  











                             
Attributable to:                            
Equity holders of the parent       5,355     3,558     2,078     2,873  
Minority interests       110     (11 )        















        5,465     3,547     2,078     2,873  











                             
Effect of changes in accounting policies on the implementation of IFRS                            
Equity holders of the parent       (1,843 )   1,243     (16,759 )   (15,798 )
Minority interests       (2,878 )   (321 )        















        (4,721 )   922     (16,759 )   (15,798 )












99






Cash flow statements
for the year ended 31 December 2005


        Group     Company  










  Note     2005
£m
    2004
£m
    2005
£m
    2004
£m
 















Operating activities                            
Operating profit before tax       7,936     7,284     1,932     2,890  
                             
Adjustments for:                            
Depreciation and amortisation       1,825     1,674          
Interest on subordinated liabilities       1,271     681     583     318  
Charge for defined benefit pension schemes       462     397          
Cash contribution to defined benefit pension schemes       (452 )   (1,146 )        
Other non-cash items       338     (767 )   (16 )   1  















Net cash inflow from trading activities       11,380     8,123     2,499     3,209  
Changes in operating assets and liabilities       (519 )   (4,264 )   2,050     (148 )















Net cash flows from operating activities before tax       10,861     3,859     4,549     3,061  
Income taxes (paid)/received       (1,911 )   (1,366 )   (18 )   36  















Net cash flows from operating activities 36     8,950     2,493     4,531     3,097  















                             
Investing activities                            
Sale and maturity of securities       39,472     43,022          
Purchase of securities       (39,196 )   (41,790 )        
Investment in subsidiaries               (2,961 )   (6,342 )
Sale of property, plant and equipment       2,220     1,921          
Purchase of property, plant and equipment       (4,812 )   (4,583 )        
Net investment in business interests and intangible assets 37     (296 )   (7,968 )        
Loans to subsidiaries               (337 )   (350 )
Repayments to subsidiaries               1,183     40  















Net cash flows from investing activities       (2,612 )   (9,398 )   (2,115 )   (6,652 )















                             
Financing activities                            
Issue of ordinary shares       163     2,845     163     2,845  
Issue of equity preference shares       1,649     1,358     1,649     1,358  
Issue of subordinated liabilities       1,234     4,624     337     1,424  
Proceeds of minority interests acquired       1,264     1,260          
Costs of minority interests redeemed       (121 )   (2 )        
Repayments of subordinated liabilities       (1,553 )   (718 )   (1,183 )   (40 )
Dividends paid       (2,007 )   (1,635 )   (1,912 )   (1,488 )
Interest on subordinated liabilities       (1,332 )   (613 )   (577 )   (318 )















Net cash flows from financing activities       (703 )   7,119     (1,523 )   3,781  















Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents       (3,107 )   1,686     (76 )    















                             
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents       2,528     1,900     817     226  
Cash and cash equivalents 1 January       50,021     48,121     309     83  















Cash and cash equivalents 31 December       52,549     50,021     1,126     309  












100






Notes on the accounts

Introduction

IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation’, IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’ and IFRS 4 ‘Insurance Contracts’ were implemented by the Group on 1 January 2005 and applied prospectively from that date and, as permitted by IFRS, without restating comparatives. Consequently, in the notes on the accounts affected by these standards, comparative data for 2004 in accordance with previous GAAP have been presented.

1 Income from trading activities   Group

    2005
£m
  2004
£m








Foreign exchange(1)   683   616
Securities    
  equities(2)   39   36
   debt(3)   1,023   811
Interest rate derivatives(4)   598   525








    2,343   1,988



  Notes:
(1) Includes spot and forward foreign exchange contracts and currency swaps, futures and options and related hedges and funding
(2) Includes equities, equity derivatives, commodity contracts and related hedges and funding.
(3) Includes debt securities and related hedges and funding.
(4) Includes interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements, interest rate options, interest rate futures and credit derivatives and related hedges and funding.
           
2 Operating expenses    
          Group

  2005
£m
  2004
£m








Administrative expenses    
Staff costs    
Wages, salaries and other staff costs   5,084   4,421
Social security costs   354   295
Share-based compensation   44   36
Pension costs (see note 3)    
– defined benefit schemes   462   397
– defined contribution schemes   48   39





  5,992   5,188
Premises and equipment   1,313   1,177
Other   2,816   2,323





  10,121   8,688
Depreciation and amortisation    
Property plant and equipment (see note 18)   1,326   1,155
Intangible assets (see note 17)   499   519





  11,946   10,362



The average number of persons employed by the Group during the year, excluding temporary staff, was 144,900 (2004 – 133,300).

101






Notes on the accounts continued

3 Pension costs

The Group operates a number of pension schemes which are predominantly defined benefit schemes whose assets are independent of the Group’s finances. In addition to The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (‘Main Scheme’), the Group operates a number of other UK and overseas pension schemes.

It also provides other post-retirement benefits, principally through subscriptions to private healthcare schemes in the UK and the US and unfunded post-retirement benefit plans. Provision for the costs of these benefits is charged to the income statement over the average remaining future service lives of the eligible employees. The amounts are not material.

Interim valuations of the Group’s schemes were prepared to 31 December by independent actuaries, using the following assumptions:

  Main Scheme      All Schemes



 
 
Principal actuarial assumptions at 31 December (weighted average)   2005     2004     2005     2004












 
Discount rate   4.8%     5.4%     4.8%     5.4%  
Expected return on plan assets   6.5%     6.7%     6.5%     6.8%  
Rate of increase in salaries   4.0%     4.0%     3.9%     3.9%  
Rate of increase in pensions in payment   2.7%     2.7%     2.6%     2.7%  
Inflation assumption   2.7%     2.7%     2.7%     2.7%  












 
The expected return on plan assets at 31 December is based upon the weighted average of the following assumptions of the returns on the major classes of plan assets:
         
  Main Scheme     All Schemes



 
 
  2005     2004     2005     2004












 
Equities   7.7%     8.1%     7.7%     8.1%  
Index-linked bonds   4.1%     4.5%     4.1%     4.5%  
Government fixed interest bonds   4.1%     4.5%     4.1%     4.5%  
Corporate and other bonds   4.8%     5.4%     4.8%     5.4%  
Property   5.9%     6.3%     5.9%     6.3%  
Cash and other assets   4.2%     4.6%     3.7%     4.5%  












 
The expected return on Main Scheme plan assets at 31 December 2004 has been adjusted to reflect the investment, in early January 2005, of payments made to the fund on 31 December and included as cash and other assets at that date.
               
Post-retirement mortality assumptions (Main Scheme)     2005     2004     2003












 
Longevity at age 60 for current pensioners (years)        
Males     25.4   25.4   23.5
Females     28.2   28.2   25.3
         
Longevity at age 60 for future pensioners (years)        
Males     26.2   26.2   24.8
Females     29.0   29.0   26.5












 


102






  Main Scheme     All Schemes








 







Changes in value of net pension liability   Fair value
of plan
assets
£m
    Present
value of
defined
benefit
obligations
£m
    Net
pension
liability
£m
    Fair value
of plan
assets
£m
    Present
value of
defined
benefit
obligations
£m
    Net
pension
liability
£m



















At 1 January 2004   11,797   13,594   1,797   12,862   14,898   2,036



















Currency translation and other adjustments         (18 )   (9 )   9
Income statement:            
    Expected return   838         (838 )   920     (920 )
    Interest cost         759   759     837   837
    Current service cost     400   400     469   469
    Past service cost           11   11
    838   1,159   321   920   1,317   397
Statement of recognised income
  and expense:
           
Actuarial gains and losses   392   1,825   1,433   408   2,009   1,601
Acquisitions of subsidiaries         45   88   43
Contributions by employer   1,069     (1,069 )   1,146     (1,146 )
Contributions by plan participants         3   3  
Benefits paid   (494 )   (494 )     (534 )   (534 )  
Expenses included in service cost   (33 )   (33 )     (34 )   (34 )  



















At 31 December 2004   13,569   16,051   2,482   14,798   17,738   2,940



















Currency translation and other adjustments         26   26  
Income statement:            
    Expected return   930     (930 )   1,017     (1,017 )
    Interest cost     865   865     953   953
    Current service cost     447   447     522   522
    Past service cost     3   3     4   4
  930   1,315   385   1,017   1,479   462
Statement of recognised income
  and expense:
           
   Actuarial gains and losses   1,556   2,273   717   1,660   2,459   799
Disposal of subsidiaries           (14 )   (14 )
Contributions by employer   380     (380 )   452     (452 )
Contributions by plan participants         4   4  
Benefits paid   (504 )   (504 )     (550 )   (550 )  
Expenses included in service cost   (17 )   (17 )     (19 )   (19 )  



















At 31 December 2005   15,914   19,118   3,204   17,388   21,123   3,735

















The Group expects to contribute £444 million to its defined benefit pension schemes in 2006 (Main Scheme – £384 million). Of the net pension liability, £104 million (2004 – £95 million) relates to unfunded schemes.


103






Notes on the accounts continued

3 Pension costs (continued)        
  Main Scheme     All Schemes





 



 
Major plan assets as a percentage of total plan assets   2005     2004     2005     2004












 
Equities   61.3 %   56.7 %   61.6 %   57.2 %
Index-linked bonds   18.1 %   16.5 %   16.8 %   15.3 %
Government fixed interest bonds   1.8 %   2.1 %   2.6 %   2.8 %
Corporate and other bonds   14.6 %   12.5 %   14.6 %   12.7 %
Property   3.6 %   3.1 %   3.7 %   3.2 %
Cash and other assets   0.6 %   9.1 %   0.7 %   8.8 %












 

The pension plan assets include a holding of the company’s ordinary shares with a fair value of £78 million (2004 – £73 million), of which £76 million (2004 – £71 million) are held in the Main Scheme which also holds financial instruments issued by the Group with a value of £299 million (2004 – £726 million).

Cumulative net actuarial losses of £2,400 million (2004 – £1,601 million) have been recognised in the statement of recognised income and expense, of which £2,150 million (2004 – £1,433 million) relate to the Main Scheme.

  Main Scheme   All Schemes







 






History of defined benefit schemes   2005
£m
    2004
£m
    2003
£m
  2005
£m
    2004
£m
    2003
£m

















Present value of defined benefit obligations   19,118   16,051   13,594   21,123   17,738   14,898
Fair value of plan assets   15,914   13,569   11,797   17,388   14,798   12,862

















Net deficit   3,204   2,482   1,797   3,735   2,940   2,036















Experience losses on plan liabilities   (41 )   (624 )     (68 )   (631 )  
Experience gains on plan assets   1,556   392     1,660   408  
Actual return on pension schemes assets   2,486   1,230     2,677   1,328  


















4 Operating profit before tax    
     
Operating profit before tax is stated after taking account of the following:   Group

 
    2005
£m
    2004
£m








 
Income   Sales of available-for-sale securities    
  – Gross gains   683  
  – Gross losses   (16 )  



 
  – Net profit   667  

 
  Sales of investment securities    
  – Gross gains     197
  – Gross losses     (30 )






 
  – Net profit     167

 
  Dividend income   108   79
  Share of associated undertakings’ net profit   41   24
  Rental income from investment properties   250   241
  Net gains on financial assets and liabilities    
  designated as at fair value through profit or loss   364  
Expenses   Interest on subordinated liabilities   1,271   681
  Direct operating expenses of investment properties   61   72
  Integration expenditure* relating to:    
  – acquisition of NatWest   129   280
  – other acquisitions   329   240








 
     
* Integration expenditure comprises:    
  Staff costs   148   83
  Premises and equipment   39   35
  Other administrative expenses   131   149
  Depreciation and amortisation   140   253








 
    458   520




 


104






Auditors’ remuneration    
     
Amounts paid to the auditors for statutory audit and other services were as follows:   Group



  2005
£m
  2004
£m





Audit services    
       – Statutory audit   9.9   8.2
       – Audit related including regulatory reporting*   7.0   1.1





  16.9   9.3





Further assurance services   6.8   3.0





Tax services    
       – Compliance services   0.2   0.2
       – Advisory services     0.2





  0.2   0.4





Other services   0.4   3.0





Total   24.3   15.7



* Includes fees relating to the transition to IFRS and work in respect of US Sarbanes-Oxley Act Section 404 reporting requirements.    
     
The auditors’ remuneration for statutory audit of the company was £0.1 million (2004 – £0.1 million). Non–audit fees paid to the auditors and their associates in the UK was £12.4 million (2004 – £6.4 million).
     
5 Tax   Group

 
  2005
£m
    2004
£m






 
   Current taxation:    
   UK corporation tax charge for the year at 30%   2,280   2,091
   Over provision in respect of prior periods   (101 )   (168 )
   Relief for overseas taxation   (171 )   (212 )






 
  2,008   1,711
   Deferred taxation:    
   Current year charge   477   333
   Over provision in respect of prior periods   (107 )   (49 )






 
   Tax charge for the year   2,378   1,995




 
The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax charge computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 30% as follows:      
         
  2005
£m
    2004
£m






 
   Expected tax charge   2,381   2,185
   Interest on subordinated debt not allowable for tax   79  
   Non-deductible items   230   110
   Non-taxable items   (166 )   (128 )
   Taxable foreign exchange movements   (10 )   (10 )
   Foreign profits taxed at other rates   77   49
   Unutilised losses brought forward and carried forward   (5 )   6
   Adjustments relating to prior periods   (208 )   (217 )






 
   Actual tax charge for the year   2,378   1,995




 

(1)

Deferred tax assets of £51 million (2004 – £110 million) resulting from tax losses carried forward of £150 million (2004 – £291 million) have not been recognised as it is currently not certain that the assets will be recoverable. These assets may be recoverable if the losses can be offset against suitable future taxable profits arising in the same tax jurisdiction.

105






Notes on the accounts continued

6 Profit attributable to preference shareholders   Group
   


  Dividends paid
to equity
preference
shareholders
2005
£m
  Finance cost
included in
interest
payable
2005
£m
  Finance
cost of
preference
shares
2004
£m









Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01   58   115   105
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$ 0.01     73   90
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01     9   33
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01   51     4
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01     15   15
Appropriation for premium payable on redemption and issue costs     8   9









Total(3)   109   220   256
   




Equity       15
Non-equity       241









  Notes:
(1) In the year ended 31 December 2005, dividends of £55,000 (2004 – £55,000) were paid on the 11% cumulative preference shares of £1 and dividends of £22,000 (2004 – £22,000) were paid on the 5.5% cumulative preference shares of £1.
(2) Following the implementation of IAS 32 on 1 January 2005, several of the Group’s preference share issues are now included in subordinated liabilities and the finance cost thereon is included in interest payable.
(3) Between 1 January 2006 and the date of approval of these accounts, dividends amounting to US$39 million have been declared in respect of equity preference shareholders for payment on 31 March 2006.

7 Ordinary dividends Group
 


  2005
p per share
  2004
p per share
  2005
£m
  2004
£m









Final dividend for previous year declared during the current year   41.2   35.7   1,308   1,059
Interim dividend   19.4   16.8   619   529









Total dividends paid on ordinary equity shares   60.6   52.5   1,927   1,588
 


Final dividends are not accounted for until they have been ratified at the Annual General Meeting. At the meeting on 28 April 2006, a dividend in respect of 2005 of 53.1 pence per share (2004 – 41.2 pence per share) amounting to a total of £1.7 billion (2004 – £1.3 billion) is to be proposed. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2005 do not reflect this dividend which, if approved, will be accounted for in shareholders’ equity as an appropriation of retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2006.

8 Profit dealt with in the accounts of the company

As permitted by section 230(3) of the Companies Act 1985, the primary financial statements of the company do not include an income statement. Condensed information is set out below:

  Company

 
  2005
£m
    2004
£m






 
Dividends received from banking subsidiary   2,082   3,000
Dividends received from other subsidiaries   100  






 
Total income   2,182   3,000
Interest receivable from subsidiaries   577   313
Interest payable to subsidiaries   (189 )   (150 )
Other net interest payable and operating expenses   (638 )   (273 )






 
Operating profit before tax   1,932   2,890
Tax   142   (16 )






 
Profit for the year   2,074   2,874




 
Profit attributable to:    
Ordinary shareholders   1,965   2,618
Other shareholders   109   256






 
  2,074   2,874




 

106





9 Earnings per ordinary share    
     
The earnings per share are based on the following:   Group

  2005
£m
  2004
£m





Earnings:    
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders   5,392   4,856
Add back dividends on dilutive convertible non-equity shares   65   66





Diluted earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders   5,457   4,922



  Number of shares – millions





Number of ordinary shares:    
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year   3,183   3,085
Effect of dilutive share options and convertible non-equity shares   60   73





Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares during the year   3,243   3,158



All convertible preference shares have a dilutive effect in the current year and as such have been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share. In 2004, $1,500 million of convertible preference shares was not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect was anti-dilutive.

10 Treasury bills and other eligible bills       Group

      2005
£m
  2004
£m









Treasury bills and similar securities       5,402   5,538
Other eligible bills       136   572









      5,538   6,110


Held-for-trading       3,004  
Available-for-sale       2,534  







   
      5,538  

11 Loans and advances to banks   Group   Company


 
  2005   2004   2005   2004
  £m   £m   £m   £m









Held-for-trading   44,965      
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss   282      
Loans and receivables   25,340     9,122  









  70,587   61,073   9,122   4,106
   






Amounts above include:        
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,901   2,629    
Due from subsidiaries       9,122   4,106









         
12 Loans and advances to customers   Group   Company



 
  2005   2004   2005   2004
  £m   £m   £m   £m









Held-for-trading   53,963      
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss   616      
Loans and receivables   350,960     567  
Finance leases   11,687      









  417,226   347,251   567   305







Amounts above include:        
Due from subsidiaries       567   305
Subordinated advances     220    










107





Notes on the accounts continued

12 Loans and advances to customers (continued)

Securitisations

The Group engages in securitisation transactions of its financial assets including commercial and residential mortgage loans, commercial and residential mortgage related securities, US Government agency collateralised mortgage obligations, and other types of financial assets. In such transactions, the assets, or interests in the assets, are transferred generally to a special purpose entity which then issues liabilities to third party investors.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets; continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets; or derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer (see Accounting policies on page 93). The Group has securitisations in each of these categories.

Continued recognition

The table below sets out the asset categories together the carrying amounts of the assets and associated liabilities.

  2005   2004


 

Asset type   Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m
  Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m









Residential mortgages (1, 2)   2,388   2,366   1,519   1,479
Finance lease receivables (1, 3)   1,467   1,170   1,897   1,502
Other loans (1, 4)   2,189   1,543   1,713   1,313
Credit card receivables (5)   2,891   2,836   1,133   1,133
Commercial paper conduits (6)   6,688   6,685   4,704   4,696










(1) At 31 December 2004, in accordance with previous GAAP, the financial assets in these categories were derecognised to the extent of non-recourse finance as the arrangements qualified for the linked presentation.
(2) Mortgages have been transferred to special purpose vehicles, held ultimately by charitable trusts, funded principally through the issue of floating rate notes. The Group has entered into arm’s length fixed/floating interest rate swaps with the securitisation vehicles and provides mortgage management and agency services to the vehicles. On repayment of the financing, any further amounts generated by the mortgages will be paid to the Group. In 2004, the Group recognised net income of £26 million.
(3) Certain finance lease receivables (leveraged leases) involve the Group as lessor obtaining non-recourse funding from third parties. This financing is secured on the underlying leases and the provider of the finance has no recourse whatsoever to the other assets of the Group. In 2004, the Group recognised net income of £13 million.
(4) Other loans originated by the Group have been transferred to special purpose vehicles funded through the issue of notes. Any proceeds from the loans in excess of the amounts required to service and repay the notes are payable to the Group after deduction of expenses. In 2004, the Group recognised net income of £37 million.
(5) Credit card receivables in the UK have been securitised. Notes have been issued by a special purpose vehicle. The note holders have a proportionate interest in a pool of credit card receivables that have been equitably assigned by the Group to a receivables trust. The Group continues to be exposed to the risks and rewards of the transferred receivables through its right to excess spread (after charge offs).
(6) The Group sponsors commercial paper conduits. Customer assets are transferred into an SPE which issues notes in the commercial paper market. The Group supplies certain services and contingent liquidity support to these vehicles on an arm’s length basis as well as programme credit enhancement.

108





Continuing involvement

In certain US securitisations of residential mortgages substantially all the risks and rewards have been neither transferred nor retained, but the Group has retained control, of the assets and continues to recognise the assets to the extent of its continuing involvement. Securitised assets were £39.8 billion; retained interests £863 million; subordination assets £609 million and related liabilities £609 million.

Derecognition

Other securitisations of the Group’s financial assets in the US qualify for derecognition as substantially all the risks and rewards of the assets been transferred The Group continues to recognise any retained interests in the securitisation vehicles.

Disclosures are given below about those securitisations of financial assets undertaken by the Group that resulted in derecognition or recognition to the extent of continuing involvement. The Group has classified these securitisations into three broad categories: US Agency, consumer, and commercial securitisations. During 2005, the Group received proceeds of approximately £46.3 billion from securitisation trusts in connection with new securitisations of Group assets and £9.6 billion in connection with securitisation of third-party assets.

The Group recognised net pre-tax gains of approximately £182 million (2004 – £111 million) relating to these securitisations. Net pre-tax gains are based on the difference between the sales prices and previous carrying values of assets prior to date of sale, are net of transaction costs, and exclude any results attributable to hedging activities, interest income, funding costs, and changes in asset values prior to, and in retained interest values subsequent to, the securitisation date.

At 31 December 2005, the fair value of the Group’s retained interests was approximately £2.1 billion (2004 – £1.4 billion). These retained interests comprise approximately £1,179 million in US Agency based retained interests, £764 million in consumer based retained interests and £128 million in commercial based retained interests. These retained interests primarily relate to mortgage loans and securities and arose from securitisations that have taken place in current and prior years. Cash flows received in 2005 from retained interests held at 31 December 2005 in connection with securitisations that took place in current and prior years amounted to approximately £481 million (2004 – £383 million).


109





Notes on the accounts continued

12 Loans and advances to customers (continued)

Key economic assumptions used in measuring the value of retained interests at the date of securitisation resulting from securitisations completed during the year were as follows:

Assumptions   U.S. Agency
retained
interests
    Consumer
retained
interests
    Commercial
retained
interests









 
Prepayment speed   139 – 690PSA     16 – 44% CPR (1)   0 – 100 CPY (1)
Weighted average life   1 – 20 years   1 – 10 years   1 – 20 years
Cash flow discount rate   0– 26%     4– 90%     5– 81%  
Credit losses   N/A (3)   0 – 2% CDR (4)   N/A (5)









 
                 
Key economic assumptions and the sensitivity of the current fair value of retained interests at 31 December 2005 to immediate adverse changes, as indicated below, in those assumptions are as follows:
         
Assumptions/impact on fair value   U.S. Agency
retained
interests
    Consumer
retained
interests
    Commercial
retained
interests









 
Fair value of retained interests at 31 December 2004   £1,179 million   £764 million   £128 million
Prepayment speed(6)   9 – 25% CPR (1)   16 – 80% CPR (1)   0 – 75 CPY (2)
Impact on fair value of 10% adverse change   £0.5 million   £26.1 million  
Impact on fair value of 20% adverse change   £0.6 million   £47.1 million  
Weighted average life   0 – 19 years   1 – 10 years   1 – 20 years
Cash flow discount rate   0– 26%     4– 96%     5– 81%  
Impact on fair value of 10% adverse change   £33.5 million   £23.8 million   £4.7 million
Impact on fair value of 20% adverse change   £65.1 million   £46.0 million   £9.1 million
Credit losses   N/A (3)   0 – 2% CDR (4)   N/A (5)
Impact on fair value of 10% adverse change   N/A   £10.9 million   N/A
Impact on fair value of 20% adverse change   N/A   £19.8 million   N/A









 
  Notes:
(1) Constant prepayment rate – the CPR range represents the low and high points of a dynamic CPR curve.
(2) CPR with yield maintenance provision and thus prepayment risk is limited.
(3) Population consists of securities whose collateral is guaranteed by US Government sponsored entities and therefore, no credit loss has been assumed.
(4) Constant default rate.
(5) Population consists of only investment grade senior tranches; therefore, no credit losses are included in the assumptions.
(6) Prepayment speed has been stressed on an overall portfolio basis for US Agency retained interests due to the overall homogeneous nature of the collateral. Consumer and commercial retained interests have been stressed on a security level basis.

The sensitivities depicted in the preceding table are hypothetical and should be used with caution. The likelihood of those percent variations selected for sensitivity testing is not necessarily indicative of expected market movements because the relationship of the change in the assumptions to the change in fair value may not be linear. Also, the effect of a variation in a particular assumption on the fair value of a retained interest is calculated without changing any other assumptions. This might not be the case in actual market conditions since changes in one factor might result in changes to other factors. Further, the sensitivities depicted above do not consider any corrective actions that the Group might take to mitigate the effect of any adverse changes in one or more key assumptions.

Mortgage-backed securities

The Group sells originated mortgage loans to US Agencies in return for securities backed by these loans and guaranteed by the Agency whilst retaining the rights to service the mortgages. These securities may be subsequently sold. The purchaser has recourse to the Group for losses up to pre-determined levels on certain designated mortgages. The Group is not obliged, and does not intend, to support losses that may be suffered by the Agencies. Under the terms of the sale agreements, the Agencies have agreed to seek repayment only from the cash from the mortgage loans. Once the securities exchanged for the loans have been sold the Group’s exposure is restricted to the amount of the recourse. At 31 December 2005 mortgages amounting to £385 million (2004 - £472 million) had been sold with recourse and the related securities sold. These loans have been derecognised; they qualified for the linked presentation under previous GAAP.


110





13 Debt securities         Group
         













 
2005             UK
government
£m
    Other
government
£m
    Other public
sector body
£m
    Bank and
building
society
£m
  Other
issuers
£m
  Total
£m
















 
Held-for-trading             4,386   18,073   257     8 57,929   80,653
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss       451   7       864 2,669   3,991
Available-for-sale             662   17,807   40     9,613 7,411   35,533
Loans and receivables                     788   788
















 
At 31 December 2005             5,499   35,887   297     10,485 68,797   120,965
         













 
Available-for-sale                  
 Gross unrealised gains             9   9       7 41   66
 Gross unrealised losses                 (7 )   (277 )   (1)     (6 ) (64)   (355 )
















 
                   
2004                  
















 
Investment securities             757   14,135   309     9,355 10,987   35,543
Other securities             1,866   12,457   37     1,701 42,304   58,365
















 
At 31 December 2004(1)             2,623   26,592   346     11,056 53,291   93,908
         














Investment securities:                  
 Book value             757   14,135   309     9,355 10,987   35,543
 Gross unrecognised gains       2   85   1     5 78   171
 Gross unrecognised losses           (22 )   (44 )       (4 ) (285)   (355 )


























 Valuation at 31 December 2004       737   14,176   310     9,356 10,780   35,359
         














(1)   Amounts above include subordinated debt securities of £644 million at 31 December 2004.      
                             
2005                   Listed
£m
  Unlisted
£m
  Total
£m
















 
Held-for-trading                   41,544   39,109   80,653
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss                     3,043   948   3,991
Available-for-sale                   34,074   1,459   35,533
Loans and receivables                     788   788
















 
At 31 December 2005                   78,661   42,304   120,965
   
 
2004                    
















 
Investment securities                   25,647   9,896   35,543
Other securities                   30,946   27,419   58,365
















 
At 31 December 2004                   56,593   37,315   93,908
   
 
 
The following table shows the Group’s available-for-sale debt securities by remaining maturity and the related yield (based on weighted averages) as at 31 December 2005.
                     
Within 1 year   After 1 but
within 5 years
    After 5 but
within 10 years
    After 10 years   Total

 
   
   
 
 
Amount
£m
  Yield
%
  Amount
£m
    Yield
%
    Amount
£m
    Yield
%
    Amount
£m
    Yield
%
  Amount
£m
  Yield
%
















 
UK government 111   7.0   357   5.6   187     5.5   7   2.3   662   5.8
US government, federal agencies and states 52   2.2   292   2.3   829     1.9     14,976   3.6   16,149   3.5
Other government 604   1.9   1,088   4.1      4     5.0   3   4.5   1,699   3.3
Corporate debt securities 640   3.8   1,492   3.9   222     4.7   191   5.1   2,545   4.0
Mortgage-backed securities 27   4.7   13   6.0   511     5.8     3,230   3.6   3,781   3.9
Bank and building society 7,853   4.3   1,567   3.9   156     4.1   37   4.5   9,613   4.3
Other 837   3.1   56   2.8      3     6.8   188   4.8   1,084   3.4
















 
Total fair value 10,124   4.1   4,865   4.0     1,912     3.8     18,632   3.6   35,533   3.8
 














 

111





Notes on the accounts continued

13 Debt securities (continued)

The table below shows the number and fair value of available-for-sale debt-securities that were in an unrealised loss position at 31 December 2005.

  Less than 12 months     More than 12 months     Total

   
   


Issued by   Number
of issues
  Fair value
£m
    Gross
unrealised
losses
£m
    Fair value
£m
  Gross
unrealised
losses
£m
    Fair value
£m
    Gross
unrealised
losses
£m



















 
UK government   9       217   7   217   7
US government, federal agencies and states   511   13,390   228   1,475   35   14,865   263
Other government   54   1,136   7   149   7   1,285   14
Corporates   21   157   3   54   1   211   4
Mortgage-backed securities   110   2,797   55   149   4   2,946   59
Bank and building society   159   5,417   4   156   2   5,573   6
Other   5     2   6     6   2



















 
  869   22,897   299   2,206   56   25,103   355
   
















 
       
The Group considers that unrealised losses on available-for-sale debt securities are temporary principally because they reflect changes in benchmark interest rates.
               
14 Equity shares     Group















 
    Listed
£m
    Unlisted
£m
    2005
Total
£m
  Listed
£m
    Unlisted
£m
    2004
Total
£m



















 
Held-for-trading     2,937   4   2,941      
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss     2,113   428   2,541      
Available-for-sale     704   3,115   3,819      











    5,754   3,547   9,301      








Investment securities           1,213   1,227   2,440
Other securities           2,282   1   2,283







 
At 31 December           3,495   1,228   4,723







 
Available-for-sale              
    Gross unrealised gains     168   54   222      
    Gross unrealised losses     (5 )   (8 )   (13 )        











     
    163   46   209      








Investment securities              
    Book value           1,213   1,227   2,440
    Gross unrecognised gains           356   169   525
    Gross unrecognised losses           (78 )   (5 )   (83 )







 
          1,491   1,391   2,882







 

Unquoted equity investments at cost include £1.8 billion attributable to the Group’s investment in Bank of China which was completed on 31 December 2005. Also included are equity investments in the Federal Home Loans Bank and Federal Reserve Bank that are redeemable at cost (£0.8 billion). The remaining investments at cost cannot be measured reliably and comprised numerous small shareholdings including those received on trouble debt restructuring. Disposals in the year generated gains of £85 million.

At 31 December 2005 the £13 million gross unrealised losses represented 23 equity issues with fair value of £30 million which were in an unrealised loss position for less than 12 months.


112





15 Investments in Group undertakings

Investments in Group undertakings are carried at cost less impairment. Movements during the year were as follows:

  Company

 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m






 
At 1 January   21,900   15,497
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 on 1 January 2005   (4,004 )  
Currency translation and other adjustments   (6 )   (399 )
Additions   2,961   6,802






 
At 31 December   20,851   21,900




 

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the company are shown below. Their capital consists of ordinary and preference shares which are unlisted with the exception of certain preference shares issued by NatWest. The Royal Bank and RBS Insurance Group Limited are directly owned by the company, and all of the other subsidiary undertakings are wholly owned directly, or indirectly through intermediate holding companies, by these companies. All of these subsidiaries are included in the Group’s consolidated financial statements and have an accounting reference date of 31 December.

  Nature of
business
  Country of
incorporation
and principal
area of operation



The Royal Bank of Scotland plc   Banking   Great Britain
National Westminster Bank Plc (1)   Banking   Great Britain
Citizens Financial Group, Inc.   Banking   US
Coutts & Co(2)   Private banking   Great Britain
Greenwich Capital Markets, Inc.   Broker dealer   US
RBS Insurance Group Limited   Insurance   Great Britain
Ulster Bank Limited(3)   Banking   Northern Ireland



  Notes:
(1) The company does not hold any of the NatWest preference shares in issue.
(2) Coutts & Co is incorporated with unlimited liability. Its registered office is 440 Strand, London WC2R 0Q5.
(3) Ulster Bank Limited and its subsidiary undertakings also operate in the Republic of Ireland.

The above information is provided in relation to the principal related undertakings as permitted by Section 231(5) of the Companies Act 1985. Full information on all related undertakings will be included in the Annual Return filed with the UK Companies House.


113





Notes on the accounts continued

16 Impaired and past-due financial assets   Group



2005   Cost
£m
  Provision
£m
  Net book
value
£m




Impaired financial assets      
Loans and receivables and finance leases   5,926   3,344   2,582
Available-for-sale   316   132   184






  6,242   3,476   2,766
 




  Group

  2005
£m
  2004
£m





Impairment losses charged to the income statement    
Loans and receivables and finance leases (see table below)   1,703  
Available-for-sale   4  
Loans and advances (see table below)     1,402
Amounts written-off fixed asset investments     83





Total   1,707   1,485
 


The following table shows impairment losses for loans and receivables and finance leases (2004 – loans and advances).

  Group






  2005
£m
  Specific
£m
  General
£m
  2004
Total
£m









At 1 January   4,174   3,332   553   3,885
Implementation of IAS 39   (29 )      
Currency translation and other adjustments   51   (22 )   (76 )   (98 )
Acquisitions     222   68   290
Amounts written-off (1)   (2,040 )   (1,449 )     (1,449 )
Recoveries of amounts previously written-off   172   144     144
Charged to the income statement   1,703   1,386   16   1,402
Unwind of discount   (144 )      











At 31 December (2)   3,887   3,613   561   4,174








(1) Amounts written-off during the year include £2 million relating to banks (2004 – nil).
(2) Balance at 31 December 2005 includes £3 million relating to banks (2004 – £6 million).

Loan impairment

At 31 December 2005, the Group’s non-accrual loans, loans past due 90 days and troubled debt restructurings amounted to £5,937 million (2004 – £5,470 million). Loan impairment provisions of £3,344 million (2004 – £3,561 million) were held against these loans. Average non-accrual loans, loans past due 90 days and troubled debt restructurings for the year to 31 December 2005 were £5,923 million (2004 – £5,264 million).

  IFRS

  2005
£m
  2004
£m



Gross income not recognised but which would have been      
recognised under the original terms of non-accrual and restructured loans      
     Domestic   334   235
     Foreign   62   58





  396   293
 


Interest on non-accrual and restructured loans included in net interest income      
     Domestic   130   58
     Foreign   14   7





  144   65
 



114





17 Intangible assets   Group














2005   Goodwill
£m
  Core
deposit
intangibles
£m
  Other
purchased
intangibles
£m
  Internally
generated
software
£m
  Total
£m
















Cost:          
At 1 January 2005   18,032   268   261   2,089   20,650
Currency translation and other adjustments   786   31   30     847
Acquisition of subsidiaries   113         113
Additions       34   329   363
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets   (108 )       (124 )   (232 )
















At 31 December 2005   18,823   299   325   2,294   21,741














Accumulated amortisation and impairment:          
At 1 January 2005     22   22   1,364   1,408
Currency translation and other adjustments     5   3     8
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets         (106 )   (106 )
Charge for the year     58   39   402   499
















At 31 December 2005     85   64   1,660   1,809














Net book value at 31 December 2005   18,823   214   261   634   19,932














           
2004          
















Cost:          
At 1 January 2004   13,131       1,827   14,958
Currency translation and other adjustments   (518 )   (18 )   (2 )     (538 )
Acquisition of subsidiaries   5,435   286   263     5,984
Additions         303   303
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets   (16 )       (41 )   (57 )
















At 31 December 2004   18,032   268   261   2,089   20,650














           
Accumulated amortisation and impairment:          
At 1 January 2004         931   931
Currency translation and other adjustments     (1 )       (1 )
Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets         (41 )   (41 )
Charge for the year     23   22   474   519
















At 31 December 2004     22   22   1,364   1,408














Net book value at 31 December 2004   18,032   246   239   725   19,242















The weighted average amortisation period of purchased intangible assets, other than goodwill, subject to amortisation are:     The amortisation expense for each of the next five years is currently estimated to be:  
     
  Years     £m

 
Core deposit intangibles 6   2006 113
Other purchased intangibles 7   2007 113

2008 113
    2009 67
    2010 20



115





Notes on the accounts continued

17 Intangible assets (continued)

Impairment review

      Goodwill  

 
Significant Business
Division
  Acquisition   Cash generating unit   2005
£m
(1)   2004
£m
Basis of valuation   Key assumptions














Corporate Markets   NatWest*   Core corporate banking   1,888   1,888(2) Earnings   Allocation of












  common
Corporate Markets   NatWest*   Financial markets   1,563   1,563(2) Earnings   resources












   
Retail Banking   NatWest*   NatWest Retail   3,095   2,721(2) Earnings    














Citizens   Mellon   Mid-Atlantic   1,209   1,197(1) Expected earnings   Mellon business
        and cash generation   typical of recent
        multiples, including control
premium
  transactions in the
same region














Citizens   Charter One   Charter One   4,471   Value-in-use:   Terminal growth
(acquired 2004)         cash flow   rate after year 7**














RBS Insurance   Churchill   Churchill Group   794   775(1) Value-in-use:   Terminal growth
        cash flow   rate after year 7**














(1) As at 30 September.
(2) As at 1 January 2004.
* Of the overall goodwill arising from the acquisition of NatWest in 2000, £2.7 billion (2004 – £3.1 billion) has been allocated to cash generating units other than those shown above.
** The key valuation parameters are the same as those used to support the Group’s decision to purchase the businesses.
   
18 Property, plant and equipment   Group
                                       




















2005   Investment
properties
£m
  Freehold
premises
£m
  Long
leasehold
premises
£m
  Short
leasehold
premises
£m
  Computers
and other
equipment
£m
  Operating
lease
assets
£m
  Total
£m






















Cost or valuation:              
At 1 January 2005   4,162   2,878   404   842   3,143   9,447   20,876
Currency translation and other adjustments   (55 )   17   11   18   67   469   527
Reclassifications   (2 )   34   (31 )     (1 )    
Additions   348   331   25   322   597   3,136   4,759
Subsequent expenditure on investment properties   53             53
Change in fair value of investment properties   26             26
Disposals and write-off of fully depreciated assets   (176 )   (560 )   (71 )   (127 )   (466 )   (1,372 )   (2,772 )
Disposals of subsidiaries   (9 )   (19 )     (10 )   (30 )   (111 )   (179 )






















At 31 December 2005   4,347   2,681   338   1,045   3,310   11,569   23,290




















               
Accumulated depreciation and amortisation:              
At 1 January 2005     417   138   280   1,831   1,782   4,448
Currency translation and other adjustments     4     6   31   141   182
Disposals and write-off of fully depreciated assets     (91 )   (24 )   (29 )   (340 )   (159 )   (643 )
Disposals of subsidiaries         (2 )   (21 )   (53 )   (76 )
Depreciation charge for the year     60   7   64   390   805   1,326






















At 31 December 2005     390   121   319   1,891   2,516   5,237




















Net book value at 31 December 2005   4,347   2,291   217   726   1,419   9,053   18,053





















116





        Group      



















 
2004   Investment
properties
£m
  Freehold
premises
£m
  Long
leasehold
premises
£m
  Short
leasehold
premises
£m
  Computers
and other
equipment
£m
  Operating
lease
assets
£m
  Total
£m





















 
Cost:              
At 1 January 2004   4,076   2,635   312   655   2,712   7,537   17,927
Currency translation and other
   adjustments
  2   (18 )     (10 )   (42 )   (184 )   (252 )
Reclassifications     1   (5 )   (5 )   9    
Acquisition of subsidiaries     164   32   41   133   487   857
Additions   164   589   86   212   691   2,841   4,583
Disposals and write-off of fully
   depreciated assets
  (80 )   (493 )   (21 )   (51 )   (360 )   (1,234 )   (2,239 )





















 
At 31 December 2004   4,162   2,878   404   842   3,143   9,447   20,876



















 
Accumulated depreciation and amortisation:              
At 1 January 2004     407   129   280   1,537   1,327   3,680
Currency translation and
   other adjustments
    (1 )   3   (3 )   (17 )   (29 )   (47 )
Reclassifications         (2 )   2    
Acquisition of subsidiaries       5     14   28   47
Disposals and write-off of
   fully depreciated assets
    (19 )   (2 )   (4 )   (130 )   (232 )   (387 )
Depreciation charge for the year     30   3   9   425   688   1,155





















 
At 31 December 2004     417   138   280   1,831   1,782   4,448



















 
Net book value at 31 December 2004   4,162   2,461   266   562   1,312   7,665   16,428



















 

  2005   2004
  £m   £m





Contracts for future capital expenditure not provided for in the accounts    
   at the year end (excluding investment properties)   38   447
Contractual obligations to purchase, construct or develop investment    
   properties or to repair, maintain or enhance investment property   4   155
Property, plant and equipment pledged as security   1,250   1,268





Investment properties are valued to reflect fair market value. Valuations are carried out by qualified surveyors who are members of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, or an equivalent overseas body. The 31 December 2005 valuation for a significant majority of the Group’s investment properties was undertaken by external valuers.

The fair value of investment properties includes £100 million (2004 – £74 million) of appreciation since purchase. This increase would normally be realised on disposal of the properties. Premises include £84 million (2004 – £570 million) assets in the course of construction.

117





Notes on the accounts continued

19 Derivatives at fair value

Companies in the Group enter into various off-balance sheet financial instruments (derivatives) as principal either as a trading activity or to manage balance sheet foreign exchange and interest rate risk. Derivatives include swaps, forwards, futures and options. They may be traded on an organised exchange (exchange-traded) or over-the-counter (OTC). Holders of exchange traded derivatives are generally required to provide margin daily in the form of cash or other collateral.

Swaps include currency swaps, interest rate swaps, credit default swaps, total return swaps and equity and equity index swaps. A swap is an agreement to exchange cash flows in the future in accordance with a pre-arranged formula. In currency swap transactions, interest payment obligations are exchanged on assets and liabilities denominated in different currencies; the exchange of principal may be notional or actual. Interest rate swap contracts generally involve exchange of fixed and floating interest payment obligations without the exchange of the underlying principal amounts.

Forwards include forward foreign exchange contracts and forward rate agreements. A forward contract is a contract to buy (or sell) a specified amount of a physical or financial commodity, at agreed price, on an agreed future date. Forward foreign exchange contracts are contracts for the delayed delivery of currency on a specified future date. Forward rate agreements are contracts under which two counterparties agree on the interest to be paid on a notional deposit of a specified maturity at a specific future date; there is no exchange of principal.

Futures are exchange-traded forward contracts to buy (or sell) standardised amounts of underlying physical or financial commodities. The Group buys and sells currency, interest rate and equity futures.

Options include exchange-traded options on currencies, interest rates and equities and equity indices and OTC currency and equity options, interest rate caps and floors and swaptions. They are contracts that give the holder the right but not the obligation to buy (or sell) a specified amount of the underlying physical or financial commodity at an agreed price on an agreed date or over an agreed period.

The Group enters into fair value and cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations. Fair value hedges principally involve interest rate swaps hedging the interest rate risk in recognised financial assets and financial liabilities. Similarly the majority of the Group’s cash flow hedges relate to exposure to variability in future interest payments and receipts on forecast transactions and on recognised financial assets and financial liabilities and hedged by interest rate swaps for periods of up to 28 years. The Group hedges its net investments in foreign operations with currency borrowings.

  Group



  Total derivatives


2005   Notional amounts
£bn
  Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m

Exchange rate contracts      
Spot, forwards and futures   885   10,758   10,214
Currency swaps   221   3,228   3,849
Options purchased   301   6,438  
Options written   315     6,101
       
Interest rate contracts      
Interest rate swaps   7,234   65,618   67,156
Options purchased   814   5,988  
Options written   719     5.557
Futures and forwards   1,482   268   325
             
Credit derivatives   217   1,455   1,355
             
Equity and commodity contracts   61   1,910   1,881







    95,663   96,438


Included in the above are cash flow hedging derivatives as follows:        
   Spot, forwards and futures     5   25
   Interest rate swaps     431   373
         
Included in the above are fair value hedging derivatives as follows:        
   Interest rate swaps     1,096   676

The company held derivative assets at fair value amounting to £55 million (notional amounts £1 billion).


118





  Group






 
    Trading derivatives
Fair value

 
2004   Notional amounts
£bn
  Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m








 
Exchange rate contracts      
Spot, forwards and futures   746   17,133   18,566
Currency swaps   178   6,281   6,314
Options purchased   243   5,797  
Options written   256     5,324
       
Interest rate contracts      
Interest rate swaps   4,939   54,964   55,360
Options purchased   296   3,168  
Options written   287     3,274
Futures and forwards   1,091   475   479
             
Credit derivatives   59   264   285
             
Equity and commodity contracts   41   1,227   783








 
    89,309   90,385
Effect of netting     (71,509 )   (71,509 )








 
    17,800   18,876




 

Non-trading derivatives

Under previous GAAP, hedging derivatives were accounted for in accordance with the treatment of the hedged transaction. As a result any gains or losses on the hedging instrument arising from changes in fair values were not recognised in the profit and loss account immediately but accounted for in the same manner as the hedged item. The Group established such non-trading derivative positions externally with third parties and also internally. The tables below include the components of the internal hedging programme that transferred risks to the trading portfolio or to external third party participants in the derivatives market.

  Group





    Fair value   Book value


2004   Notional
amounts
£bn
  Positive
£m
  Negative
£m
  Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m











Exchange rate contracts          
Spot, forwards and futures   21   46   665   35   603
Currency swaps and options   5   349   227   234   123
           
Interest rate contracts          
Interest rate swaps   121   1,617   1,342   623   650
Futures, forwards and options   14   71   318   2   2
                     
Credit derivatives   1   4   11     6
                     
Equity and commodity contracts   2   207   62   102   15











    2,294   2,625   996   1,399
       







119





Notes on the accounts continued

19 Derivatives at fair value (continued)   Group




 
2004   Unrecognised
gains and
losses
£m
  Deferred
gains and
losses
£m






 
As at 1 January 2004 – gains   2,236   213
As at 1 January 2004 – losses   (2,205 )   (34 )






 
  31   179
Recognised gains that arose in previous periods   (781 )   (65 )
Recognised losses that arose in previous periods   537   4
Unrecognised gains and losses arising in the year   224  
Unrecognised gains and losses deferred in the year   61   (61 )
Unrecognised gains and losses deferred and taken to profit or loss in the year     (30 )






 
At 31 December 2004   72   27





         
Of which – gains   1,571   483
Of which – losses   (1,499 )   (456 )






 
  72   27





Maturity of replacement cost of over-the-counter contracts (trading and non-trading)

Replacement cost indicates the Group’s derivatives credit exposure. The following table sets forth the gross positive fair values by maturity. The replacement cost of internal trades is not included as there is no credit risk associated with them.

  Group



2004   Within
one year
£m
  One to
five years
£m
  Over
five years
£m
  Total
£m









Before netting        
Exchange rate contracts   21,812   5,414   2,018   29,244
Interest rate contracts   6,777   24,932   27,287   58,996
Credit derivatives     107   157   264
Equity and commodity contracts   604   777   13   1,394









  29,193   31,230   29,475   89,898



Financial institutions         70,417
Others         19,481









        89,898


20 Prepayments, accrued income and other assets   Group   Company



  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m





Prepayments   1,274   1,505      
Accrued income   857   4,541       208
Deferred expenses   372   898      
Other assets   6,295   4,668   147   110









  8,798   11,612   147   318




         
Amounts above include:        
Due from subsidiaries           313






120





21 Deposits by banks   Group   Company



  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m









Held-for-trading   32,067        
Amortised cost   78,340     951  









  110,407   99,883   951   174







Amounts above include:        
Items in the course of transmission to other banks   722   802    
Due to subsidiaries       944   108









         
22 Customer accounts   Group   Company



  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m









Held-for-trading   34,645        
Designated as at fair value through profit or loss (1)   3,683        
Amortised cost   304,539      55  









  342,867   283,315    55  







Amounts above include:        
Due to subsidiaries        55  










(1) The amounts include insurance linked liabilities with a carrying value of £2,296 million. The carrying amount of other customer accounts designated as at fair value through profit or loss is £114 million greater than amortised cost. No amounts have been recognised in profit or loss for changes in credit risk associated with these liabilities as the changes are immaterial measured as the change in fair value from movements in the period in the credit risk premium payable by the Group.
   
23 Debt securities in issue   Group   Company


  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m









     Held-for-trading   1,469      
     Designated as at fair value through profit or loss (1)   11,068      
     Amortised cost   77,883     2,942  









  90,420   63,999   2,942   1,608








(1) No amounts have been recognised in profit or loss for changes in credit risk associated with these liabilities as the changes are immaterial measured as the change in fair value from movements in the period in the credit risk premium payable by the Group. The carrying amount is £365 million less than amortised cost.
   
24 Settlement balances and short positions   Group

  2005
£m
  2004
£m



Settlement balances – amortised cost   6,561   4,067
Short positions – held-for-trading:    
    Debt securities – Government   30,749   24,619
    Debt securities – Other issuers   5,355   4,002
    Treasury bills and other eligible bills   1,178   302
    Equity shares   145  





  43,988   32,990




121





Notes on the accounts continued

25 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   Group   Company

 
 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m











 
Notes in circulation   1,365   1,351    
Current taxation   952   662     18
Accruals   3,875   8,468   13   83
Deferred income   3,333   3,095    
Provisions for liabilities and charges (see table below)   162   198    
Other liabilities   4,560   3,874   1   200











 
  14,247   17,648   14   301









 
Amounts above include:        
Due to subsidiaries       1   150











 
(1)      Other liabilities include £10 million (2004 – £20 million) in respect of share-based compensation.
         
      Group  







 
Provisions for liabilities and charges     Property(1)
£m
  Other(2)
£m
  Total
£m











 
At 1 January 2005     164   34   198
Currency translation and other movements     1   (1 )  
Charge to income statement     7   7   14
Releases to income statement     (14 )   (2 )   (16 )
Provisions utilised     (29 )   (5 )   (34 )











 
At 31 December 2005     129   33   162







 
  Notes:
(1) The Group has a number of leasehold properties where rents payable and other unavoidable costs exceed the value to the Group. Such costs arise over the period of the lease or to the expected termination date, and the provision has been discounted due to the long-term nature of certain of these obligations.
(2) Other provisions arise in the normal course of business.
         
26 Deferred taxation        
         
Provision for deferred taxation has been made as follows:   Group   Company



 


  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m












Deferred tax liability   1,695   2,061    
Deferred tax asset (included in Prepayments, accrued income and other assets, Note 20)   (156 )   (47 )   (3 )  












Net deferred tax   1,539   2,014   (3 )  











Group





























Accelerated
capital
Pension allowances
  Provisions   Deferred
gains
  Other
transition
    Fair
value of
financial
instruments
    Intangibles   Hedging   Other   Total
£m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m






























At 1 January 2004 under UK GAAP 75   2,440   (686 )   38           121     1,988
Implementation of IFRS (excluding IAS 32 and IAS 39) (582 )   (75 )     109   7     243     (2 )   (300 )






























At 1 January 2004 restated (507 )   2,365   (686 )   147   7     243     119   1,688
Charge to income statement (68 )   419   2   (12 )   (44 )     (79 )     66   284
Charge to equity directly (424 )   (6 )   4     56     (2 )     7   (365 )
Acquisitions of subsidiaries   514     7   (6 )           515
Other   (87 )   22             (43 )   (108 )






























At 1 January 2005 (999 )   3,205   (658 )   142   13     162     149   2,014
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39     (24 )     (288 )   65     12     (235 )






























At 1 January 2005 restated (999 )   3,205   (682 )   142   (275 )   65   162   12   149   1,779
Charge to income statement 53   433   52   (21 )   (52 )   48   (18 )     (125 )   370
Charge to equity directly (238 )           (217 )     (59 )   (39 )   (553 )
Other 2   15   (34 )       (4 )   4   2   (42 )   (57 )






























At 31 December 2005 (1,182 )   3,653   (664 )   121   (327 )   (108 )   148   (45 )   (57 )   1,539






























122





      Company


      Total*
£m










At 1 January 2004 and 1 January 2005      
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39       (5 )










At 1 January 2005 restated       (5 )
Charge to equity directly       2










At 31 December 2005       (3 )


* All relates to hedging.      
       
27 Insurance liabilities      
    Group


    2005
£m
    2004
£m










Life assurance business:      
   Unit linked insurance contracts     325   306
   Other insurance contracts     1,974   1,735
   Investment contracts       2,102
General insurance business     4,913   4,504










    7,212   8,647





General insurance business      
       
(i) Claims and loss adjustment expenses      
  Group








  Gross
£m
    Reinsurance
£m
    Net
£m










Notified claims   2,812   (481 )   2,331
Incurred but not reported   1,087   (140 )   947










At 1 January 2004   3,899   (621 )   3,278
Cash paid for claims settled in the year   (3,198 )   462   (2,736 )
Increase in liabilities      
    – arising from current year claims   3,943   (484 )   3,459
    – arising from prior year claims   (139 )   217   78
Net exchange differences   (1 )   (1 )   (2 )










At 31 December 2004   4,504   (427 )   4,077


















Notified claims   3,137   (296 )   2,841
Incurred but not reported   1,367   (131 )   1,236










At 1 January 2005   4,504   (427 )   4,077
Cash paid for claims settled in the year   (3,474 )   147   (3,327 )
Increase in liabilities      
 – arising from current year claims   4,220   (96 )   4,124
 – arising from prior year claims   (344 )   29   (315 )
Net exchange differences   7   (1 )   6










At 31 December 2005   4,913   (348 )   4,565

Notified claims   3,465   (208 )   3,257
Incurred but not reported   1,448   (140 )   1,308










At 31 December 2005   4,913   (348 )   4,565








123






Notes on the accounts continued

27 Insurance liabilities (continued)      
       
(ii) Provisions for unearned premiums and unexpired short term insurance risks      
        Group      








Unearned premium provision   Gross
£m
    Reinsurance
£m
    Net
£m










At 1 January 2004   2,472   (125 )   2,347
Increase in the year   423     423
Release in the year     27   27










At 31 December 2004   2,895   (98 )   2,797
Release in the year   (12 )   71   59










At 31 December 2005   2,883   (27 )   2,856








Performance of life business (life contracts) in 2005      
      Group
     

      2005
£m










Opening net assets       772
New business contribution       34
Profit from existing business:      
 Expected return       16
 Experience variances       (13 )










      3










Investment return variances       7
Economic assumption changes       (15 )
Other       23










Closing net assets       824


New business contribution represents the present value of future profits on new insurance contract business written during the year.
         
Movement in provision for liabilities under life contracts and investment contracts (net of reinsurance)    
    Group


    Life
contracts
£m
    Investment
contracts
£m










At 1 January 2005     2,041   2,102
Implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 on 1 January 2005     47  
Premiums received     429   86
Fees and expenses     (11 )   (21 )
Investment return     252   333
Actuarial adjustments     (91 )  
Account balances paid on surrender and other terminations in the year     (368 )   (204 )










At 31 December 2005     2,299   2,296





Following implementation of IFRS 4 ‘Insurance Contracts’ on 1 January 2005, investment contracts have been reclassified as customer accounts.

Changes in assumptions during the year were not material to the profit recognised.

124






Assets backing unit-linked liabilities   2005
£m
  2004
£m



Debt securities   1,497   1,491
Equity securities   2,217   1,887
Other investments   8   14
Cash and cash equivalents   49   65
         
The associated liabilities are:    
Unit-linked contracts classified as insurance contracts   1,640   1,514
Unit-linked contracts classified as investment contracts (within customer deposits)   2,131   1,943



 
There are no options and guarantees relating to life assurance contracts that could in aggregate have a material effect on the amount, timing and uncertainty of the Group’s future cash flows.
     

125






Notes on the accounts continued

28 Subordinated liabilities   Group   Company

 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m





Designated as at fair value through profit or loss   150      
Amortised cost   28,124     9,242  




  28,274     9,242  
 

Dated loan capital   12,977   11,013   2,039   4,850
Undated loan capital   10,236   9,353   1,244   1,085
Preference securities – preference shares   2,840     2,344  
Preference securities – trust preferred securities   2,221     3,615  









  28,274   20,366   9,242   5,935
 




On implementation of IAS 32, certain preference shares were re-classified as liabilities; these securities remain subject to the capital maintenance rules of the Companies Act 1985.

The following tables analyse the remaining maturity of subordinated liabilities by (1) the final redemption date; and (2) the next callable date.

        Group
       












2005 – final redemption       2006
£m
  2007
£m
  2008-2010
£m
  2011-2015
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     51   150     1,123   415     1,739
   US$     412     811   3,537   555     5,315
   Euro     129     836   3,003   1,164     5,132
   Other     10     356   425       791

















Dated loan capital     602   150   2,003   8,088   2,134     12,977

















Sterling               5,709   5,709
   US$               2,723   2,723
   Euro               1,681   1,681
   Other               123   123

















Undated loan capital               10,236   10,236

















   Sterling               374   374
   US$               3,829   3,829
   Euro               858   858

















Preference securities               5,061   5,061

















    602   150   2,003   8,088   2,134   15,297   28,274













  Group















2005 – call date   Currently
£m
  2006
£m
  2007
£m
  2008 – 2010
£m
  2011– 2015
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     51   150     1,188   350     1,739
   US$     412     1,559   3,079   265     5,315
   Euro     129     1,522   2,659   822     5,132
   Other     10     781         791

















Dated loan capital     602   150   3,862   6,926   1,437     12,977

















   Sterling   127   280   174   564     4,539   25   5,709
   US$   1,645   40   333   13       692   2,723
   Euro     19     475     1,031   156   1,681
   Other             123     123

















Undated loan capital   1,772   339   507   1,052     5,693   873   10,236

















   Sterling   152       197     24   1   374
   US$   741   426   289   1,065     1,308     3,829
   Euro             858     858

















Preference securities   893   426   289   1,262     2,190   1   5,061

















  2,665   1,367   946   6,176   6,926   9,320   874   28,274
   














126






        Group
       












2004 – final redemption       2005
£m
  2006
£m
  2007-2009
£m
  2010-2014
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     165     150   486   913     1,714
   US$     206   54   719   2,410   850     4,239
   Euro         391   2,621   1,645     4,657
   Other           403       403

















Dated loan capital     371   54   1,260   5,920   3,408     11,013

















   Sterling               5,308   5,308
   US$               2,372   2,372
   Euro               1,509   1,509
   Other               164   164

















Undated loan capital               9,353   9,353

















    371   54   1,260   5,920   3,408   9,353   20,366
       
   
  Group















2004 – call date   Currently
£m
  2005
£m
  2006
£m
  2007– 2009
£m
  2010– 2014
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     165   301   150   250   848     1,714
   US$     206   54   1,387   2,000   592     4,239
   Euro         1,095   2,268   1,294     4,657
   Other         403         403

















Dated loan capital     371   355   3,035   4,518   2,734     11,013

















   Sterling       125   150   1,347   3,686     5,308
   US$   1,316   44   103   255       654   2,372
   Euro         458   1,051       1,509
   Other             164     164

















Undated loan capital   1,316   44   228   863   2,398   3,850   654   9,353

















  1,316   415   583   3,898   6,916   6,584   654   20,366
   














127






Notes on the accounts continued

28 Subordinated liabilities (continued)       Company
       












2005 – final redemption       2006
£m
  2007
£m
  2008-2010
£m
  2011-2015
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















                             
Dated loan capital – US$     33     232   1,572   202     2,039

















Undated loan capital – US$               1,244   1,244

















   Sterling               198   198
   US$               4,567   4,567
   Euro               1,194   1,194

















Preference securities               5,959   5,959

















    33     232   1,572   202   7,203   9,242
       












   
  Company















2005 – call date   Currently
£m
  2006
£m
  2007
£m
  2008 – 2010
£m
  2011– 2015
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















Dated loan capital – US$     33     232   1,572   202     2,039

















Undated loan capital – US$   484   24   44         692   1,244

















   Sterling         197       1   198
   US$   595   371   115   1,065     2,421     4,567
   Euro             1,194     1,194

















Preference securities   595   371   115   1,262     3,615   1   5,959

















  1,079   428   159   1,494   1,572   3,817   693   9,242
   














     
        Company
       












2004 – final redemption       2005
£m
  2006
£m
  2007-2009
£m
  2010-2014
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     40             40
   US$         589   2,486   860     3,935
   Euro           875       875

















Dated loan capital     40     589   3,361   860     4,850

















Undated loan capital – US$               1,085   1,085

















    40     589   3,361   860   1,085   5,935
       












   
  Company















2004 – call date   Currently
£m
  2005
£m
  2006
£m
  2007– 2009
£m
  2010– 2014
£m
  thereafter
£m
  perpetual
£m
  Total
£m

















   Sterling     40             40
   US$         589   2,486   860     3,935
   Euro           875       875

















Dated loan capital     40     589   3,361   860     4,850

















Undated loan capital – US$   284   44   103         654   1,085

















  284   84   103   589   3,361   860   654   5,935
   














  Notes:
(1) In the event of certain changes in tax laws, dated and undated loan capital issues may be redeemed in whole, but not in part, at the option of the Group, at the principal amount thereof plus accrued interest, subject to prior regulatory approval.
(2) At 31 December 2004 the principle amounts payable to dated and undated loan note holders would not have been materially different from the carrying amount.
(3) On 30 November 2005, the company gave notice of redemption of 8 million Exchangeble Capital Securities, Series A, of US$25 each on 31 December 2005. This occurred on the next banking day, 3 January 2006. On 15 December 2005, NatWest gave notice of redemption of 20 million Exchangeble Capital Securities, Series A, of US$25 each on 17 January 2006.
   

128






29 Minority interests           Group

 
          2005
£m
  2004
£m














 
At 1 January           3,492   2,392
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 on 1 January 2005           (2,541 )  
Currency translation adjustments and other movements           53   (188 )
Profit attributable to minority interests           57   177
Dividends paid           (95 )   (147 )
Equity raised           1,264   1,260
Equity withdrawn           (121 )   (2 )














 
At 31 December           2,109   3,492

 
Equity minority interests at 31 December 2004 were £158 million.  
             
30 Share capital       Allotted, called up and fully paid   Authorised
   

 
      1 January
2005
£m
  Issued during
the year
£m
  31 December
2005
£m
  31 December
2005
£m
  31 December
2004
£m














 
Equity shares            
Ordinary shares of 25p       793   6   799   1,270   1,020
Non-voting deferred shares of £0.01       27     27   323   323














 
Total equity share capital       820   6   826   1,593   1,343














 
             
Non-equity shares            
Additional Value Shares of £0.01             27   27
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01       1     1   2   2
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01              
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01              
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01              
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25             225   225
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01              
Cumulative preference shares of £1       1     1   1   1
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1             300   300














 
Total non-equity share capital       2     2   555   555














 
Total share capital       822   6   828   2,148   1,898
       









 
               
          Allotted, called up and fully paid   Authorised
       

 
Number of shares – thousands         2005   2004   2005   2004














 
Equity shares            
Ordinary shares of 25p           3,196,544   3,172,605   5,079,375   4,079,375
Non-voting deferred shares of £0.01           2,660,556   2,660,556   32,300,000     32,300,000
             
Non-equity shares            
Additional Value Shares of £0.01             2,700,000   2,700,000
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01           206,000   153,000   419,500   348,500
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01         1,000   1,900   3,900   3,900
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01         2,500   1,250   66,000   66,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01           750   3,000   3,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25             900,000   900,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01         200   200   1,000   1,000
Cumulative preference shares of £1         900   900   900   900
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1             300,000   300,000














 

129






Notes on the accounts continued

30 Share capital (continued)

Ordinary shares

The following issues of ordinary shares were made during the year ended 31 December 2005:

(a)

13.5 million ordinary shares following the exercise of options under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and a further 0.7 million ordinary shares in respect of the exercise of options under the NatWest executive and sharesave schemes which had been exchanged for options over the company’s shares following the acquisition of NatWest in 2000;
   
(b) 7.4 million ordinary shares in lieu of cash in respect of the final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2004 and the interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2005; and
   
(c) 2.3 million ordinary shares under the company’s employee share ownership plan.

Consideration of £163 million was received on the issue of ordinary shares for cash and dividends of £124 million were satisfied by the issue of shares.

During the year to 31 December 2005, options were granted over 17.3 million ordinary shares under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes. At 31 December 2005, options granted under the company’s various schemes, exercisable up to 2015 at prices ranging from 496p to 1841p per share, were outstanding in respect of 70.8 million ordinary shares.

In addition, options granted under the NatWest schemes were outstanding in respect of 0.8 million ordinary shares exercisable up to 2009 at prices ranging from 403p to 924p per share.

Preference shares

In March 2005, the company redeemed 750,000 Series 1 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of €0.01 each at €1,000 per share and 500,000 Series 2 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01 each at US$1,000 per share.

In May 2005, the company issued 40 million Series N non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at US$25 per share, the net proceeds being US$969 million.

In June 2005, the company issued 1.25 million Series 2 non-cumulative preference shares of €0.01 each at €1,000 per share, the net proceeds being 1,226 million.

In November 2005, the company issued 22 million Series P non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at US$25 per share, the net proceeds being US$533 million and redeemed 9 million Series J non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at US$25 per share.

In December 2005, the company redeemed 400,000 Series 3 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01 each at US$1,000 per share.

The costs of issue and discounts allowed on preference shares issued during the year were £42 million.

Under IFRS, certain of the Group's preference shares are classified as debt and are now included in subordinated liabilities on the balance sheet. The following table shows the re-classification of the Group’s non-equity shares at 31 December 2004 in to equity shares and subordinated liabilities (see Note 28) upon implementation of IAS 32 on 1 January 2005. All preference share capital redeemed during the year was classified as debt and all capital issued during the year is classified as equity in accordance with IAS 32.

  31 December 2004   1 January 2005


Share capital and share premium   Non-equity
£m
  Adjustment to
historic cost
£m
  Equity
£m
  Debt
£m










Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01   1,951   35   499   1,487
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01   978       978
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01   864   (4 )   860  
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01   529       529
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01   197       197
Cumulative preference shares of £1   1       1










  4,520   31   1,359   3,192

130






Non-cumulative preference shares

Non-cumulative preference shares entitle the holders thereof to receive periodic non-cumulative cash dividends at specified fixed rates for each Series payable out of distributable profits of the company.

The non-cumulative preference shares are redeemable at the option of the company, in whole or in part from time to time at the rates detailed below plus dividends otherwise payable for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of redemption.

Class of preference share   Series   Number
of shares in issue
  Redemption
date on or after
  Redemption
price per share









Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01   Series D   7 million   14 September 2005   US$25.00
  Series E   8 million   17 October 2006   US$25.00
  Series F   8 million   31 March 2007   US$25.00
  Series G   10 million   31 March 2003   US$25.00
  Series H   12 million   31 March 2004   US$25.00
  Series I   12 million   30 September 2004   US$25.00
  Series K   16 million   30 June 2006   US$25.00
  Series L   34 million   30 September 2009   US$25.00
  Series M   37 million   30 September 2009   US$25.00
  Series N   40 million   30 June 2010   US$25
  Series P   22 million   31 December 2010   US$25
Non-cumulative convertible preference
   shares of
US$ 0.01
  Series 1   1 million   31 March 2010   US$1,000
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01   Series 1   1.25 million   31 December 2009   €1,000
  Series 2   1.25 million   30 June 2010   €1,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference
   shares of
£ 0.01
  Series 1   0.2 million   31 December 2010   £1,000









In the event that the non-cumulative convertible preference shares are not redeemed on or before the redemption date, the holder may convert the non-cumulative convertible preference shares into ordinary shares in the company.

Under existing arrangements, no redemption or purchase of any non-cumulative preference shares may be made by the company without the prior consent of the UK Financial Services Authority.

On a winding-up or liquidation of the company, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares will be entitled to receive, out of any surplus assets available for distribution to the company’s shareholders (after payment of arrears of dividends on the cumulative preference shares up to the date of repayment) pari passu with the cumulative preference shares, the non-cumulative sterling preference shares and all other shares of the company ranking pari passu with the non-cumulative preference shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company, a liquidation distribution of US$25 per non-cumulative preference share of US$0.01, US$1,000 per non-cumulative convertible preference share of US$0.01, €1,000 per non-cumulative preference share of €0.01 and £1,000 per non-cumulative convertible preference share of £0.01, together with an amount equal to dividends for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of payment, before any distribution or payment may be made to holders of the ordinary shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company.

Except as described above, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of the company.

Holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of or attend general meetings of the company except if any resolution is proposed for adoption by the shareholders of the company to vary or abrogate any of the rights attaching to the non-cumulative preference shares or proposing the winding-up or liquidation of the company. In any such case, they are entitled to receive notice of and to attend the general meeting of shareholders at which such resolution is to be proposed and will be entitled to speak and vote on such resolution (but not on any other resolution). In addition, in the event that, prior to any general meeting of shareholders, the company has failed to pay in full the three most recent quarterly dividend payments due on the non-cumulative dollar preference shares, the two most recent semi-annual dividend payments due on the non-cumulative convertible dollar preference shares and the most recent annual dividend payments due on the non-cumulative convertible euro preference shares and on the non-cumulative convertible sterling preference shares, the holders shall be entitled to receive notice of, attend, speak and vote at such meeting on all matters together with the holders of the ordinary shares, and in these circumstances only, the rights of the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares so to vote shall continue until the company shall have resumed the payment in full of the dividends in arrears.

131






Notes on the accounts continued

31 Reserves   Group   Company
 



 



  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m













Share premium account        
At 1 January   12,964   8,175   12,964   8,175
Reclassification of preference shares on implementation        
     of IAS 32 on 1 January 2005   (3,159 )     (3,159 )  
Currency translation adjustments     (231 )     (231 )
Shares issued during the year   1,972   4,550   1,972   4,550
Conversion of exchangeable undated loan capital     460     460
Other movements     10     10













At 31 December   11,777   12,964   11,777   12,964











         
Merger reserve        
At 1 January and 31 December   10,881   10,881    











         
Available-for-sale reserve        
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 on 1 January 2005   289      
Currency translation adjustments   4      
Unrealised gains in the year   35      
Realised gains in the year   (582 )      
Taxation   181      










At 31 December   (73 )      




         
Cash flow hedging reserve        
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 on 1 January 2005   67     (13 )  
Unrealised (losses)/gains in the year   (67 )     6  
Taxation   59     (2 )  










At 31 December   59     (9 )  




         
Foreign exchange reserve        
At 1 January   (320 )   90    
Retranslation of net assets   1,588   (830 )    
Foreign currency (losses)/gains on hedges of net assets   (799 )   420    













At 31 December   469   (320 )    











         
Other reserves        
At 1 January   150   157   150   157
Own shares held in relation to employee share schemes     (7 )     (7 )













At 31 December   150   150   150   150











         
Retained earnings        
At 1 January   9,408   7,269   4,675   3,646
Implementation of IAS 32 and IAS 39 on 1 January 2005   (1,078 )     81  
Currency translation adjustments and other movements     (8 )     (1 )
Profit attributable to ordinary and equity preference shareholders   5,501   5,112   2,074   2,874
Ordinary dividends paid   (1,927 )   (1,588 )   (1,927 )   (1,588 )
Equity preference dividends paid   (109 )     (109 )  
Preference dividends – non-equity     (256 )     (256 )
Share-based payments, net of tax   112   15    
Actuarial losses recognised in post-retirement benefit schemes, net of tax   (561 )   (1,136 )    













At 31 December   11,346   9,408   4,794   4,675











Reserves at 31 December   34,609   33,083   16,712   17,789











132






UK law prescribes that only reserves of the company are taken into account for the purpose of making distributions and the permissible applications of the share premium account. The merger reserve arose on the acquisition of NatWest under UK GAAP accounting.

The Group optimises capital efficiency by maintaining reserves in subsidiaries, including regulated entities. Certain preference shares and subordinated debt are also included within regulatory capital. The remittance of reserves to the parent or the redemption of shares or subordinated capital by regulated entities may be subject to maintaining the capital resources required by the relevant regulator.

At 31 December 2005, 680,966 (2004 – 707,247) ordinary shares of 25p each of the company were held by the 1992 Employee Share Trust and 91,951 (2004 – 63,098) ordinary shares of 25p each were held by the 2001 Employee Share Trust in respect of options under the executive option scheme and awards under the medium term performance plan.

32 Leases

Minimum amounts receivable and payable under non-cancellable leases

    Group
   










    Year in which receipt or payment will occur
   










2005   Within 1
year
£m
    After 1 year
but within
5 years
£m
    After 5
years
£m
    Total
£m













Finance lease assets:        
Amounts receivable   1,297   4,733   11,604   17,634
Present value adjustment   (462 )   (1,857 )   (3,628)     (5,947 )
Other movements   (26 )   (136 )   (231 )   (393 )













Present value amounts receivable   809   2,740   7,745   11,294











Operating lease assets:        
Amounts receivable   954   2,757   2,241   5,952











Operating lease obligations:        
Amounts payable:        
Premises   310   1,103   1,700   3,113
Equipment   10   11     21













  320   1,114   1,700   3,134











         
2004        













Finance lease assets:        
Amounts receivable   1,382   4,110   10,901   16,393
Present value adjustment   (515 )   (2,127 )   (4,362 )   (7,004 )
Other movements   (50 )   (170 )   (446 )   (666 )













Present value amounts receivable   817   1,813   6,093   8,723











         
Operating lease assets:        
Amounts receivable   833   1,895   2,493   5,221











         
Operating lease obligations:        
Amounts payable:        
Premises   316   1,114   2,246   3,676
Equipment   12   18     30













  328   1,132   2,246   3,706











133






Notes on the accounts continued

32 Leases (continued)

  2005
£m
  2004
£m







Nature of operating lease assets in balance sheet    
Transportation   7,742   6,185
Cars and light commercial vehicles   978   895
Other   333   585







  9,053   7,665





Amounts recognised as income and expense    
Finance lease receivables – contingent rental income   (34 )   (51 )
Operating lease payables – minimum payments   332   319
     
Contracts for future capital expenditure not provided for at the year end    
Operating leases   594   423
     
Finance lease receivables    
Unearned finance income   5,947   7,004
Accumulated allowance for uncollectable minimum lease receivables   72   68







Residual value exposures

The tables below give details of the unguaranteed residual values included in the carrying value of finance lease receivables (see page 133) and operating lease assets (see note 18).

  Year in which residual value will be recovered
 








 
2005   Within
1 years
£m
  After 1 year
but within
2 years
£m
  After 2 year
but within
5 years
£m
  After 5 year
£m
  Total
£m
 











 
Operating leases          
   Transportation   579   912   895   3,229   5,615  
   Cars and light commercial vehicles   612   115   77     804  
   Other   26   21   84   21   152  
Finance leases   26   32   104   231   393  











 
  1,243   1,080   1,160   3,481   6,964  









 
2004          











 
Operating leases          
   Transportation   65   400   1,257   2,527   4,249  
   Cars and light commercial vehicles   403   141   116     660  
   Other   27   4   51   44   126  
Finance leases   50   56   114   446   666  











 
  545   601   1,538   3,017   5,701  









 

134






33 Collateral

Securities repurchase agreements and lending transactions

The Group enters into securities repurchase agreements and securities lending transactions under which it receives or transfers collateral in accordance with normal market practice. Under standard terms for repurchase transactions in the UK and US markets, the recipient of collateral has an unrestricted right to sell or repledge it, subject to returning equivalent securities on settlement of the transaction.

Securities transferred under repurchase transactions included within securities on the balance sheet were as follows:

  2005
£m
  2004
£m
 





 
Treasury and other eligible bills   896   1,593  
Debt securities   53,485   32,129  





 
  54,381   33,722  



 

All of the above securities could be sold or repledged by the holder. Securities received as collateral under reverse repurchase agreements amounted to £105.6 billion (2004 – £91.4 billion), of which £85.6 billion (2004 – £85.1 billion) had been resold or repledged as collateral for the Group's own transactions.

Other collateral given

Assets charged as security for liabilities   2005
£m
  2004
£m
 





 
Loans and advances to customers   27,092   16,071  
Debt securities   9,578   4,852  
Property, plant and equipment   1,274   1,268  
Loans to banks   60    
Other   16   4  





 
  38,020   22,195  



 
  2005   2004  
Liabilities secured by charges on assets   £m   £m  





 
Deposits by banks   11,407   5,628  
Customer accounts   6,761   2,001  
Debt securities in issue   11,347   6,561  
Other liabilities   20    





 
  29,535   14,190  



 

135






34 Financial instruments

Financial risk management policies and objectives

The Board establishes the overall governance framework for risk management and sets the risk appetite and philosophy for the Group.

The principal financial risks that the Group manages are as follows:

  • Credit risk: credit risk is the risk arising from the possibility that the Group will incur losses from the failure of customers to meet their obligations

  • Liquidity risk: the risk that the Group is unable to meet its’ obligations as they fall due.

  • Market risk: the Group is exposed to market risk because of positions held in its trading portfolios and its non-trading businesses.

  • Insurance underwriting risk: the Group is exposed to insurance risk, either directly through its businesses or through using insurance as a tool to mitigate other risk exposures.

Credit risk

The objective of credit risk management is to enable the Group to achieve sustainable and superior risk versus reward performance whilst maintaining credit risk exposure in line with approved risk appetite.

The key principles for credit risk management are set out in the Group’s Credit Risk Management Framework and include:

  • Approval of all credit exposure must be granted prior to any advance or extension of credit.

  • An appropriate credit risk assessment of the customer and related credit facilities must be undertaken prior to approval of credit exposure. This must include an assessment of, amongst others, the purpose of the credit and sources of repayment, compliance with affordability tests, repayment history, capacity to repay, sensitivity to economic and market developments and risk-adjusted return.

  • The Board delegates authority to Executive Advances Committee, Group Credit Committee and divisional credit committees. A divisional CEO may delegate a subset of the divisional credit risk authority to sub-committees or to individuals.

  • Credit risk authority must be specifically granted in writing to all individuals involved in the granting of credit approval, whether this is exercised personally or collectively as part of a credit committee. These individuals must act independently and with balanced commercial judgement in exercising credit authority.

  • Where credit authority is exercised personally, the individual must not have any responsibility or accountability for business revenue origination.

  • All credit exposures, once approved, must be effectively monitored and managed and reviewed periodically against approved limits. Review occurs at least annually, with lower quality exposures being subject to a greater frequency of analysis and assessment.

  • Customers with emerging credit problems must be identified early and classified accordingly. Remedial actions must be implemented promptly to minimise the potential loss to the Group and consideration should be given whether to transfer customers with credit problems to a specialised problem management or recovery unit.

  • Portfolio analysis and reporting must be used to identify and manage credit risk concentrations and credit risk quality migration.

Credit grading models

In order to support the analytical elements of the credit risk management framework, in particular the risk assessment part of the credit approval process, ongoing monitoring and portfolio analysis, the Group employs a range of credit risk models. These models can be broadly grouped into four categories.

  • Probability of default (“PD”)/customer credit grade – these models assess the probability that the customer will fail to make full and timely repayment of credit obligations over a one year time horizon. Each customer is assigned an internal credit grade which corresponds to a probability of default. There are a number of different credit grading models in use across the Group, each of which considers particular characteristics of customer types in that portfolio. The credit grading models use a combination of quantitative inputs, such as recent financial performance and customer behaviour, and qualitative inputs, such as company management performance or sector outlook.

Every customer credit grade across all grading scales in the Group can be mapped to a Group level credit grade which uses a five band scale from AQ1 to AQ5.

  • Loss given default (“LGD”) – these models estimate the economic loss that may be suffered by the Group on a credit facility in the event of default. The LGD of a facility represents the amount of debt which cannot be recovered and is typically expressed as a percentage of the EAD. The Group's LGD models take into account the type of borrower, facility and any risk mitigation such as the presence of any security or collateral held. The LGD may also be affected by the industry sector of the borrower, the legal jurisdiction in which the borrower operates as well as general economic conditions which may impact the value of any assets held as security.

136






  • Exposure at default (“EAD”) – these models estimate the expected level of utilisation of a credit facility at the time of a borrower’s default. The EAD will typically be higher than the current utilisation (e.g. in the case where further drawings are made on a revolving credit facility prior to default) but will not typically exceed the total facility limit. The methodologies used in EAD modelling recognise that customers may make more use of their existing credit facilities in the run up to a default.

  • Credit risk exposure measurement – these models calculate the credit risk exposure for products where the exposure is not 100% of the gross nominal amount of the credit obligation. These models are most commonly used for derivative and other traded instruments where the amount of credit risk exposure may be dependent on external variables such as interest rates or foreign exchange rates.

Risk assets

The Group’s portfolio consists of loans (including overdraft facilities), instalment credit, finance lease receivables, debt securities and other traded instruments. In order to encompass the entire range of products in the Group’s credit portfolios exposure is monitored using risk assets, which cover exposures to all these asset and customer types.

Risk asset quality

Internal reporting and oversight of risk assets is principally differentiated by credit ratings. Internal ratings are used to assess the credit quality of borrowers. Customers are assigned credit ratings, based on various credit grading models that reflect the probability of default. All credit ratings across the Group map to a Group level asset quality scale.

Provision analysis

The Group’s consumer portfolios, which consist of small value, high volume credits, have highly efficient largely automated processes for identifying problem credits and very short timescales, typically three months, before resolution or adoption of various recovery methods.

Corporate portfolios consist of higher value, lower volume credits, which tend to be structured to meet individual customer requirements. Provisions are assessed on a case by case basis.

Early and proactive management of problem exposures ensures that credit losses are minimised. Specialised units are used for different customer types to ensure that the appropriate risk mitigation is taken in a timely manner.

Portfolio provisions are reassessed regularly as part of the Group’s ongoing monitoring process.

Provisions methodology

Under IAS 39 provisions are assessed under three categories as described below:

Individually assessed provisions are the provisions required for individually significant impaired assets which are assessed on a case by case basis, taking into account the financial condition of the counterparty and any guarantor. This incorporates an estimate of the discounted value of any recoveries and realisation of security or collateral. The asset continues to be assessed on an individual basis until it is repaid in full, transferred to the performing portfolio or written off.

Collectively assessed provisions are the provisions on impaired credits below an agreed value threshold which are assessed on a portfolio basis, to reflect the homogenous nature of the assets, such as credit cards or personal loans. The provision is determined from a quantitative review of the relevant portfolio, taking account of the level of arrears, security and average loss experience over the recovery period.

Latent loss provisions are the provisions held against the estimated impairment in the performing portfolio which has yet to be identified and reported as at the balance sheet date. To assess the latent loss within the portfolio, the Group has developed methodologies to estimate the time that an asset can remain impaired within a performing portfolio before it is identified and reported as such.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity management within the Group focuses on both overall balance sheet structure and the control, within prudent limits, of risk arising from the mismatch of maturities across the balance sheet and from undrawn commitments and other contingent obligations. It is undertaken within limits and other policy parameters set by Group Asset and Liability Management Committee (GALCO).

The structure of the Group’s balance sheet is managed to maintain substantial diversification, to minimise concentration across its various deposit sources, and to contain the level of reliance on total and net short-term wholesale sources of funds within prudent levels.

The degree of maturity mismatch within the overall long-term structure of the Group’s assets and liabilities is also managed within internal policy limits, to ensure that term asset commitments may be funded on an economic basis over their life. In managing its overall term structure, the Group analyses and takes into account the effect of retail and corporate customer behaviour on actual asset and liability maturities where they differ materially from the underlying contractual maturities. The short-term maturity structure of the Group’s assets and liabilities is managed on a daily basis to ensure that contractual cash flow obligations, and potential cash flows arising from undrawn commitments and other contingent obligations, can be met as they arise from day to day, either from cash inflows from maturing assets, new borrowing or the sale or repurchase of debt securities held.

137






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

Short-term liquidity risk is managed on a consolidated basis for the whole Group excluding the activities of Citizens and insurance businesses, which are subject to regulatory regimes that necessitate local management of liquidity.

Internal liquidity mismatch limits are set for all other subsidiaries and non-UK branches which have material local treasury activities in external markets, to ensure those activities do not compromise daily maintenance of the Group’s overall liquidity risk position within the Group’s policy parameters.

The level of large deposits taken from banks, corporate customers, non-bank financial institutions and other customers and significant cash outflows therefrom are also reviewed to monitor concentrations and identify any adverse trends.

Market risk

The Group is exposed to market risk because of positions held in its trading portfolios and its non-trading business including the Group’s treasury operations. The Group manages the market risk in its trading and treasury portfolios through its market risk management framework, which is based on value-at-risk (“VaR”) limits, together with, but not limited to, stress testing, scenario analysis, and position and sensitivity limits. Stress testing measures the impact of abnormal changes in market rates and prices on the fair value of the Group’s trading portfolios. GEMC approves the high-level VaR and stress limits for the Group. The Group Market Risk function, independent from the Group’s trading businesses, is responsible for setting and monitoring the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s market risk management processes.

Value-at-risk (“VaR”)

VaR is a technique that produces estimates of the potential negative change in the market value of a portfolio over a specified time horizon at given confidence levels. For internal risk management purposes, the Group’s VaR assumes a time horizon of one day and a confidence level of 95%. The Group uses historical simulation models in computing VaR. This approach, in common with many other VaR models, assumes that risk factor changes observed in the past are a good estimate of those likely to occur in the future and is, therefore, limited by the relevance of the historical data used. The Group’s method, however, does not make any assumption about the nature or type of underlying loss distribution. The Group typically uses the previous two years of market data. The Group’s VaR should be interpreted in light of the limitations of the methodology used. These limitations include:

  • Historical data may not provide the best estimate of the joint distribution of risk factor changes in the future and may fail to capture the risk of possible extreme adverse market movements which have not occurred in the historical window used in the calculations.

  • VaR using a one-day time horizon does not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be liquidated or hedged within one day.

  • VaR using a 95% confidence level does not reflect the extent of potential losses beyond that percentile.

The Group largely computes the VaR of trading portfolios at the close of business and positions may change substantially during the course of the trading day. Controls are in place to limit the Group’s intra-day exposure; such as the calculation of the VaR for selected portfolios. These limitations and the nature of the VaR measure mean that the Group cannot guarantee that losses will not exceed the VaR amounts indicated.

Trading

The principal focus of the Group’s trading activities is client facilitation – providing products to the Group’s client base at competitive prices. The Group also undertakes: market making –quoting firm bid (buy) and offer (sell) prices with the intention of profiting from the spread between the quotes; arbitrage –entering into offsetting positions in different but closely related markets in order to profit from market imperfections; and proprietary activity – taking positions in financial instruments as principal in order to take advantage of anticipated market conditions. The main risk factors are interest rates, credit spreads and foreign exchange. Financial instruments held in the Group’s trading portfolios include, but are not limited to, debt securities, loans, deposits, securities sale and repurchase agreements and derivative financial instruments (futures, forwards, swaps and options). For a discussion of the Group’s accounting policies for derivative financial instruments, see Accounting policies.

The VaR for the Group’s trading portfolios segregated by type of market risk exposure, including idiosyncratic risk, is presented in the table below.

  2005   2004  










 







 
Trading   Average
£m
  Period end
£m
    Maximum
£m
  Maximum
£m
  Average
£m
  Period end
£m
    Maximum
£m
  Maximum
£m
 



















 
Interest rate   7.3   7.4     10.9   5.1   6.0   5.4   8.5   4.1  
Credit spread   11.4   11.8     14.4   8.8   8.6   10.4   12.0   5.1  
Currency   1.8   1.4     10.7   0.5   1.1   1.2   2.7   0.5  
Equity and commodity   0.5   0.7     1.1   0.2   0.8   0.4   2.1   0.3  
Diversification       (8.5 )             (6.5 )    
   

       

Total trading VaR   13.0   12.8     16.5   9.9   10.6   10.9   16.0   6.3  

















 

138






Non-trading

The principal market risks arising from the Group’s non-trading activities are interest rate risk, currency risk and equity risk. Treasury activity and mismatches between the repricing of assets and liabilities in its retail and corporate banking operations account for most of the non-trading interest rate risk. Non-trading currency risk derives from the Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries, associates and branches. The Group’s venture capital portfolio and investments held by its general insurance business are the principal sources of non-trading equity price risk. The Group’s portfolios of non-trading financial instruments mainly comprise loans (including finance leases), debt securities, equity shares, deposits, certificates of deposits and other debt securities issued, loan capital and derivatives. To reflect their distinct nature, the Group’s long-term assurance assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders have been excluded from these market risk disclosures.

• Interest rate risk

Non-trading interest rate risk arises from the Group’s treasury activities and retail and corporate banking businesses.

Treasury

The Group’s treasury activities include its money market business and the management of internal funds flow within the Group’s businesses. Money market portfolios include cash instruments (principally debt securities, loans and deposits) and related hedging derivatives.

Retail and corporate banking

Structural interest rate risk arises in these activities where assets and liabilities have different repricing dates. It is the Group’s policy to minimise the sensitivity of net interest income to changes in interest rates and where interest rate risk is retained to ensure that appropriate resources, measures and limits are applied.

Structural interest rate risk is calculated in each division on the basis of establishing the repricing behaviour of each asset and liability product. For many products, the actual interest rate repricing characteristics differ from the contractual repricing. In most cases, the repricing maturity is determined by the market interest rate that most closely fits the historical behaviour of the product interest rate. For non-interest bearing current accounts, the repricing maturity is determined by the stability of the portfolio. The repricing maturities used are approved by Group Treasury and divisional asset and liability committees at least annually. Key conventions are reviewed annually by GALCO.

A static maturity gap report is produced as at the month-end for each division, in each functional currency based on the behaviouralised repricing for each product. It is Group policy to include in the gap report, non-financial assets and liabilities, mainly property, plant and equipment and the Group’s capital and reserves, spread over medium and longer term maturities. This report also includes hedge transactions, principally derivatives.

Any residual non-trading interest rate exposures are controlled by limiting repricing mismatches in the individual balance sheets. Potential exposures to interest rate movements in the medium to long term are measured and controlled using a version of the same VaR methodology that is used for the Group’s trading portfolios but without discount factors. Net accrual income exposures are measured and controlled in terms of sensitivity over time to movements in interest rates.

Risk is managed within limits approved by GALCO through the execution of cash and derivative instruments. Execution of the hedging is carried out by the relevant division through the Group’s treasury function. The residual risk position is reported to divisional asset and liability committees, GALCO and Board.

• Currency risk

The Group does not maintain material non-trading open currency positions other than the structural foreign currency translation exposures arising from its investments in foreign subsidiaries and associated undertakings and their related currency funding. The Group’s policy in relation to structural positions is to match fund the structural foreign currency exposure arising from net asset value, including goodwill, in foreign subsidiaries, equity accounted investments and branches, except where doing so would materially increase the sensitivity of either the Group’s or the subsidiary’s regulatory capital ratios to currency movements. The policy requires structural foreign exchange positions to be reviewed regularly by GALCO. Gains or losses on foreign currency investments net of any gains or losses on related foreign currency funding or hedges are recognised in the statement of recognised income and expense.

139






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

The tables below set out the Group’s structural foreign currency exposures.

2005   Net investments
in foreign
operations
£m
  Foreign
currency
borrowings
hedging net
investments
£m
  Structural
foreign
currency
exposures
£m
 







 
US dollar   15,452   6,637   8,815  
Euro   2,285   139   2,146  
Swiss franc   431   430   1  
Chinese RMB   914     914  
Other non-sterling   76   72   4  







 
  19,158   7,278   11,880  





 
2004      







 
US dollar   12,367   6,580   5,787  
Euro   2,086   1,349   737  
Swiss franc   398   392   6  
Other non-sterling   116   112   4  







 
  14,967   8,433   6,534  





 

The US dollar open structural foreign currency exposure reflects the action taken to mitigate the effect of the acquisition in 2004 of Charter One on the Group’s capital ratios. However, the increase in this position and the Euro structural exposure over 2004 is largely the result of the exclusion from the table of preference shares classified as equity under IFRS. These instruments continue to be considered part of the currency funding of foreign operations for asset and liability management purposes. The exposure in Chinese RMB arises from the Group’s strategic investment in Bank of China.

Equity risk

Non-trading equity risk arises principally from the Group’s strategic investments, its venture capital activities and its general insurance business.

VaR is not an appropriate risk measure for the Group’s venture capital investments, which comprise a mix of quoted and unquoted investments, or its portfolio of strategic investments. These investments are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recorded in profit or loss, or equity.

Insurance risk

The Group is exposed to insurance risk, either directly through its businesses or through using insurance as a tool to reduce other risk exposures.

Insurance risk is the risk of fluctuations in the timing, frequency and severity of insured events, relative to the expectations of the Group at the time of underwriting.

Underwriting and pricing risk

The Group manages underwriting and pricing risk through underwriting guidelines for all business transacted restricting the types and classes of business that may be accepted; pricing policies by product line and by brand; and centralised control of policy wordings and any subsequent changes.

Claims management risk

The risk that claims are paid inappropriately is managed using a range of IT system controls and manual processes conducted by experienced staff, to ensure that claims are handled in a timely and accurate manner. Detailed policies and procedures exist to ensure that all claims are handled appropriately.

Reinsurance risk

Reinsurance protects against the effect of major catastrophic events or unforeseen volumes of, or adverse trends in, large individual claims and to transfer risk that is outside the Group’s current risk appetite.

Reinsurance is only effective when the counterparty is financially secure. The rating profile of the top ten reinsurers of the Group which accounts for 67% of the total reinsurance debtors is as follows:

Standard & Poor’s Rating Number of Reinsurers  


 
AAA 1  
AAA- 1  
AA 3  
AA- 2  
A 2  
A- 1  

140






Reserving risk

Reserving risk relates to both premiums and claims. It is the risk that reserves are assessed incorrectly such that insufficient funds have been retained to pay or handle claims as the amounts fall due. Claims development data provides information on the historical pattern of reserving risk.

  Accident year
   
















Insurance claims – gross   2001
£m
    2002
£m
    2003
£m
    2004
£m
    2005
£m
  Total
£m



















Estimate of ultimate claims costs:            
   At end of accident year   2,395   3,013   3,658   3,705   4,247     17,018
   One year later   (70 )   91   (140 )   (186 )       (305 )
   Two years later   20   1   (106 )         (85 )
   Three years later   12   (12 )          
   Four years later   (40 )             (40 )



















Current estimate of cumulative claims   2,317   3,093   3,412   3,519   4,247     16,588
Cumulative payments to date   (2,119 )   (2,680 )   (2,637 )   (2,521 )   (2,035 )   (11,992 )



















Liability recognised on the balance sheet   198   413   775   998   2,212     4,596














     
Liability in respect of prior years               208
Claims handling costs               109



















Total liability included on the balance sheet               4,913
   


  Accident year
   
















Insurance claims – net of reinsurance   2001
£m
    2002
£m
    2003
£m
    2004
£m
    2005
£m
  Total
£m



















Estimate of ultimate claims costs:            
   At end of accident year   2,011   2,584   3,215   3,508   4,150     15,468
   One year later   (61 )   59   (106 )   (168 )       (276 )
   Two years later   22   (12 )   (103 )         (93 )
   Three years later   13   (3 )           10
   Four years later   (41 )             (41 )



















Current estimate of cumulative claims   1,944   2,628   3,006   3,340   4,150     15,068
Cumulative payments to date   (1,779 )   (2,254 )   (2,342 )   (2,367 )   (2,008 )   (10,750 )



















Liability recognised on the balance sheet   165   374   664   973   2,142     4,318














     
Liability in respect of prior years               138
Claims handling costs               109



















Total liability included on the balance sheet               4,565
 

141






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

Claims reserves

It is the Group’s policy to hold undiscounted claims reserves (including reserves to cover claims which have occurred but not been reported (IBNR reserves)) for all classes at a sufficient level to meet all liabilities as they fall due.

The Group’s focus is on high volume and relatively straightforward products, for example home and motor. This facilitates the generation of comprehensive underwriting and claims data, which is used to monitor and accurately price the risks accepted. This attention to data analysis is reinforced by tight controls on costs and claims handling procedures.

The following table indicates the diversity of risks underwritten, the frequency and severity of claims and the corresponding loss ratios for each major class of business, gross and net of reinsurance.

    2005   2004  
   




 




 
    Earned
premiums
£m
  Claims
incurred
£m
  Loss
ratio
%
  Earned
premiums
£m
  Claims
incurred
£m
  Loss
ratio
%
 















 
Residential property   Gross   1,098   602   55   1,090   599   55  
  Net   1,037   580   56   990   578   58  
Personal motor   Gross   3,312   2,603   79   3,179   2,506   79  
  Net   3,257   2,601   80   2,976   2,360   79  
Commercial property   Gross   212   82   39   191   77   40  
  Net   193   77   40   173   73   42  
Commercial motor   Gross   102   54   53   93   71   76  
  Net   96   44   46   87   59   68  
Creditor   Gross   157   87   55   143   74   52  
  Net   156   87   56   142   74   52  
Other   Gross   696   455   65   811   499   62  
  Net   605   426   70   685   414   60  















 
Total   Gross   5,577   3,883   70   5,507   3,826   69  











 
  Net   5,344   3,815   71   5,053   3,558   70  











 

The Group has no interest rate exposure from general insurance liabilities because provisions for claims under short term insurance contracts are not discounted.

Frequency and severity of specific risks and sources of uncertainty

Most general insurance contracts written by the Group are issued on an annual basis, which means that the Group’s liability extends for a 12 month period, after which the Group is entitled to decline or renew or can impose renewal terms by amending the premium or excess or both.

The following paragraphs explain the frequency and severity of claims and the sources of uncertainty for the key classes that the Group is exposed to:

a) Motor insurance contracts (private and commercial)

Claims experience is quite variable, due to a wide number of factors, but the principal ones of these are age of driver, type of vehicle and use.

There are many sources of uncertainty that will affect the Group's experience under motor insurance, including operational risk, reserving risk, premium rates not matching claims inflation rates, the social, economic and legislative environment and reinsurance failure risks.

b) Property insurance contracts (residential and commercial)

The major causes of claims for property insurance are theft, flood, escape of water, fire, storm, subsidence and various types of accidental damage.

The major source of uncertainty in the Group’s property accounts is the volatility of weather. Weather in the UK can affect most of the above perils. Over a longer period, the strength of the economy is also a factor.

c) Commercial other insurance contracts

Other commercial claims come mainly from business interruption and loss arising from the negligence of the insured (liability insurance). Business interruption losses come from the loss of income, revenue and/or profit as a result of property damage claims. Liability insurance comprises employers liability and public/products liability. Liability insurance is written on an occurrence basis, and is subject to claims over a substantial period of time, but where loss was in existence during the life of the policy.

Fluctuations in the social and economic climate are a source of uncertainty in the Group’s general liability account. Other sources of uncertainty are changes in the law, or its interpretation, and changes in the actuarial estimates underlying long-term claims. Other uncertainties are significant events (for example terrorist attacks) and any emerging new heads of damage, types of claim that are not envisaged when the policy is written.

142






d) Creditor insurance

Creditor insurance contracts are designed to cover payments on secured or unsecured lending. These contracts will be for a maximum term of 5 years. The causes of creditor insurance claims are loss of income through accident, sickness or unemployment or, in some circumstances, loss of life.

The main source of uncertainty affecting the Group's creditor accounts is the economic environment.

Life business

The three regulated life companies of RBSG, NatWest Life Assurance Limited, Royal Scottish Assurance plc (“RSA”) and Direct Line Life Limited, are required to meet minimum capital requirements at all times under the Financial Service Authority’s Prudential Sourcebook. The capital resources covering the regulatory requirement are not transferable to other areas of the Group. To ensure that the capital requirement is satisfied at all times, each company holds an additional voluntary buffer above the absolute minimum. Sufficient capital resources are held to ensure that the capital requirements are covered over a two year projection period. Life insurance results are inherently uncertain, due to actual experience being different to modelled assumptions. Such differences affect regulatory capital resources, as do varying levels of new business. Therefore, projections are formally reviewed twice a year. Where there is a shortfall of capital, various options are available to provide new capital.

The Group is not exposed to price, currency, credit, or interest risk on unit linked life contracts but it is exposed to variation in management fees. A decrease of 10% in the value of the assets would reduce the asset management fees by £5 million per annum (2004 – £5 million). The Group also writes insurance contracts with minimum guaranteed death benefits that expose it to the risk that declines in the value of underlying investments may increase the Group’s net exposure to death risk.

Valuation discount rates   2005   2004







Assurances    
 Life policies   2.85%   3.00%
 Pensions policies   3.80%   4.00%
Annuities in payment (all reinsured)   4.00%   4.67%
Interest rates    
 Sterling interest   2.85% net   3.0% net
 Unit growth   2.85% net   3.0% net
Expense inflation   4.0% net   4.0% net







Mortality assumptions are set with regard to recent experience and general industry trends.

Mortality tables used:  
Pre-2001 products – RSA  



Term assurances   72% AM80 ult -2 + 33% AIDS R6A
Unit-linked life assurances   76.5% / 72% AM80 ult.-2+ 33% AIDS R6A
Unit-linked pensions   90% AM80 ult.-2



     
Pre-2000 products – NatWest Life    



Term assurances   65% TM80 ultimate + 33% AIDS R6A
Unit-linked assurances   60% AM80 ult.



Rates above are for male, non-smokers.    
   
Post-2000 products  



Term assurances   60% TM80 ult + 33% AIDS R6A




Expenses:          
Pre-2000 products – RSA   2005
per annum
  2004
per annum
 







 
Lifestyle protection plan   £ 29.81   £ 27.17  
Mortgage savings plan   £ 67.05   £ 60.08  







 
               
Pre-2000 products – NatWest Life              







 
Term assurances   £ 26.79   £ 25.13  
Single premium unit-linked bonds   £ 23.86   £ 22.38  







 
               
Post-2000 products              







 
Term assurances   £ 23.97   £ 22.38  
Guaranteed bonds   £ 26.92   £ 25.13  







 

143






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

Frequency and severity of claims – for contracts where death is the insured risk, the most significant factors that could increase the overall frequency of claims are epidemics or wide spread changes in lifestyle, resulting in earlier or more claims than expected.

For contracts where survival is the insured risk, the most significant factor is continued improvement in medical science and social conditions that would increase longevity.

For contracts with fixed and guaranteed benefits and fixed future premiums, there are no mitigating terms and conditions that reduce the insurance risk accepted. Participating contracts can result in a significant portion of the insurance risk being shared with the insured party.

Sources of uncertainty in the estimation of future benefit payments and premium receipts – the Group uses base tables of standard mortality appropriate to the type of contract being written and the territory in which the insured person resides. These are adjusted to reflect the Group’s experience, mortality improvements and voluntary termination behaviour.

Sensitivity factor   Description of sensitivity factor applied



Interest rate and investment return   Change in market interest rates of ± 1%.
  The test allows consistently for similar changes to investment returns and
  movements in the market value of backing fixed interest securities.



Expenses   Increase in maintenance expenses of 10%



Assurance mortality/morbidity   Increase in mortality/morbidity rates for assurance contracts of 5%



Annuitant mortality   Reduction in mortality rates for annuity contracts of 5%




The above sensitivity factors are applied via actuarial and statistical models, with the following impact on the financial statements.
Risk factor Variability   Impact
on profit
and equity
£m






Interest rates   +1%   (16 )
Interest rates –1%   20
Expenses   +10%   (5 )
Assurance mortality/morbidity   +5%   (7 )
Annuitant mortality – 5%  






Limitations of sensitivity analysis: the above tables demonstrate the effect of a change in a key assumption whilst other assumptions remain unaffected. In reality, such an occurrence is unlikely, due to correlation between the assumptions and other factors. It should also be noted that these sensitivities are non-linear, and larger or smaller impacts should not be interpolated or extrapolated from these results. The sensitivity analyses do not take into consideration that assets and liabilities are actively managed and may vary at the time that any actual market movement occurs.

Purchased insurance

The Insurance Sourcing Department is responsible to GEMC for the Group-wide purchase of insurance as a means of reducing other risk exposures.

144






    Group
Remaining maturity  

2005
  1 month
or less
£m
  Within 3 months
£m
  3-12 months
£m
  1-5 years
£m
  Over 5 years
£m
  Equity shares
£m
  Total
£m















 
Assets              
Cash and balances at central banks   4,759             4,759  
Treasury bills and other eligible bills   779   1,252   3,507         5,538  
Loans and advances to banks   46,276   14,959   8,749   265   338     70,587  
Loans and advances to customers   139,732   48,881   42,485   66,488   119,640     417,226  
Debt securities   2,635   8,289   11,472   25,621   72,948     120,965  
Equity shares             9,301   9,301  
Settlement balances   6,005             6,005  
Derivatives at fair value   4,816   7,282   11,778   31,667   40,120     95,663  
               
Liabilities              
Deposits by banks   69,393   17,876   13,293   8,264   1,581     110,407  
Customer accounts   286,960   28,582   14,516   8,172   4,637     342,867  
Debt securities in issue   20,577   23,297   24,253   14,986   7,307     90,420  
Settlement balances and short positions   16,533   569   1,696   15,950   9,240     43,988  
Derivatives at fair value   4,962   6,733   12,740   32,067   39,936     96,438  
Subordinated liabilities   539   418   3,075   7,122   17,120     28,274  















 
               
2004              















 
Assets              
Cash and balances at central banks   4,293             4,293  
Treasury bills and other eligible bills   2,201   2,555   1,354         6,110  
Loans and advances to banks   36,482   11,867   11,902   266   556     61,073  
Loans and advances to customers   103,672   32,403   38,990   54,788   117,398     347,251  
Debt securities   2,002   2,967   11,635   18,267   59,037     93,908  
Equity shares             4,723   4,723  
Settlement balances   5,682             5,682  
Derivatives at fair value   1,082   1,538   3,076   6,230   5,874     17,800  
               
Liabilities              
Deposits by banks   65,489   18,888   10,474   3,675   1,357     99,883  
Customer accounts   232,982   25,801   15,502   7,803   1,227     283,315  
Debt securities in issue   15,505   24,711   13,852   8,261   1,670     63,999  
Settlement balances and short positions   4,738   577   282   19,486   7,907     32,990  
Derivatives at fair value   1,148   1,570   3,322   6,606   6,230     18,876  
Subordinated liabilities     1,135   596   4,481   14,154     20,366  















 

145






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

Remaining maturity   Company
 
 
2005   1 month
or less
£m
  1-3 month
£m
  3-12 month
£m
  1-5 years
£m
  Over 5 years
£m
  Total
£m
 













 
Assets            
Loans and advances to banks   435   1,476   780   1,510   4,921   9,122  
Loans and advances to customers         262   305   567  
Derivatives at fair value         55     55  
             
Liabilities            
Deposits by banks   32   919         951  
Customer accounts     55         55  
Debt securities in issue   909   2,033         2,942  
Subordinated liabilities   189   311   1,008   1,653   6,081   9,242  













 
             
2004            













 
Assets            
Loans and advances to banks   196   664   351   680   2,215   4,106  
Loans and advances to customers           305   305  
             
Liabilities            
Deposits by banks   174           174  
Debt securities in issue   197   394   517   500     1,608  
Subordinated liabilities       368   731   4,836   5,935  













 

146






Interest rate sensitivity

The following tables summarise the interest rate sensitivity gap for the Group and the company at 31 December 2005 and 31 December 2004. The tables show the contractual repricing for each category of asset, liability and off-balance sheet items in the banking book. A liability (or negative) gap position exists when liabilities reprice more quickly or in greater proportion than assets during a given period and tends to benefit net interest income in a declining interest rate environment. An asset (or positive) gap position exists when assets reprice more quickly or in greater proportion than liabilities during a given period and tends to benefit net interest income in a rising interest rate environment. Contractual repricing terms do not reflect the potential impact of early repayment or withdrawal. Positions may not be reflective of those in subsequent periods. Major changes in positions can be made promptly as market outlooks change. In addition, significant variations in interest rate sensitivity may exist within the re-pricing periods presented and among the currencies in which the Group has interest rate positions.

    Group
   






















2005   3 months or less
£m
  After 3 months but less than 6 months
£m
  After 6 months but less than 1 year
£m
  After 1 year but less than 5 years
£m
  Over 5 years
£m
  Total interest earning/ bearing
£m
  Yield
%
  Non interest earning/ bearing
£m
  Fair value through profit or loss
£m
  Banking book total £m   Trading book total £m   Total
£m

























Assets                                                
Loans and advances                                                
   to banks   15,843   2,100   2,293   85   69   20,390   3.71   4,241   282   24,913   45,674   70,587
Loans and advances                                                
   to customers   231,730   14,063   13,045   49,078   32,789   340,705   5.51   15,274   616   356,595   60,631   417,226
Debt securities and                                                
   treasury bills   12,416   3,362   994   4,765   16,857   38,394   3.81   469   3,991   42,854   83,649   126,503
Other assets                   54,952   2,541   57,493   105,018   162,511

























Total assets   259,989   19,525   16,332   53,928   49,715   399,489   5.26   74,936   7,430   481,855   294,972   776,827
   






















Liabilities and equity                                                
Deposits by banks   54,515   2,880   1,507   776   968   60,646   3.97   2,123     62,769   47,638   110,407
Customer accounts   232,221   5,715   8,141   7,332   2,909   256,318   2.57   37,817   3,683   297,818   45,049   342,867
Debt securities in issue   65,055   4,212   3,586   957   1,140   74,950   4.18   7   11,068   86,025   4,395   90,420
Subordinated liabilities   3,965   1,492   116   5,749   16,339   27,661   6.84   110   150   27,921   353   28,274
Other liabilities                   29,576     29,576   139,848   169,424
Shareholders’ equity                   33,775     33,775   1,660   35,435
Internal funding of                                                
   trading business   (48,506 ) (4,913 ) (1,800 ) (9 )   (55,228 ) 3.83   (801 )   (56,029 ) 56,029  

























Total liabilities and equity   307,250     9,386   11,550   14,805   21,356   364,347   3.82   102,607   14,901   481,855   294,972   776,827
   






















Interest rate swaps   (13,537 ) (2,849 ) (1,508 ) 1,182   16,712                      
   

















         
interest rate sensitivity gap   (60,798 ) 7,290    3,274   40,305   45,071   35,142       (27,671 ) (7,471 )          
   

















         
Cumulative interest rate                                                
sensitivity gap   (60,798 )  (53,508 )  (50,234 )  (9,929 ) 35,142   35,142       7,471                
   















             

Trading book

The table below sets out by time band the net effect on the Group’s profit or loss of a basis point (0.01%) increase in interest rates, assuming all trading positions remained unchanged.

    Group
   
2005 3 months or less £’000   After 3 months but less than 6 months £’000   After 6 months but less than 1 year
£’000
After 1 year but less than 5 years £’000 Over 5 years £’000 Total
£’000
 














(Loss)/gain per basis point increase   (487 ) (40 ) 180   (1,631 ) 1,146   (832 )














147






Notes on the accounts continued


34 Financial instruments (continued)
  Group
   
















2004   3 months or less
£m
After 3 months but less than 6 months
£m
  After 6 months but less than i year
£m
After 1 year but less than 5 year
£m
Over 5 years
£m
  Non
Interest
earning/
bearing
£m
  Banking
book
total
£m
Trading
book
total
£m
  Total
£m



















Assets          
Loans and advances to banks   14,829 5,140   1,367 77 482   3,272   25,167 35,906   61,073
Loans and advances to customers   191,796 16,632   11,177 34,687 28,419   2,304   285,015 62,236   347,251
Debt securities and treasury bills   12,530 4,088   3,656 6,133 13,548   2,416   42,371 57,647   100,018
Other assets       54,871   54,871 24,909   79,780



















Total assets   219,155 25,860   16,200 40,897 42,449   62,863   407,424 180,698   588,122

















Liabilities and equity          
Deposits by banks   54,679 2,282   907 119 477   1,737   60,201 39,682   99,883
Customer accounts   190,796 5,589   6,948 7,043 461   31,345   242,182 41,133   283,315
Debt securities in issue   45,903 6,104   4,418 4,087 1,727     62,239 1,760   63,999
Subordinated liabilities   4,401 1,020   302 2,151 12,438     20,312 54   20,366
Other liabilities   4 5   8 49 126   33,469   33,661 52,993   86,654
Shareholders’ equity       32,755   32,755 1,150   33,905
Internal funding of trading business   (42,516 ) (313 ) (1,088 ) (9 )     (43,926 ) 43,926  



















Total liabilities and equity   253,267 14,687   11,495 13,440 15,229   99,306   407,424 180,698   588,122

















Off-balance sheet items   (2,126)   (6,906 ) (1,160 ) 1,560 8,632      











interest rate sensitivity gap   (36,238 ) 4,267   3,545 29,017 35,852   (36,443 )      











     
Cumulative interest rate sensitivity gap   (36,238 ) (31,971 ) (28,426 ) 591 36,443      









148






                Company              
   
2005   3 months or less
£m
  After 3 months but less than 6 months
£m
  After 6 months but less than 1 year
£m
    After 1 year but less than 5 years
£m
    Over 5 years
£m
    Total interest
earning/
bearing
£m
  Yield
%
    Non interest
earning/
bearing
£m
    Banking
Book
Total
£m



























 
Assets                            
Loans and advances to banks   1,803   554   119     1,585     5,061     9,122   6.05         9,122  
Loans and advances to customers   305         262         567   2.82         567  
Investment in subsidiaries                         20,851     20,851  
Other assets                         202     202  



























 
Total assets   2,108   554   119     1,847     5,061     9,689   5.86     21,053     30,742  

























 
Liabilities and equity                            
Deposits by banks   951                 951   4.42         951  
Customer accounts   55                 55           55  
Debt securities in issue   2,942                 2,942   4.55         2,942  
Other liabilities                         14     14  
Subordinated liabilities   1,317   567   116     1,603     5,639     9,242   6.83         9,242  
Shareholders’ equity                         17,538     17,538  



























 
Total liabilities and equity   5,265   567   116     1,603     5,639     13,190   6.12     17,552     30,742  

























 
                                           
Interest rate swaps                            
   





















       
interest rate sensitivity gap   (3,157 )   (13 )   3     244     (578 )   (3,501 )       3,501    
   





















       
Cumulative interest rate sensitivity gap   (3,157 )   (3,170 )   (3,167 )   (2,923 )   (3,501 )   (3,501 )          
   
















                 

149






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

The following table shows the carrying values and the fair values of financial instruments on the balance sheets.

  Group   Company  
 
 
 
  2005
Carrying
value
£m
  2005
Fair
value
£m
  2004
Carrying
value
£m
  2004
Fair
value
£m
  2005
Carrying
value
£m
  2005
Fair
value
£m
  2004
Carrying
value
£m
  2004
Fair
value
£m
 

















 
Financial assets                
Cash and balances at central banks   4,759   4,759   4,293   4,293          
   














 
                     
Treasury bills and other eligible bills                
   Held-for-trading   3,004   3,004            
   Available-for-sale   2,534   2,534            
                           
   Banking business       3,189   3,189          
   Trading business       2,921   2,921          
   














 
  5,538   5,538   6,110   6,110          
   














 
                 
Loans and advance to banks                
   Held-for-trading   44,965   44,965            
   Designated as at fair value
      through profit or loss
  282   282            
   Loans and receivables   25,340   25,336       9,122   9,122    
                           
   Banking business       25,167   25,111       4,106   4,106  
   Trading business       35,906   35,906          
   














 
  70,587   70,583   61,073   61,017   9,122   9,122   4,106   4,106  
   














 
                 
Loans and advance to customers                
   Held-for-trading   53,963   53,963            
   Designated as at fair value
       through profit or loss
  616   616            
   Loans and receivables   350,960   354,670       567   567    
   Finance leases   11,687   11,687            
                           
   Banking business       285,015   287,289       305   305  
   Trading business       62,236   62,236          
   














 
  417,226   420,936   347,251   349,525   567   567   305   305  
   














 
                 
Debt securities                
   Held-for-trading   80,653   80,653            
   Designated as at fair value
       through profit or loss
  3,991   3,991            
   Available-for-sale   35,533   35,533            
   Loans and receivables   788   788            
                           
   Banking business       39,182   38,998          
   Trading business       54,726   54,726          
   














 
  120,965   120,965   93,908   93,724          
   














 
                 
Equity shares                
   Held-for-trading   2,941   2,941            
   Designated as at fair value
       through profit or loss
  2,541   2,541            
   Available-for-sale   3,819   3,819            
                           
   Banking business       4,237   4,679          
   Trading business       486   486          
   














 
  9,301   9,301   4,723   5,165          
   














 
Settlement balances   6,005   6,005   5,682   5,682          
   














 
Derivatives at fair value   95,663   95,663   17,800   17,800   55   55      

















 

150







  Group   Company  
 
 
 
  2005
Carrying
value
£m
  2005
Fair
value
£m
  2004
Carrying
value
£m
  2004
Fair
value
£m
  2005
Carrying
value
£m
  2005
Fair
value
£m
  2004
Carrying
value
£m
  2004
Fair
value
£m
 

















 
Financial liabilities                
Deposits by banks                
   Held-for-trading   32,067   32,067            
   Amortised cost   78,340   78,218       951   951    
                           
   Banking business       60,201   59,294       174   174  
   Trading business       39,682   39,682          















 
  110,407   110,285   99,883   98,976   951   951   174   174  















 
                 
Customer accounts                
   Held-for-trading   34,645   34,645            
   Designated as at fair value
      through profit or loss
  3,683   3,683            
   Amortised cost   304,539   305,252       55   55    
                           
   Banking business       242,182   241,971          
   Trading business       41,133   41,133          















 
  342,867   343,580   283,315   283,104   55   55      















 
                 
Debt securities in issue                
   Held-for-trading   1,469   1,469            
   Designated as at fair value
      through profit or loss
  11,068   11,068            
   Amortised cost   77,883   78,089       2,942   2,942    
                           
   Banking business       62,239   62,238       1,608   1,608  
   Trading business       1,760   1,760          















 
  90,420   90,626   63,999   63,998   2,942   2,942   1,608   1,608  















 
                                   
Settlement balances and short positions   43,988   43,988   32,990   32,990          















 
Derivatives at fair value   96,438   96,438   18,876   18,876          















 
                 
Subordinated liabilities                
   Designated as at fair value
        through profit or loss
  150   150            
   Amortised cost   28,124   29,598       9,242   9,639    
                           
   Banking business       20,312   21,652       5,935   6,184  
   Trading business       54   54          















 
  28,274   29,748   20,366   21,706   9,242   9,639   5,935   6,184  

















 

Analysis of total assets and liabilities

     
  2004
£m
 




 
Assets: denominated in sterling   279,433  
denominated in currencies other than sterling   308,689  




 
  588,122  
     
 
         
Liabilities: denominated in sterling   282,660  
denominated in currencies other than sterling   305,462  




 
  588,122  
 
 

151






Notes on the accounts continued

34 Financial instruments (continued)

Industry risk – geographical analysis

    Group
 











 
2005   Loans and
advances
to banks
and customers
£m
  Treasury bills,
debt securities
and equity shares
£m
  Derivatives
£m
  Other
£m
(1)

Total
£m
  Netting and
offset
£m
(2)
(2)













 
UK                          
Central and local government   4,082   20,061   175   407   24,725   1,584  
Manufacturing   14,861   462   1,088     16,411   3,829  
Construction   8,389   53   126     8,568   1,655  
Finance   99,123   49,532   66,132   2,129   216,916   84,330  
Service industries and business activities   53,504   3,404   2,148   162   59,218   6,290  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   2,685   17   2     2,704   265  
Property   41,074   401   1,123     42,598   3,157  
Individuals            
       Home mortgages   65,286     3     65,289   2,690  
       Other   26,987   564     186   27,737   688  
Finance leases and instalment credit   13,909   4       13,913    
Interest accruals   1,503   774       2,277    













 
Total UK   331,403   75,272   70,797   2,884   480,356   104,488  













 
             
US            
Central and local government   472   27,420     112   28,004    
Manufacturing   3,369   89   91     3,549   6  
Construction   730   30   8     768    
Finance   33,811   24,672   21,023   3,818   83,324   22,059  
Service industries and business activities   10,440   661   113     11,214   11  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   92         92    
Property   5,215   5   39     5,259   15  
Individuals            
       Home mortgages   34,783   922       35,705    
       Other   14,396         14,396    
Finance leases and instalment credit   2,973         2,973    
Interest accruals   424   194       618   2  













 
Total US   106,705   53,993   21,274   3,930   185,902   22,093  













 
             
Europe            
Central and local government   297   301       598   121  
Manufacturing   6,429         6,429   891  
Construction   2,382         2,382   1,931  
Finance   8,259   2,214   450   8   10,931   4,988  
Service industries and business activities   9,908   10   11     9,929   3,735  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   514         514   577  
Property   5,078   49       5,127   2,682  
Individuals            
       Home mortgages   8,848         8,848   11,310  
       Other   3,585   105       3,690   1,584  
Finance leases and instalment credit   1,311         1,311    
Interest accruals   115   26       141    













 
Total Europe   46,726   2,705   461   8   49,900   27,819  













 
             
Rest of the World            
Central and local government   243   1,709   1,379     3,331    
Manufacturing   102     7     109   1  
Construction   65         65    
Finance   3,680   2,233   1,728   3   7,644   896  
Service industries and business activities   1,610   24   17     1,651    
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   3         3    
Property   112         112   1  
Individuals            
       Home mortgages   216         216    
       Other   792         792    
Finance lease and instalment credit              
Interest accruals   43         43    













 
Total Rest of the World   6,866   3,966   3,131   3   13,966   898  













 
(1) Includes settlement balances of £6,005 million.
(2) This column shows the amount by which exposures to counterparties are reduced by the existence of a legal right of set off (on the basis that the financial asset will be collected in accordance with its terms) and under master netting arrangements. The credit risk of financial assets subject to a master netting arrangement is eliminated only to the extent that financial liabilities due to the same counterparty will be settled after the assets are realised. The extent to which the Group's credit risk is reduced through a master netting arrangement may change substantially within a short period following the balance sheet date because the exposure is affected by each transaction subject to the arrangement.

152




    Group













 
2005   Loans and
advances
to banks
and customers
£m
  Treasury bills,
debt securities
and equity shares
£m
  Derivatives
£m
  Other
£m
(1)

Total
£m
  Netting and
offset
£m
(2)
(2)













 
Total            
Central and local government   5,094   49,491   1,554   519   56,658   1,705  
Manufacturing   24,761   551   1,186     26,498   4,727  
Construction   11,566   83   134     11,783   3,586  
Finance   144,873   78,651   89,333   5,958   318,815   112,273  
Service industries and business activities   75,462   4,099   2,289   162   82,012   10,036  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   3,294   17   2     3,313   842  
Property   51,479   455   1,162     53,096   5,855  
Individuals            
       Home mortgages   109,133   922   3     110,058   14,000  
       Other   45,760   669     186   46,615   2,272  
Finance lease and instalment credit   18,193   4       18,197    
Interest accruals   2,085   994       3,079   2  













 
  491,700   135,936   95,663   6,825   730,124   155,298  













 
(1) Includes settlement balances of £6,005 million.
(2) This column shows the amount by which exposures to counterparties are reduced by the existence of a legal right of set off (on the basis that the financial asset will be collected in accordance with its terms) and under master netting arrangements. The credit risk of financial assets subject to a master netting arrangement is eliminated only to the extent that financial liabilities due to the same counterparty will be settled after the assets are realised. The extent to which the Group's credit risk is reduced through a master netting arrangement may change substantially within a short period following the balance sheet date because the exposure is affected by each transaction subject to the arrangement.

35 Memorandum items

Contingent liabilities and commitments

The amounts shown in the table below are intended only to provide an indication of the volume of business outstanding at 31 December. Although the Group is exposed to credit risk in the event of non-performance of the obligations undertaken by customers, the amounts shown do not, and are not intended to, provide any indication of the Group’s expectation of future losses.

  Group   Company  
   






 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
 









 
Contingent liabilities:        
Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security   12,253   10,438   448   448  
Other contingent liabilities   6,394   5,655      









 
  18,647   16,093   448   448  







 
         
Commitments:        
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend          
       – less than one year   121,911   109,653      
       – one year and over   81,110   69,577      
Other commitments   3,529   1,547      









 
  206,550   180,777      







 

153






Notes on the accounts continued

35 Memorandum items (continued)

Banking commitments and contingent obligations, which have been entered into on behalf of customers and for which there are corresponding obligations from customers, are not included in assets and liabilities. The Group’s maximum exposure to credit loss, in the event of non-performance by the other party and where all counterclaims, collateral or security proves valueless, is represented by the contractual nominal amount of these instruments included in the table. These commitments and contingent obligations are subject to the Group’s normal credit approval processes and any potential loss is taken into account in assessing provisions for bad and doubtful debts in accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy.

Contingent liabilities

Guarantees – the Group gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that the Group will meet a customer’s obligations to third parties if the customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that the Group could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount as disclosed in the table above. The Group expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused.

Other contingent liabilities – these include standby letters of credit, supporting customer debt issues and contingent liabilities relating to customer trading activities such as those arising from performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities.

Commitments

Commitments to lend – under a loan commitment the Group agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities.

Other commitments – these include forward asset purchases, forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities, documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions.

Regulatory enquiries and investigations – in the normal course of business the Group and its subsidiaries co-operate with regulatory authorities in various jurisdictions in their enquiries or investigations into alleged or possible breaches of regulations.

Additional contingent liabilities arise in the normal course of the Group’s business. It is not anticipated that any material loss will arise from these transactions.

Litigation

Proceedings, including a consolidated class action, have been brought in the United States against a large number of defendants, including the Group, following the collapse of Enron. The claims against the Group could be significant but are largely unquantified. The Group considers that it has substantial and credible legal and factual defences to these claims and it continues to defend them vigorously. A court ordered mediation commenced in September 2003 but no material progress has been made towards a resolution of the claims, although a number of other defendants have reached settlements in the principal class action. The Group is unable reliably to estimate the possible loss in relation to these matters or the effect that the possible loss might have on the Group’s consolidated net assets or its operating results or cash flows in any particular period. In addition, pursuant to requests received from the US Securities and Exchange Commission and the Department of Justice, the Group has provided copies of Enron-related materials to these authorities and has co-operated fully with them.

Members of the Group are engaged in other litigation in the United Kingdom and a number of overseas jurisdictions, including the United States, involving claims by and against them arising in the ordinary course of business. The Group has reviewed these other actual, threatened and known potential claims and proceedings and, after consulting with its legal advisers, is satisfied that the outcome of these other claims and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on its consolidated net assets, operating results or cash flows in any particular period.

Trustee and other fiduciary activities

In its capacity as trustee or other fiduciary role, the Group may hold or place assets on behalf of individuals, trusts, companies, pension schemes and others. The assets and their income are not included in the Group’s financial statements.

154






36 Net cash inflow from operating activities

  Group   Company
 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m













Operating profit before tax   7,936   7,284   1,932   2,890
Decrease/(increase) in prepayments and accrued income   1,064   (333 )   4   (17 )
Interest on subordinated liabilities   1,271   681   583   318
(Decrease)/increase in accruals and deferred income   (1,200 )   1,750   8   (7 )
Provisions for impairment losses   1,707   1,402    
Loans and advances written-off net of recoveries   (1,870 )   (1,305 )    
Unwind of discount on impairment losses   (144 )      
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment   (91 )   (69 )    
Loss/(profit) on sale of subsidiaries and associates   80   (4 )    
Profit on sale of securities   (667 )   (167 )    
Charge for defined benefit pensions   462   397    
Cash contribution to defined benefit pension schemes   (452 )   (1,146 )    
Other provisions utilised   (34 )   (47 )    
Depreciation and amortisation   1,825   1,674    
Other non-cash items   1,493   (1,994 )   (28 )   25













Net cash inflow from trading activities   11,380   8,123   2,499   3,209













(Increase)/decrease in loans and advances to banks and customers   (36,778 )   (72,955 )   (14 )   77
Increase in securities   (28,842 )   (11,883 )    
(Increase)/decrease in other assets   (2,390 )   (2,208 )   5   33
(Increase)/decrease in derivative assets   (5,758 )   (3,753 )   50   21













Changes in operating assets   (73,768 )   (90,799 )   41   131













Increase in deposits by banks and customers   32,424   53,073   832   18
Increase in insurance liabilities   620   866    
Increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue   24,147   19,073   1,328   (269 )
Increase/(decrease) in other liabilities   571   919   (55 )   (19 )
Increase/(decrease) in derivative liabilities   5,161   3,808   (96 )   (9 )
Increase in settlement balances and short positions   10,326   8,796    













Changes in operating liabilities   73,249   86,535   2,009   (279 )













Total income taxes paid   (1,911 )   (1,366 )   (18 )   36













Net cash inflow from operating activities   8,950   2,493   4,531   3,097
   











37 Analysis of the net investment in business interests and intangible assets
  Group
 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m







Fair value given for businesses acquired   (85 )   (8,157 )
Cash and cash equivalents acquired     457
Non-cash consideration   10   4







Net outflow of cash in respect of purchases   (75 )   (7,696 )







         
Cash and cash equivalents in businesses sold   10  
Other assets sold   208   18
Non-cash consideration   (30 )  
(Loss)/profit on disposal   (80 )   4







Net inflow of cash in respect of disposals   108   22







Dividends received from joint ventures   16   9
Cash expenditure on intangible assets   (345 )   (303 )







Net outflow   (296 )   (7,968 )






155






Notes on the accounts continued

38 Interest received and paid

  Group   Company
 
 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m













Interest received   21,608   17,025   488   337
Interest paid   (11,878 )   (8,164 )   (704 )   (402 )













  9,730   8,861   (216 )   (65 )











39 Analysis of changes in financing during the year

  Group   Company
 
 
  Share capital     Subordinated liabilities   Share capital     Subordinated liabilities
 
   
 
   
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
    2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
    2005
£m
  2004
£m

























At 1 January   13,786     8,944     20,366     16,998     13,786     8,944     5,935     5,393  
Implementation of IAS 32   (3,161 )         7,160           (3,161 )         3,308        

























At 1 January 2005 restated   10,625     8,944     27,526     16,998     10,625     8,944     9,243     5,393  

























Issue of ordinary shares   163     2,845                 163     2,845              
Issue of equity preference shares   1,649     1,358                 1,649     1,358              
Net proceeds from issue of                                                
     subordinated liabilities               1,234     4,624                 337     1,424  
Repayment of subordinated liabilities               (1,553 )   (718 )               (1,183 )   (40 )

























Net cash inflow/(outflow) from financing   1,812     4,203     (319 )   3,906     1,812     4,203     (846 )   1,384  

























Acquisitions of subsidiaries               397                  
Currency translation   166     179     1,067     (475 )   166     179     845     (382 )
Other non-cash movements       460         (460 )       460         (460 )

























At 31 December   12,603     13,786     28,274     20,366     12,603     13,786     9,242     5,935  
   























40 Analysis of cash and cash equivalents

  Group   Company
 
 
  2005
£m
  2004
£m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m










At 1 January        
       – cash   23,723   20,937   60   19  
       – cash equivalents   26,298   27,184   249   64  
Net cash inflow   2,528   1,900   817   226  










At 31 December   52,549   50,021   1,126   309  
   







         
Comprising:        
Cash and balances at central banks   4,456   4,035      
Treasury bills and debt securities   998   3,016      
Loans and advances to banks repayable on demand   47,095   42,970   1,126   309  










Cash and cash equivalents   52,549   50,021   1,126   309  
   







Certain subsidiary undertakings are required to maintain balances with the Bank of England which, at 31 December 2005, amounted to £303 million (2004 – £260 million). Certain subsidiary undertakings are required by law to maintain reserve balances with the Federal Reserve Bank in the US. Such reserve balances amounted to US$156 million at 31 December 2005 (2004 – US$132 million).

156






41 Segmental analysis

The directors manage the Group primarily by class of business and present the segmental analysis on that basis. Segments charge market prices for services rendered to other parts of the Group with the exception of Manufacturing and central resources. The expenditure incurred by Manufacturing relates to shared costs principally in respect of the Group's UK and Ireland banking and insurance operations. These costs reflect activities that are shared between the various customer-facing divisions and consequently cannot be directly attributed to individual divisions. Funding charges between segments are determined by Group Treasury, having regard to commercial demands.

(a) Divisions

                            Group                      
   
    Revenue   Total Income                      
   
 
                     
2005   External
£m
    Inter segment
£m
  Total
£m
  External
£m
  Inter segment
£m
    Total
£m
  Operating expenses
£m
    Depreciation and amortisation
£m
    Provisions
£m
    Operating profit before tax
£m































Corporate Markets   14,633     3,724   18,357   11,062   (2,247 )   8,815   (2,440 )   (816 )   (335 )   5,224
Retail Banking   7,086     1,333   8,419   5,507   (74 )   5,433   (1,810 )   (13 )   (601 )   3,009
Retail Direct   3,751     183   3,934   2,123   (157 )   1,966   (580 )   (25 )   (571 )   790
Wealth Management   870     1,129   1,999   (235 )   1,049   814   (379 )   (14 )   (13 )   408
Ulster Bank   1,638     150   1,788   973   (115 )   858   (246 )   (24 )   (58 )   530
Citizens   4,878     4   4,882   3,353   (89 )   3,264   (1,407 )   (151 )   (131 )   1,575
RBS Insurance   6,194     67   6,261   5,501   (12 )   5,489   (4,536 )   (27 )     926
Manufacturing   55     6   61   (61 )   (34 )   (95 )   (2,125 )   (523 )     (2,743 )
Central items   15     5,161   5,176   (2,654 )   1,679   (975 )   (500 )   5   2   (1,468 )
Eliminations       (11,757 )   (11,757 )              































Operating profit before amortisation of
   purchased intangibles, integration costs and
   net gain on sale of strategic investments
  39,120       39,120   25,569     25,569   (14,023 )   (1,588 )   (1,707 )   8,251
Amortisation of intangibles                   (97 )     (97 )
Integration costs                 (318 )   (140 )     (458 )
Net gain on sale of strategic investments   333       333   333     333   (93 )       240































Operating profit before tax   39,453       39,453   25,902     25,902   (14,434 )   (1,825 )   (1,707 )   7,936
   





























                            Group                      
   
    Revenue   Total Income                      
   
 
                     
2004   External
£m
    Inter segment
£m
  Total
£m
  External
£m
  Inter segment
£m
    Total
£m
  Operating
expenses
£m
    Depreciation
and
amortisation
£m
    Provisions
£m
    Operating
profit
before tax
£m































Corporate Markets   11,809     4,007   15,816   9,548   (1,897 )   7,651   (2,084 )   (760 )   (581 )   4,226
Retail Banking   6,907     1,283   8,190   5,460   120   5,580   (1,969 )   (10 )   (389 )   3,212
Retail Direct   3,504     109   3,613   1,933   (156 )   1,777   (552 )   (27 )   (313 )   885
Wealth Management   861     918   1,779   18   755   773   (368 )   (30 )   (18 )   357
Ulster Bank   1,281     53   1,334   800   (57 )   743   (224 )   (27 )   (40 )   452
Citizens   2,929     15   2,944   2,265   3   2,268   (1,003 )   (77 )   (117 )   1,071
RBS Insurance   6,043     33   6,076   5,064   (25 )   5,039   (4,145 )   (31 )     863
Manufacturing   43     15   58   (66 )     (66 )   (2,062 )   (424 )     (2,552 )
Central items       2,065   2,065   (1,631 )   1,257   (374 )   (274 )   10   (27 )   (665 )
Eliminations       (8,498 )   (8,498 )              































Operating profit before amortisation of                      
  purchased intangibles and integration costs   33,377       33,377   23,391     23,391   (12,681 )   (1,376 )   (1,485 )   7,849
Amortisation of intangibles                   (45 )     (45 )
Integration costs                 (267 )   (253 )     (520 )































Operating profit before tax   33,377       33,377   23,391     23,391   (12,948 )   (1,674 )   (1,485 )   7,284
   




























157






Notes on the accounts continued

41 Segmental analysis (continued)      

        2005           2004      
   
 
 
Group   Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m
  Cost to
acquire fixed
assets and
intangible
assets
£m
  Assets
£m
  Liabilities
£m
  Cost to
acquire fixed
assets and
intangible
assets
£m
 
   










 
Corporate Markets   499,206   456,258   3,674   352,889   320,263   3,438   
Retail Banking   83,077   83,334   1   78,521   76,726   107  
Retail Direct   27,210   2,941   23   23,479   4,160   80  
Wealth Management   10,078   26,369   42   9,034   23,478   17  
Ulster Bank   35,875   29,878   77   27,405   21,891   564  
Citizens   92,197   77,471   301   71,597   58,888   6,165  
RBS Insurance   12,523   8,925   172   11,215   8,356   38  
Manufacturing   5,638   1,788   998   5,548   2,149   1,318  
Central items   11,023   52,319     8,434   34,814    













 
Group   776,827   739,283   5,288   588,122   550,725   11,727  











 

Segmental analysis of goodwill is as follows:

                      Group                      
   

























    Corporate
Markets
£m
  Retail
Banking
£m
    Retail Direct
£m
  Wealth
Management
£m
  Citizens
£m
    RBS
Insurance
£m
    Ulster Bank
£m
  Centre
£m
    Total
£m




























At 1 January 2005   186     83     174     153     6,635     961     425     9,415     18,032  
Currency translation and other adjustments   (5 )       (3 )   (4 )   809         (11 )       786  
Arising on acquisitions during the year   1     1     8             103             113  
Disposals   (96 )           (12 )                   (108 )




























At 31 December 2005   86     84     179     137     7,444     1,064     414     9,415     18,823  



























158






(b) Geographical segments

The geographical analyses in the tables below have been compiled on the basis of location of office where the transactions are recorded

      Group      
   








 
2005   UK
£m
  USA
£m
  Europe
£m
  Rest of
the world
£m
  Total
£m
 











 
Net interest income   6,942   2,225   713   38   9,918  
Fees and commissions (net)   3,466   1,100   263   80   4,909  
Income from trading activities   1,263   959   56   65   2,343  
Other operating income   2,330   211   403   9   2,953  
Insurance premium income (net of reinsurers’ share)   5,462     317     5,779  











 
Total income   19,463   4,495   1,752   192   25,902  









 
Operating profit before tax   5,278   2,032   602   24   7,936  









 
Total assets   492,962   205,514   62,203   16,148   776,827  









 
Total liabilities   473,581   191,189   58,527   15,986   739,283  









 
Net assets attributable to equity shareholders and minority interests   19,381   14,325   3,676   162   37,544  









 
Contingent liabilities and commitments   161,927   51,392   10,714   1,164   225,197  









 
Cost to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets   3,353   337   1,581   17   5,288  









 
           
2004          











 
Net interest income   6,454   1,825   751   41   9,071  
Fees and commissions (net)   3,455   717   301   74   4,547  
Income from trading activities   1,113   821   18   36   1,988  
Other operating income   1,741   109   284   4   2,138  
Insurance premium income (net of reinsurers’ share)   5,390     257     5,647  











 
Total income   18,153   3,472   1,611   155   23,391  









 
Operating profit before tax   5,059   1,575   583   67   7,284  









 
Total assets   382,623   145,748   45,845   13,906   588,122  









 
Total liabilities   362,297   131,449   43,129   13,850   550,725  









 
Net assets attributable to equity shareholders and minority interests   20,326   14,299   2,716   56   37,397  









 
Contingent liabilities and commitments   151,489   37,972   6,791   618   196,870  









 
Cost to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets   3,811   6,178   1,736   2   11,727  









 

159






Notes on the accounts continued

42 Directors’ and key management remuneration

Group  

 
Directors’ remuneration   2005
£000
  2004
£000
 





 
Non-executive directors – emoluments 924 874  
Chairman and executive directors – emoluments 8,994 8,421  
Chairman and executive directors – contributions and allowances in respect of defined
Chairman and executive directors          contribution pension schemes 220 178  





 
10,138 9,473  
Chairman and executive directors – amounts receivable under long-term incentive plans 4,778 2,189  
Chairman and executive directors – gains on exercise of share options 11 5  





 
14,927 11,667  
 


 

Retirement benefits are accruing to four directors (2004 – five) under defined benefit schemes, two (2004 – two) of whom also accrued benefits under defined contribution schemes.

The executive directors may also participate in the company’s executive share option, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and details of their interests in the company’s shares arising from their participation are contained on page 79. Details of the remuneration received by each director during the year and each director’s pension arrangements are given on pages 78 to 81.

Compensation of key management

The aggregate remuneration of directors and other members of key management during the year was as follows:

Group  

 
    2005
£000
  2004
£000
 





 
Short-term benefits 26,180 23,652  
Post-employment benefits 9,383 5,298  
Other long-term 4,215
Share-based payments 1,568 5,200  





 
41,346 34,150  
 


 

160






43 Transactions with directors, officers and others

(a) At 31 December 2005, the amounts outstanding in relation to transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by authorised institutions in the Group, as defined by UK Law, were £149,537 in respect of loans to six persons who were directors of the company (or persons connected with them) at any time during the financial period and £2,055 to one person who was an officer of the company at any time during the financial period.
 
(b) For the purposes of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’, key management comprise directors of the company and members of the Group Executive Management Committee. The captions in the Group’s primary financial statements include the following amounts attributable, in aggregate, to key management:

    2005
£000
  2004
£000





Loans and advances to customers   3,090   2,497
Customer accounts   12,604   8,021





Key management have banking relationships with Group entities which are entered into in the normal course of business.

Key management had no reportable transactions or balances with the company except for dividends.

44 Related parties

(a) Group companies provide development and other types of capital support to businesses in their roles as providers of finance. These investments are made in the normal course of business and on arm’s-length terms. In some instances, the investment may extend to ownership or control over 20% or more of the voting rights of the investee company. However, these investments are not considered to give rise to transactions of a materiality requiring disclosure under IAS 24.
 
(b) The Group recharges The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund with the cost of administration services incurred by it. The amounts involved are not material to the Group.
 
(c) In accordance with IAS 24, transactions or balances between Group entities that have been eliminated on consolidation are not reported.
 
(d) The captions in the primary financial statements of the parent company include amounts attributable to subsidiaries. These amounts have been disclosed in aggregate in the relevant notes to the financial statements.

161






Notes on the accounts continued

45 Transition to IFRS

(1) Significant differences between the Group’s UK GAAP accounting policies applied in its 2004 financial statements and its IFRS accounting policies

UK GAAP      IFRS



(a) Goodwill    
Goodwill arising on acquisitions after 1 October 1998 is capitalised and amortised over its estimated useful economic life. Goodwill arising on acquisitions before 1 October 1998 was deducted from equity. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full year following an acquisition and subsequently if events or changes in circumstances indicated that its carrying value might not be recoverable,  

Goodwill is recorded at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is tested annually for impairment or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.

The carrying amount of goodwill in the Group’s opening IFRS balance sheet (as at 1 January 2004) was £13,131 million, its carrying value under UK GAAP as at 31 December 2003.




(b) Intangibles other than goodwill    
Computer software development costs    
Most computer software development costs are written off as incurred.

 

Computer software development costs are capitalised if they create an identifiable intangible asset. They are amortised over their estimated useful life of three years. Net computer software development costs of £818 million were recognised on transition to IFRS.
     
Other intangibles    
An intangible asset acquired in a business combination is capitalised separately from goodwill only if it can be disposed of separately from the revenue-earning activity to which it contributes and its value can be measured reliably.   An intangible asset is recognised as an asset separately from goodwill if it is separable or if it arises from contractual or other legal rights regardless of whether these rights are transferable or separable.
     
  Core deposit intangibles of £268 million, mortgage servicing rights of £81 million, customer relationships of £162 million and other intangibles of £18 million were recognised in business combinations that took place in 2004.



(c) Leasing    
Finance lease income is recognised so as to give a level rate of return on the net cash investment in the lease; tax cash flows are taken into account in allocating income.   IFRS requires a level rate of return on the net investment in the lease. Tax cash flows are not reflected in the pattern of income recognition.
     
Assets held under operating leases are depreciated on a straight-line or reverse-annuity basis.   Assets held on operating leases are depreciated on a straight- line basis.



(d) Dividends    
Dividends payable on ordinary shares are recorded in the period to which they relate.   Dividends are recorded in the period in which they are declared.



(e) Consolidation    
UK GAAP requires consolidation of entities controlled by the reporting entity. Control is the ability to direct the financial and operating policies of an entity.   All entities controlled by the Group are consolidated together with special purpose entities (SPEs) where the substance of the relationship between the reporting entity and the SPE indicates that it is controlled by the reporting entity.



(f) Life assurance    
To reflect the distinct nature of long-term assurance assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders, they are shown separately on the consolidated balance sheet; the results of life assurance business are presented as a single contribution to profit before tax.   Assets, liabilities, income and expense of life assurance business are consolidated on a line-by-line basis.
     
Changes in embedded value determined on a post-tax basis are grossed up for inclusion in the income statement.   Movements in embedded value are not grossed up, instead they are included net of tax in profit before tax.

162






UK GAAP      IFRS



(g) Associates and joint ventures    
An associate is an entity in which the reporting entity holds a participating interest and over whose operating and financial policies it exercises a significant influence in practice. A joint venture is an entity in which the reporting entity in practice shares control with other investors. Associates are accounted for using the equity method and joint ventures using the gross equity method.   The definitions of associate and joint venture are similar to those in UK GAAP. However, significant influence is defined as the power to participate in the financial and operating policies of the associate. A joint venture is an entity where the strategic financial and operating decisions require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. Associates are accounted for using the equity method. The Group proportionately consolidates its joint ventures.



(h) Property, plant and equipment    
The Group’s freehold and long leasehold property occupied for its own use is recorded at valuation on the basis of existing use value.  

The Group’s freehold and long leasehold property occupied for its own use is recorded at cost less depreciation.

The Group has elected to use the UK GAAP valuation as at 31 December 2003 as deemed cost for freehold and long leasehold property occupied for its own use in its opening IFRS balance sheet (1 January 2004).




(i) Investment property    
Investment property is revalued annually to open market value and changes in market value reflected in the Statement of total recognised gains and losses.   Investment property is stated at fair value. Any gain or loss arising from a change in fair value is recognised in profit or loss.



(j) Share-based payments    
No expense is recognised for options over The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc shares granted to employees.   The Group has applied IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payment’ to grants of options over shares after 7 November 2002 that had not vested on 1 January 2005. The expense for these transactions is measured based on the fair value on the date the options are granted. The fair value is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period.



(k) Pensions    
Pension scheme assets are measured at fair value using mid-market prices.   Pension scheme assets are measured at fair value using bid prices.



(l) Income tax    
Deferred tax is not accounted for in relation to revaluations of fixed assets where there is no commitment to dispose of the asset or in relation to taxable gains or losses on sales of fixed assets that are rolled over into the tax cost of replacement fixed assets.   Deferred tax is provided on fixed asset revaluations and on taxable gains and losses on fixed asset sales rolled over into the tax cost of replacement assets.



(m) Cash flow statements    
Cash comprises cash and balances with central banks and loans and advances to banks repayable on demand.   Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and demand deposits with banks together with short-term highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and subject to insignificant risk of changes in value.
     
Under UK GAAP, cash flows are classified under the following headings:   Under IFRS cash flows are classified into operating, investing and financing activities.
     
  • operating activities
  • dividends from joint ventures and associates
  • returns on investments and servicing of finance
  • taxation
  • capital expenditure and financial investment
  • acquisitions and disposals
  • ordinary equity dividends paid
  • financing
   

163






Notes on the accounts continued

45 Transition to IFRS (continued)

Implementation of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4

UK GAAP      IFRS



(n) Financial instruments: financial assets    

Loans are measured at cost less provisions for bad and doubtful debts, derivatives held-for-trading are carried at fair value and hedging derivatives are accounted for in accordance with the treatment of the item being hedged (see Derivatives and hedging below).

Debt securities and equity shares intended for use on a continuing basis in the Group’s activities are classified as investment securities and are stated at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value. The cost of dated investment securities is adjusted for the amortisation of premiums or discounts. Other debt securities and equity shares are carried at fair value.

  Under IAS 39, financial assets are classified into held-to-maturity; available-for-sale; held-for-trading; designated as at fair value through profit or loss; and loans and receivables. Financial assets classified as held-to-maturity or as loans and receivables are carried at amortised cost. Other financial assets are measured at fair value. Changes in the fair value of available-for-sale financial assets are reported in a separate component of shareholders’ equity. Changes in the fair value of financial assets held-for-trading or designated as at fair value are taken to profit or loss. Financial assets can be classified as held-to-maturity only if they have a fixed maturity and the reporting entity has the positive intention and ability to hold to maturity. Trading financial assets are held for the purpose of selling in the near term. IFRS allows any financial asset to be designated as at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition. Unquoted debt financial assets that are not classified as held-to-maturity, held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss are categorised as loans and receivables. All other financial assets are classified as available-for-sale.



(o) Financial instruments: financial liabilities    
Under UK GAAP, short positions in securities and trading derivatives are carried at fair value; all other financial liabilities are recorded at amortised cost.   IAS 39 requires all financial liabilities to be measured at amortised cost except those held-for-trading and those that were designated as at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition.



(p) Liabilities and equity    
Under UK GAAP, all shares are classified as shareholders' funds. An analysis of shareholders’ funds between equity and non-equity interests is given.   There is no concept of non-equity shares in IFRS. Instruments are classified between equity and liabilities in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangements. A non- derivative instrument is classified as equity if it does not include a contractual obligation either to deliver cash or to exchange financial instruments with another entity under potentially unfavourable conditions, and, if the instrument will or may be settled by the issue of equity, settlement does not involve the issue of a variable number of shares. On implementation of IAS 32, non-equity shares with a balance sheet value of £3,192 million and £2,568 million of non-equity minority interests were reclassified as liabilities.

164






UK GAAP      IFRS



(q) Effective interest rate and lending fees    

Under UK GAAP, loan origination fees are recognised when received unless they are charged in lieu of interest.
  IAS 39 requires the amortised cost of a financial instrument to be calculated using the effective interest method. The effective interest rate is the rate that discounts estimated future cash flows over an instrument’s expected life to its net carrying value. It takes into account all fees and points paid that are an integral part of the yield, transaction costs and all other premiums and discounts.

On implementation of IAS 39, the carrying value of financial assets was reduced by £708 million and financial liabilities increased by £224 million, deferred tax was reduced by £283 million and shareholders’ equity reduced by £649 million.


(r) Derivatives and hedging    

Under UK GAAP non-trading derivatives are accounted for on an accruals basis in accordance with the accounting treatment of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a non-trading derivative transaction is terminated or ceases to be an effective hedge, it is re-measured at fair value and any gain or loss amortised over the remaining life of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a hedged item is derecognised the related non-trading derivative is remeasured at fair value and any gain or loss taken to the income statement.

  Under IAS 39, all derivatives are measured at fair value. Hedge accounting is permitted for three types of hedge relationship: fair value hedge – the hedge of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or firm commitment; cash flow hedge – the hedge of variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a forecasted transaction; and the hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity. In a fair value hedge the gain or loss on the derivative is recognised in profit or loss as it arises offset by the corresponding gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the risk hedged. In a cash flow hedge and in the hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity, the element of the derivative’s gain or loss that is an effective hedge is recognised directly in equity. The ineffective element is taken to the income statement. Certain conditions must be met for a relationship to qualify for hedge accounting. These include designation, documentation and prospective and actual hedge effectiveness. On implementation of IAS 39, non- trading derivatives were remeasured at fair value.

     
Embedded derivatives are not bifurcated from the host contract.

  A derivative embedded in a contract is accounted for as a stand-alone derivative if its economic characteristics are not closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract, unless the entire contract is carried at fair value through profit or loss.


(s) Loan impairment    

Under UK GAAP provisions for bad and doubtful debts are made so as to record impaired loans at their ultimate net realisable value. Specific provisions are established against individual advances or portfolios of smaller balance homogeneous advances and the general provision covers advances impaired at the balance sheet date but which have not been identified as such. Interest receivable from loans and advances is credited to the income statement as it accrues unless there is significant doubt that it can be collected.

  IFRS require impairment losses on financial assets carried at amortised cost to be measured as the difference between the asset's carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the asset's original effective interest rate. There is no concept of specific and general provision – under IFRS impairment is assessed individually for individually significant assets but can be assessed collectively for other assets. Once an impairment loss has been recognised on a financial asset or group of financial assets, interest income is recognised on the carrying amount using the rate of interest at which estimated future cash flows were discounted in measuring impairment.

165






Notes on the accounts continued

Transition to IFRS (continued)    
     
UK GAAP   IFRS



(t) Offset    
Under UK GAAP an intention to settle net is not a requirement for set off; the entity must have the ability to insist on net settlement and that ability is assured beyond doubt.  

For a financial asset and a financial liability to be offset, IFRS require that an entity must intend to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

On implementation of IAS 32, the balance sheet value of financial assets and financial liabilities increased by £104 billion.




(u) Insurance contracts    
All contracts within the life assurance business are accounted for as insurance contracts and the obligations to policyholders presented as Long-term assurance liabilities attributable to policyholders.   IFRS 4 requires life assurance products to be classified between insurance contracts and investment contracts. The latter are accounted for in accordance with IAS 39. Insurance contracts continue to be accounted for using the embedded value methodology.
     
The value placed on in-force policies includes future investment margins.   The value of in-force policies excludes any amounts that reflect future investment margins.



(v) Linked presentation    
FRS 5 ‘Reporting the Substance of Transactions’ allows qualifying transactions to be presented using the linked presentation.   There is no linked presentation under IFRS. If substantially all the risks and rewards have been retained, the gross assets and related funding are presented separately.



(w) Extinguishment of liabilities    
Under UK GAAP, recognition of a financial liability ceases once any transfer of economic benefits to the creditor is no longer likely.   A financial liability is removed from the balance sheet when, and only when, it is extinguished i.e. when the obligation specified in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.

166






(2) Analysis of IFRS adjustments, excluding IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4

Opening balance sheet at 1 January 2004 – Group

    UK GAAP
£m
  Dividends
£m
  Income tax
£m
  Leases
£m
    Consolidation
£m
    Software
development
costs
£m
  Investment
property
£m
    Share
based
payment
£m
  Employee
benefits
£m
  Insurance
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m






























Assets                                                          
Cash and balances at central banks   3,822                                 3,822
Treasury bills and other eligible bills   4,846                                 4,846
Loans and advances to banks   54,392           (2 )             1,013     1,011     55,403
Loans and advances to customers   252,531       (147 )   1,798       (448 )       (541 )   662     253,193
Debt securities   79,949           123               1,076     1,199     81,148
Equity shares   2,300                         1,745     1,745     4,045
Intangible assets   13,131               896               896     14,027
Property, plant and equipment   13,927       (127 )   76     (78 ) 448         1     320     14,247
Settlement balances   2,857                                 2,857
Derivatives at fair value   14,087                         (40 )   (40 )   14,047
Prepayments, accrued income                                                          
  and other assets   9,029           72     1         (10 ) 256     319     9,348
Long-term assurance assets   3,557                         (3,557 )   (3,557 )  






























Total assets   454,428       (274 )   2,067     819         (10 ) (47 )   2,555     456,983
   



























 
Liabilities                                                          
Deposits by banks   68,281                                 68,281
Customer accounts   236,963           (1,002 )             (495 )   (1,497 )   235,466
Debt securities in issue   41,016           3,129                   3,129     44,145
Settlement balances and                                                          
  short positions   21,369                                 21,369
Derivatives at fair value   15,173                         (105 )   (105 )   15,068
Accruals, deferred income                                                          
  and other liabilities   18,779   (1,059 )   2     238           6     (3,596 )   (4,409 )   14,370
Retirement benefit liabilities   1,445                       591       591     2,036
Deferred taxation liabilities   2,036     109   (75 )   13     243       (2 ) (584 ) (4 )   (300 )   1,736
Insurance liabilities                           7,781     7,781     7,781
Subordinated liabilities   16,998                                 16,998
Minority interests   2,713           (313 )   5           (13 )   (321 )   2,392
Shareholders’ equity   26,098   1,059   (109 ) (201 )   2     571       (4 ) (17 ) (58 )   1,243     27,341
Long-term assurance liabilities   3,557                         (3,557 )   (3,557 )  






























Total liabilities and equity   454,428       (274 )   2,067     819         (10 ) (47 )   2,555     456,983
   




























167





Notes on the accounts continued

45 Transition to IFRS (continued)

Opening balance sheet at 1 January 2004 – Company

      UK GAAP
£m
  Dividends
£m
    Valuation
of
subsidiaries
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m
 
















Assets                              
Loans and advances to banks     4,257               4,257  
Loans and advances to customers     382               382  
Investments in Group undertakings     32,354       (16,857 )   (16,857 )   15,497  
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets     355               355  
















Total assets     37,348       (16,857 )   (16,857 )   20,491  
   












 
 
Liabilities                              
Deposits by banks     156               156  
Debt securities in issue     1,877               1,877  
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities     1,377   (1,059 )       (1,059 )   318  
Subordinated liabilities     5,393               5,393  
Shareholders’ equity     28,545   1,059     (16,857 )   (15,798 )   12,747  
















Total liabilities and equity     37,348       (16,857 )   (16,857 )   20,491  
 













 
Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds as at 1 January 2004                              
                      Group
£m
    Company
£m
 
















UK GAAP shareholders’ funds                     26,098     28,545  
Standards applicable to all periods:                              
Valuation of subsidiaries                         (16,857 )
Proposed dividend                     1,059     1,059  
Software development costs                     814     ––  
Leasing                     (276 )   ––  
Share-based payments                     (6 )   ––  
Other                     (72 )   ––  
Tax effect on adjustments                     (167 )   ––  
Deferred tax                     (109 )   ––  
















Shareholders' funds under IFRS                     27,341     12,747  
     






168





Balance sheet at 31 December 2004 – Group

    UK GAAP
£m
  Dividends
£m
    Income tax
£m
    Property
plant and
equipment
£m
    Leases
£m
    Consolidation
£m
    Software
development
costs
£m
    Investment
property
£m
    Share
based
payment
£m
  Employee
benefits
£m
    Insurance
£m
    Goodwill
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m








































Assets                                                                              
Cash and balances at                                                                              
   central banks   4,293                                                 4,293
Treasury bills and other                                                                              
   eligible bills   6,110                                                 6,110
Loans and advances                                                                              
   to banks   60,889                   (2 )                 186         184     61,073
Loans and advances                                                                              
   to customers   345,469               (132 )   3,173         (449 )         (810 )       1,782     347,251
Debt securities   91,211                   618                   2,079         2,697     93,908
Equity shares   2,960                                     1,763         1,763     4,723
Intangible assets   17,576                       725                   941     1,666     19,242
Property, plant and                                                                              
   equipment   16,294           (60 )   (153 )   67     (168 )   447           1         134     16,428
Settlement balances   5,682                                                 5,682
Derivatives at fair value   17,884                   (37 )                 (47 )       (84 )   17,800
Prepayments, accrued                                                                              
   income and other                                                                              
   assets   11,299               (9 )   118         1       (4 )   283     (76 )   (313 )   11,612
Long-term assurance                                                                              
   assets   3,800                                     (3,800 )       (3,800 )  








































Total assets   583,467           (60 )   (294 )   3,937     557     (1 )     (4 )   (345 )   865     4,655     588,122
 


































Liabilities                                                                              
Deposits by banks   99,883                                                 99,883
Customer accounts   285,062                   (1,015 )                 (732 )       (1,747 )   283,315
Debt securities                                                                              
   in issue   58,960                   5,039                           5,039     63,999
Settlement balances                                                                              
   and short positions   32,990                                                 32,990
Derivatives at fair value   19,034                                     (158 )       (158 )   18,876
Accruals, deferred                                                                              
   income and other                                                                              
   liabilities   22,904   (1,308 )           25     258             20       (4,251 )       (5,256 )   17,648
Retirement benefit                                                                              
   liabilities   1,901                   14               1,025             1,039     2,940
Deferred taxation                                                                              
  liabilities   2,873       109         (90 )   9     164     1     (6 ) (1,008 )   12     (3 )   (812 )   2,061
Insurance liabilities                                       8,647         8,647     8,647
Subordinated liabilities   20,366                                                 20,366
Minority interests   3,829                   (334 )   6               (9 )       (337 )   3,492
Shareholders’ equity   31,865   1,308     (109 )   (60 )   (229 )   (34 )   387     (2 )   (14 ) (21 )   (54 )   868     2,040     33,905
Long-term assurance                                                                              
   liabilities   3,800                                     (3,800  )       (3,800 )  








































Total liabilities                                                                              
   and equity   583,467           (60 )   (294 )   3,937     557     (1 )     (4 )   (345 )   865     4,655     588,122
 



































169





Notes on the accounts continued

45 Transition to IFRS (continued)

Balance sheet at 31 December 2004 – Company

    UK GAAP
£m
  Dividends
£m
    Valuation
of
subsidiaries
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m














Assets                          
Loans and advances to banks   4,106               4,106
Loans and advances to customers   305               305
Investments in Group undertakings   36,870       (14,970 )   (14,970 )   21,900
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets   322   (4 )       (4 )   318














Total assets   41,603   (4 )   (14,970 )   (14,974 )   26,629
 











 
Liabilities                          
Deposits by banks   174               174
Debt securities in issue   1,608               1,608
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   1,609   (1,308 )       (1,308 )   301
Subordinated liabilities   5,935               5,935
Shareholders’ equity   32,277   1,304     (14,970 )   (13,666 )   18,611














Total liabilities   41,603   (4 )   (14,970 )   (14,974 )   26,629













Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2004

    UK GAAP
£m
  Property,
including
investment
property
£m
    Leases
£m
    Consolidation
£m
    Software
development
costs
£m
   

Share
based
payments
£m

    Employee
benefits
£m
    Insurance
£m
    Goodwill
£m
    Other
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m



































Net interest income   9,208   (21 )   (18 )   (67 )   16             (47 )           (137 )   9,071
Non-interest income   8,602   22     27     (142 )           (85 )   251         (2 )   71     8,673
Insurance net premium income   4,944           109                 594             703     5,647



































Total income   22,754   1     9     (100 )   16         (85 )   798         (2 )   637     23,391
Operating expenses   10,846   5     49     2     278     36     (83 )   106     (875 )   (2 )   (484 )   10,362
Insurance net claims   3,480           78                 702             780     4,260



































Operating profit before                                                                    
   impairment losses   8,428   (4 )   (40 )   (180 )   (262 )   (36 )   (2 )   (10 )   875         341     8,769
Impairment losses   1,511           (26 )                           (26 )   1,485



































Operating profit before tax   6,917   (4 )   (40 )   (154 )   (262 )   (36 )   (2 )   (10 )   875         367     7,284
Tax   2,155   1     (12 )   (40 )   (79 )   (11 )       (17 )   (2 )       (160 )   1,995



































Profit for the year   4,762   (5 )   (28 )   (114 )   (183 )   (25 )   (2 )   7     877         527     5,289
 
































Company income statement for the year ended 31 December 2004

    UK GAAP
£m
  Other
£m
    Total
Adjustments
£m
    IFRS
£m











 
Profit for the year   2,878   (4 )   (4 )   2,874
 








170






(3) Analysis of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 adjustments

Balance sheet at 1 January 2005 – Group

    IFRS prospective adjustments
   









































   

IFRS
31 December
2004
£m

  Offset
£m
    Other
IAS 39
£m
    Debt
equity
£m
    Classification/
measurement
£m
    Embedded
derivatives
£m
    Provisioning
and
impairment
£m
    Hedging/
measurement
£m
    Derecognition
£m
    Revenue
recognition
£m
    Insurance
contracts
£m
    Fair
value
option
£m
    Other
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
1 January
2005
£m












































Assets                                                                                      
Cash and balances at                                                                                      
   central banks   4,293                                                       4,293
Treasury bills and                                                                                      
   other eligible bills   6,110               (1 )                                   (1 )   6,109
Loans and advances                                                                                      
   to banks   61,073   4,425     165                     4             23         1     4,618     65,691
Loans and advances                                                                                      
   to customers   347,251   28,566     1,533         (31 )       (82 )   518     4,022     (615 )               33,911     381,162
Debt securities   93,908       747         (241 )           50     (580 )       31             7     93,915
Equity shares   4,723               507                                 1     508     5,231
Intangible assets   19,242                                                       19,242
Property, plant and                                                                                      
   equipment   16,428                                   (3 )               (3 )   16,425
Settlement balances   5,682                                                       5,682
Derivatives at fair value   17,800   71,509             (18 )   114         520                 (20 )       72,105     89,905
Prepayments,                                                                                      
   accrued income                                                                                      
   and other assets   11,612   (29 )   (2,445 )       (1 )   3         (379 )   327     (90 )   (142 )       (1 )   (2,757 )   8,855












































Total assets   588,122   104,471             215     117     (82 )   713     3,769     (708 )   (88 )   (20 )   1     108,388     696,510
 









































                                                                                       
Liabilities                                                                                      
Deposits by banks   99,883   4,425     207                     10     1,501                       6,143     106,026
Customer accounts   283,315   28,566     937         (2 )   (39 )       (11 )   177         2,102         1     31,731     315,046
Debt securities in issue   63,999       342         (25 )           (1,060 )   2,131             858         2,246     66,245
Settlement balances                                                                                      
   and short positions   32,990       349                                             349     33,339
Derivatives at fair value   18,876   71,509             (19 )   188         1,599                 (876 )       72,401     91,277
Accruals, deferred                                                                                      
   income and other                                                                                      
   assets   17,648   (29 )   (2,346 )   (60 )   32     (32 )       (636 )   130     224     (162 )   (49 )       (2,928 )   14,720
Retirement benefit                                                                                      
   liablities   2,940                                                       2,940
Deferred taxation                                                                                      
   liabilities   2,061               65         (24 )   12     (51 )   (283 )   46             (235 )   1,826
Insurance liabilities   8,647                                       (2,055 )           (2,055 )   6,592
Subordinated liabilities   20,366       511     5,820                 782                 47         7,160     27,526
Minority interests   3,492           (2,493 )                           (48 )           (2,541 )   951
Shareholders’ equity   33,905           (3,267 )   164         (58 )   17     (119 )   (649 )   29             (3,883 )   30,022












































Total liabilities                                                                                      
   and equity   588,122   104,471             215     117     (82 )   713     3,769     (708 )   (88 )   (20 )   1     108,388     696,510
 









































171






Notes on the accounts continued

45 Transition to IFRS (continued)

Balance sheet at 1 January 2005 – Company

    IFRS prospective adjustments
   


















    IFRS
31 December
2004
£m
  Debt/
equity
£m
    Other
IAS 32/39
£m
    Hedging &
measurement
£m
    Fair
value
option
£m
    Total
adjustments
£m
    IFRS
1 January
2005
£m
 





















Assets                                        
Loans and advances to banks   4,106   3,959     91             4,050     8,156  
Loans and advances to customers   305   153     95             248     553  
Investment in Group undertakings   21,900   (4,004 )               (4,004 )   17,896  
Derivatives at fair value         101     4         105     105  
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets   318       (287 )   (17 )       (304 )   14  





















Total assets   26,629   108         (13 )       95     26,724  
   


















                                         
Liabilities                                        
Deposits by banks   174                       174  
Debt securities in issue   1,608       6             6     1,614  
Derivatives at fair value         96             96     96  
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   301   (31 )   (146 )       (45 )   (222 )   79  
Subordinated liabilities   5,935   3,219     44         45     3,308     9,243  
Shareholders’ funds   18,611   (3,080 )       (13 )       (3,093 )   15,518  





















Total liabilities   26,629   108         (13 )       95     26,724  
   


















                                         
Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds                         Group
£m
          Company
£m
 





















UK GAAP shareholders’ funds at 31 December 2004                         31,865           32,277  
Standards applicable to all periods:                                        
Valuation of subsidiaries                                   (14,970 )
Proposed dividend                         1,308           1,308  
Goodwill and other intangibles                         865            
Software development costs                         551            
Leasing                         (319 )          
Share-based payments                         (20 )          
Other                         (159 )         (4 )
Tax effect on adjustments                         (77 )          
Deferred tax                         (109 )          





















Shareholders’ funds under IFRS at 31 December 2004                       33,905           18,611  
Standards applicable from 1 January 2005:                                        
Non-equity shares reclassified to debt                         (3,192 )         (3,192 )
Revenue recognition                         (932 )          
Derecognition                         (170 )          
Securities                         229            
Investments in Group undertakings adjusted to historic cost                                   108  
Other                         (53 )         (14 )
Tax effect on adjustments                         235           5  





















Shareholders’ funds under IFRS at 1 January 2005                         30,022           15,518  
Equity – minority interests                         951            





















Equity under IFRS at 1 January 2005                         30,973           15,518  
                         








    Group   Company
   


 


As at 1 January 2005   Fair value on
implementation
of IAS 39
£m
  Carrying value
under UK GAAP
£m
  Fair value on
implementation
of IAS 39
£m
  Carrying value
under UK GAAP
£m









Financial assets                
– designated as at fair value through profit or loss   2,579   2,728    
– Available-for-sale   40,161   39,718    
                 
Financial liabilities                
– designated as at fair value through profit or loss   9,976   10,071    









172






46 Significant differences between IFRS and US GAAP

The consolidated accounts of the Group have been prepared in accordance with IFRS issued and extant at 31 December 2005 which differ in certain significant respects from US GAAP. The significant differences which affect the Group are summarised below in three separate sections:

Section (1) covers significant differences between US GAAP and IFRS for the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2005 and the balance sheet at 31 December 2005. These differences include those between US GAAP and IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4. As permitted by IFRS 1, the Group implemented IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 4 from 1 January 2005 without restating comparatives.

Section (2) sets out the significant differences between US GAAP and IFRS for 2004.

Section (3) summarises those areas where, though the recognition and measurement principles in US GAAP and IFRS are the same, adjustments to IFRS amounts are required due to differing implementation dates for the Group.

(1) For 31 December 2005

IFRS      US GAAP



(a) Acquisition accounting    
All integration costs relating to acquisitions are expensed as post-acquisition expenses.

  Certain restructuring and exit costs incurred in the acquired business are treated as liabilities assumed on acquisition and taken into account in the calculation of goodwill.




(b) Property revaluation and depreciation    
Freehold and long leasehold property occupied for the Group's use is carried at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is charged based on an estimated useful life of 50 years. As permitted by IFRS 1, valuation as at 31 December 2003 is its deemed cost.   Under US GAAP, revaluations of property are not permitted. Depreciation is charged, and gains or losses on disposal are based on the historical cost for both own-use and investment properties.
     
Investment properties are carried at fair value; changes in fair value are included in the income statement.    



(c) Leasehold property provisions    
Provisions are recognised on leasehold properties when there is a commitment to vacate the property.   Provisions are recognised on leasehold properties at the time the property is vacated.



(d) Loan origination    
Only costs that are incremental and directly attributable to the origination of a loan are deferred over the period of the related loan or facility.   Certain direct (but not necessarily incremental) costs are deferred and recognised over the period of the related loan or facility.



(e) Pension costs    
Pension scheme assets are measured at their fair value. Scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit method and discounted at the current rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent term and currency. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets compared with liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). An asset is only recognised to the extent that the surplus can be recovered through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the scheme.   US GAAP requires a similar method but allows a certain portion of actuarial gains and losses to be deferred and allocated in equal amounts over the average remaining service lives of current employees. An additional minimum liability must be recognised if the accumulated benefit obligation (the current value of accrued benefits without allowance for future salary increases) exceeds the fair value of plan assets and the Group has recorded a prepaid pension cost or has an accrued liability that is less than the unfunded accumulated benefit obligation. Movements in the additional minimum liability, together with the related deferred tax, are recognised in a separate component of equity.



173






Notes on the accounts continued

46 Significant differences between IFRS and US GAAP (continued)

IFRS      US GAAP



(f) Long-term assurance business    
IFRS requires bancassurance contracts to be analysed between insurance and investment contracts. Investment contracts are accounted for as financial instruments. Insurance contracts are accounted for using an embedded value methodology: the shareholders’ interest in the long-term assurance fund is valued as the discounted value of the cash flows expected to be generated from in-force policies together with net assets in excess of the statutory liabilities.  

US GAAP also requires bancassurance contracts to be classified either as insurance or investment contracts; however US GAAP does not permit embedded value reporting.

US GAAP requires deferred acquisition cost and income accounting for all contracts. Where investment contract policy charges benefit future periods, they are deferred and amortised.




(g) Financial instruments    
Financial assets designated as at fair value through profit or loss   Such designation is not allowed under US GAAP.
Under IFRS, a financial asset may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition.    
     
     
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables
Non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable repayments that are not quoted in an active market are classified as loans and receivables except those that are classified as held-to-maturity, held-for-trading, available-for-sale or designated as at fair value through profit or loss. Loans and receivables are initially recognised at fair value plus directly related transaction costs. They are subsequently measured at adjusted cost using the effective interest method less any impairment losses. The Group has classified some debt securities as loans and receivables.
  Under US GAAP, these debt securities are classified as available-for-sale securities with unrealised gains and losses reported in a separate component of equity, except when the unrealised loss is considered other than temporary in which case the loss is included in net income.
   

 

Financial assets other than debt securities and equity shares classified as available-for-sale    
Under IAS 39 financial assets classified as available-for-sale may take any legal form.   Under US GAAP, only debt and equity securities can be classified as available-for-sale. (Such securities are measured at fair value with unrealised gains and losses reported in a separate component of equity).
     
Foreign exchange gains and losses on monetary available-for- sale financial assets    
For the purposes of recognising foreign exchange gains and losses, a monetary available-for-sale financial asset is treated as if it were carried at amortised cost in the foreign currency. Accordingly, for such financial assets, exchange differences resulting from retranslating amortised cost are recognised in profit or loss.   Such differences are included with other unrealised gains and losses and reported in a separate component of equity.
     
Financial liabilities    
All financial liabilities held-for-trading are classified as such and carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in net income. A financial liability may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss.   Only financial liabilities that are derivatives and short positions are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in net income.



174






IFRS      US GAAP



(h) Derivatives and hedging activities    

Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of a derivative are recognised as they arise in profit or loss unless the derivative is the hedging instrument in a qualifying hedge. The Group enters into three types of hedge relationship: hedges of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or firm commitment (fair value hedges); hedges of the variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); and hedges of the net investment in a foreign entity.

  US GAAP principles are similar to IFRS. There are however differences in their detailed application. The Group has not recognised any hedge relationships for US GAAP purposes except hedges of net investments in foreign operations. All derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in net income.



(i) Liabilities and equity

   

The Group classifies a financial instrument that it issues as a financial asset, financial liability or an equity instrument in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangement. An instrument is classified as a liability if there is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset, or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities on potentially unfavourable terms. An instrument is classified as equity if it evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after the deduction of liabilities.

 

Under US GAAP, preference shares issued by the Group are classified as equity as they are perpetual and redeemable only at the option of the Group.

Certain trusts and partnerships that are subsidiaries under IFRS are not consolidated under US GAAP because the Group is not their primary beneficiary. As a result securities issued by them are reclassified from minority interests to subordinated liabilities.




(j) Offset arrangements

   

A financial asset and a financial liability are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when, and only when, the reporting entity currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts; and intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Arrangements such as master netting arrangements do not generally provide a basis for offsetting.

 

Under US GAAP, debit and credit balances with the same counterparty may be offset only where there is a legally enforceable right of set-off and the intention to settle on a net basis. However, fair value amounts for forward, interest rate swap, currency swap, option, and other conditional or exchange contracts executed with the same counterparty under a master netting agreement may be offset as may repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements that are executed under a master netting agreement with the same counterparty and have the same settlement date.

This GAAP difference has no effect on net income or shareholders’ equity.




175






Notes on the accounts continued

46 Significant differences between IFRS and US GAAP (continued)

(2) For 2004

As indicated above, as permitted by IFRS 1, in the preparation of the Group's 2004 consolidated income statements and balance sheets, all IFRS have been applied except those relating to financial instruments and insurance contracts where UK GAAP principles then current have been applied.

IFRS or relevant UK GAAP      US GAAP



(a) Acquisition accounting    
All integration costs relating to acquisitions are expensed as post-acquisition expenses.   Certain restructuring and exit costs incurred in the acquired business are treated as liabilities assumed on acquisition and taken into account in the calculation of goodwill.

(b) Property revaluation and depreciation    

Freehold and long leasehold property occupied for the Group's use is carried at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is charged based on an estimated useful life of 50 years. As permitted by IFRS 1, valuation as at 31 December 2003 is its deemed cost.

Investment properties are carried at fair value; changes in fair value are included in the income statement.

  Under US GAAP, revaluations of property are not permitted. Depreciation is charged, and gains or losses on disposal are based on the historical cost for both own-use and investment properties.



(c) Leasehold property provisions    
Provisions are raised on leasehold properties when there is a commitment to vacate the property.   Provisions are recognised on leasehold properties at the time the property is vacated.

(d) Loan origination fees    
Certain loan fees, together with related costs, are recognised in the income statement as received or incurred.   Applicable non-refundable loan fees and certain direct costs are deferred and recognised over the period of the related loan or facility.

(e) Pension costs    
Pension scheme assets are measured at their fair value. Scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit method and discounted at the current rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent term and currency. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets compared with liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). An asset is only recognised to the extent that the surplus can be recovered through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the scheme.   US GAAP requires similar valuations but allows a certain portion of actuarial gains and losses to be deferred and allocated in equal amounts over the average remaining service lives of current employees. An additional minimum liability must be recognised if the accumulated benefit obligation (the current value of accrued benefits without allowance for future salary increases) exceeds the fair value of plan assets and the Group has recorded a prepaid pension cost or has an accrued liability that is less than the unfunded accumulated benefit obligation. Movements in the additional minimum liability, together with the related deferred tax, are recognised in a seperate component of equity.



(f) Long-term assurance business    
The shareholders’ interest in the long-term assurance fund is valued as the discounted value of the cash flows expected to be generated from in-force policies together with net assets in excess of the statutory liabilities.  

US GAAP does not permit embedded value reporting. US GAAP requires bancassurance contracts to be classified either as insurance or investment contracts.

US GAAP requires deferred acquisition cost and income accounting for all contracts. Where investment contract policy charges benefit future periods, they are deferred and amortised.




(g) Extinguishment of liabilities    
Recognition of a financial liability ceases once any transfer of economic benefits to the creditor is no longer likely.   A financial liability is derecognised only when the creditor is paid or the debtor is legally released from being the primary obligator under the liability, either judicially or by the creditor.



176






IFRS or relevant UK GAAP      US GAAP



(h) Securities    
The Group’s debt and equity securities are classified as being held as investment securities or for trading purposes. Investment securities are stated at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value. Premiums and discounts on dated debt securities are amortised to interest income over the period to maturity. Securities held for trading purposes are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss.

  Investment securities held by the Group’s private equity business are considered to be held by investment companies and carried at fair value, with changes in fair value being reflected in net income. The Group’s other investment debt securities and marketable investment equity shares are classified as available- for-sale securities and measured at fair value with unrealised gains and losses reported in a separate component of equity, except when the unrealised loss is considered other-than- temporary in which case the loss is included in net income. The Group recognises an other-than-temporary impairment on an available-for-sale equity share when its carrying value has exceeded its market value for a period of more than twelve months.


(i) Derivatives and hedging activities    
Non-trading derivatives are entered into by the Group to hedge exposures arising from transactions entered into in the normal course of banking activities. They are recognised in the accounts in accordance with the accounting treatment of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. To be classified as non- trading, a derivative must match or eliminate the risk inherent in the hedged item from potential movements in interest rates, exchange rates and market values. In addition, there must be a demonstrable link to an underlying transaction, pool of transactions or specified future transaction or transactions. Specified future transactions must be reasonably certain to arise for the derivative to be accounted for as a hedge. In the event that a non-trading derivative transaction is terminated or ceases to be an effective hedge, the derivative is remeasured at fair value and any resulting profit or loss amortised over the remaining life of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a hedged item is derecognised, or a specified future transaction is no longer likely to occur, the related non-trading derivative is remeasured at fair value and the resulting profit or loss taken to the income statement.   The Group has not made changes in its use of non-trading derivatives to meet the hedge criteria in SFAS 133 ‘Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities’. For US GAAP purposes, its portfolio of non-trading derivatives is remeasured to fair value and changes in fair value reflected in net income.
     
Monetary assets denominated in a foreign currency are retranslated at closing rates with exchange differences taken to profit or loss. Equity shares financed by foreign currency borrowings are retranslated at closing rates with exchange differences taken to reserves along with differences on the related borrowings.   SFAS 133 does not permit a non-derivative financial instrument to be designated as the hedging instrument in a fair value hedge of the foreign exchange exposure of available-for-sale securities.
     
Embedded derivatives are not bifurcated from the host contract.   SFAS 133 requires derivatives embedded in other financial instruments to be accounted for on a stand-alone basis if they have economic characteristics and risks that differ from those of the host instrument.

(j) Consolidation    

All entities controlled by the Group are consolidated together with special purpose entities (SPEs) where the substance of the relationship between the reporting entity and the SPE indicates that it is controlled by the reporting entity.

 

US GAAP requires consolidation by the primary beneficiary of a variable interest entity (VIE). An enterprise is the primary beneficiary of a VIE if it will absorb a majority of the entity’s expected losses, receive a majority of the entity's expected residual returns, or both. In accordance with the provisions of FIN46R, trust preferred securities issued by subsidiaries are in effect re-classified from minority interests to liabilities.

Certain trusts and partnerships that are subsidiaries under IFRS are not consolidated under US GAAP because the Group is not their primary beneficiary. As a result securities issued by them are reclassified from minority interests to subordinated liabilities.


177





Notes on the accounts continued

46 Significant differences between IFRS and US GAAP (continued)

IFRS or relevant UK GAAP      US GAAP

(k) Offset arrangements    
Debit and credit balances with the same counterparty are aggregated into a single item where there is a right to insist on net settlement and the debit balance matures no later than the credit balance.   Under US GAAP, debit and credit balances with the same counterparty may be offset only where there is a legally enforceable right of set-off and the intention to settle on a net basis. However, fair value amounts for forward, interest rate swap, currency swap, option, and other conditional or exchange contracts executed with the same counterparty under a master netting agreement may be offset as may repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements that are executed under a master netting agreement with the same counterparty and have the same settlement date.

(3) Implementation timing differences

This section sets out the areas where differences in amounts reported under IFRS and US GAAP arise because the effective dates of standards are different although the recognition and measurement principles are the same.

 
IFRS   US GAAP

Intangible assets    
Purchased goodwill    
Purchased goodwill is recorded at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is tested annually (at 30 September) for impairment or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.   US GAAP requires the same treatment of purchased goodwill. This was adopted by the Group from 1 July 2001. Prior to this goodwill was recognised as an asset and amortised over periods of up to 25 years. No amortisation was written back on this change of policy. During 2005, the Group changed the date for performing its annual goodwill impairment test from 1 January to 30 September for certain of its reporting units in order to conform to the date selected by the Group upon adoption of IFRS.
     

Goodwill arising on acquisitions after 1 October 1998 was capitalised and amortised over its estimated useful economic life. Goodwill arising on acquisitions before 1 October 1998 was deducted from equity. The carrying amount of goodwill in the Group's opening IFRS balance sheet was its carrying value under UK GAAP as at 31 December 2003.

There was no restatement of previous acquisitions in 1998. In 2004 no amortisation was written back.

   
     
Other intangibles    
Until 2004 intangible assets acquired in a business combination were recognised separately from goodwill only if they were separable and reliably measurable. Thereafter intangibles have been recognised if they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights. All intangibles are amortised over their useful economic lives.   The same treatment was adopted for US GAAP purposes from 1 July 2001.
     



Other adjustments in the reconciliation of net income for the year ended 31 December 2005 from IFRS to US GAAP include refinements to estimates arising from the implementation of IFRS.

Recent developments in US GAAP

In May 2005, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards 154 ‘Accounting Changes and Error Corrections’. The standard replaces APB 20 and SFAS 3 and amends the treatment of changes of accounting principle and the correction of errors. It is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors made in fiscal years beginning after 15 December 2005.

In February 2006, the FASB published SFAS 155 ‘Accounting for Certain Hybrid Financial Instruments – an amendment of FASB Statements No 133 and 140’ (SFAS 155) which is effective for all financial instruments acquired or issued by the Group after 1 January 2007. The statement allows any hybrid financial instrument that contains an embedded derivative that would otherwise require bifurcation to be measured at fair value. The statement also eliminates the exemption from applying SFAS 133 to interests in securitised financial assets.

The FASB issued SFAS 156 ‘ Accounting for Servicing of Financial Assets - an amendment of FASB Statement No. 140’ in March 2006. SFAS 156 addresses the recognition and measurement of separately recognised servicing assets and liabilities and provides an approach to obtain hedge-like (offset) accounting. The standard also: clarifies when an obligation to service financial assets should be separately recognised as a servicing asset or liability; requires fair value measurement for these assets and liabilities, if practicable; permits fair value or amortisation for subsequent measurement of these assets and liabilities; and permits a servicer using derivatives to offset servicing risk to measure both the derivative and related servicing asset or liability at fair value.

178






Selected figures in accordance with US GAAP

The following tables summarise the significant adjustments to consolidated net income available for ordinary shareholders and shareholders’ equity which would result from the application of US GAAP instead of IFRS. Where applicable, the adjustments are stated gross of tax with the tax effect shown separately in total.

Consolidated statement of income     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders – IFRS     5,392     4,856  
Adjustments in respect of:              
       Acquisition accounting         66  
       Property revaluation and depreciation     (90 )   (65 )
       Leasehold property provisions     (26 )   (19 )
       Loan origination     55     (85 )
       Pension costs     (363 )   (283 )
       Long-term assurance business     10     (17 )
       Extinguishment of liabilities         (94 )
       Financial instruments     (556 )   (628 )
       Derivatives and hedging     (119 )   73  
       Liabilities and equity     74      
       Intangible assets – timing difference     (66 )   (95 )
       Other     (59 )   (40 )
       Taxation     223     240  








Net income available for ordinary shareholders – US GAAP     4,475     3,909  
   




 
 
Consolidated shareholders’ equity     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Shareholders’ equity – IFRS     35,435     33,905  
Adjustments in respect of:              
       Acquisition accounting     517     517  
       Property revaluation and depreciation     (403 )   (313 )
       Leasehold property provisions     38     64  
       Loan origination     614     (373 )
       Pension costs     145     215  
       Long-term assurance business     (47 )   (163 )
       Extinguishment of liabilities         (178 )
       Financial instruments     (259 )   76  
       Derivatives and hedging     260     238  
       Liabilities and equity     2,298      
       Intangible assets – timing difference     1,919     1,985  
       Other         140  
       Taxation     (288 )   78  








Shareholders’ equity – US GAAP     40,229     36,191  
   




Total assets under US GAAP of £700.4 billion (2004 – £631.1 billion) primarily reflects the effect of certain arrangements that can be netted under US GAAP, together with the effect of adjustments made to shareholders’ equity.

179






46 Significant differences between IFRS and US GAAP (continued)

Earnings per share

Basic and diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) under US GAAP differ from IFRS only to the extent that the income calculated under US GAAP differs from that under IFRS.

        2005          2004   
     













      Income*
£m
  No. of
shares
million
  Per share
amount
p
ence
      Income*
£m
  No. of
shares
million
  Per share
amount
p
ence
 

















Basic EPS     4,475   3,183   140.6       3,909   3,085   126.7  
Dilutive effect of share options and convertible preference shares     65   60   (0.6 )     66   73   (0.8 )

















Diluted EPS     4,540   3,243   140.0       3,975   3,158   125.9  
   













* US GAAP net income available to ordinary shareholders, see page 179.

The Group has convertible preference shares totalling £200 million (2004 – £200 million), nil million (2004 – 750 million) and $1,000 million (2004 – $1,900 million). All of the convertible preference shares have a dilutive effect in the current year and as such have been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share.

Outstanding options to purchase shares are excluded from the computation of diluted EPS where the exercise prices of the options are greater than the average market price of the ordinary shares during the relevant period. At 31 December 2005, there were 17.3 million such options outstanding (2004 –8.7 million).

Pensions

On 1 April 2002, the Group’s main pension schemes, The Royal Bank of Scotland Staff Pension Scheme and the National Westminster Bank Pension Fund, were merged to form The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (“the plan”). The provisions of SFAS 87 ‘Employers’ Accounting for Pensions’ have been applied to the plan, which covers most of the Group’s UK employees; the impact of US GAAP on the other Group schemes is considered to be immaterial.

A trust fund has been established under the plan, to which payments are made, determined on an actuarial basis, designed to build up reserves during the working life of full-time employees to pay such employees or their dependants a pension after retirement. Such pensions are based on final pensionable salaries and are related to the length of service prior to retirement. Pensions are limited to a maximum of two-thirds of final salary for 40 years service or more. Staff do not make contributions for basic pensions but may make voluntary contributions on a regular basis to purchase additional service qualification where less than 40 years service will have been completed by normal retirement age.

The assets of the plan are held under separate trusts and, in the long-term, the funding policy is to maintain assets sufficient to cover the benefits in respect of service to date, with due allowance for future earnings increases. The plan assets consist mainly of fixed-income securities and listed securities. The investment policy followed for the plan seeks to deploy the plan assets primarily in UK and overseas equity shares and UK government securities.

Disclosures required by SFAS 132R for the Group’s main scheme are set out below.

Obligations and funded status              
Change in benefit obligation:     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Projected benefit obligation at beginning of year     16,192     13,963  
Service cost     457     420  
Interest cost     860     768  
Past service cost     3      
Net actuarial gain     2,302     1,568  
Benefits and expenses paid     (521 )   (527 )








Projected benefit obligation at year end     19,293     16,192  
   




 
Change in plan assets:     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year     13,598     11,822  
Actual return on plan assets     2,477     1,234  
Employer’s contribution     380     1,069  
Benefits and expenses paid     (521 )   (527 )








Market value of plan assets at year end     15,934     13,598  
   




180






Prepaid pension cost:     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Funded status     (3,359 )   (2,594 )
Unrecognised net actuarial loss     6,383     5,990  
Unrecognised prior service cost     11     12  
Unrecognised transition amount         (6 )








Prepaid pension cost at year end     3,035     3,402  
   




 
 
Components of net periodic pension cost:     2005
£m
    2004
£m
 








Service cost     457     420  
Interest cost     860     768  
Expected return on plan assets     (932 )   (840 )
Amortisation of prior service cost     4     1  
Amortisation of loss     364     263  
Amortisation of net transition asset     (6 )   (8 )








Net periodic pension cost     747     604  
   




 
Assumptions              
Weighted average assumptions used at 31 December:     2005
% per annum
    2004
% per annum
 



Discount rate for liabilities     4.80     5.40  
Salary increases     3.95     3.95  
Pension increases     2.70     2.70  
Long-term rate of return on assets     6.47     6.95  








 
 
Weighted average allocations of market value of plan assets at 31 December:     2005
%
    2004
%
 








Equity shares     61     57  
Debt securities     35     31  
Other     4     12  








Total     100     100  
   





At 31 December 2005, the fund’s accumulated benefit obligation was underfunded by £1,433 million (2004 – £561 million). This resulted in a reduction in the accumulated other comprehensive income component of US GAAP shareholders’ equity of £4,457 million (2004 – £3,951 million), comprising the excess of the accumulated benefit obligation over the market value of assets of £1,433 million (2004 – £561 million), prepaid pension cost of £3,035 million (2004 – £3,402 million) less unrecognised prior service cost £11 million (2004 – £12 million). This was reduced by deferred tax of £1,337 million (2004 – £1,185 million). At 31 December 2003, the fund had a surplus of assets over its accumulated benefit obligation and no minimum liability was recognised.

Cash flows

The following pension payments under the main scheme, which reflect expected future service, as appropriate, are expected to be paid:

    £m



2006   513
2007   522
2008   535
2009   549
2010   565
After 2011   3,156



The Group expects to contribute £392 million to its main UK pension plan in 2006.

47 Post balance sheet events

There have been no significant events between the year end and the date of approval of these accounts which would require a change to or disclosure in the accounts.

181






 

 

 

 

 

 

[Page intentionally left blank]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

182






Additional information

Contents
     
184   Financial summary  
184 Amounts in accordance with  
  IFRS  
193 Amounts in accordance with  
  US GAAP  
194 Amounts in accordance with  
  UK GAAP  
202 Exchange rates  
203 Off-balance sheet arrangements  
205 Economic and monetary  
  environment  
205 Supervision and regulation  
209 Description of property  
  and equipment  
209 Major shareholders  
209 Material contracts  

183






Additional information

Financial summary

The Group’s accounts are prepared in accordance with IFRS, which differ in certain significant respects from US GAAP. For a discussion of such differences and a reconciliation between IFRS and US GAAP, see Note 46 on the accounts. The dollar financial information included below has been converted from sterling at a rate of £1.00 to US$1.7188, being the Noon Buying Rate on 30 December 2005.

Amounts in accordance with IFRS              
               
Summary consolidated income statement – IFRS     2005
$m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m








Net interest income     17,047   9,918   9,071
Non-interest income (1)     27,473   15,984   14,320








Total income     44,520   25,902   23,391
Operating expenses (2, 3, 4)     20,533   11,946   10,362
Insurance net claims     7,413   4,313   4,260








Operating profit before impairment losses     16,574   9,643   8,769
Impairment losses     2,934   1,707   1,485








Operating profit before tax     13,640   7,936   7,284
Tax     4,087   2,378   1,995








Profit for the year     9,553   5,558   5,289
Minority interests     98   57   177
Preference dividends     187   109   256








Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders     9,268   5,392   4,856
   




 

Notes:

(1)    Includes gain on sale of strategic investment of £333 million for the year ended 31 December 2005 (2004 – nil).
(2) Includes loss on sale of subsidiaries of £93 million for the year ended 31 December 2005 (2004 – nil).
(3) Includes integration expenditure of £458 million for the year ended 31 December 2005 (2004 – £520 million).
(4) Includes purchased intangibles amortisation of £97 million for the year ended 31 December 2005 (2004 – £45 million)

Summary consolidated balance sheet – IFRS     2005
$m
  2005
£m
  2004
£m








Loans and advances     838,453   487,813   408,324
Debt securities and equity shares     223,901   130,266   98,631
Derivatives at fair value and settlement balances     174,747   101,668   23,482
Other assets     98,109   57,080   57,685








Total assets     1,335,210   776,827   588,122
   




               
Shareholders’ equity     60,906   35,435   33,905
Minority interests     3,625   2,109   3,492
Subordinated liabilities     48,597   28,274   20,366








Total capital resources     113,128   65,818   57,763
Deposits     779,087   453,274   383,198
Derivatives at fair value, settlement balances and short positions     241,364   140,426   51,866
Other liabilities     201,631   117,309   95,295








Total liabilities and equity     1,335,210   776,827   588,122
   




184






Other financial data based upon IFRS: 2005     2004  






Earnings per ordinary share – pence 169.4     157.4  
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – pence (1) 168.3     155.9  
Dividends per ordinary share – pence 60.6     52.5  
Dividend payout ratio (2) 43 %   38 %
Share price per ordinary share at period end – £ 17.55     17.52  
Market capitalisation at period end – £bn 56.1     55.6  
Net asset value per ordinary share – £ 10.14     9.26  
Return on average total assets (3) 0.73 %   0.94 %
Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity (4) 17.5 %   18.3 %
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets 4.5 %   5.9 %
Risk asset ratio – Tier 1 7.6 %   7.0 %
Risk asset ratio – Total 11.7 %   11.7 %
Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges and preference share dividends (5)          
       – including interest on deposits 1.67     1.88  
       – excluding interest on deposits 6.05     7.43  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges only (5)          
       – including interest on deposits 1.69     1.94  
       – excluding interest on deposits 6.50     9.70  






Notes:
(1) All the convertible preference shares have a dilutive effect in the current year and as such have been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share. In 2004 their effect was anti-dilutive.
(2) Dividend payout ratio represents the interim dividend paid and final dividend proposed as a percentage of profit attributable to ordinary shareholders.
(3) Return on average total assets represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.
(4) Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average ordinary shareholders’ equity.
(5) For this purpose, earnings consist of income before tax and minority interests, plus fixed charges less the unremitted income of associated undertakings (share of profits less dividends received). Fixed charges consist of total interest expense, including or excluding interest on deposits and debt securities in issue, as appropriate, and the proportion of rental expense deemed representative of the interest factor (one third of total rental expenses).

185






Additional information continued

Amounts in accordance with IFRS

Analysis of loans and advances to customers – IFRS

The following table analyses loans and advances to customers before provisions by remaining maturity, geographical area and type of customer. Overdrafts are included in the ‘Within 1 year’ category.

  Within
1 year
£m
  After 1
but within
5 years
£m
  After
5 years
£m
  2005
Total
£m
    2004
£m
 












UK                      
Central and local government 3,336     4   3,340     1,866  
Manufacturing 10,552   555   508   11,615     6,292  
Construction 5,790   726   758   7,274     5,024  
Finance 25,424   1,229   438   27,091     24,638  
Service industries and business activities 31,448   3,817   5,422   40,687     30,867  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 1,644   399   602   2,645     2,481  
Property 24,401   3,264   5,234   32,899     26,448  
Individuals – home mortgages 19,576   4,284   41,426   65,286     57,535  
Individuals – other 15,935   6,806   3,582   26,323     26,459  
Finance leases and instalment credit 3,420   3,941   6,548   13,909     13,044  
Accrued interest 1,247   1   2   1,250        












Total domestic 142,773   25,022   64,524   232,319     194,654  
Overseas residents 39,446   6,167   6,621   52,234     48,183  












Total UK offices 182,219   31,189   71,145   284,553     242,837  












                       
Overseas                      
US 27,147   27,541   35,918   90,606     74,027  
Rest of the World 23,691   7,417   14,843   45,951     34,555  












Total Overseas offices 50,838   34,958   50,761   136,557     108,582  












Loans and advances to customers – gross 233,057   66,147   121,906   421,110     351,419  





Loan impairment provisions             (3,884 )   (4,168 )





Loans and advances to customers – net             417,226     347,251  





                       
Fixed rate 30,966   29,099   40,683   100,748     101,227  
Variable rate 202,091   37,048   81,223   320,362     250,192  












Loans and advances to customers – gross 233,057   66,147   121,906   421,110     351,419  











Cross border exposures

Cross border exposures are defined as loans to banks and customers (including finance lease and instalment credit receivables) and other monetary assets, including non-local currency claims of overseas offices on local residents.

The Group monitors the geographical breakdown of these exposures based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk.

The table below sets out the Group’s cross border outstandings in excess of 0.75% of Group total assets (including acceptances), which totalled £776.8 billion (2004 – £588.5 billion). None of these countries has experienced repayment difficulties that have required refinancing of outstanding debt.

  2005   2004
  £m   £m




United States 34,246   28,795
Germany 18,395   14,050
France 13,402   9,604
Cayman Islands 11,813   7,258
Netherlands 8,026   8,871
Spain 7,392   5,249
Switzerland 7,061   *
Republic of Ireland 6,008   *



* Less than 0.75% of Group total assets.

186






Loan impairment provisions

For a discussion of the factors considered in determining the amount of the provisions, see ‘Loan impairment’ on page 45 and ‘Accounting policies – Loan impairment provisions’ on page 94.

The following table shows the elements of loan impairment provisions.

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Provisions at the beginning of the year          
Domestic 2,675     2,408  
Foreign 1,470     1,477  






  4,145     3,885  






Currency translation and other adjustments          
Domestic (7 )   (8 )
Foreign 58     (90 )






  51     (98 )






Acquisitions of businesses          
Domestic     2  
Foreign     288  






      290  






Amounts written-off          
Domestic (1,252 )   (901 )
Foreign (788 )   (548 )






  (2,040 )   (1,449 )






Recoveries of amounts written-off in previous years          
Domestic 97     85  
Foreign 75     59  






  172     144  






Charged to income statement          
Domestic 1,376     960  
Foreign 327     442  






  1,703     1,402  






Unwind of discount          
Domestic (130 )    
Foreign (14 )    






  (144 )    






Provisions at the end of the year (1)          
Domestic 2,759     2,546  
Foreign 1,128     1,628  






  3,887     4,174  





           
Gross loans and advances to customers          






Domestic 232,319     194,654  
Foreign 188,791     156,765  






  421,110     351,419  





Closing customer provisions as a % of gross loans and advances to customers (2)          
Domestic 1.19 %   1.31 %
Foreign 0.60 %   1.04 %






Total 0.92 %   1.19 %





           
Customer charge to income statement as a % of gross loans and advances to customers          
Domestic 0.59 %   0.49 %
Foreign 0.17 %   0.28 %






Total 0.40 %   0.40 %





Notes:
(1) Includes closing provisions against loans and advances to banks of £3 million (2004 – £6 million).
(2) Closing customer provisions exclude closing provisions against loans and advances to banks.

187






Additional information continued

Loan impairment provisions (continued)

The following table presents additional information in respect of the loan impairment provisions.

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Loans and advances to customers (gross) 421,110     351,419  






           
Loan impairment provisions at end of year:          
       – customers 3,884        
       – banks 3        
Specific provisions – customers       3,607  
Specific provisions – banks       6  
General provision       561  






  3,887     4,174  





           
Customer provision at end of year as % of loans and advances to customers at end of year:          
Specific provisions       1.03 %
General provision       0.16 %






        1.19 %
   


           
Average loans and advances to customers (gross) 402,473     299,430  






           
As a % of average loans and advances to customers during the year:          
Total customer provisions charged to income statement 0.42 %   0.47 %






           
Amounts written-off (net of recoveries) – customers 0.46 %   0.44 %






Analysis of closing loan impairment provisions

The following table analyses customer loan impairment provisions by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

  IFRS

  2005     2004




  Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%
    Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%









Domestic                
Central and local government   0.8       0.6
Manufacturing 138   2.8     127   1.8
Construction 74   1.7     71   1.4
Finance 104   6.4     54   7.0
Service industries and business activities 647   9.7     516   8.8
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 26   0.6     23   0.7
Property 63   7.8     64   7.5
Individuals – home mortgages 36   15.5     32   16.4
Individuals – other 1,513   6.3     1,277   7.5
Finance leases and instalment credit 88   3.3     122   3.7
Accrued interest   0.3          









Total domestic 2,689   55.2     2,286   55.4
Foreign 652   44.8     1,321   44.6









Impaired book provisions 3,341   100.0         100.0


Latent book provisions 543              
Specific provisions           3,607    
General provision           561    

 
   
Total provisions 3,884         4,168    

 
   

188






Analysis of write-offs

The following table analyses amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Domestic          
Manufacturing 40     55  
Construction 17     12  
Finance 21     19  
Service industries and business activities 176     163  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 4     9  
Property 25     33  
Individuals – home mortgages 4     4  
Individuals – others 948     516  
Finance leases and instalment credit 15     90  






Total domestic 1,250     901  
Foreign 788     548  






Total write-offs* 2,038     1,449  





* Excludes amounts written-off in respect of banks of £2 million (2004 – nil).

Analysis of recoveries

The following table analyses recoveries of amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Domestic          
Manufacturing 1     1  
Construction 1      
Finance     2  
Service industries and business activities 2     1  
Property 2      
Individuals – home mortgages     1  
Individuals – others 84     78  
Finance leases and instalment credit 7     2  






Total domestic 97     85  
Foreign 75     59  






Total recoveries 172     144  






189






Additional information continued

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans

The Group’s loan control and review procedures do not include the classification of loans as non-accrual, accruing past due, restructured and potential problem loans, as defined by the SEC in the US. The following table shows the estimated amount of loans that would be reported using the SEC’s classifications. The figures are stated before deducting the value of security held or related provisions.

IAS 39 requires interest to be recognised on a financial asset (or a group of financial assets) after impairment at the rate of interest used to discount recoveries when measuring the impairment loss. Thus, interest on impaired financial assets is credited to profit or loss as the discount on expected recoveries unwinds. Despite this, such assets are not considered performing. All loans that have an impairment provision are classified as non-accrual. This is a change from past practice where certain loans with provisions were classified as past due 90 days or potential problem loans (and interest accrued on them).

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis (2):          
       Domestic 4,977     3,658  
       Foreign 949     1,075  






       Total 5,926     4,733  






Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest (3):          
       Domestic 2     634  
       Foreign 7     79  






       Total 9     713  






Loans not included above which are classified as ‘troubled debt restructurings’ by the SEC:          
       Domestic 2     14  
       Foreign     10  






       Total 2     24  






Total risk elements in lending 5,937     5,470  





Potential problem loans (4)          
       Domestic 14     173  
       Foreign 5     107  






Total potential problem loans 19     280  





           
Closing provisions for impairment as a % of total risk elements in lending 65 %   76 %
Closing provisions for impairment as a % of total risk elements in lending and potential problem loans 65 %   72 %
Risk elements in lending as a % of gross lending to customers excluding reverse repos 1.60 %   1.83 %






Notes:
(1) For the analysis above, 'Domestic' consists of the United Kingdom domestic transactions of the Group. 'Foreign' comprises the Group’s transactions conducted through offices outside the UK and through those offices in the UK specifically organised to service international banking transactions.
(2) All loans against which an impairment provision is held are reported in the non-accrual category.
(3) Loans where an impairment event has taken place but no impairment recognised. This category is used for over-collateralised non-revolving credit facilities.
(4) Loans for which an impairment event has occurred but no impairment provision is necessary. This category is used for over-collateralised advances and revolving credit facilities where identification as 90 days overdue is not feasible.
IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Gross income not recognised but which would have been          
       recognised under the original terms of non-accrual and restructured loans          
                 Domestic 334     235  
                 Foreign 62     58  






  396     293  





           
Interest on non-accrual and restructured loans included in net interest income          
                 Domestic 130     58  
                 Foreign 14     7  






  144     65  






190






Analysis of deposits – product analysis

The following table shows the distribution of the Group’s deposits by type and geographical area:

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






UK          
Domestic:          
Demand deposits – interest-free 28,833     22,307  
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 91,564     72,938  
Time deposits – savings 27,091     21,012  
Time deposits – other 73,097     76,995  
Overseas residents:          
Demand deposits – interest-free 396     387  
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 26,663     16,965  
Time deposits – savings 1,108     1,209  
Time deposits – other 53,997     52,629  






Total UK offices (1) 302,749     264,442  






Overseas          
Demand deposits – interest-free 13,248     10,371  
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 17,886     12,975  
Time deposits – savings 21,691     21,153  
Time deposits – other 97,700     74,257  






Total overseas offices (see below) 150,525     118,756  






Total deposits 453,274     383,198  





           
Held for trading 66,712        
Fair value through profit or loss 3,683        
Amortised cost 382,879        
           
Banking business       302,383  
Trading business       80,815  






Total deposits 453,274     383,198  





           
Overseas          
US 120,405     86,677  
Rest of the World 30,120     32,079  






Total overseas 150,525     118,756  





Note:
(1) Presentation of product analysis data has been refined and 2004 has been restated onto a basis consistent with 2005.

191






Additional information continued

Short term borrowings

IFRS





  2005
£m
    2004
£m
 






Commercial paper          
       Outstanding at year end 14,110     8,391  
       Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year 16,853     8,391  
       Approximate average amount during the year 15,329     7,450  
       Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year 3.7 %   1.9 %
       Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end 4.2 %   2.6 %
           
Other short term borrowings          
       Outstanding at year end 105,483     95,381  
       Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year 117,913     96,356  
       Approximate average amount during the year 100,681     85,496  
       Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year 3.4 %   2.9 %
       Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end 3.5 %   3.1 %






Average interest rates during the year are computed by dividing total interest expense by the average amount borrowed. Average interest rates at year end are average rates for a single day and as such may reflect one-day market distortions which may not be indicative of generally prevailing rates. Original maturities of commercial paper are not in excess of one year. ‘Other short-term borrowings’ consist principally of borrowings in the money markets included within ‘Deposits by banks’ and ‘Customer accounts’ in the accounts, and generally have original maturities of one year or less.

Certificates of deposit and other time deposits

The following table shows details of the Group’s certificates of deposit and other time deposits over $100,000 or equivalent by remaining maturity.

  Within
3 months
£m
  Over 3 months
but within
6 months
£m
  Over 6 months
but within
12 months
£m
  Over
12 months
£m
  2005
Total
£m










UK based companies and branches                  
Certificates of deposit 18,911   2,009   2,528     23,448
Other time deposits 64,819   3,679   2,113   3,696   74,307
                   
Overseas based companies and branches                  
Certificates of deposit 4,841   956   747     6,544
Other time deposits 61,126   4,553   3,114   10,385   79,178










Total 149,697   11,197   8,502   14,081   183,477










192






Amounts in accordance with US GAAP

  2005
$m
  2005
£m
    2004
£m
    2003
£m
    2002
£m
    2001
£m
 

















Net income available for ordinary shareholders (1) 7,692   4,475     3,909     2,564     3,108     2,062  
Shareholders’ equity (1) 69,146   40,229     36,191     31,665     28,177     29,088  
Total assets (1) 1,203,823   700,386     631,100     488,046     430,573     386,696  

















                                 
                                 
Other financial data based upon US GAAP:     2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

















Basic earnings per ordinary share – pence     140.6     126.7     87.5     107.9     74.7  
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – pence (2)     140.0     125.9     86.8     106.3     73.2  
Dividends per ordinary share – pence     60.6     52.5     45.6     39.7     34.5  
Dividend payout ratio     43.1 %   40.6 %   51.9 %   36.7 %   45.7 %
Return on average total assets (3)     0.64 %   0.70 %   0.55 %   0.75 %   0.57 %
Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity (4)     13.4 %   13.2 %   9.5 %   12.1 %   8.8 %
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage                                
       of average total assets     5.4 %   6.3 %   6.5 %   7.3 %   7.7 %
Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges and preference                              
       share dividends (5)                                
       – including interest on deposits     1.57     1.73     1.98     1.97     1.51  
       – excluding interest on deposits     5.31     6.34     7.24     6.49     4.63  
Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges only (5)                                
       – including interest on deposits     1.58     1.79     2.07     2.07     1.59  
       – excluding interest on deposits     5.71     8.28     9.96     9.03     6.98  

















Notes:
(1) The dollar information included above has been converted from sterling at a rate of US$1.7188, the Noon Buying Rate on 30 December 2005.
(2) All convertible preference shares have a dilutive effect in the current year and as such have been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share. In prior years their effect was anti-dilutive.
(3) Return on average total assets represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.
(4) Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average ordinary shareholders’ equity.
(5) For this purpose, earnings consist of income before tax and minority interests, plus fixed charges less the unremitted income of associated undertakings (share of profits less dividends received). Fixed charges consist of total interest expense, including or excluding interest on deposits and debt securities in issue, as appropriate, and the proportion of rental expense deemed representative of the interest factor (one third of total rental expenses).

193






Additional information continued

Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP              
               
Summary consolidated profit and loss account – UK GAAP 2004
£m
  2003
£m
  2002
£m
  2001
£m








Net interest income 9,208   8,301   7,849   6,846
Non-interest income 13,546   10,980   9,167   7,712








Total income 22,754   19,281   17,016   14,558
Operating expenses excluding goodwill amortisation (1) 9,931   8,753   8,738   7,716
Goodwill amortisation 915   763   731   651
General insurance claims (net) 3,480   2,195   1,350   948








Profit before provisions 8,428   7,570   6,197   5,243
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts 1,428   1,461   1,286   984
Amounts written off fixed asset investments 83   33   59   7








Profit on ordinary activities before tax 6,917   6,076   4,852   4,252
Tax on profit on ordinary activities 2,155   1,888   1,582   1,537








Profit on ordinary activities after tax 4,762   4,188   3,270   2,715
Minority interests (including non-equity) 250   210   133   90
Preference dividends – non-equity 256   261   305   358








  4,256   3,717   2,832   2,267
Additional Value Shares dividend – non-equity   1,463   798   399








Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders 4,256   2,254   2,034   1,868







Notes:
(1) Includes integration expenditure of £269 million for the year ended 31 December 2004 (2003 – £229 million; 2002 – £957 million; 2001 – £875 million).
               
Summary consolidated balance sheet – UK GAAP 2004
£m
  2003
£m
  2002
£m
  2001
£m








Loans and advances to banks (net of provisions) 58,260   51,891   44,296   38,513
Loans and advances to customers (net of provisions) 345,469   252,531   223,324   190,492
Debt securities and equity shares 94,171   82,249   68,928   65,597
Intangible fixed assets 17,576   13,131   12,697   13,325
Other assets 67,991   54,626   61,793   60,932








Total assets 583,467   454,428   411,038   368,859







               
Called up share capital 822   769   754   893
Share premium account 12,964   8,175   7,608   7,465
Other reserves 10,856   11,307   11,922   12,354
Profit and loss account 7,223   5,847   4,787   5,956








Shareholders’ funds 31,865   26,098   25,071   26,668
Minority interests 3,829   2,713   1,839   585
Subordinated liabilities 20,366   16,998   13,965   12,530








Total capital resources 56,060   45,809   40,875   39,783
Deposits by banks 99,081   67,323   54,720   40,038
Customer accounts 285,062   236,963   219,161   198,995
Debt securities in issue 58,960   41,016   33,938   30,669
Other liabilities 84,304   63,317   62,344   59,374








Total liabilities 583,467   454,428   411,038   368,859








194






Other financial data based upon UK GAAP 2004     2003     2002     2001  












Earnings per ordinary share – pence 138.0     76.9     70.6     67.6  
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – pence (1) 136.9     76.3     69.6     66.3  
Dividends per ordinary share – pence 58.0     50.3     43.7     38.0  
Dividend payout ratio 43.2 %   66.1 %   62.3 %   58.1 %
Share price per ordinary share at period end – £ 17.52     16.46     14.88     16.72  
Market capitalisation at period end – £bn 55.6     48.8     43.2     47.8  
Net asset value per ordinary share – £ 8.62     7.82     7.43     7.79  
Return on average total assets (2) 0.82 %   0.51 %   0.52 %   0.53 %
Return on average equity shareholders’ funds (3) 16.0 %   9.8 %   8.8 %   8.9 %
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage                      
       of average total assets 5.7 %   5.9 %   6.8 %   7.2 %
Risk asset ratio – Tier 1 7.0 %   7.4 %   7.3 %   7.1 %
Risk asset ratio – Total 11.7 %   11.8 %   11.7 %   11.5 %
Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges and preference                      
       share dividends (4)                      
       – including interest on deposits 1.84     1.95     1.74     1.49  
       – excluding interest on deposits 7.09     7.08     5.20     4.45  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges only (4)                      
       – including interest on deposits 1.90     2.04     1.83     1.55  
       – excluding interest on deposits 9.26     9.73     7.24     6.52  












  Notes:
(1) Convertible preference shares have not been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect was anti-dilutive.
(2) Return on average total assets represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.
(3) Return on average equity shareholders’ funds represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average equity shareholders’ funds.
(4) For this purpose, earnings consist of income before tax and minority interests, plus fixed charges less the unremitted income of associated undertakings (share of profits less dividends received). Fixed charges consist of total interest expense, including or excluding interest on deposits and debt securities in issue, as appropriate, and the proportion of rental expense deemed representative of the interest factor (one third of total rental expenses).

195






Additional information continued

Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP

Analysis of loans and advances to customers

The following table analyses loans and advances to customers before provisions by geographical area and type of customer.

  UK GAAP  
 










  2004
£m
    2003
£m
    2002
£m
    2001
£m
 












UK                      
Central and local government 1,866     1,217     1,521     706  
Manufacturing 6,292     6,384     7,386     7,401  
Construction 5,024     3,960     3,468     3,018  
Finance 25,157     18,948     12,396     8,517  
Service industries and business activities 30,850     29,290     26,022     25,033  
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 2,480     2,562     2,463     2,391  
Property 26,445     19,670     15,939     12,274  
Individuals – home mortgages 57,529     48,117     42,101     36,976  
Individuals – other 27,863     25,526     22,255     20,076  
Finance leases and instalment credit 13,083     11,703     11,723     11,258  












Total domestic 196,589     167,377     145,274     127,650  
Overseas residents 44,053     27,168     23,657     24,164  












Total UK offices 240,642     194,545     168,931     151,814  












                       
Overseas                      
US 74,045     40,373     41,008     29,230  
Rest of the World 35,004     21,535     17,305     13,093  












Total overseas offices 109,049     61,908     58,313     42,323  












Loans and advances to customers – gross 349,691     256,453     227,244     194,137  
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts (4,222 )   (3,922 )   (3,920 )   (3,645 )
 










Loans and advances to customers – net 345,469     252,531     223,324     190,492  
 










                       
Fixed rate 100,729     81,918     80,326     62,282  
Variable rate 248,962     174,535     146,918     131,855  












Loans and advances to customers – gross 349,691     256,453     227,244     194,137  
 










Cross border exposures

The table below sets out the Group’s cross border outstandings in excess of 0.75% of Group total assets (including acceptances), which totalled £583.8 billion at 31 December 2004 (2003 – £455.0 billion). None of these countries has experienced repayment difficulties that have required refinancing of outstanding debt.

  UK GAAP



  2004
£m
  2003
£m




United States 28,795   14,618
Germany 14,050   15,073
France 9,604   7,524
Netherlands 8,871   6,830
Cayman Islands 7,258   6,666
Spain 5,249   3,421
Japan 4,610   4,141





196






Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

The following table shows the elements of provisions for bad and doubtful debts under UK GAAP.

  UK GAAP  
 










  2004
£m
    2003
£m
    2002
£m
    2001
£m
 












Provisions at the beginning of the year                      
Domestic 2,452     2,581     2,467     2,370  
Foreign 1,477     1,346     1,186     783  












  3,929     3,927     3,653     3,153  












Currency translation and other adjustments                      
Domestic (8 )   (2 )   (4 )   4  
Foreign (90 )   (60 )   (58 )   13  












  (98 )   (62 )   (62 )   17  












Acquisitions of businesses                      
Domestic 2         11     83  
Foreign 288     50     12     171  












  290     50     23     254  












Amounts written-off                      
Domestic (920 )   (1,097 )   (743 )   (645 )
Foreign (548 )   (422 )   (293 )   (190 )












  (1,468 )   (1,519 )   (1,036 )   (835 )












Recoveries of amounts written-off in previous years                      
Domestic 88     38     37     54  
Foreign 59     34     26     26  












  147     72     63     80  












Charged to profit and loss account                      
Domestic 986     932     813     601  
Foreign 442     529     473     383  












  1,428     1,461     1,286     984  












Provisions at the end of the year (1)                      
Domestic 2,600     2,452     2,581     2,467  
Foreign 1,628     1,477     1,346     1,186  












  4,228     3,929     3,927     3,653  
 










                       
Gross loans and advances to customers                      












Domestic 196,589     167,377     145,274     127,650  
Foreign 153,102     89,076     81,970     66,487  












  349,691     256,453     227,244     194,137  
 










Closing customer provisions as a % of gross loans and advances to customers (2)                      
Domestic 1.32 %   1.46 %   1.78 %   1.93 %
Foreign 1.06 %   1.65 %   1.63 %   1.77 %












Total 1.21 %   1.53 %   1.72 %   1.88 %
 










                       
Customer charge against profit as a % of gross loans and advances to customers                      
Domestic 0.50 %   0.56 %   0.56 %   0.47 %
Foreign 0.29 %   0.59 %   0.58 %   0.58 %












Total 0.41 %   0.57 %   0.57 %   0.51 %
 










Notes:
(1) Includes closing provisions against loans and advances to banks of £6 million in 2004 (2003 – £7 million; 2002 – £7 million; 2001 – £8 million).
(2) Closing customer provisions exclude closing provisions against loans and advances to banks.

197






Additional information continued

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts (continued)

The following table presents additional information with respect to the provisions for bad and doubtful debts under UK GAAP.

  UK GAAP  
 










  2004
£m
    2003
£m
    2002
£m
    2001
£m
 












Loans and advances to customers (gross) 349,691     256,453     227,244     194,137  












                       
Provisions at end of year:                      
Specific provisions – customers 3,648     3,356     3,323     3,031  
Specific provisions – banks 6     7     7     8  
General provision 574     566     597     614  












  4,228     3,929     3,927     3,653  
 










                       
Customer provision at end of year as % of loans and                      
       advances to customers at end of year:                      
Specific provisions 1.04 %   1.31 %   1.46 %   1.56 %
General provision 0.17 %   0.22 %   0.26 %   0.32 %












  1.21 %   1.53 %   1.72 %   1.88 %
 










                       
Average loans and advances to customers (gross) 298,150     245,798     211,206     181,584  












                       
As a % of average loans and advances to customers during the year:                      
Total customer provisions charged to profit and loss 0.48 %   0.59 %   0.61 %   0.54 %












                       
Amounts written-off (net of recoveries) – customers 0.44 %   0.59 %   0.46 %   0.42 %













Analysis of closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts

The following table analyses customer provisions for bad and doubtful debts by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

  UK GAAP
 














  2004   2003   2002   2001
 














  Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%
  Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%
  Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%
  Closing
provision
£m
  % of loans
to total
loans
%
















Domestic                              
Central and local government   0.5     0.5     0.6     0.4
Manufacturing 127   1.8   156   2.5   205   3.2   209   3.8
Construction 71   1.4   56   1.5   65   1.5   72   1.6
Finance 54   7.2   34   7.4   71   5.5   73   4.4
Service industries and business activities   516   8.8   599   11.4   699   11.5   627   12.9
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 23   0.7   20   1.0   29   1.1   31   1.2
Property 64   7.6   58   7.7   40   7.0   39   6.3
Individuals – home mortgages 32   16.5   35   18.8   60   18.5   53   19.1
Individuals – other 1,318   8.0   1,003   9.9   855   9.8   855   10.3
Finance leases and instalment credit 122   3.7   136   4.6   208   5.2   164   5.8
















Total domestic 2,327   56.2   2,097   65.3   2,232   63.9   2,123   65.8
Foreign 1,321   43.8   1,259   34.7   1,091   36.1   908   34.2
















Specific provisions 3,648   100.0   3,356   100.0   3,323   100.0   3,031   100.0




General provision 574       566       597       614    



   
Total provisions 4,222       3,922       3,920       3,645    



   

198






Analysis of write-offs

The following table analyses amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

  UK GAAP







  2004
£m
  2003
£m
  2002
£m
  2001
£m








Domestic              
Manufacturing 55   99   111   61
Construction 12   22   18   19
Finance 19   54   35   8
Service industries and business activities 163   393   180   176
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 9   4   10   5
Property 33   6   9   14
Individuals – home mortgages 4   2   2   3
Individuals – others 535   357   333   297
Finance leases and instalment credit 90   160   45   62








Total domestic 920   1,097   743   645
Foreign 548   422   293   190








Total write-offs* 1,468   1,519   1,036   835







* Includes amounts written-off in respect of banks of nil in 2004 (2003 – nil; 2002 – £1 million; 2001 – £6 million).

Analysis of recoveries

The following table analyses recoveries of amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

  UK GAAP







  2004
£m
  2003
£m
  2002
£m
  2001
£m








Domestic              
Manufacturing 1     1   2
Construction       1
Finance 2       1
Service industries and business activities 1   3   1   5
Property     1   1
Individuals – home mortgages 1      
Individuals – others 81   26   27   41
Finance leases and instalment credit 2   9   7   3








Total domestic 88   38   37   54
Foreign 59   34   26   26








Total recoveries 147   72   63   80








199






Additional information continued

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans

The Group’s loan control and review procedures do not include the classification of loans as non-accrual, accruing past due, restructured and potential problem loans, as defined by the SEC in the US. The following table shows the estimated amount of loans that would be reported using the SEC’s classifications. The figures incorporate estimates and are stated before deducting the value of security held or related provisions.

  UK GAAP  
 










  2004
£m
    2003
£m
    2002
£m
    2001
£m
 












Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis(3):                      
       Domestic 3,705     3,221     3,077     2,829  
       Foreign 1,075     1,211     1,098     737  












       Total 4,780     4,432     4,175     3,566  












Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days                      
   or more as to principal or interest(4):                      
       Domestic 646     561     363     643  
       Foreign 79     81     129     142  












       Total 725     642     492     785  












Loans not included above which are classified                      
   as ‘troubled debt restructurings’ by the SEC:                      
       Domestic 14     53     144     26  
       Foreign 10     30     60     116  












       Total 24     83     204     142  












Total risk elements in lending 5,529     5,157     4,871     4,493  











Potential problem loans(5)                      
       Domestic 173     492     639     801  
       Foreign 107     99     544     279  












Total potential problem loans 280     591     1,183     1,080  











                       
Closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts as a % of total risk elements in lending 76 %   76 %   80 %   81 %
Closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts as a % of                      
   total risk elements in lending and potential problem loans 73 %   68 %   65 %   65 %
Risk elements in lending as a % of gross loans and advances                      
   to customers excluding reverse repos 1.86 %   2.22 %   2.37 %   2.46 %












Notes:
(1) For the analysis above, ‘Domestic’ consists of the UK domestic transactions of the Group. ‘Foreign’ comprises the Group’s transactions conducted through offices outside the UK and through those offices in the UK specifically organised to service international banking transactions.
(2) The classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not necessarily indicate that the principal of the loan is uncollectable in whole or in part. Collection depends in each case on the individual circumstances of the loan, including the adequacy of any collateral securing the loan and therefore classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not always require that a provision be made against such a loan. In accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts, it is considered that adequate provisions for the above risk elements in lending have been made.
(3) The Group’s UK banking subsidiary undertakings account for loans on a non-accrual basis from the point in time at which the collectability of interest is in significant doubt. Certain subsidiary undertakings of the Group, principally Citizens, generally account for loans on a non-accrual basis when interest or principal is past due 90 days.
(4) Overdrafts generally have no fixed repayment schedule and consequently are not included in this category.
(5) Loans that are current as to the payment of principal and interest but in respect of which management has serious doubts about the ability of the borrower to comply with contractual repayment terms. Substantial security is held in respect of these loans and appropriate provisions have already been made in accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts.
   
  UK GAAP







  2004
£m
  2003
£m
  2002
£m
  2001
£m








Gross income not recognised but which would have been              
       recognised under the original terms of non-accrual and restructured loans              
                 Domestic 237   237   234   173
                 Foreign 58   55   73   60








  295   292   307   233







               
Interest on non-accrual and restructured loans included in net interest income              
                 Domestic 58   60   47   42
                 Foreign 7   3   7   14








  65   63   54   56








200






Analysis of deposits – product analysis

The following table shows the distribution of the Group’s deposits by type and geographical area:

  UK GAAP



  2004
£m
  2003
£m




UK      
Domestic:      
Demand deposits – interest-free 22,249   20,567
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 78,178   78,670
Time deposits – savings 18,205   13,238
Time deposits – other 68,662   57,994
Overseas residents:      
Demand deposits – interest-free 376   830
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 12,740   9,559
Time deposits – savings 836   1,014
Time deposits – other 64,141   32,531




Total UK offices 265,387   214,403




Overseas      
Demand deposits – interest-free 10,371   7,937
Demand deposits – interest-bearing 12,975   7,471
Time deposits – savings 21,153   15,450
Time deposits – other 74,257   59,025




Total overseas offices (see below) 118,756   89,883




Total deposits 384,143   304,286



       
Banking business 303,328   251,986
Trading business 80,815   52,300




Total deposits 384,143   304,286



       
Overseas      
US 86,677   67,019
Rest of the World 32,079   22,864




Total overseas 118,756   89,883



       
Analysis of deposits – currency analysis      
 
The following table shows the distribution of deposits by banks and customer accounts by sterling and other currencies:
       
  UK GAAP



  2004
£m
  2003
£m




Deposits by banks      
Sterling 18,958   14,574
Other currencies 80,123   52,749




Total deposits by banks 99,081   67,323




       
Customer accounts      
Sterling 161,636   142,551
Other currencies 123,426   94,412




Total customer accounts 285,062   236,963




Total deposits 384,143   304,286




201






Additional information continued

Short term borrowings

  UK GAAP  





  2004
£m
    2003
£m
 






Commercial paper          
       Outstanding at year end 8,391     6,968  
       Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year 8,391     7,032  
       Approximate average amount during the year 7,450     5,499  
       Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year 1.9 %   1.6 %
       Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end 2.6 %   1.5 %
           
Other short term borrowings          
       Outstanding at year end 95,381     84,795  
       Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year 96,356     94,570  
       Approximate average amount during the year 85,496     78,004  
       Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year 2.9 %   2.2 %
       Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end 3.1 %   2.0 %






Average interest rates during the year are computed by dividing total interest expense by the average amount borrowed. Average interest rates at year end are average rates for a single day and as such may reflect one-day market distortions which may not be indicative of generally prevailing rates. Original maturities of commercial paper are not in excess of one year. ‘Other short-term borrowings’ consist principally of borrowings in the money markets included within ‘Deposits by banks’ and ‘Customer accounts’ in the accounts, and generally have original maturities of one year or less.

Certain debt securities

          UK GAAP
         






          2003
Book Value
£m
  Gross
unrecognized
gains
£m
  Gross
unrecognized
losses
£m
  2003
Valuation
£m












Investment securities:                      
UK government         1,516   1 ` (6 ) 1,512
Other government         12,442   101   (105 ) 12,438
Other public sector bodies         422   4     426
Bank and building society         11,690   4   (7 ) 11,687
Other issuers         15,464   130   (302 ) 15,292












          41,534   240   (419 ) 41,355
         






Exchange rates

Except as stated, the following tables show, for the dates or periods indicated, the Noon Buying Rate in New York for cable transfers in sterling as certified for customs’ purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the “Noon Buying Rate”):

US dollars per £1 March
2006
  February
2006
  January
2006
  December
2005
  November
2005
  October
2005












Noon Buying Rate                      
High 1.7567   1.7807   1.7885   1.7740   1.7755   1.7855
Low 1.7256   1.7343   1.7404   1.7188   1.7138   1.7484












                       
                       
      2005   2004   2003   2002   2001












Noon Buying Rate                      
Period end rate     1.7188   1.9160   1.7842   1.6095   1.4543
Average rate for the period (1)     1.8147   1.8356   1.6450   1.5043   1.4396
                       
Consolidation rate (2)                      
Period end rate     1.7214   1.9346   1.7857   1.6128   1.4498
Average rate for the period     1.8198   1.8325   1.6354   1.5032   1.4401












Notes:
(1) The average of the Noon Buying Rates on the last business day of each month during the period.
(2) The rates used by the Group for translating US dollars into sterling in the preparation of its financial statements.
(3) On 24 April 2006, the Noon Buying Rate was £1.00 = US$1.7839.

202






Off-balance sheet arrangements

The Group is involved with several types of off-balance sheet arrangements, including special purpose vehicles, lending commitments and financial guarantees.

Special purpose entities (“SPEs”)

SPEs are vehicles set up for a specific, limited purpose, usually do not carry out a business or trade and typically have no employees. They take a variety of legal forms – trusts, partnerships and companies – and fulfil many different functions. They constitute a key element of securitisation transactions in which an SPE acquires financial assets funded by the issue of securities. In the normal course of business, the Group arranges securitisations to facilitate client transactions and undertakes securitisations to sell financial assets or to obtain funding. It has established a number of SPEs to act as commercial paper conduits for customers. SPEs are also utilised in its fund management activities to structure investment funds to which the Group provides investment management services.

Commercial paper conduits – the Group has established a number of SPEs that act as multi-seller commercial paper conduits. These allow customers to access liquidity in the commercial paper market by selling assets to the conduit which it finances by issuing commercial paper to third parties. The Group supplies certain services and contingent liquidity support to these vehicles on an arm’s length basis as well as programme credit enhancement. These vehicles with total assets of £6,688 million at 31 December 2005 are consolidated under IFRS and US GAAP.

Residential mortgages and credit card securitisations – in the UK and Ireland, the Group has securitised portfolios of residential mortgages and credit card receivables totalling £5,279 million as at 31 December 2005. These assets have been transferred to SPEs funded by the issue of notes to third-party investors. These SPEs are consolidated under IFRS and US GAAP and the securitised assets remain on the Group’s balance sheet.

US securitisations – in the US, RBS Greenwich Capital securitises commercial and residential mortgage loans, commercial and residential mortgage related securities, US Government agency collateralised mortgage obligations, and other types of financial assets. It also acts as an underwriter and depositor in securitisation transactions involving both client and proprietary transactions. The majority of proprietary securitisations undertaken by RBS Greenwich Capital result in sales treatment under IFRS and US GAAP. Certain transactions may not result in derecognition of the assets under IFRS or US GAAP: under US GAAP, transactions involving vehicles that are not qualifying special purpose entities and where the Group is the primary beneficiary; under IFRS, those where the Group has retained substantially all the risks and rewards of the assets.

Finance lease receivables – in the US, the Group has financed lease receivables with non-recourse funding from third parties. The transactions are shown gross of third-party financing under IFRS but net under US GAAP.

Further disclosures about the Group’s securitisations are given in Note 12 on the accounts.

Lending commitments and other commitments

Under a loan commitment, the Group agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term, may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities. Other commitments include documentary credits, which are commercial letters of credit providing for payment by the Group to a named beneficiary against presentation of specified documents, forward asset purchases, forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities.

Guarantees and other contingent liabilities

The Group gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that the Group will meet a customer’s obligations to third parties if the customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that the Group could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount. The Group expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused. Other contingent liabilities include those arising from standby letters of credit that support customer debt issues and those relating to customers’ trading activities such as performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities.

203






Additional information continued

The Group’s contingent liabilities and commitments are set out below.
2005 Less than
1 year
£m
  More than
1 year but
less than
3 years
£m
  More than
3 years but
less than
5 years
£m
  Over
5 years
£m
  Total
£m










Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security 1,584   3,916   3,760   2,993   12,253
Other contingent liabilities 3,078   644   677   1,995   6,394
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend 132,126   15,077   33,466   22,352   203,021
Other commitments 2,402   865   148   114   3,529










Total 139,190   20,502   38,051   27,454   225,197









                   
2004                  










Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security 3,974   1,729   1,893   2,842   10,438
Other contingent liabilities 3,076   785   293   1,501   5,655
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend 118,367   23,045   21,216   16,602   179,230
Other commitments 881   415   6   245   1,547










Total 126,298   25,974   23,408   21,190   196,870









                   
                   
Contractual obligations                  
 
The table below summarises the Group’s contractual cash obligations by remaining maturity.
                   
2005 Less than
1 year
£m
  More than
1 year but
less than
3 years
£m
  More than
3 years but
less than
5 years
£m
  Over
5 years
£m
  Total
£m










Contractual cash obligations                  
Dated loan capital 602   1,041   2,971   8,363   12,977
Operating leases 310   591   512   1,700   3,113
Unconditional obligations to purchase goods or services 659   458   148   20   1,285










Total 1,571   2,090   3,631   10,083   17,375









                   
2004                  










Contractual cash obligations                  
Dated loan capital 371   527   2,863   7,252   11,013
Operating leases 328   597   535   2,246   3,706
Finance leases 17   38   11   126   192
Unconditional obligations to purchase goods or services 733   421   148   152   1,454










Total 1,449   1,583   3,557   9,776   16,365









                   
The tables above do not include undated loan capital. Commitments for the purchase of software at 31 December 2005 were £139 million (2004 – £256 million).

204






Economic and monetary environment

Monetary policy

The Group’s earnings are affected by domestic and global economic conditions. The policies of the UK government, and of governments in other countries in which the Group operates, also have an impact.

The UK government sets an inflation target, which changed in December 2003 from a 2.5% target based on the retail prices index excluding mortgage interest payments to a 2% target based on the consumer prices index, in line with other European countries.

The Bank of England has operational independence in setting the repo rate to achieve the inflation target. The Bank was given independence by the Chancellor of the Exchequer in 1997, with the aim of making monetary policy free from political influence, and therefore more stable and credible. The Bank’s Monetary Policy Committee (“MPC”) meets each month to agree any change to interest rates, and the minutes of these meetings are published two weeks later. One-off meetings can also be held in exceptional circumstances. In response to the downturn in the global economy and the terrorist attacks, the Bank of England, along with other major central banks around the world, cut rates sharply in 2001. Rates remained at exceptionally low levels throughout 2002, and were reduced again in the first half of 2003, reflecting the uncertain nature of the global and domestic economic circumstances. Signs of recovery in the global economy led the Bank of England to increase rates five times since November 2003, to 4.75%, before interest rates were cut to 4.5% in August 2005.

The value of sterling is also important for UK monetary conditions. The monetary authorities do not have an exchange rate target, but movements in sterling play a role in the MPC’s monthly debates.

European Economic and Monetary Union (“EMU”)

The European single currency, the euro, came into being on 1 January 1999. The third stage of EMU started on schedule on 1 January 1999. During the course of 1998, it was determined that eleven countries (Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Portugal and Spain) would participate. The UK, along with Denmark, exercised its right to opt out at that stage, and Sweden also determined not to be part of this first wave.

On 31 December 1998, the European Currency Unit (the “ECU”) was replaced by the euro on the international currency markets, on a one-for-one basis. The rates for the euro against other international currencies were based upon the official closing rates for the ECU. The bilateral rates for the legacy currencies of the participating states were derived from their rates within the Exchange Rate Mechanism and the closing value of the ECU. These rates, between the legacy currencies and between these currencies and the euro, were fixed as of 1 January 1999. The euro became the formal currency for all eleven then-participating states.

Euro notes and coins were introduced into circulation on 1 January 2002 in accordance with the Maastricht Treaty, which required that legacy currency notes and coins be withdrawn by 30 June 2002. Also on 1 January 1999, the European Central Bank ("ECB") assumed responsibility for the operation of monetary policy throughout the euro zone. The ECB sets one short-term interest rate to cover all twelve countries.

The UK government continues to support EMU entry in principle, but has decided the UK will not adopt the single currency until it is in the UK’s economic interests, with a positive referendum vote. The Chancellor of the Exchequer has laid down five key economic conditions for UK participation. An assessment of these five tests took place in June 2003, resulting in the publication of HM Treasury’s assessment, the 18 supporting EMU studies, and a third outline National Changeover Plan. While indicating that these five economic tests have yet to be fully met, the government has set out a programme of economic reforms and structural assessments necessary to achieve readiness for entry. The Chancellor made a progress statement in Budget 2004, at which point he decided not to undertake an immediate further assessment of the entry tests.

The Group continues to co-operate with the UK government, and to work within the financial services sector, to develop thinking and plans regarding a range of practical issues that would arise if the UK were to decide to enter EMU. In particular, the Group continues its involvement in discussions as to how a phased transition could be achieved, in order to minimise cost and risk. In addition, due attention is being paid to the implications, for elements of the Group and for customers, of the introduction of euro notes and coins and the withdrawal of sterling.

Uncertainty continues on the likelihood and timing of the euro being introduced in the UK. It is not possible to estimate with any degree of certainty the ultimate cost of making systems and operations fully compliant. Expenditure in the year ended 31 December 2005 in preparation for the possible introduction of the euro in the UK was minimal.

Supervision and regulation

1 United Kingdom

1.1 The regulatory regime applying to the UK financial services industry

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (“FSMA 2000”), containing an integrated legislative framework for regulating most of the UK financial services industry, came into force at the end of 2001. This and subsequent amendments established the Financial Services Authority (the “FSA”) as the single statutory regulator responsible for regulating deposit taking, insurance and investment business in the UK.

Under the FSMA 2000, businesses require the FSA’s permission to undertake specified types of activities including entering into and carrying out contracts of insurance; managing, dealing in or advising on, investments; accepting deposits; and issuing electronic money (“regulated activities”). The FSA has published detailed regulatory requirements contained in a Handbook of Rules and Guidance.

205






Additional information continued

The FSA’s statutory objectives are to maintain confidence in, and to promote public understanding of, the UK financial system; to secure an appropriate degree of consumer protection; and to reduce the scope for financial crime. In achieving these objectives, the FSA must take account of certain “principles of good regulation” which include recognising the responsibilities of authorised firms’ own management, facilitating innovation and competition and acting proportionately in imposing burdens on the industry.

1.2 Authorised firms in the Group

As at 31 December 2005, 35 companies in the Group, spanning a range of financial services sectors (banking, insurance and investment business), are authorised and regulated to conduct regulated activities by the FSA. These companies are referred to as ‘authorised firms.’

The FSA supervises the banking business of the UK based banks in the Group, including the Royal Bank, NatWest, Coutts & Co, Ulster Bank Limited and Tesco Personal Finance Limited.

General insurance business is principally undertaken by companies in the RBS Insurance division, whilst life assurance business is undertaken by Royal Scottish Assurance plc and National Westminster Life Assurance Limited (with the Group’s partner, the AVIVA Group) and Direct Line Life Insurance Company Limited. Investment management business is principally undertaken by companies in the Wealth Management division, including Adam & Co Investment Management Limited and Coutts & Co Investment Management Limited, and in the Corporate Markets division, RBS Asset Management Ltd.

1.3 The FSA’s regulatory approach and supervisory standards

The regulatory regime focuses on the risks to the FSA of not meeting its statutory objectives and uses the full range of regulatory tools (including the authorisation of firms, rule-making, supervision, investigation and enforcement) available to the FSA. It is founded on a risk based, integrated approach to regulation.

The FSA can request information from and give directions to, authorised firms. It may also require authorised firms to provide independent reports prepared by professionals. The FSA can exercise indirect control over the holding companies of authorised firms via its statutory powers to object to persons who are, or will become, “controllers” of these firms.

As part of its regulatory approach the FSA carries out regular risk assessments of the firms in the Group and they are subject generally to direct and on-going FSA supervision.

Setting standards for firms

The FSA carries out the prudential supervision and conduct of business regulation of all authorised firms and also regulates the conduct of their business in the UK. Currently, the application of its conduct of business rules to banking business is limited but detailed conduct of business requirements apply to general insurance intermediary activities, mortgage businesses and investment business activities.

Prudential supervision includes monitoring the adequacy of a firm's management, its financial resources and internal systems and controls. Firms are required to submit regular returns to the FSA which provide material for supervisory assessment. Different prudential requirements have applied to different sectors of the financial services industry. However, the FSA has prepared an Integrated Prudential Sourcebook (“IPSB”) aimed at applying a more harmonised and consistent approach to prudential regulation across the whole industry. From 1 January 2005, insurers were the first industry segment to comply with the FSA's new IPSB requirements. Implementation for the remainder of the industry is expected in stages, from 1 January 2005 until 1 January 2008.

Many of the standards relating to the capital which firms must hold to absorb losses arising from risks to its business are determined by EU legislation or are negotiated internationally. The current capital adequacy regime requires firms to maintain certain levels of capital, of certain specified types (or tiers), against particular business risks.

In its supervisory role, the FSA sets requirements relating to matters such as consolidated supervision, capital adequacy, liquidity, large exposures, and the adequacy of accounting procedures and controls. Banks are required to set out their policy on “large exposures” and to inform the FSA of this. The policy must be reviewed annually and any significant departures from policies must be discussed with the FSA. Large exposures must be monitored and controlled.

As regards the insurance industry, the FSA’s primary objective is to regulate and supervise the industry so that policyholders have confidence that they have bought appropriate products, and so that UK insurers are able to meet their liabilities and treat customers fairly. The FSA sets requirements relating to “margins of solvency” (i.e. the excess of the value of assets over the amount of liabilities). Companies carrying out insurance business are required to submit regular returns covering reserves and solvency to the FSA.

206






Firms must also meet standards relating to senior management and internal systems and controls and must comply with rules designed to reduce the scope for firms to be used for money laundering. Revised Joint Money Laundering Steering Group Guidance Notes will come into force approximately mid 2006. The EU has published its draft Third Money Laundering Directive which will supersede the two previous Anti Money Laundering Directives. Implementation is expected in 2007.

Conduct of business standards essentially govern key aspects of firms’ relationships with customers, and require the provision of clear and adequate information, the managing of conflicts of interest and the recommending of products suitable to the needs of customers. The marketing of financial products (particularly investment products) is subject to detailed requirements.

1.4 Focus on customers

An important element in securing an appropriate degree of consumer protection is ensuring that suitable arrangements are made for dealing with customer complaints. Firms are required to establish appropriate internal complaint handling procedures and to report complaints statistics to the FSA. Where an issue cannot be resolved by the parties it may be referred for independent assessment to the Financial Ombudsman Service.

The FSA’s high level principles require all regulated firms to treat their customers fairly. The FSA has undertaken a number of industry wide thematic reviews on this issue, and this is expected to continue in 2006. The FSA has indicated that it will include assessment of firms' effectiveness in this area in regular risk assessments of firms.

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (financed by levies on authorised firms) is available to provide compensation up to certain limits if a firm collapses owing money to investors, depositors or policyholders.

1.5 Fraud

Towards the end of October 2004, the FSA launched its new policy on combating fraud in the financial services industry – Fighting Fraud in Partnership. The FSA is working on a programme of activities focusing on (i) actions that the FSA will take, (ii) FSA support for work by trade associations and the industry, (iii) creating closer relationships with law enforcement agencies and, (iv) the Government making fraud a higher law enforcement priority and leading the development of a fraud strategy. On 26 October 2005, the Attorney General announced that the Government will carry out a wide ranging review of fraud to consider the scale and costs to the country of fraud. The final report is to be produced by late spring 2006.

1.6 Enforcement

Where appropriate, the FSA may discipline and/or prosecute for breaches of the legislative or regulatory requirements. The FSA works closely with the criminal authorities and uses both civil and criminal powers. It can withdraw a firm’s authorisation, discipline firms and individuals, prosecute for various offences and require funds to be returned to customers.

The FSA also has powers under certain consumer legislation to take action against authorised firms to address unfair terms in financial services consumer contracts.

1.7 Extension of the FSA’s responsibilities

From 31 October 2004, the scope of the FSA’s responsibilities was widened to cover the regulation and supervision of mortgage lending and administration and the provision of mortgage advice. Arrangements relating to the sale and administration of general insurance (and certain other insurance) contracts became regulated from 14 January 2005.

1.8 Other relevant UK agencies and Government departments

Consumer credit issues are covered by the Department of Trade and Industry (“DTI”) and the Office of Fair Trading (“OFT”) and competition issues are dealt with by the OFT.

Changes to consumer credit regulation are being promulgated at both national and EU levels. A number of changes to the UK regime took effect in May 2005, and the Consumer Credit Bill, once enacted in 2006, will make further, more fundamental, changes. Negotiations also continue on a draft EU Consumer Credit Directive, to harmonise core regulatory standards in each EU Member State. The UK regime will need to change again when this Directive is implemented in 2008 or later.

As discussed above, the retail banking and consumer credit industries are subject to continuing regulatory scrutiny, both in the UK and at the EU level. Details of the main competition inquiries which may affect the Group are set out below.

In June 2005, the European Commission launched a sector inquiry into competition in financial services. The financial services sector inquiry includes an investigation into three areas - payment cards, core retail banking and business insurance – across all 25 Member States. The outcome of the inquiry will not be known for some time, but the Commission wishes to promote the further integration of EU financial markets with a view to enhancing competitiveness, and accordingly it is likely to have an impact on markets in which the Group operates.

In March 2002, the UK Competition Commission recommended a number of pricing and behavioural remedies following its inquiry into the UK market for the supply of banking services to small and medium-sized enterprises. The Group gave undertakings to implement these remedies in 2003. However, the Competition Commission recommended in its 2002 Report that the OFT review the effectiveness of these undertakings after three years. In January 2006, the OFT announced that it was beginning its review, and that it expected to report to the Competition Commission around the end of 2006, unless its interim findings indicate a need for substantial further work.

In September 2005, the Citizens Advice Bureau made a super-complaint to the OFT regarding payment protection insurance. Following its preliminary inquiry, the OFT identified certain areas which it believes indicate the need for a more detailed examination of the sector, and it announced in December 2005 that it would be undertaking a market study. The market study was launched in April 2006, and the OFT expects to publish its report by the end of 2006.

The OFT reached a decision in September 2005 that the method by which the MasterCard interchange fees are set infringes competition law. In particular, the OFT claims that the interchange fee is used to recover “extraneous costs” for services which are not necessary for the operation of the MasterCard scheme. The Group (along with other card issuers) disputes the OFT’s findings and, together with the MasterCard Members Forum, has appealed the decision to the Competition Appeals Tribunal. It is expected that the appeal will be heard in September 2006.

In November 2004, MasterCard introduced new arrangements for setting the fallback interchange fees. In February 2006, the OFT announced that it was launching a further investigation into MasterCard’s new arrangements for the period after November 2004. Since the appeal in the earlier case will potentially have a decisive effect on the outcome of this further investigation, the OFT has said that it will confine its investigative activities to the gathering of further information pending the conclusion of the appeal.

The OFT has also issued a statement of objections against VISA and its UK members (including the Group) in October 2005, regarding interchange fees. The VISA case is at an earlier stage than the MasterCard case, and in the light of the importance of the outcome of the MasterCard appeal to the VISA case, the OFT has indicated that it will stay proceedings in the VISA case pending the conclusion of the MasterCard case.

In April 2006, the OFT published a statement setting out its views on the level of default charges set by credit card issuers in their contracts with consumers. The OFT is of the view that these charges are generally set at a higher level than is legally fair. It has therefore published its views on the principles which should apply to such charges, at the same time indicating that it is minded to challenge any charge in excess of a threshold of £12. Only a court can decide whether the level of a charge is fair, but the OFT has given interested parties until 31 May 2006 to respond to its position statement. The OFT has also said that the same principles regarding fairness should apply to other consumer contracts, such as bank overdrafts, store cards and mortgages. The Group is currently considering its response to the OFT’s announcement.

1.9 The European dimension

Much of the regulatory agenda in the UK and other European Member States in which the Group operates continues to be set by the European Union. Legislation comprising the Union’s Financial Services Action Plan is nearly complete and implemented, with attention now turning to the policy agenda through to 2010. The Commission wishes to pursue a different approach to policymaking: costed, evidence-based and targeted. Nonetheless, there are some major initiatives already in the pipeline; including a revised Consumer Credit Directive, a directive to establish a Legal Framework for the Euro Payments Area, Solvency II (a revised EU capital framework for insurance companies), and possible legislation on mortgage credit. In addition, the Capital Requirements Directive and Markets in Financial Instruments Directive, both of which apply to the Group are expected to be implemented in the next two years. The Group has been increasingly engaged with EU and national policymakers on all these priority measures, and will aim to maintain this level of involvement.

For a discussion of recent inquiries by the European Commission, see subsection 1.8 immediately above.

207






Additional information continued

2 United States

As the ultimate parent of Citizens’ subsidiary US banks, the company is a bank holding company within the meaning of, and subject to regulation and supervision under, the US Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the ‘BHCA’), by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the ‘Federal Reserve Board’). Under current Federal Reserve Board policy, the company is expected to act as a source of financial strength to its US bank subsidiaries.

The BHCA generally prohibits the company from acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company engaged in non-banking activities in the United States unless the Board has determined, by order or regulation, that such activities are so closely related to banking or managing or controlling banks as to be a proper incident thereto. In addition, the BHCA requires the company to obtain the prior approval of the Federal Reserve Board before acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5% of any class of the voting shares of any US bank or bank holding company. With passage of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (the “GLBA”), bank holding companies that have met certain eligibility criteria and elected to become ‘financial holding companies’ are permitted to engage in a significantly expanded set of non-banking activities, including making controlling investments in non-bank business ventures without prior approval from the Federal Reserve Board under the Federal Reserve Board’s merchant banking authority. The company elected to become a financial holding company effective in February 2004. In November 2005, the company notified the Federal Reserve Board that it had commenced its merchant banking activities through its US subsidiary, Greenwich Capital Markets, Inc.

The company’s US bank and non-bank subsidiaries, and the Royal Bank’s US offices, are subject to direct supervision and regulation by various other federal and state authorities. Citizens’ state chartered bank subsidiaries are subject to regulation and supervision by state banking authorities and the US Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, and the Royal Bank’s New York branch is supervised by the New York State Banking Department. The company's US insurance agencies are regulated by state insurance authorities. The company’s US securities affiliates, including Greenwich Capital Markets Inc., are subject to regulation and supervision by the US Securities and Exchange Commission and various self-regulating organisations. The futures activities of Greenwich Capital Markets, Inc. are also subject to oversight by the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission and the Chicago Board of Trade. Charter One Bank N.A., Citizens Bank NA, and RBS National Bank are regulated and supervised primarily by the US Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.

3 Regulatory developments for capital and risk management

The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, which meets at the Bank of International Settlements in Switzerland, sets the standards for firm’s weighted risk asset calculations and associated regulatory capital triggers. This Committee published a revised framework, called Basel 2, in June 2004.

In the EU, the framework became law through the Capital Requirements Directive (EU CRD) and associated changes to national laws or regulatory guidelines (for example the FSA’s Integrated Prudential Sourcebook). Within the US, regulators have the flexibility to implement Basel 2 directly, after a Final Notice of Prudential Rulemaking expected later in 2006. Full adoption of these new rules comes into force across the EU on 1 January 2008 and the US on 1 January 2009.

Application of Basel 2 differs between jurisdictions. The EU is applying Basel 2 to all banks and investment firms. The US is taking a different approach, mandating that their largest internationally active banks use the ‘Advanced’ approaches for credit and operational risk calculations; other banks can either remain on Basel 1 (or a modified version thereof, called Basel 1a) or ‘opt-into’ Basel 2. Our US subsidiary, Citizens, currently falls outside the group of mandated Basel 2 banks for the purposes of US regulation.

Basel 2, based around three Pillars, presents a fundamental change to the current capital adequacy regime and will have wide ranging consequences for the banking industry as a whole. RBS is making good progress in satisfying the requirements for credit, market and operational risk which, together, represent the minimum capital standards (Pillar 1). Work on the other Pillars of Basel 2, supervisory review (Pillar 2) and market disclosures (Pillar 3) are also progressing as the standards are emerging from the regulatory authorities.

208






Description of property and equipment

The Group operates from a number of locations worldwide, principally in the UK. At 31 December 2005, the Royal Bank and NatWest had 643 and 1,631 retail branches, respectively, in the UK. Ulster Bank and First Active had a network of 272 branches in Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland. Citizens had 1,635 retail banking offices (including in-store branches) covering Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Massachusetts, Michigan, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont. A substantial majority of the UK branches are owned by the Royal Bank, NatWest and their subsidiaries or are held under leases with unexpired terms of over 50 years. The Group’s principal properties include its headquarters at Gogarburn, Edinburgh, its principal offices in London at 135 and 280 Bishopsgate and the Drummond House administration centre located at South Gyle, Edinburgh.

Total capital expenditure on premises (excluding investment properties), computers and other equipment in the year ended 31 December 2005 was £1,275 million (2004 – £1,578 million).

Major shareholders

Details of major shareholders of the company’s ordinary and preference shares are given on page 63.

With the exception of Banco Santander Central Hispano S.A. which sold (i) 79 million shares representing 2.5% of the company’s ordinary share capital on 9 September 2004 and (ii) 82 million shares representing 2.5% of the company’s ordinary share capital on 27 January 2005, there have been no significant changes in the percentage ownership of major shareholders of the company’s ordinary and preference shares during the three years ended 27 February 2006. All shareholders within a class of the company’s shares have the same voting rights. The company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation or any foreign government.

At 27 February 2006, the directors of the company had options to purchase a total of 1,583,566 ordinary shares of the company.

As at 31 December 2005, almost all of the company’s US$ denominated preference shares were held by shareholders registered in the US. All other shares were predominantly held by shareholders registered outside the US.

Material Contracts

The company and its subsidiaries are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. For the year ended 31 December 2005, there have been no material contracts entered into outside the ordinary course of business.

209






[Page intentionally left blank.]

 

 

210






Shareholder information

Contents
212 Financial calendar
212 Shareholder enquiries
212 Capital gains tax
213 Analyses of ordinary shareholders
213 Trading market
215 Dividend history
216 Taxation for US Holders
220 Share repurchases
220 Exchange controls
220 Memorandum and articles of association
220 Documents on display

211






Shareholder information

Financial calendar  
   
Annual General Meeting 28 April 2006 at 2.00 pm,
  Edinburgh International Conference Centre,
  The Exchange, Morrison Street, Edinburgh
   
Interim results 4 August 2006
   

Dividends

 
Payment dates:  

      Ordinary shares (2005 Final)

9 June 2006
      Ordinary shares (2006 Interim) October 2006
      Cumulative preference shares 31 May and 29 December 2006
     Non-cumulative dollar preference shares 31 March, 30 June, 29 September and 29 December 2006
Ex-dividend dates:  
      Ordinary shares (2005 Final) 8 March 2006
      Cumulative preference shares 3 May 2006
Record dates:  
      Ordinary shares (2005 Final) 10 March 2006

      Cumulative preference shares

5 May 2006

Shareholder enquiries

Shareholdings in the company may be checked by visiting our website (www.rbs.com/shareholder). You will need the shareholder reference number printed on your share certificate or tax voucher to gain access to this information.

Braille and audio Annual Review and Summary Financial Statement

Shareholders requiring a Braille or audio version of the Annual Review and Summary Financial Statement should contact the Registrar on 0870 702 0135.

ShareGift

The company is aware that shareholders who hold a small number of shares may be retaining these shares because dealing costs make it uneconomical to dispose of them. ShareGift, the charity share donation scheme is a free service operated by The Orr Mackintosh Foundation (registered charity 1052686) to enable shareholders to donate unwanted shares to charity.

Should you wish to donate your shares to charity in this way you should contact ShareGift for further information:

ShareGift, The Orr Mackintosh Foundation,
46 Grosvenor Street, London W1K 3HN
Tel: 020 7337 0501
www.ShareGift.org

Donating your shares in this way will not give rise to either a gain or a loss for UK capital gains tax purposes and you may be able to reclaim UK income tax on gifted shares. Further information can be obtained from HM Revenue & Customs.

Capital gains tax

For shareholders who held RBS ordinary shares at 31 March 1982, the market value of one ordinary share held was 103p. After adjusting for the 1 March 1985 rights issue, the 1 September 1989 capitalisation issue and the bonus issue of Additional Value Shares on 12 July 2000, the adjusted 31 March 1982 base value of one ordinary share held currently is 46.1p.

For shareholders who held NatWest ordinary shares at 31 March 1982, the market value of one ordinary share held was 85.16p for shareholders who accepted the basic terms of the RBS offer. This takes account of the August 1984 and June 1986 rights issues and the June 1989 bonus issue of NatWest ordinary shares as well as the subsequent issue of Additional Value Shares.

When disposing of shares, shareholders are also entitled to indexation allowance (to April 1998 only in the case of individuals and non-corporate holders), which is calculated on the 31 March 1982 value, on the cost of subsequent purchases from the date of purchase and on the subscription for rights from the date of that payment. Further adjustments must be made where a shareholder has chosen to receive shares instead of cash for dividends. Individuals and non-corporate shareholders may also be entitled to some taper relief to reduce the amount of any chargeable gain on disposal of shares.

The information set out above is intended as a general guide only and is based on current United Kingdom legislation and HM Revenue & Customs practice as at this date. This information deals only with the position of individual shareholders who are resident in the United Kingdom for tax purposes, who are the beneficial owners of their shares and who hold their shares as an investment. It does not deal with the position of shareholders other than individual shareholders, shareholders who are resident outside the United Kingdom for tax purposes or certain types of shareholders, such as dealers in securities.

212






Analyses of ordinary shareholders at 31 December 2005          
  shareholdings   millions   %
of total






Individuals 168,687   233.5   7.3
Banks and nominee companies 19,832   2,882.5   90.2
Investment trusts 162   0.7  
Insurance companies 325   1.8   0.1
Other companies 2,531   65.4   2.0
Pension trusts 46   8.2   0.3
Other corporate bodies 102   4.4   0.1






  191,685   3,196.5   100.0
 




           






Range of shareholdings:          
               1–1,000 128,045   43.7   1.4
       1,001–10,000 58,577   158.6   5.0
     10,001–100,000 3,738   93.1   2.9
   100,001–1,000,000 929   301.4   9.4
1,000,001–10,000,000 341   951.8   29.8
10,000,001 and over 55   1,647.9   51.5






  191,685   3,196.5   100.0
 




Trading market

On 13 September 1995, 16 October 1996, 26 March 1997, 12 February 1998, 8 February 1999, 30 July 1999, 30 September 1999, 12 June 2001, 30 September 2004, 26 August 2004, 19 May 2005 and 9 November 2005 the company issued the following American Depositary Shares (“ADSs”) in the United States:

7,000,000 Series D (“Series D ADSs”) representing 7,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series D;
8,000,000 Series E (“Series E ADSs”) representing 8,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series E;
8,000,000 Series F (“Series F ADSs”) representing 8,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series F;
10,000,000 Series G (“Series G ADSs”) representing 10,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series G;
12,000,000 Series H (“Series H ADSs”) representing 12,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series H;
12,000,000 Series I (“Series I ADSs”) representing 12,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series I;
9,000,000 Series J (“Series J ADSs”) representing 9,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series J;
16,000,000 Series K (“Series K ADSs”) representing 16,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series K;
34,000,000 Series L (“Series L ADSs”) representing 34,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series L;
37,000,000 Series M (“Series M ADSs”) representing 37,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series M;
40,000,000 Series N (“Series N ADSs”) representing 40,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series N; and
22,000,000 Series P (“Series P ADSs”) representing 22,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series P.

Each of the respective ADSs represents the right to receive one corresponding preference share, and is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (“ADR”) and is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”).

The ADRs evidencing the ADSs above were issued pursuant to Deposit Agreements, among the company, The Bank of New York, as depository, and all holders from time-to-time of ADRs issued thereunder. Currently, there is no non-United States trading market for any of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares. All of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares are held by the depository, as custodian, in bearer form.

On 28 November 2005, the company redeemed the 9 million Series J non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each and on 6 March 2006, the company redeemed the 7 million Series D and the 12 million Series I, non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01.

At 31 December 2005, there were 216 registered shareholders of Series D ADSs, 114 registered shareholders of Series E ADSs, 133 registered shareholders of Series F ADSs, 83 registered shareholders of Series G ADSs, 82 registered shareholders of Series H ADSs, 112 registered shareholders of Series I ADSs, 62 registered shareholders of Series K ADSs, 28 registered shareholders of Series L ADSs, 1 registered shareholder of Series M ADSs, 43 registered shareholders of series N ADSs and 55 registered shareholders of Series P ADSs.

On 29 March 1994 and 23 June 2003, respectively, the company issued 8,000,000 Exchangeable Capital Securities (“X-CAPs”), Series A and 34,000,000 Exchangeable Capital Securities, Series B, each in connection with a public offering in the United States. On 30 September 2004, all of the outstanding Series B X-CAPs were exchanged into 34,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series L. On 31 December 2005, all of the outstanding Series A X-CAPS were redeemed.

On 20 August 2001, the company issued US$1.2 billion of perpetual regulatory tier one securities (‘PROs’) in connection with a public offering in the United States.

The ADSs and the PRO’s are listed on the NYSE.

213






Shareholder information continued

The following table shows the high and low sales prices for each of the outstanding ADSs and PROs for the periods indicated, as reported on the NYSE composite tape:

Figures in US$     Series D
ADSs
  Series E
ADSs
  Series F
ADSs
  Series G
ADSs
  Series H
ADSs
  Series I
ADSs
  Series K
ADSs
  Series L
ADSs
  Series M
ADSs
  Series N
ADSs
  Series P
ADSs
  PROs(1)



























By month                                                    
March 2006 High   25.32   26.24   26.56   25.90   25.78   25.32   25.86   24.50   25.62   25.60   25.34   124.67  
  Low   25.32   25.55   25.72   25.45   25.35   25.31   25.22   23.20   25.08   25.10   24.72   119.63  
February 2006 High   25.42   26.14   26.89   25.70   25.63   25.50   25.77   24.20   25.55   25.58   25.30   125.76  
  Low   25.29   25.73   26.33   25.47   25.41   25.23   25.43   23.67   25.39   25.36   25.15   122.25  
January 2006 High   26.25   26.38   27.25   25.67   25.52   25.85   25.75   23.90   25.58   25.50   25.35   122.23  
  Low   25.66   25.73   26.63   25.35   25.25   25.31   25.45   23.09   25.38   25.13   24.95   119.70  
December 2005 High   26.25   26.76   27.83   25.92   25.67   26.05   25.95   23.56   25.50   25.29   25.30   121.96  
  Low   25.37   25.75   26.75   25.28   25.20   25.35   25.30   22.90   25.12   24.97   24.90   118.77  
November 2005 High   26.20   26.27   27.05   26.00   25.91   25.80   26.05   23.31   25.28   25.13   25.50   120.47  
  Low   25.41   25.80   26.21   25.45   25.50   25.49   25.57   22.67   24.80   24.70   24.60   116.70  
October 2005 High   26.26   26.41   26.96   25.94   25.66   26.09   25.92   24.19   25.42   25.45     121.87  
  Low   25.38   26.10   26.02   25.54   25.50   25.56   25.73   22.90   24.77   24.92     117.23  
                                                     
By quarter                                                    
2006: First quarter High   26.25   26.38   27.25   25.90   25.78   25.85   25.86   24.50   25.62   25.60   25.35   125.76  
  Low   25.29   25.55   25.72   25.35   25.25   25.23   25.22   23.09   25.08   25.10   24.72   119.63  
2005: Fourth quarter High   26.26   26.76   27.83   26.00   25.91   26.09   26.05   24.19   25.50   25.45   25.50   121.96  
  Low   25.37   25.75   26.02   25.28   25.20   25.35   25.30   22.67   24.77   24.70   24.60   116.70  
2005: Third quarter High   26.88   27.00   27.45   26.00   25.96   26.35   26.37   24.90   26.30   26.23     127.58  
  Low   25.56   26.10   26.50   25.51   25.36   25.62   25.59   23.95   25.37   25.33     121.31  
2005: Second quarter High   26.24   27.05   27.30   25.80   26.19   26.08   26.53   24.40   25.97   25.38     128.54  
  Low   25.62   26.30   26.27   25.37   25.30   25.45   25.75   23.76   25.30   25.00     121.46  
2005: First quarter High   26.75   27.50   28.00   25.97   25.79   25.96   26.84   24.99   26.75       129.57  
  Low   25.60   26.11   26.26   25.30   25.26   25.33   25.82   23.31   25.01       120.03  
2004: Fourth quarter High   26.96   28.35   27.90   25.92   25.87   26.00   27.18   24.68   26.16       122.52  
  Low   25.89   27.00   27.16   25.30   25.30   25.30   26.32   23.51   25.21       117.44  
2004: Third quarter High   27.45   28.38   28.15   25.75   25.62   25.79   27.30     25.35       121.77  
  Low   26.08   26.65   26.65   25.12   24.95   25.20   26.30     25.13       112.21  
2004: Second quarter High   27.22   29.00   28.10   25.65   25.41   26.00   27.97           122.11  
  Low   25.84   25.90   25.65   24.20   24.45   25.14   25.70           110.58  
2004: First quarter High   27.90   29.00   28.45   25.90   25.67   26.25   28.00           125.14  
  Low   26.96   27.99   27.65   25.30   25.15   25.70   27.21           116.87  
                                                     
By year                                                    
2005 High   26.88   27.50   28.00   26.00   26.19   26.35   26.84   24.99   26.75   26.23   25.50   129.57  
  Low   25.37   25.75   26.02   25.28   25.20   25.33   25.30   22.67   24.77   24.70   24.60   116.70  
2004 High   27.90   29.00   28.45   25.92   25.87   26.25   28.00   24.68   26.16       125.14  
  Low   25.84   25.90   25.65   24.20   24.45   25.14   25.70   23.51   25.13       110.58  
2003 High   29.00   29.20   29.05   26.00   26.40   27.40   28.20           130.78  
  Low   26.76   27.01   27.03   25.00   25.10   25.65   26.05           111.06  
2002 High   27.77   28.20   28.00   25.73   26.05   27.08   27.30           116.36  
  Low   25.74   25.53   25.15   24.46   24.27   24.50   24.79           100.07  
2001 High   27.99   27.94   27.20   25.86   27.15   27.00   26.95           106.44  
  Low   25.38   25.25   24.31   22.94   22.75   24.63   22.17           96.58  
Notes:
(1) Price quoted as a % of US$1,000 nominal.

214





Dividend history

As discussed on page 2, the Group implemented IFRS with effect from 1 January 2004. The dividend data presented for 2004 and 2005, each of which is based on IFRS, is not directly comparable with the dividend data presented for 2001, 2002 and 2003 on this page, each of which is based on UK GAAP.

Preference and other non-equity dividends                  
       
Following the implementation of IAS 32 on 1 January 2005, several of the Group’s preference share issues are now included in subordinated liabilities. In 2004, all preference shares were classified as non-equity and included in shareholders’ equity.
  2005-IFRS   2004-IFRS








  Subordinated
liabilities
  Equity   Non-Equity
Amount per share $ £ $ £ £








 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01                  
       – Series B (1)            
       – Series C (1)            
       – Series D 2.05   1.13           1.11
       – Series E 2.03   1.12           1.10
       – Series F 1.91   1.06           1.04
       – Series G 1.85   1.02           1.00
       – Series H 1.81   1.00           0.98
       – Series I 2.00   1.10           1.08
       – Series J (2) 1.94   1.06           1.15
       – Series K 1.97   1.09           1.07
       – Series L 1.44   0.79           0.19
       – Series M         1.60   0.88   0.30
       – Series N         0.97   0.55  
       – Series P         0.22   0.13  
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$ 0.01                   
       – Series 1 91.18   50.33           49.05
       – Series 2 (3) 22.04   11.60           47.43
       – Series 3 (4) 78.16   43.03           41.74
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01                  
       – Series 1 19.83   11.54           44.19
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01                  
       – Series 1         70.72   41.14   3.45
       – Series 2             ––
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £ 0.01                  
       – Series 1 126.97   73.87           73.87
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25            
Additional Value Shares of £0.01            








 

Ordinary dividends            
  2005-IFRS       2004-IFRS  
Amount per share cents pence pence  






 
Final dividend for previous year declared during current year 70.8   41.2   35.7  
Interim dividend 33.3   19.4   16.8  






 
Total dividends paid on equity shares 104.1   60.6   52.5  





 
Notes:
(1) Redeemed on 30 January 2003.
(2) Redeemed on 28 November 2005.
(3) Redeemed on 31 March 2005.
(4) Redeemed on 30 December 2005.

For further information, see Notes 6 and 7 on the accounts.

Preference and other non-equity dividends                
                 
        2003-UK
GAAP
 

2002-UK
GAAP

  2001-UK
GAAP
Amount per share   £ £ £


 





Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01                
       – Series B (1)       0.13   1.65   1.73
       – Series C (1)       0.11   1.40   1.47
       – Series D       1.23   1.34   1.41
       – Series E       1.21   1.32   1.40
       – Series F       1.15   1.25   1.31
       – Series G       1.11   1.21   1.27
       – Series H       1.09   1.18   1.24
       – Series I       1.20   1.31   1.38
       – Series J       1.27   1.39   1.46
       – Series K       1.18   1.29   0.74
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$ 0.01                 
       – Series 1       54.89   59.15   62.70
       – Series 2       53.08   57.20   60.63
       – Series 3       45.57   49.81   53.74
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01                
       – Series 1       49.58   44.45   41.34
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £ 0.01                
       – Series 1       73.87   73.87   73.87
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25           0.08
Additional Value Shares of £0.01       0.55   0.30   0.15









           
Ordinary dividends          
  2003-UK
GAAP
  2002-UK
GAAP
  2001-UK
GAAP
Amount per share pence pence pence






Interim 14.6   12.7   11.0
Final 35.7   31.0   27.0






Total dividends on equity shares 50.3   43.7   38.0





Notes:
(1) Redeemed on 30 January 2003.

215






Shareholder information continued

Taxation for US Holders

The following discussion summarises certain US federal and UK tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs, X-CAPs or PROs by a beneficial owner that is a citizen or resident of the United States or that otherwise will be subject to US federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs, X-CAPs or PROs (a “US Holder”). This summary assumes that a US Holder is holding non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs, X-CAPs or PROs, as applicable, as capital assets. This summary does not address the tax consequences to a US Holder (i) that is resident (or, in the case of an individual, ordinarily resident) in the UK for UK tax purposes or (ii) generally, that is a corporation which alone or together with one or more associated companies, controls, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting stock of the company.

The statements and practices set forth below regarding US and UK tax laws, including the US/UK double taxation convention relating to income and capital gains which entered into force on 31 March 2003 (the “Treaty”), and the US/UK double taxation convention relating to estate and gift taxes (the “Estate Tax Treaty”), are based on those laws and practices as in force and as applied in practice on the date of this Report. This summary is not exhaustive of all possible tax considerations and holders are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax consequences, including specifically the consequences under US federal, state, local and other laws, and possible changes in taxation law, of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs, X-CAPs or PROs by consulting their own tax advisers.

For the purposes of the Treaty, the Estate Tax Treaty and the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), US Holders of ADSs will be treated as owners of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares underlying such ADSs.

Preference shares or ADSs
Taxation of dividends

The company is not required to withhold tax at source from dividend payments it makes or from any amount (including any amounts in respect of accrued dividends) distributed by the company.

Dividends paid by the company will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporate US Holders.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Non-corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

If a corporate US Holder is subject to UK corporation tax by reason of carrying on a trade in the UK through a permanent establishment and its non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS is, or has been, used, held or acquired for the purposes of that permanent establishment, certain provisions introduced by the Finance (No. 2) Act 2005 will apply if the US Holder holds its non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS for a “tax avoidance purpose”. If these provisions apply, dividends on the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS, as well as certain fair value credits and debits arising in respect of such share or ADS, will be brought within the charge to UK corporation tax on income and the UK tax position outlined in the preceding paragraphs will not apply in relation to such US Holder.

Taxation of capital gains

A US Holder that is not resident (or, in the case of an individual, ordinarily resident) in the UK will not normally be liable for UK tax on capital gains realised on the disposition of such holder’s non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS unless at the time of the disposal, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a permanent establishment or, in the case of any other US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency and such non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS is or has been used, held or acquired by or for the purposes of such trade (or profession or vocation), permanent establishment, branch or agency. Special rules apply to individuals who are temporarily not resident or ordinarily resident in the UK.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS, generally recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes (assuming that in the case of a redemption, such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding in the case of a redemption any amount treated as a dividend for US federal income tax purposes, which will be taxed accordingly) and the US Holder’s tax basis in the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS.

A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on gain recognised on the disposal of a non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

Estate and gift tax

A non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS beneficially owned by an individual, whose domicile is determined to be the United States for purposes of the Estate Tax Treaty and who is not a national of the UK, will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individual’s death or on a lifetime transfer of the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS, except in certain cases where the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS (i) is comprised in a settlement (unless, at the time of the settlement, the settlor was domiciled in the United States and was not a national of the UK); (ii) is part of the

216






business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise; or (iii) pertains to a UK fixed base of an individual used for the performance of independent personal services. The Estate Tax Treaty generally provides a credit against US federal estate or gift tax liability for the amount of any tax paid in the UK in a case where the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS is subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate or gift tax.

UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax (“SDRT”)

The following is a summary of the UK stamp duty and SDRT consequences of transferring an ADS in registered form (otherwise than to the custodian on cancellation of the ADS) or of transferring a non-cumulative dollar preference share. A transfer of a registered ADS executed and retained in the United States will not give rise to stamp duty and an agreement to transfer a registered ADS will not give rise to SDRT. Stamp duty or SDRT will normally be payable on or in respect of transfers of non-cumulative dollar preference shares and accordingly any holder who acquires or intends to acquire non-cumulative dollar preference shares is advised to consult its own tax advisers in relation to stamp duty and SDRT.

X-CAPs

United States

Because the X-CAPs have no stated maturity, can be exchanged for preference shares or ADSs at the option of the company, would be treated as if they were preference shares in a winding-up of the company, and the company may elect not to make payments on the X-CAPs, the X-CAPs will be treated as equity for US federal income tax purposes.

Payments (including any UK withholding tax, as to which see below) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporate US Holders. A US Holder who is entitled under the Treaty to a refund of UK tax, if any, withheld on a payment will not be entitled to claim a foreign tax credit with respect to such tax.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Non-corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of X-CAPs, generally recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes (assuming that in the case of a redemption, such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding in the case of a redemption any amount treated as a dividend for US federal income tax purposes, which will be taxed accordingly) and the US Holders tax basis in the X-CAPs.

A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on gain recognised on the disposal of the X-CAPs will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

Gain or loss will not be recognised by a US Holder upon the exchange of X-CAPs for preference shares or ADSs pursuant to the company’s exercise of its exchange right. A US Holder’s basis in the preference shares or ADSs received in exchange for its X-CAPs will be the same as the US Holder’s basis in the X-CAPs at the time of the exchange and the US Holder’s holding period for the preference shares or ADSs received in the exchange will include the holding period of the X-CAPs exchanged.

United Kingdom

Taxation of payments of interest

Payments on the X-CAPs will constitute interest rather than dividends for UK withholding tax purposes. However, the X-CAPs will constitute ‘quoted eurobonds’ within the meaning of section 349 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988, and therefore payments of interest will not be subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK taxation as long as the X-CAPs remain at all times listed on the New York Stock Exchange or some other recognised stock exchange within the meaning of section 841 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. In all other cases an amount must be withheld on account of UK income tax at the lower rate (currently 20%) subject to any direction to the contrary by HM Revenue & Customs under the Treaty and except that the withholding obligation is disapplied in respect of payments to persons who the company reasonably believes are within the charge to corporation tax or fall within various categories enjoying a special tax status (including charities and pension funds), or are partnerships consisting of such persons (unless HM Revenue & Customs directs otherwise).

If interest were paid under deduction of UK income tax (e.g., if the X-CAPs lost their listing), US Holders may be able to claim a refund of the tax deducted under the Treaty.

Any paying agent or other person through whom interest is paid to, or by whom interest is received on behalf of, an individual, may be required to provide information in relation to the payment and the individual concerned to HM Revenue & Customs. HM Revenue & Customs may communicate this information to the tax authorities of other jurisdictions.

HM Revenue & Customs confirmed at around the time of issue of the X-CAPs that interest payments should not be treated as distributions for UK tax purposes by reason of (i) the fact that interest may be deferred under the terms of issue or (ii) the undated nature of the X-CAPs, provided that at the time an interest payment is made, the X-CAPs are not held by a company which is ‘associated’ with the company or by a ‘funded company’. A company will be associated with the company if, broadly speaking, it is in the same group as the company. A company will be a ‘funded company’ for these purposes if there are arrangements involving that company being put in funds (directly or indirectly) by the company, or an entity associated with the company. In this respect,

217






Shareholder information continued

Taxation for US Holders (continued)

HM Revenue & Customs has confirmed that a company holding an interest in X-CAPs which incidentally has banking facilities with any company associated with the company will not be a ‘funded company’ by virtue of such facilities.

Interest on the X-CAPs constitutes UK source income for UK tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding. However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a US Holder unless, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment or in the case of other US Holders, such persons carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency in connection with which the interest is received or to which the X-CAPs are attributable. There are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agents (such as some brokers and investment managers).

EU Directive on taxation of savings income

The European Union has adopted a directive regarding the taxation of savings income. The Directive requires Member States of the European Union to provide to the tax authorities of other Member States details of payments of interest or other similar income paid by a person to an individual in another Member State, except that Belgium, Luxembourg and Austria are instead imposing a withholding system for a transitional period unless during such period they elect otherwise.

Disposal (including redemption)

A disposal (including redemption) of X-CAPs by a non-corporate US Holder will not give rise to any liability to UK taxation on capital gains unless the US Holder carries on a trade (which for this purpose includes a profession or vocation) in the UK through a branch or agency and the X-CAPs are, or have been, held or acquired for the purposes of that trade, branch or agency. The exchange by such US Holder of X-CAPs for preference shares or ADSs pursuant to the company’s exercise of its exchange right will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on capital gains even if such US Holder would be subject to tax on a disposal of such holder’s X-CAPs in accordance with the tax treatment referred to previously.

A transfer of X-CAPs by a US Holder will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on accrued but unpaid interest payments, unless the US Holder is an individual or other non-corporate taxpayer and at any time in the relevant year of assessment or accounting period carries on a trade in the UK through a branch or agency to which the X-CAPs are attributable.

Annual tax charges

Corporate US Holders of X-CAPs may be subject to annual UK tax charges (or relief) by reference to fluctuations in exchange rates and in respect of profits, gains and losses arising from the X-CAPs, but only if such corporate US Holders carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK permanent establishment to which the X-CAPs are attributable.

Inheritance tax

X-CAPs in bearer form physically held outside the UK should not be subject to UK inheritance tax in respect of a lifetime transfer by, or the death of, a US Holder who is neither domiciled nor deemed to be domiciled in the UK for inheritance tax purposes. However, in relation to X-CAPs held through DTC (or any other clearing system), the position is not free from doubt and the HM Revenue and Customs is known to consider that the situs of securities held in this manner is not necessarily determined by the place in which the securities are physically held. If X-CAPs in bearer form are or become situated in the UK, or if X-CAPs are held in registered form, there may be a charge to UK inheritance tax as a result of a lifetime transfer at less than fair market value by, or on the death of, such US Holder. However, exemption from, or a reduction of, any such UK tax liability may be available under the Estate Tax Treaty in the same manner as for non-cumulative dollar preference shares. US Holders should consult their professional advisers in relation to such potential liability.

Stamp duty and SDRT

No UK stamp duty is payable on the transfer by delivery or redemption of bearer X-CAPs, whether in definitive form or in the form of one or more global X-CAPs. No SDRT is payable on any agreement to transfer bearer X-CAPs, provided that the agreement is not made in contemplation of, or as part of an arrangement for, a takeover of the company.

No UK stamp duty will be payable in respect of any instrument of transfer of depositary interests representing X-CAPs, provided that any instrument relating to such transfer is not executed in the UK, and remains at all times outside the UK. Depositary interests representing X-CAPs will not be “chargeable securities” for SDRT purposes, and consequently a transfer of such depositary interests will not be subject to SDRT. Although the position is not clear, the transfer on the sale of X-CAPs in registered form may attract ad valorem UK stamp duty or (if an unconditional agreement to transfer X-CAPs is not completed by a duly stamped transfer) UK SDRT, generally at the rate of 0.5% of the consideration paid, which, in the case of stamp duty, will be rounded up to £5 or multiples thereof. The transfer of X-CAPs in registered form to, or to a nominee or agent for, a person whose business (i) is or includes issuing depositary receipts or (ii) is or includes the provision of clearance services, may give rise to a liability to UK stamp duty or (to the extent that UK stamp duty is not paid on an instrument of transfer) UK SDRT, generally at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs transferred, which, in the case of stamp duty, will be rounded up to £5 or multiples thereof. Such transfer of X-CAPs in bearer form may give rise to a charge to UK SDRT generally at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs transferred. A charge to UK SDRT may also arise on the issue of X-CAPs whether in registered or bearer form to, or to a nominee or agent for, a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts or includes the provision of clearance services, generally at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs issued.

218






PROs

United States

Payments of interest on a PRO (including any UK withholding tax, as to which see below) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporate US Holders. A US Holder who is entitled under the Treaty to a refund of UK tax, if any, withheld on a payment will not be entitled to claim a foreign tax credit with respect to such tax.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Non-corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a PRO, generally recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes (assuming that in the case of a redemption, such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding any amount in respect of mandatory interest and any Missed Payments which are to be satisfied on a Missed Payment Satisfaction Date, which would be treated as ordinary income) and the US Holder’s tax basis in the PRO.

A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on gain recognised on the disposal of PROs will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

United Kingdom

Taxation of payments on the PROs

Payments on the PROs will constitute interest rather than dividends for UK withholding tax purposes. However, the PROs will constitute “quoted eurobonds” within the meaning of section 349 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 and therefore payments of interest will not be subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK taxation as long as the PROs remain at all times listed on a ‘recognised stock exchange’ within the meaning of section 841 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. In all other cases, an amount must be withheld on account of UK income tax at the lower rate (currently 20%) subject to any direction to the contrary by HM Revenue & Customs under the Treaty and except that the withholding obligation is disapplied in respect of payments to persons who the company reasonably believes are within the charge to corporation tax or fall within various categories enjoying a special tax status (including charities and pension funds), or are partnerships consisting of such persons (unless HM Revenue & Customs directs otherwise). Where interest has been paid under deduction of UK withholding tax, US Holders may be able to recover the tax deducted under the Treaty.

Any paying agent or other person by or through whom interest is paid to, or by whom interest is received on behalf of, an individual, may be required to provide information in relation to the payment and the individual concerned to HM Revenue & Customs. HM Revenue & Customs may communicate this information to the tax authorities of other jurisdictions.

HM Revenue & Customs confirmed at around the time of the issue of the PROs that interest payments would not be treated as distributions for UK tax purposes by reason of (i) the fact that interest may be deferred under the terms of issue or (ii) the undated nature of the PROs, provided that at the time an interest payment is made, the PROs are not held by a company which is ‘associated’ with the company or by a ‘funded company’. A company will be associated with the company if, broadly speaking, it is part of the same group as the company. A company will be a ‘funded company’ for these purposes if there are arrangements involving that company being put in funds (directly or indirectly) by the company, or an entity associated with the company. In this respect, HM Revenue & Customs has confirmed that a company holding an interest in the PROs which incidentally has banking facilities with any company associated with the company will not be a ‘funded company’ by virtue of such facilities.

Interest on the PROs constitutes UK source income for UK tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding. However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a US Holder unless, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment or in the case of other US Holders, such persons carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency in connection with which the interest is received or to which the PROs are attributable. There are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agents (such as some brokers and investment managers).

EU Directive on taxation of savings income

The European Union has adopted a directive regarding the taxation of savings income. The Directive requires Member States of the European Union to provide to the tax authorities of other Member States details of payments of interest and other similar income paid by a person to an individual resident in another Member State, except that Belgium, Luxembourg and Austria are instead imposing a withholding system for a transitional period unless during such period they elect otherwise.

Disposal (including redemption)

A disposal (including redemption) of PROs by a non-corporate US Holder will not give rise to any liability to UK taxation on capital gains unless the US Holder carries on a trade (which for this purpose includes a profession or a vocation) in the UK through a branch or agency and the PROs are, or have been, held or acquired for the purposes of that trade, branch or agency.

219






Shareholder information continued

Taxation for US Holders (continued)

A transfer of PROs by a US Holder will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on accrued but unpaid interest payments, unless the US Holder is an individual or other non-corporate taxpayer and at any time in the relevant year of assessment or accounting period carries on a trade in the UK through a branch or agency to which the PROs are attributable.

Annual tax charges

Corporate US Holders of PROs may be subject to annual UK tax charges (or relief) by reference to fluctuations in exchange rates and in respect of profits, gains and losses arising from the PROs, but only if such corporate US Holders carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK permanent establishment to which the PROs are attributable.

Inheritance tax

In relation to PROs held through DTC (or any other clearing system), the UK inheritance tax position is not free from doubt in respect of a lifetime transfer, or death of, a US Holder who is not domiciled nor deemed to be domiciled in the UK for inheritance tax purposes; HM Revenue & Customs is known to consider that the situs of securities held in this manner is not necessarily determined by the place where the securities are registered. In appropriate circumstances, there may be a charge to UK inheritance tax as a result of a lifetime transfer at less than fair market value by, or on the death of, such US Holder. However, exemption from, or a reduction of, any such UK tax liability may be available under the Estate Tax Treaty. US Holders should consult their professional advisers in relation to such potential liability.

Stamp duty and SDRT

No stamp duty, SDRT or similar tax is imposed in the UK on the issue, transfer or redemption of the PROs.

Share repurchases

As discussed on page 62, the company has authority from its shareholders to make market purchases of ordinary shares. On 28 February 2006, the company announced its intention to repurchase up to £1 billion ordinary shares over the following 12 months. As at 21 April 2006, the company had repurchased 3.9 million ordinary shares at an average price of £18.69 pursuant to this publicly announced repurchase plan.

Exchange controls

The company has been advised that there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would prevent the remittance of dividends or other payments to non-UK resident holders of the company’s non-cumulative dollar preference shares.

There are no restrictions under the articles of association of the company or under UK law, as currently in effect, which limit the right of non-UK resident owners to hold or, when entitled to vote, freely to vote the company’s non-cumulative dollar preference shares.

Memorandum and articles of association

The company’s Memorandum of Association (the “Memorandum”) and Articles of Association (the “Articles”) as in effect at the date of this annual report are registered with the Registrar of Companies of Scotland. The Articles were last amended on 29 April 2004 and have been filed with the SEC. For a description of certain provisions of the company’s Memorandum and Articles, please refer to the ‘Additional Information — Memorandum and Articles of Association’ in the Group’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2004.

Incorporation and registration

The company was incorporated and registered in Scotland under the Companies Act 1948 as a limited company on 25 March 1968 under the name National and Commercial Banking Group Limited. On 10 March 1982, it changed its name to its present name and was registered under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980 as a public company with limited liability. The company is registered under Company No. SC 45551.

Code of Ethics

As discussed on page 65, the Group has adopted a code of ethics that is applicable to all of the Group’s employees, which will be provided to any person, upon request, by contacting Group Secretariat at the telephone number listed on the following page.

Documents on display

Documents concerning the company may be inspected at 36 St Andrew Square, Edinburgh, EH2 2YB.

Executive directors’ service contracts and copies of directors’ indemnities granted by the company in terms of section 309C of the Companies Act 1985 may be inspected at the company’s office at Gogarburn, Edinburgh, EH12 1HQ (telephone 0131 626 4117).

In addition, we file reports and other information with the SEC. You can read and copy these reports and other information at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street, N.E., Room 1580, Washington, D.C. 20549. You can call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the Public Reference Room or contact the offices of The New York Stock Exchange, on which certain of our securities are listed, at 20 Broad Street, New York, New York 10005. The SEC also maintains a website at www.sec.gov which contains in electronic form each of the reports and other information that we have filed electronically with the SEC.

220






Important addresses   Principal offices
   
Shareholder enquiries   The company
Registrar   PO Box 1000 Gogarburn Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
Computershare Investor Services PLC   Telephone: 0131 626 0000
PO Box 82    
The Pavilions   The Royal Bank of Scotland plc  
Bridgwater Road   PO Box 1000 Gogarburn Edinburgh EH12 1HQ
Bristol BS99 7NH   280 Bishopsgate London EC2M 4RB
Telephone: 0870 702 0135    
Facsimile: 0870 703 6009   National Westminster Bank Plc
Email: web.queries@computershare.co.uk   135 Bishopsgate London EC2M 3UR
   
Group Secretariat   Citizens
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc   Citizens Financial Group, Inc.
PO Box 1000   One Citizens Plaza Providence Rhode Island 02903 USA
Business House F    
Gogarburn   Ulster Bank
Edinburgh EH12 1HQ   11-16 Donegall Square East Belfast BT1 5UB
Telephone: 0131 556 8555   George’s Quay Dublin 2
Facsimile: 0131 626 3081    
    RBS Insurance
Investor Relations   Direct Line House 3 Edridge Road Croydon Surrey CR9 1AG
280 Bishopsgate   Churchill Court Westmoreland Road Bromley BR1 1DP
London EC2M 4RB    
Telephone: 0207 672 1578   RBS Greenwich Capital
Email: investor.relations@rbsir.com   600 Steamboat Road
    Greenwich Connecticut 06830 USA
Registered office    
36 St Andrew Square   Coutts Group
Edinburgh EH2 2YB   440 Strand London WC2R 0QS
Telephone: 0131 556 8555    
    The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited
Registered in Scotland No. 45551   Royal Bank House 71 Bath Street
    St Helier Jersey Channel Islands JE4 8PJ
Website    
www.rbs.com   NatWest Offshore
    23/25 Broad Street
    St Helier Jersey Channel lslands JE4 8QG

221




Exhibit index

     
Exhibit
Number
  Description
1.1*   Memorandum and Articles of Association of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
4.1***   Contract of employment for Sir Frederick A. Goodwin
4.2***   Consulting Agreement for Bud Koch
4.3***   Supplementary Agreement for Bud Koch
4.4   Service contract for Gordon Pell
4.5**   Service contract for Lawrence Fish
4.6   Service contract for Guy Whittaker
4.7   Service contract for Mark Fisher
4.8   Service contract for Johnny Cameron
7.1   Explanation of ratio calculations
8.1   Principal subsidiaries of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
12.1   CEO certification required by Rule 13a-14(a)
12.2   CFO certification required by Rule 13a-14(a)
13.1   Certification required by Rule 13a-14(b)
15.1   Independent auditors’ consent

* Previously filed and incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 to Post-effective Amendment No. 2 to the Registration Statement on Form F-3 (Registration No. 333-100661).

** Previously filed and incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.6 to the Group’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2003 (File No. 1-10306).

*** Previously filed and incorporated by reference to Exhibits 4.1, 4.3 and 4.3.1, respectively, to the Group’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2004 (File No. 1-10306).

222




SIGNATURE

     The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc


Registrant

   
/s/ Guy Robert Whittaker  

 
Guy Robert Whittaker  
Group Finance Director  


26 April 2006

223